1. technology and computing
2. mp3 and midi

Eight loop controller
Mini8
Engineering
Handbook
ENG
E U ROT H E R M
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 – Multi-Loop Process Controller
1.
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.4.15
1.4.16
1.5
1.6
2.
What Instrument Do I Have?
Mini8 Ordering Code
How to Install the Controller
Dimensions
To Install the Controller
Environmental Requirements
Electrical Connections
Power Supply
Fixed IO Connections
Digital Communications Connections
Configuration Port
Modbus
DeviceNet / CANopen
Typical DeviceNet / CANopen Wiring Diagram
Profibus DP
Ethernet (Modbus TCP)
Thermocouple Input TC4 and TC8
RTD / PT100 Input RT4
Logic Input DI8
Logic Output DO8
Relay Output RL8
Analogue Output AO4 and AO8
Current Transformer input Module CT3
Adding or replacing an IO module.
Mini 8 LED Indicators
CHAPTER 2 USING THE MINI8
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.8.1
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
3.
iTools
iTools OPC Open server
Modbus, single register, SCADA addressing
Modbus (Floating Point)
Fieldbus
Ethernet
Mini8 Execution
The iTools Operator Interface
Scanning
Browsing and Changing Parameter Values
Recipe Editor
Recipe Menu Commands
OPCScope
OPC Scope List Window Context Menu
OPC Scope Chart Window
OPC Server
CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURATION USING ITOOLS
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Configuration
On-Line/Off-line Configuration
Connecting a PC to the Mini8 Controller
Configuration Cable and Clip
Scanning
Cloning
Configuring the Mini8
Function Blocks
Soft Wiring
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
8
8
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
31
31
32
33
33
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
38
38
39
1
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
3.5
Simple Worked Example
3.5.1
The I/O
3.5.2
Wiring
3.6
Graphical Wiring Editor
3.6.1
Graphical Wiring Toolbar
3.6.2
Function Block
3.6.3
Wire
3.6.4
Block Execution Order
3.6.5
Using Function Blocks
3.6.6
Tooltips
3.6.7
Function Block State
3.6.8
Using Wires
3.6.9
Using Comments
3.6.10
Using Monitors
3.6.11
Downloading
3.6.12
Selections
3.6.13
Colours
3.6.14
Diagram Context Menu
3.6.15
Wiring Floats with Status Information
3.6.16
Edge Wires
4.
40
40
42
45
46
46
46
46
46
47
48
49
50
51
51
51
52
52
53
54
CHAPTER 4 MINI8 OVERVIEW
4.1
55
Complete list of Function Blocks.
56
5.
CHAPTER 5 ACCESS FOLDER
57
6.
CHAPTER 6 INSTRUMENT FOLDER
58
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
7.
58
59
59
60
CHAPTER 7 I/O FOLDER
7.1
7.1.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.8
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.7
7.7.1
2
Instrument / Enables
Instrument Options
Instrument / InstInfo
Instrument / Diagnostics
62
Module ID
Modules
Logic Input
Logic Input Parameters
Logic Output
Logic Out Parameters
Logic Output Scaling
Example: To Scale a Proportioning Logic Output
Relay Output
Relay Parameters
Thermocouple Input
Thermocouple Input Parameters
Linearisation Types and Ranges
CJC Type
Sensor Break Value
Fallback
User Calibration (Two Point)
PV Offset (Single Point)
Using TC4 or TC8 channel as a mV input
Resistance Thermometer Input
RT Input Parameters
Linearisation Types and Ranges
Using RT4 as mA input
Analogue Output
Example – 4 to 20mA Analogue Output
62
62
63
63
64
64
64
65
66
66
67
67
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
7.8
Fixed IO
7.9
Current Monitor
7.9.2
Single Phase Configurations
7.9.3
Three Phase Configuration
7.9.4
Parameter Configuration
7.9.5
Commissioning
7.9.6
Calibration
8.
CHAPTER 8 ALARMS
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.3
8.3.1
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.5
8.5.1
8.6
8.6.1
8.7
8.8
9.
Further Alarm Definitions
Analogue Alarms
Analogue Alarm Types
Digital Alarms
Digital Alarm Types
Alarm Outputs
How Alarms are Indicated
To Acknowledge an Alarm
Alarm Parameters
Example: To Configure Alarm 1
Digital Alarm Parameters
Example: To Configure DigAlarm 1
Alarm Summary
Alarm Log
76
77
78
80
81
82
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
87
87
87
87
89
90
90
91
93
CHAPTER 9 BCD INPUT
94
9.1
BCD Parameters
9.1.1
Example: To wire a BCD Input
94
95
10.
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
10.1
10.1.1
10.2
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3.6
10.3.7
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.5
10.6
10.6.1
10.6.2
10.6.3
10.6.4
10.6.5
10.6.6
10.6.7
10.6.8
10.6.9
10.6.10
10.6.11
10.7
10.8
Configuration Port
Configuration Communications Parameters
Field Communications Port
Modbus
Modbus Connections
Communications Parameters
Communications Identity
Modbus Address Switch
Baud Rate
Parity
RX/TX Delay Time
Modbus Broadcast Master Communications
Mini8 Broadcast Master
Wiring Connections
DeviceNet
CANopen
Instrument setup
Mini8 CANopen Features
Communication Interface
Network Management (NMT)
Device Profile DS-404
Default PDOs
Enabling and Disabling PDO Communications
Changing PDO Mapping
Remapping over the network
Enabling & Disabling PDO Change of State transmission.
General Communication Objects
Profibus
Ethernet
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
96
96
96
97
97
97
98
98
99
99
99
99
100
100
101
102
103
103
103
104
105
106
106
109
109
112
114
114
119
120
3
Engineering Handbook
10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
11.
11.1
11.1.1
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
11.3
11.3.1
11.4
11.4.1
12.
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
12.2.7
12.2.8
13.
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.2
14.
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.2
14.3
14.3.1
14.3.2
14.3.3
14.4
14.4.1
14.4.2
14.4.3
4
Mini8 Controller
Instrument setup
Unit Identity
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Settings
iTools Setup
Ethernet Parameters
120
120
120
121
122
CH. 11 COUNTERS, TIMERS, TOTALISERS, RT CLOCK
124
Counters
Counter Parameters
Timers
Timer Types
On Pulse Timer Mode
On Delay Timer Mode
One Shot Timer Mode
Minimum On Timer or Compressor Mode
Timer Parameters
Totalisers
Totaliser Parameters
Real Time Clock
Real Time Clock Parameters
124
125
126
126
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
133
CHAPTER 12 APPLICATIONS
134
Humidity
Overview
Temperature Control of an Environmental Chamber
Humidity Control of an Environmental Chamber
Humidity Parameters
Zirconia (Carbon Potential) Control
Temperature Control
Carbon Potential Control
Sooting Alarm
Automatic Probe Cleaning
Endothermic Gas Correction
Clean Probe
Probe Status
Zirconia Parameters
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
136
136
136
136
136
136
137
CHAPTER 13 INPUT MONITOR
139
Description
Maximum Detect
Minimum Detect
Time Above Threshold
Input Monitor Parameters
139
139
139
139
140
CHAPTER 14 LOGIC AND MATHS OPERATORS.
141
Logic Operators
Logic 8
2 input Logic Operations
Logic Operator Parameters
Eight Input Logic Operators
Maths Operators
Math Operations
Math Operator Parameters
Sample and Hold Operation
Multiple Input Operator Block
Cascaded operation
Fallback Strategy
Multiple Input Operator Block Parameters
141
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
150
151
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
14.5
14.5.1
14.5.2
15.
Eight Input Analog Multiplexers
Multiple Input Operator Parameters
Fallback
CHAPTER 15 INPUT CHARACTERISATION
15.1
15.1.1
15.1.2
15.2
16.
Input Linearisation
Compensation for Sensor Non-Linearities
Input Linearisation Parameters
Polynomial
CHAPTER 16 LOAD
16.1
17.
Load Parameters
CHAPTER 17 CONTROL LOOP SET UP
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.3.1
17.4
17.4.1
17.4.2
17.4.3
17.4.4
17.4.5
17.4.6
17.4.7
17.4.8
17.4.9
17.4.10
17.5
17.5.1
17.5.2
17.5.3
17.5.4
17.5.5
17.5.6
17.5.7
17.6
17.6.1
17.6.2
17.6.3
17.6.4
17.6.5
17.7
17.7.1
18.
18.1.1
18.1.2
18.2
18.3
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.3.6
18.3.7
Engineering Handbook
What is a Control Loop?
Loop Parameters - Main
Loop Set up
Types of Control Loop
PID Control
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
High and Low Cutback
Integral action and manual reset
Relative Cool Gain
Loop Break Time
Cooling Algorithm
Gain Scheduling
PID Parameters
Tuning
Automatic Tuning
One-shot Tuning
Calculation of the cutback values
Manual Tuning
Setting the Cutback Values
Multi-zone applications.
Tune Parameters
Setpoint Function Block
Setpoint Function Block
SP Tracking
Manual Tracking
Rate Limit
Setpoint Parameters
Output Function Block
Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband
SETPOINT PROGRAMMER
Time to Target Programmer
Ramp Rate Programmer
Mini8 Programmer Block(s)
Segment Types
Rate
Dwell
Step
Time
GoBack
Wait
End
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
152
152
152
153
153
154
155
156
158
158
160
160
161
161
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
164
164
164
165
166
167
167
167
167
168
168
169
169
170
170
171
171
171
171
173
175
176
176
177
177
178
178
178
178
178
178
179
179
5
Engineering Handbook
18.4
18.4.1
18.4.2
18.4.3
18.5
18.5.1
18.6
18.7
18.7.1
18.8
18.9
18.9.1
18.9.2
18.9.3
18.9.4
18.9.5
18.9.6
18.10
18.11
18.12
18.13
18.14
18.14.1
18.14.2
18.14.3
18.14.4
18.15
19.
19.1.1
19.1.2
20.
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.4.1
20.4.2
20.4.3
20.4.4
21.
21.1
22.
22.1
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
22.1.4
22.1.5
22.2
22.3
22.3.1
22.3.2
22.4
22.5
6
Mini8 Controller
Output Events
Digital Events
PV Event & User Value
Time Event
Holdback
Guaranteed Soak
PID Select
Program Cycles
Servo
Power Fail Recovery
To Run, Hold or Reset a Program
Run
Reset
Hold
Skip segment
Advance segment
Fast
PV Start
Configuring the Programmer
Programmer Run Status
Creating a Program
Program Editor
Analog View
Digital View
Saving & Loading Programs
Printing a Program
Wiring the Programmer Function Block.
180
180
181
181
184
184
185
185
185
186
187
187
187
187
187
188
188
188
189
191
192
192
193
195
195
196
197
CHAPTER 19 SWITCH OVER
199
Example: To Set the Switch Over Levels
Switch Over Parameters
199
200
CHAPTER 20 TRANSDUCER SCALING
201
Auto-Tare Calibration
Load Cell
Comparison Calibration
Transducer Scaling Parameters
Parameter Notes
Tare Calibration
Load Cell
Comparison Calibration
201
202
202
202
204
204
205
205
CHAPTER 21 USER VALUES
206
User Value Parameters
206
CHAPTER 22 CALIBRATION
207
TC4 / TC8 User calibration
Set Up
Zero Calibration
Voltage Calibration
CJC Calibration
Sensor-Break Limit Check
To Return to TC4/TC8 Factory Calibration
RT4 User calibration
Set Up
Calibration
To Return to RT4 Factory Calibration
Calibration Parameters
207
207
207
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
208
209
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
23.
23.1
23.2
23.2.1
23.2.2
24.
24.1
24.2
24.2.1
25.
25.1
26.
26.1
26.1.1
26.1.2
26.1.3
26.1.4
26.2
Engineering Handbook
APPENDIX A MODBUS SCADA TABLE
210
Comms Table
SCADA Table
Version 2.xx Programmer Addresses - Decimal
Version 2.xx Programmer Addresses - Hexadecimal
210
210
237
244
APPENDIX B DEVICENET PARAMETER TABLES
IO Re-Mapping Object
Application Variables Object
Table Modification
APPENDIX C CANOPEN PARAMETER TABLES
Manufacturer Object – Pick List
251
251
252
256
257
257
APPENDIX D VERSION 1.XX PROGRAMMER
261
Version 1.xx Parameter Tables
Configuring the Programmer (V1.xx)
To Select, Run, Hold or Reset a Program (V1.xx).
Creating a Program (V1.xx)
To Select, Run, Hold or Reset a Program (Version 1.xx)
Version 1.xx Programmer SCADA addresses
261
261
262
262
263
263
27.
APPENDIX E SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION
268
28.
APPENDIX F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
271
28.1
28.2
28.3
28.4
28.5
28.6
28.7
28.8
28.9
28.10
28.11
28.12
28.13
28.14
28.15
28.16
28.17
Environmental Specification
Network Communications Support
Configuration Communications Support
Fixed I/O Resources
TC8 8-Channel and TC4 4-Channel TC Input Card
DO8 8-Channel Digital Output Card
RL8 8-Channel Relay Output Card
CT3 3-Channel Current-Transformer Input Card
Load Failure Detection
DI8 8-Channel Digital Input Card
RT4 Resistance Thermometer Input Card
AO8 8-Channel and AO4 4-Channel 4-20mA Output Card
Toolkit Blocks
PID Control Loop Blocks
Process Alarms
Setpoint Programmer
Recipes
271
271
271
272
272
273
273
273
274
274
274
275
276
277
277
277
277
Issue Status of This Manual
Issue 3 of this manual applies to software version 2.xx.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
7
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Mini8 Multi-Loop Process Controller
1. CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
1.1
What Instrument Do I Have?
Thank you for choosing this Mini 8 Controller.
The Mini8 is a compact DIN rail mounting multi-loop PID controller and data acquisition unit. It offers a
choice of I/O and a choice of field communications.
The Mini8 mounts on 35mm Top Hat DIN Rail. It is intended for permanent installation, for indoor use only,
and to be enclosed in an electrical panel or cabinet.
The Mini8 is pre-assembled in the factory to give the I/O required for the application as specified in the
order code. With standard applications the Mini8 is also supplied configured. Alternatively the Mini8 is
configured using Eurotherm’s iTools configuration suite running on a personal computer.
All Safety & EMC information is in Appendix E.
The full Technical Specification is in Appendix F.
Whenever the symbol
8
☺ appears in this handbook it indicates a helpful hint
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
1.2
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Ordering Code
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mini8
Loops
Programs
PSU
Comms
Units
I/O
Slot1
I/O
Slot2
I/O
Slot3
I/O
Slot4
11
12 .
13.
14.
15.
Application
Recipe
Wires
Manual
Config
1
MINI8
7-10
IO Slots 1-4
Mini 8 controller
XXX
No module fitted
Control Loops
TC4
4 Channel TC Input
ACQ
IO Acquisition only
TC8
8 Channel TC Input
4LP
4 Control loops
RT4
4 Channel RTD input
8LP
8 Control loops
AO4
16LP
16 Control loops
4 Channel 4-20mA output
(slot 4 only)
AO8
8 Channel 4-20mA output
(slot 4 only)
2
3
Programs
0PRG
No Programs
1PRG
1 Profile – 50 programs
DO8
8 Channel logic output
XPRG
Multi-profile – 50 programs
CT3
3 Channel CT input
4
PSU
RL8
8 Channel relay (slots 2, 3 only)
VL
24Vdc
DI8
8 Channel logic input
VH
100 – 264 Vac
5
Communications
11
STD
Application
MODBUS
Non Isolated Modbus RTU slave
No configuration
ISOLMBUS
Isolated Modbus RTU slave
EC8
8 Loop Extrusion Controller
DEVICENET
DeviceNet Slave
FC8
8 Loop 4-20mA outputs
PBUSRJ45
Profibus Slave RJ45
12
Wires
PBUS9PIN
Profibus Slave 9 pin D type
30
30 User Wires
ENETMBUS
Ethernet Modbus TCP IP Slave
60
60 User Wires
CANOPEN
CANopen Slave
120
120 User Wires
6
Temperature Units
C
Centigrade
F
Fahrenheit
250
250 User Wires
13
Recipes
None
RCP
14
Manual
ENG
English
GER
German
FRA
French
SPA
Spanish
ITA
Italian
15
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
No Recipes
8 Recipes
Configuration Software
NONE
No CD
ITOOLS
Itools CD & Mini8 documentation
9
Engineering Handbook
1.3
Mini8 Controller
How to Install the Controller
This instrument is intended for permanent installation, for indoor use only, and to be enclosed in an
electrical panel.
Select a location where minimum vibrations are present and the ambient temperature is within 0 and 50oC
(32 and 122oF).
Please read the safety information, Appendix E at the end of this guide, before proceeding and refer to the
EMC Booklet part number HA025497 for further information.
1.3.1
Dimensions
Allow a minimum of
25mm above and below
each unit
Allow a minimum of 25mm for
terminals and cables
A
C
B
Dimension
A
B
C
mm
108
124
115
Figure 1-1: Mini8 Dimensions
1.3.2
To Install the Controller
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3.3
Use 35mm symmetrical DIN Rail to EN50022-35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15,
Mount the DIN Rail horizontally as indicated in Figure 1.1. The Mini8 is NOT designed to be
mounted in other orientations.
Hook the upper edge of the DIN rail clip on the instrument on the top of the DIN rail and push.
To remove use a screwdriver to lever down the lower DIN rail clip and lift forward when the clip
has released.
A second unit on the same DIN rail may be mounted adjacent to the unit.
A second unit mounted above or below the unit requires a gap of at least 25mm between the top
of the lower one and the bottom of the higher one.
Environmental Requirements
Mini8
Temperature
Humidity (non condensing)
Altitude
10
Minimum
0°C
5% RH
Maximum
55°C
95% RH
2000m
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
1.4
Engineering Handbook
Electrical Connections
The Mini8 is intended for operation at safe low voltage levels, except the RL8 relay module. Voltages in
excess of 42 volts must not be applied to any terminals other than the RL8 relay module.
A protective earth connection is required.
Do not replace the battery. Return to factory if replacement battery is required.
Communications
LEDs
Communications
Configuration port
Instrument
LEDs
Power
Supply
Fixed IO
I/O Slots I to 4
Communications
connector
DeviceNet shown
Communications
settings
Figure 1-2: Terminal Layout for Mini8 Controller
1.4.1
Power Supply
The power supply requires a supply between 17.8 to 28.8 V dc, 15 watts maximum
User-Terminals
24V
Ø
24 V dc
24V
Ø
24 V dc
0V
Ø
0 V dc
GND
Ø
Ground
Connector terminals will accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 2.5, 24 to 12 awg.
Note: If the Min8 is used with the VT505 panel ensure that the power supply connectors cannot be
mistakenly changed over. The connectors are physically the same, but the electrical connections are not
compatible. Plugging the VT505 connector into the Mini8 will short-circuit the 24 volt supply.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
11
Engineering Handbook
1.4.2
Mini8 Controller
Fixed IO Connections
These I/O are part of the power supply board and are always fitted.
D1
Ø
Digital Input 1
D2
Ø
Digital Input 2
C
Ø
Digital Input common
A1
Ø
Relay A n/open
A2
Ø
Relay A n/closed
A3
Ø
Relay A common
B1
Ø
Relay B n/open
B2
Ø
Relay B n/closed
B3
Ø
Relay B common
Digital Inputs : ON requires > 10.8V with 2mA drive, 30V max.
Relays contacts: 1 amp max, 42Vdc. These contacts are NOT rated for mains operation.
1.4.3
Digital Communications Connections
Two communications connections are fitted – a Modbus Configuration port (RJ11) and a Fieldbus port.
The Fieldbus is either Modbus (2 x RJ45 ), DeviceNet, CANopen, Profibus or Ethernet 10baseT.
1.4.4
Configuration Port
The configuration port (Modbus) is on an RJ11 socket, just to the right of the power supply connections. It is
a point to point RS232 connection. Eurotherm supply a standard cable to connect a serial COM port on a
computer to the RJ11 socket, part no. SubMin8/cable/config.
9 pin DF to PC
COM port (RS232)
1.4.5
RJ11
Function
Pin
-
6
N/c
3 (Tx)
5
Rx
2 (Rx)
4
Tx
5 (0v)
3
0v (gnd)
2
N/c
1
Reserved
Pin 6
Pin 1
Modbus
For a full description of the installation of a communications link, including line matching resistors, see
Eurotherm 2000 series communications handbook, part no. HA026230.
RJ45 pin
3 wire
5 wire
8
A
RxA
7
B
RxB
6
Ground
Ground
3
Ground
Ground
2
A
TxA
1
B
TxB
Pin 8
5
4
12
Pin 1
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Two RJ45 sockets are provided – one for the incoming connection, the second to loop onto the next
instrument or for a line terminator.
For the address switch see Chapter 10.3.4
The RS485 standard allows one or more instruments to be connected (multi dropped) using a two wire
connection, with cable length of less than 1200m. 31 instruments and one master may be connected.
To use RS485, buffer the RS232 port of the PC with a suitable RS232/RS485 converter. The Eurotherm
Controls KD485 Communications Adapter unit is recommended for this purpose. The use of a RS485 board
built into the computer is not recommended since this board may not be isolated, which may cause noise
problems or damage to the computer, and the RX terminals may not be biased correctly for this application.
Either cut a patch cable and connect the open end to the KD485 converter or, using twin screened cable,
crimp an RJ45 plug on the Mini8 end.
The communication line must be daisy chained from device to device and, if the communications line is
more than a metre or two long, it must be correctly terminated. A Modbus terminator containing the correct
termination resistors is available from Eurotherm, order code:
SubMin8/RESISTOR/MODBUS/RJ45. The Modbus terminator is BLACK.
See also the 2000 series Communications Handbook, part number HA026230, available on
www.eurotherm.co.uk. for further information on digital communications.
RS232
Com Rx Tx
RxA
RxB
Com
TxA
TxB
RS485
220 ohm termination
resistor on the Rx of the
converter unit
RJ45 Patch
cables
Modbus
Terminator
Type KD485
converter
Mini8 no. 1
Mini8 no. n
Figure 1-3: RS485 two-wire Connections
For the 4 wire connection the TxA and TxB are not connected to RxA and RxB but connected separately
through another twisted pair.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
13
Engineering Handbook
1.4.6
Mini8 Controller
DeviceNet / CANopen
DeviceNet and CANopen both use a 5 way, 5.08mm pitch, connector/screw terminal, The DeviceNet bus is
powered (24V) from the system network, not from the instrument. The Mini8 requirement is a load of
around 100mA. For the address switch see Chapter 10.5
Legend
Mini8
Label
Colour
V+
Red
Function
V+
V+
CH
CAN HIGH
DR
DRAIN
CL
CAN LOW
V-
V-
Description
Network power positive terminal.
Connect the red wire of the
DeviceNet / CANopen cable here. If the network does not supply the
power, connect the positive terminal of an external 11-25 Vdc power
supply.
CAN_H
White
CAN_H data bus terminal. Connect the white wire of the DeviceNet /
CANopen cable here.
SHIELD
None
Shield/Drain wire connection. Connect the DeviceNet cable shield here.
To prevent ground loops, the network should be grounded in only one
location.
CAN_L
Blue
CAN_L data bus terminal. Connect the blue wire of the DeviceNet /
CANopen cable here.
VBlack
Network power negative terminal. Connect the black wire of the
DeviceNet / CANopen cable here. If the DeviceNet network does not
supply the power, connect the negative terminal of an external 11-25
Vdc power supply.
The DeviceNet specification states that the bus terminators of 121 ohm should not be included as any part
of a master or slave. They are not supplied but should be included in the cabling between CAN_H and
CAN_L where required.
The CANopen Cabling and Connector Pin Assignment specification specifies that the minimum termination
resistance is 118 ohm with the following guidelines. They are not supplied but should be included in the
cabling where required.
Bus length (m)
Termination resistance (ohms)
0 – 40
124
40 – 100
150 - 300
Network length depends on Baud rate.
14
Network Length
Varies w/speed, up to 4000m possible w/repeaters
Baud Rate
125
250
500
1M (CANopen)
Thin trunk
100m (328ft)
100m (328ft)
100m (328ft)
100m
Max drop
6m (20ft)
6m (20ft)
6m (20ft)
6m(20ft)
Cumulative drop
156m (512ft)
78m (256ft)
39m (128ft)
19m (64ft)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
1.4.7
Engineering Handbook
Typical DeviceNet / CANopen Wiring Diagram
Mini8
V+ 5
CAN-H 4
Drain 3
CAN-L 2
V- 1
RED
V+
CAN-H
Drain
CAN-L
V-
WHT
BLU
BLK
(SLAVE)
Address 11
MASTER
Mini8
V+
CAN-H
Drain
CAN-L
VSupply
24Vdc (+/- 1%)
250mV p-p Ripple
(SLAVE)
V+
VGnd
Address 12
max
Mini8
V+
CAN-H
Drain
CAN-L
V-
121
Ω*
(SLAVE)
Address N+1
* CANopen specifies 124 ohms, see previous section.
See the DeviceNet Communications Handbook HA027506
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
15
Engineering Handbook
1.4.8
Mini8 Controller
Profibus DP
Two Profibus communications board options are available for the Mini8.
1. Standard Profibus 3 wire RS485 9 pin D connector intended for installation using standard Profibus cabling.
Note that in this arrangement line terminations must be catered for in the cabling.
2. Profibus 3 wire RS485 via 2 paralleled RJ45 sockets. Instruments may be daisy chained using suitable RJ45
cables and an RJ45 termination plug is available to terminate the line.
1.4.8.1
Profibus Interface (D-Type Connector)
Connector: 9-Way D-Type, R/A, Female, 4-40 UNC Studs:
1.4.8.2
Pin
Function
1
Shield (Case)
2
N/C
3
RxD/TxD+ P (B)
4
N/C
5
GND (0V)
6
VP (+5V)
7
N/C
8
RxD/TxD- N (A)
9
N/C
Terminations must be included in the cabling.
Profibus Interface (RJ45 Connector)
Connector: Two RJ45, parallel connected (for daisy-chain):
Pin
3-Wire
8
(do not use)
7
(do not use)
6
VP (+5V)
5
1
4
16
8
3
GND
2
RxD/TxD+ P (B)
One connector may be used to terminate line using SubMini8/Term/Profibus/RJ45
1
RxD/TxD- N (A)
This terminator is grey.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
1.4.9
Engineering Handbook
Ethernet (Modbus TCP)
The Ethernet connection uses standard Cat5E patch cables (RJ45). These would be used with a 10BaseT hub
to create a network.
A crossover patch cable may be used ‘point-to-point’ i.e. to connect a single instrument directly to a PC.
Connector: RJ45:
Pin
Function
8
7
6
8
RX-
5
4
3
RX+
2
TX-
1
TX+
1
Network traffic activity is displayed on indicators built into the connector, yellow indicates network activity
and green shows the Mini8 is communicating.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
17
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
1.4.10 Thermocouple Input TC4 and TC8
The TC8 thermocouple module takes 8 thermocouples; the TC4 module takes 4 thermocouples. They may be placed
in any slot in the Mini8. Up to 4 may be fitted in a Mini8. Each input can be configured to any thermocouple type or a
linear mV input.
The TC4 module offers TC1 to TC4, on terminals A to H
18
A
Ø
TC1 +
B
Ø
TC1 -
C
Ø
TC2 +
D
Ø
TC2 -
E
Ø
TC3 +
F
Ø
TC3 -
G
Ø
TC4 +
H
Ø
TC4 -
I
Ø
TC5 +
J
Ø
TC5 -
K
Ø
TC6 +
L
Ø
TC6 -
M
Ø
TC7 +
N
Ø
TC7 -
O
Ø
TC8 +
P
Ø
TC8 -
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
1.4.11 RTD / PT100 Input RT4
The RT4 module provides 4 RTD inputs for 2, 3 or 4 wire connections. They may be placed in any slot in the Mini8. Up
to 4 may be fitted in a Mini8. Each input can be configured for any resistive sensor up to 600 ohms. Standard
limearisation is available for PT100.
A
Ø
CH1 Current +
B
Ø
CH1 Sense +
C
Ø
CH1 Sense ─
D
Ø
CH1 Current ─
E
Ø
CH2 Current +
F
Ø
CH2 Sense +
G
Ø
CH2 Sense ─
H
Ø
CH2 Current ─
I
Ø
CH3 Current +
J
Ø
CH3 Sense +
K
Ø
CH3 Sense ─
L
Ø
CH3 Current ─
M
Ø
CH4 Current +
N
Ø
CH4 Sense +
O
Ø
CH4 Sense ─
P
Ø
CH4 Current ─
2
3
4
wire connection
Note 2, 3 or 4 wire connection must also be selected in the input channel configuration, IO.Mod.n.IOType.
☺ Tip:
Spare RT4 input channels may be configured as mA inputs using a 2.49 ohm resistor, order code
SubMini8/resistor/Shunt/249R.1. See 7.6.3 for configuration.
A
Ø
CH1 Current +
B
Ø
CH1 Sense +
C
Ø
CH1 Sense ─
D
Ø
CH1 Current ─
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
mA in
2.49 ohm
mA out
19
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
1.4.12 Logic Input DI8
The DI8 module provides 8 logic inputs. They may be placed in any slot in the Mini8. Up to 4 may be fitted in a Mini8.
A
Ø
D1 +
B
Ø
D1 -
0V
C
Ø
D2 +
+24V
D
Ø
D2 -
0V
E
Ø
D3 +
+24V
F
Ø
D3 -
G
Ø
D4 +
H
Ø
D4 -
I
Ø
D5 +
J
Ø
D5 -
K
Ø
D6 +
L
Ø
D6 -
M
Ø
D7 +
N
Ø
D7 -
O
Ø
D8 +
P
Ø
D8 -
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
Digital Inputs : ON requires > 10.8V with 2mA drive, 30V max.
20
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
1.4.13 Logic Output DO8
The DO8 module provides 8 logic outputs. They may be placed in any slot in the Mini8. Up to 4 may be fitted in a
Mini8. Each output can be configured to Time Proportioning or On/Off.
24V
A
Ø
Supply In +
0V
B
Ø
Supply In +
C
Ø
OP 1 +
+
D
Ø
OP 2 +
–
E
Ø
OP 3 +
F
Ø
OP 4 +
G
Ø
Supply & OP -
H
Ø
Supply & OP -
SSR 1
SSRs
2 to 7
I
Ø
Supply In +
J
Ø
Supply In +
K
Ø
OP 5 +
L
Ø
OP 6 +
M
Ø
OP 7 +
N
Ø
OP 8 +
+
O
Ø
Supply & OP -
–
P
Ø
Supply & OP -
SSR 8
Supply In + (A,B,I,J) are all linked internally.
Supply In – (G,H,O,P) are all linked internally.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
21
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
1.4.14 Relay Output RL8
The RL8 module provides 8 relay outputs.
Up to 2 modules may be fitted and in slots 2 and/or 3 only
A
Ø
RLY1 A
B
Ø
RLY1 B
C
Ø
RLY2 A
D
Ø
RLY2 B
E
Ø
RLY3 A
F
Ø
RLY3 B
G
Ø
RLY4 A
H
Ø
RLY4 B
I
Ø
RLY5 A
J
Ø
RLY5 B
K
Ø
RLY6 A
L
Ø
RLY6 B
M
Ø
RLY7 A
N
Ø
RLY7 B
O
Ø
RLY8 A
P
Ø
RLY8 B
Relay contacts for full contact life:
Maximum 264V ac 2amps with snubber fitted.
Minimum 5V dc, 10mA
Snubbers are used to prolong the life of relay contacts and to reduce interference when switching inductive
devices such as contactors or solenoid valves. If the relay is used to switch a device with a high impedance
input, no snubber is necessary.
All relay modules are fitted internally with a snubber since these are generally required to switch inductive
devices. However, snubbers pass 0.6mA at 110V and 1.2mA at 230Vac, which may be sufficient to hold on
high impedance loads. If this type of device is used it will be necessary to remove the snubber from the
circuit.
The relay module has to be removed from the instrument. See Section 1.5. The snubber is removed from
the relay module by inserting a screwdriver into one of the pair of slots either side of the track of each
snubber network. Twist the screwdriver to break out this track between the slots.
This action is not reversible.
22
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
1.4.15 Analogue Output AO4 and AO8
The AO8 modules provides 8 analogue outputs and the AO4 provides 4 analogue outputs. Each output is
configurable within 0 to 20 mA , max load 360 ohm.
The AO4 offers OP1 to OP4 on terminals A to H.
Only one module may be fitted and in slot 4 only.
A
Ø
OP 1 +
B
Ø
OP 1 -
C
Ø
OP 2 +
D
Ø
OP 2 -
E
Ø
OP 3 +
F
Ø
OP 3 -
G
Ø
OP 4 +
H
Ø
OP 4 -
I
Ø
OP 5 +
J
Ø
OP 5 -
K
Ø
OP 6 +
L
Ø
OP 6 -
M
Ø
OP 7 +
N
Ø
OP 7 -
O
Ø
OP 8 +
P
Ø
OP 8 -
☺ Tip:
A 0 to 10 volt output can be obtained by scaling the drive to 0 to 10mA and fitting an external 1kohm
resistor (for example). Low load impedance may alter the results but this can be corrected by adjusting the
output range accordingly.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
23
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
1.4.16 Current Transformer input Module CT3
This provides inputs for 3 current transformers. The heater load cables are threaded through the
transformers. Each input is 50mA max into 5 ohms.
A
Ø
Reserved
B
Ø
Reserved
C
Ø
Reserved
D
Ø
Reserved
E
Ø
Reserved
F
Ø
Reserved
G
Ø
Reserved
H
Ø
Reserved
I
Ø
In 1 A
J
Ø
In 1 B
K
Ø
no connection
L
Ø
In 2 A
M
Ø
In 2 B
N
Ø
no connection
o
Ø
In 3 A
P
Ø
In 3 B
The current transformers provide channel isolation; there is no channel to channel isolation in the module.
It is recommended that the current transformer is fitted with a voltage limiting device such as two back to
back zener diodes between 3 and 10 volts, rated for 50mA.
There are 3 CT inputs, one for each phase. Up to a maximum of 16 heaters may be threaded through the
CTs but with a further limit of 6 heater wires through each individual CT.
See Chapter 7.9 for typical circuit arrangements.
To CT input on CT3 module
CT
24
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
1.5
Engineering Handbook
Adding or replacing an IO module.
Modules contain static sensitive electronic devices. Take full antistatic protection when replacing modules
by working on an earthed mat with an earthed wrist strap. Avoiding touching components, keep fingers on
the green connectors or the edge of the printed circuit boards.
Remove screw →
← Remove screw
Figure 1-4: Mini8 Cover Retaining Screws
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Part No HA028581
Remove all connectors.
Remove the 2 screws indicated above
Remove the cover.
If removing a module gently prise it out using the green connectors.
Insert the new module carefully using the guides on the side of the case to help to line up the
lower connector with its mate on the motherboard. This requires great care as the guides provide
mechanical support rather than being plug in guides.
Once you are certain the two connectors are lined up, push the module gently into place. Do NOT
force.
Replace cover and the 2 cover screws.
Replace all connectors onto their correct modules.
Issue 3
Sep-05
25
Engineering Handbook
1.6
Mini8 Controller
Mini 8 LED Indicators
Two sets of 3 LEDs on the front panel indicate the power, the state of the output relays, the status of the
Mini8 and communications activity.
Legend
LED
Function
OFF
ON
P
Green
Indicates 24V
No power
Powered
Legend
RN
CC
LED
Function
OFF
Blinking
ON
Green
Indicates run mode
Not running
Standby
Running
Green
Indicates Configuration
-Config traffic
--
A
Red
Relay A state
De-energised
Energised
B
Red
Relay B state
De-energised
Energised
FC
Modbus/Profibus
Green
Field comms activity
Offline
Traffic
DeviceNet/CANopen
Green
Status
Offline
Ready
Connected
Ethernet*
Green
Field comms activity
No port traffic
Port traffic excluding
local housekeeping
* The Ethernet connector itself has two in-built LEDs : Green = network activity
Yellow = Mini8 communicating
The Mini8 is controlling normally ONLY if the green RN LED is permanently ON.
26
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
2. CHAPTER 2 USING THE MINI8
The Mini8 Controller does not have a display. The only means of configuring it, and of interfacing with it
during normal operation is via communications.
The auxiliary communications port CC (RJ11) gives a Modbus interface usually connected to iTools for
configuration and commissioning.
The main communications port FC offers Modbus, DeviceNet, CANopen, Profibus, or Ethernet normally
connected to the system of which the Mini8 is part, and is the means by which the Mini8 is operated.
Below are ways the Mini8 may be used in a system. iTools is the best PC based solution. The Modbus single
register addressing is best for Operator panels, PLCs where floating point may not be available or necessary.
Some parameters may also be read this way as floats or long integers.
2.1
iTools
iTools offers a pc based solution. The iTools suite allows configuration, commissioning, trend graphs and
logging with OPC Scope, Program Editing, Recipes and User pages with View Builder.
2.1.1
iTools OPC Open server
With an OPEN OPC server running on a PC all the Mini8 parameters are available to any third party package
with an OPC client. The advantage of this is that all the parameters are addressed by name – the iTools OPC
server handles all the physical communication addresses. An example would be with Wonderware inTouch
using OPCLink. In this situation the user would not have to know any of the parameter addresses, and would
just select a parameter by browsing through the namespace.
e.g. Eurotherm.ModbusServer.1.COM1.ID001-Mini8.Loop.1.Main.PV
2.2
Modbus, single register, SCADA addressing
The key parameters of the Mini8 are available at a fixed single 16 bit register address, independent of its
configuration. These can be used with any device with a serial Modbus master (Modbus function 4). The
parameters are listed in full with their addresses in Appendix A.
By default iTools displays the SCADA address of those parameters which are available.
As shown, not all the parameters within the instrument are available. If other parameters are required they
can be obtained by using the Commstab folder. This allows up to 250 other parameters to be made
available using indirection addressing. This is explained in Appendix A.
Also note that in this area the resolution (number of decimal points) has to be configured and the serial
Master has to scale the parameter correctly.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
27
Engineering Handbook
2.3
Mini8 Controller
Modbus (Floating Point)
If the application requires the extra resolution, the Commstab folder also offers an alternative solution
where a parameter can be indirectly addressed and communicated either as a floating point or as a double
integer value – its ‘Native’ format. This can be used with any device e.g. PC or plc, with a serial Modbus
master, able to decode a double register for floating point numbers (Modbus function 7) and long integers
(Modbus function 8). See Appendix A.
2.4
Fieldbus
The Mini8 may be ordered with the option of DeviceNet, Profibus or CanOPEN.
DeviceNet comes pre-configured with the key parameters of 8 PID loops and alarms (60 input parameters
process variables, alarm status etc and 60 output parameters – setpoints etc.). Loops 9-16 are not included
in the DeviceNet tables as there are insufficient attributes for the DeviceNet parameters. See Appendix B.
CANopen offers 4 receive & 4 Transmit PDOs and 1 server SDO with a 200 parameter pick list. See Appendix
C
Profibus is set up using a GSD editor included on the iTools CD. The GSD editor sets up the instrument
parameters that are required to be communicated with the master.
2.5
Ethernet
The Mini8 may be ordered with an Ethernet connection (10baseT) running ModbusTCP as the protocol. An
instrument can therefore have a unique identity on the Ethernet network as well as a unique Modbus
address for the Modbus master.
2.6
Mini8 Execution
The nominal update of all inputs and function blocks is 110ms. However, in complex applications the Mini8
will automatically extend this time in multiples of 110ms.
For example, eight simple heat/cool loops each with two alarms (40 wires) will run at 110ms, while the full
EC8 configuration will run at 220ms because of the extra wiring and functionality.
The communications traffic will also have some effect on the update rate.
For example, an application using every function block and all 250 wires will run at 220ms with light
communications traffic but may be slowed to 330ms with heavy traffic.
Note that as loading changes, the sample rate may increase or decrease automatically. In order to recover to
a faster sample rate, the Mini8 must be running consistently with processing power to spare for at least 30s.
28
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
2.7
Engineering Handbook
The iTools Operator Interface
Much of this manual is about configuring the Mini8 with iTools. However iTools also provides an excellent
commissioning tool and can be used as a long-term operator view if convenient.
First it is necessary to go ‘on-line’ to the Mini8(s). This assumes the communication ports have been wired
up to the COM port on the iTools computer (Chapter 10).
2.7.1
Scanning
Open iTools and, with the controller connected, press
on the iTools menu bar. iTools will search
the communications ports for recognisable instruments. Controllers connected using the RJ11 configuration
port or with the configuration clip (CPI), may be found at address 255 (as a single point to point connection)
or on a multidrop RS485 or RS422 network will be found at the address configured in the controller.
The iTools handbook, part no. HA026179, provides further step by step instructions on the general
operation of iTools. This and the iTools software may be downloaded from www.eurotherm.co.uk.
When an instrument is found on the network it will be shown as, for example
‘COM1.ID001-Min8’ which represents <computer com port>.ID<instrument address>-<Instrument type>
Stop the scan once all the instruments have been found.
Once an instrument is found on the network a message ‘’sync pending’ or synchronizing’ is displayed next to
it whilst iTools extracts the exact configuration from the instrument. Wait until this message disappears.
2.7.2
Browsing and Changing Parameter Values
Once the instrument is synchronized the parameter navigation tree is displayed. The contents of this tree
will vary depending on the actual configuration of the instrument.
The folders shown will be some of those which are
always present –
e.g Instrument, IO, Comms, Access
as well as the configuration dependent onese.g. Loops, Alarm, Lgc2 etc. which have been
configured.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
29
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
To view or change a parameter:
1.
Highlight the folder
2.
Press
to get the parameter window or open up the parameter list by clicking on the
required folder. Right click in the parameter list to reveal or hide columns.
3.
To change the value of a parameter,
a.
click the parameter value,
b.
write in the new value. Note a pop-up window indicates the current value, and the high and low
limits.
c.
Hit <Enter> to enter the new value or <Escape> to cancel.
The ‘Access’ button puts the controller into configuration mode. In this mode the controller can be set up
without its outputs being active. Press ‘Access’ again to return to operating level.
To find a parameter use the ‘Find’ tab at the bottom of the folder list.
☺ Tip:
☺ Tip:
30
In parameter lists:
Parameters in BLUE are read only
Parameters in BLACK are read/write.
Every parameter in the parameter lists has a detailed description in the help file – just click on a
parameter and hit Shift-F1 on the keyboard or right click and select parameter help.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
2.8
Engineering Handbook
Recipe Editor
Press
for this feature. Up to 8 recipes can be stored. They can also be named by the
user. Recipes allow the operator to change the operating values of up to 24 parameters in an instrument
for different batch items/processes by simply selecting a particular recipe to load. Recipes are important for
reducing error in setup and they remove the need for operator instructions fixed to the panel next to the
instrument.
Note: Loading a recipe set causes the instrument to enter Standby mode momentarily during which time it
does not control.
The Recipe Editor is used during configuration to assign the required parameters and to set up the values to
be loaded for each recipe.
2.8.1
Recipe Menu Commands
Command
Load Recipe
Save
Edit Parameter
Delete Parameter
Edit Parameter
Value
Rename Parameter
Tag
Parameter
Properties
Copy Parameter
Paste Parameter
Columns
Load Access Level
Level1
Config
Never
Edit Data Set
Value
Clear Data Set
Value
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Description
Used to load a recipe file into the instrument
Used to save the current recipe configuration into a file
Used to assign a parameter to a Tag. Parameters can also be assigned by 'drag and drop'
from the iTools parameter list
Used to delete an assigned parameter from the recipes
Used to edit the current value of the assigned parameter
Allows the user to rename the Tag of the associated parameter. This tag is used on the
instrument to identify assigned parameters (default Value1 - Value24)
Used to find the properties and help information of the selected parameter
Used to copy the currently selected parameter
Used to assign a previously copied parameter to the selected Tag
Used to hide/show the Description and Comment Columns
Used to configure the lowest access level in which the selected recipe is allowed to load
Permitted to load when the instrument is in any of the access levels
Permitted to load when the instrument is in the Config access level
Never permitted to load
Used to edit the value of the selected assigned parameter within the selected recipe.
Values can also be edited via double left clicking the value itself
Used to clear the value of the selected assigned parameter within the selected recipe,
thus disabling it from loading when the recipe is selected to load
Sep-05
31
Engineering Handbook
Command
Rename Data Set
Snapshot Values
Description
Allows the user to rename the selected recipe. This name is used to identify individual
recipes (default Set1 - Set8). Note: Number of recipes dependent upon features
Used to clear all values in the selected recipe, thus disabling all from loading when the
recipe is selected to load
Used to copy all of the assigned parameters current values into the selected recipe
Copy Data Set
Paste Data Set
Used to copy all values of the selected recipe
Used to paste all values of a previously copied recipe into the selected recipe
Clear Data Set
2.9
Mini8 Controller
OPCScope
OPC scope is a standalone OPC client that can be used to attach to the iTools OPCserver. It offers real time trend
charts and data logging to disc in a .csv (comma separated variable) format which can easily be opened by a
spreadsheet such as Excel.
With iTools open OPC Scope can be started using the icon
.
But it can also be started on its own using the Windows Start/Programs/Eurotherm iTools/OPC Scope
and the OPC server will start up (if it is not running) and will
Select Server/Connect or click the icon
display the active ports on the computer. Opening the COM port will show the attached instruments as
shown below.
The ‘ID001-Mini8’ folder will contain all the same folders for the instrument that would have been seen in
iTools itself.
Expand the folder and double click on the blue item tag to add to the List Window. The List Window shows
all the selected parameters and their current value.
Right click on a parameter to get the context menu.
32
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
2.9.1
Engineering Handbook
OPC Scope List Window Context Menu
Command
Save
Copy Item DDE link
Copy/Paste Item
Add Item
Remove Item
Write Value
Item appears on Chart
Item Properties
Description
Saves the OPC Scope configuration as <filename>.uix See Section 2.9.3
Saves the DDE path to the clipboard.
‘Paste Special’ in an Excel cell and select ‘Paste Link’ and the current parameter value will
be displayed in the cell.
Copy & Paste
Add a new variable by name (easier to browse the navigation tree)
Remove the selected item.
Write a new value (not if the item is Read Only).
Up to 8 items can be trended on the Chart Window
Gives the item properties as seen by OPC
The OPC List can contain parameters from any instrument attached to the Modbus network.
If you have iTools Open (not iTools Standard) then OPC Scope can run on a remote networked computer.
Enter the name of the server computer (attached to the instruments) the ‘Computer’ window and browse
for the ‘Eurotherm.ModbusServer1’.
2.9.2
OPC Scope Chart Window
Click the Chart tab
at the bottom of the display window and select Chart Control Panel.
1.
Items. Includes all the items in the
list window. Those items ticked (up to
8) will appear on the chart.
2.
Axes. Allows time intervals from 1
minute to 1 month. Vertical axes can
be ‘auto’ scaled or a fixed range may
be entered.
3.
General. Allows selection of
colours, grid, legends and a data box.
4.
Plot. Allows selection of line
thickness and printing
5.
Review. Allows review of early
history charts.
These are also available on the toolbar.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
33
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
iTools Trend Graph showing Loop1 SP and PV
The
34
icon allows the chart to occupy all the window space.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
2.9.3
Engineering Handbook
OPC Server
ITools and OPC Scope all use the Eurotherm OPC Server to provide the connection between the instruments
and the computer displays. When you ‘scan’ for instruments on iTools it is in fact the OPC Server that is
actually doing the work in background ( the window is not usually displayed).
OPC Scope can run on its own but for it to find the instruments on the network it is necessary to tell the
server where they are.
1.
Start OPC Server (Windows Start/Programs/Eurotherm iTools/OPC Server)
2.
On the menu go to ‘Network’ and select ‘Start One-Shot Scan’
3.
Stop the scan when all the instruments have been found.
4.
On the menu go to ‘File’ and select ‘Save As’ and save the file with a suitable name.
5.
Once saved you will be asked ‘Would you like to make this file the default start server address
file?’ – select ‘Yes’.
6.
Close the server.
Now if you double click on an OPC Scope file e.g. Mini8 Project.uix then this file will open OPC Scope and in
turn, in background, OPC scope will open the OPC Server with this instrument file loaded. OPC Scope will
then be active with live data from the instrument(s).
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
35
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
3. CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURATION USING iTOOLS
WARNING
Configuration level gives access to a wide range of parameters that match the controller to the
process. Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled and/or
personal injury. It is the responsibility of the person commissioning the process to ensure that
the configuration is correct.
In configuration level the controller may not be controlling the process or providing alarm
indication. Do not select configuration level on a live process.
3.1
Configuration
The Mini8 is supplied unconfigured, unless ordered preconfigured, e.g. EC8. An unconfigured Mini8 has to
be configured for use in an application. This is performed using iTools.
The iTools handbook, part no. HA026179 provides further step by step instructions on the general operation
of iTools. This and the iTools software may be downloaded from www.eurotherm.co.uk.
3.1.1
On-Line/Off-line Configuration
If iTools is connected to a real Mini8 then all the parameter changes made will be written to the device
immediately. Once the Mini8 is configured and working as required, its final configuration can be saved to
disk as a ‘clone’ file of the format <name>.uic.
Alternatively iTools can be used ‘off-line’ without a real Mini8 connected at all. This virtual Mini8 can be
created in iTools and again saved to disk as a clone file. This file can later be loaded into a real Mini8 to
create the required real application. See Section 3.3 .
3.2
3.2.1
Connecting a PC to the Mini8 Controller
Configuration Cable and Clip
The controller may be connected to the PC running iTools using the Eurotherm cable
SubMin8/Cable/Config from the RJ11 port connecting to a serial port on the PC.
Alternatively a Configuration Clip is available from Eurotherm that can be fitted into the rear of the
controller.
The benefit of using this arrangement is that it is not necessary to power the controller, since the clip
provides the power to the internal memory of the controller.
3.2.2
Scanning
Open iTools and, with the controller connected, press
on the iTools menu bar. iTools will search
the communications ports and TCP/IP connections for recognisable instruments. Controllers connected
using the RJ11 configuration port or with the configuration clip (CPI), will be found at address 255 regardless
of the address configured in the controller. These connections only work from iTools to a single controller.
The iTools handbook, part no. HA026179, provides further step by step instructions on the general
operation of iTools. This and the iTools software may be downloaded from www.eurotherm.co.uk.
In the following pages it is assumed that the user is familiar with iTools and has a general understanding of
Windows.
36
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
3.3
Engineering Handbook
Cloning
Saving a Clone File
On the iTools menu ‘File – Save to File’ allows the clone file of the attached Mini8 to be saved to disc as
<user name>.UIC file. This can be loaded into another Mini8.
Note that after synchronization iTools using uses a ‘quick’ save and will only resave parameters that have
been changed through iTools itself. If there is any chance that parameters have been changed through the
other port then it is necessary to resave all the parameters. On the menu bar under Options – Cloning
ensure Reload is selected. The safest option is to keep Ask selected.
Loading a clone file
On the iTools menu ‘File – Load values File’ allows a clone file of the form <user name>.UIC to be loaded
into an attached Mini8 unit. Whilst loading, the report window will indicate what is happening. It makes a
number of attempts to load all the values and may report some errors. This is generally not an issue. If for
some reason the load fails iTools will report specifically that the load ‘Failed’
Communications port parameters
A Mini8 clone file contains information on both the CC and FC port config settings. Depending on which
comms port is used to load a clone file cloning will behave in a different manner.
Loading the clone file through the FC port will cause the CC port settings to be updated
Loading the clone file through the CC port will cause the FC port settings to be updated
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
37
Engineering Handbook
3.4
Mini8 Controller
Configuring the Mini8
Once iTools is successfully connected to a Mini8, it can be configured for the application in hand.
Configuration involves selection of the required elements of functionality called ‘function blocks’ and setting
their parameters to the correct values. The next stage is to connect all the function blocks together to
create the required strategy of control for the application.
3.4.1
Function Blocks
The controller software is constructed from a number of ‘function blocks’. A function block is a software
device that performs a particular duty within the controller. It may be represented as a ‘box’ that takes data
in at one side (as inputs), manipulates the data internally (using internal parameter values) and ‘outputs’ the
results. Some of these internal parameters are available to the user so that they can be adjusted to suit the
characteristics of the process that is to be controlled.
A representation of a function block is shown below.
Name –
corresponds to
Folder
Output
Parameters
Input
Parameters
Internal Parameters
Figure 3-1: Example of a Function Block
In the controller, parameters are organised in simple lists. The top of the list shows the list header. This
corresponds to the name of the function block and is generally presented in alphabetical order. This name
38
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
describes the generic function of the parameters within the list. For example, the list header ‘AnAlm’
contains parameters that enable you to set up analogue alarm conditions.
3.4.2
Soft Wiring
Soft Wiring (sometimes known as User Wiring) refers to the connections that are made in software between
function blocks. Soft wiring, which will generally be referred to as ‘Wiring’ from now on is created during
the instrument configuration using the iTools configuration package.
In general every function block has at least one input and one output. Input parameters are used to specify
where a function block reads its incoming data (the ‘Input Source’). The input source is usually wired from
the output of a preceding function block. Output parameters are usually wired to the input source of
subsequent function blocks.
All parameters shown in the function block diagrams are also shown in the parameter tables, in the relevant
chapters, in the order in which they appear in iTools.
Figure 3.2 shows an example of how the thermocouple is wired to the PID Loop input and the PID Loop
channel 1 (heat) output is wired to the time proportioning logic output.
PID output to
logic output
t/c to PID input
Figure 3-2: Function Block Wiring
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
39
Engineering Handbook
3.5
Mini8 Controller
Simple Worked Example
Using function blocks and wiring the following sections will show a blank Mini8 being configured to have
one PID loop.
3.5.1
The I/O
With the Mini8 successfully connected to iTools configuration can begin.
☺ Tip: In parameter lists:
Parameters in BLUE are read only
Parameters in BLACK are read/write.
☺ Tip:
Every parameter in the parameter lists has a detailed description in the help file – just click on a
parameter and hit Shift-F1 on the keyboard or right click and select parameter help.
The I/O will already have been installed in the Mini8 and can be checked in iTools.
Figure 3-3: Mini8 I/O Modules
This unit has an 8 thermocouple input board in slot 1, a CT3 input card in slot 2, and 2 DO8 output cards
in slot 3 and slot 4. Clicking on the ‘Mod’ tab will enable the first channel of the thermocouple card to be
configured. Firstly the Mini8 has to be put into configuration mode. Go to Device/Access/Configuration or
click on the Access button:
40
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Figure 3-4: Thermocouple Input
Select the I/O type, linearisation, units, resolution etc. required. Parameter details are in Section 7.5.
The other thermocouple channels can be found by using the 2,3,4…7,8 tabs on the top of the parameter
window.
Slot 2 in the Mini8 has a CT3 input card and this is configured elsewhere so the Tabs 9 to 16 are not shown.
Slot 3 has a DO8 output card and the first channel of this will be on tab 17 (to 24)
Slot 4 has a DO8 output card and the first channel of this will be on tab 25 (to 32)
Figure 3-5: Digital Output Channel
Set this channel up as required, IOType, MinOnTime etc. as required. The parameters are detailed in Section
7.3.
The remaining channels on this slot will be found under the tabs 18 to 24.
Slot 4 also contains a DO8 output card with outputs under tabs 25 to 32.
The fixed I/O is always there and there is nothing that has to be configured.
The Current Monitor is covered in Chapter 7.9.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
41
Engineering Handbook
3.5.2
Mini8 Controller
Wiring
The IO that has been configured now needs to be wired to PID loops and other function blocks.
Select
(GWE) to create and edit instrument wiring.
The Graphical Wiring Editor window
To add a function block drag it from the list and
drop it on this editor.
To add IO first expand the IO block (click the + )
and then expand the Mod to show the IO
channels 1 to 32
Similarly to add a loop first expand the loop block
(click the +) to show loops 1 to 8
Figure 3-6: List of Function Blocks & Graphical Wiring Window
The left window now contains a list of the function blocks available.
42
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Use drag and drop to select the first thermocouple from IOMod 1, the Cool output from IOMod 17 and the
Heat output from IOMod 25 and drop them on the wiring window.
Finally take the first PID block from Loop/Loop 1 and drop it on the wiring window. Note that as each block
is used it greys out on the list.
There should now be 4 blocks on the window. Those blocks are shown with dotted lines, as they have not
been loaded into the Mini8.
First make the following wire connections.
1.
Click on IO.Mod1.PV and move the pointer to Loop 1.MainPV and click again. A dotted
wire will have connected the two together.
2.
Similarly join Loop1.OP.Ch1Out to IOMod 25.PV (heat output)
3.
Enable the Cool output by clicking the select arrow to the top of the loop block:
click here
and select PID output
4.
Loop1.OP.Ch2Out to IOMod 17.PV (cool output)
Figure 3-7: Wired Blocks before download
5.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Right click on the Loop 1 function Block and select ‘Function Block View’. This opens
the Loop parameter list on top of the wiring editor.
Sep-05
43
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Figure 3-8: PID Function Block
This enables the PID function block to be set up to suit the required application. See Chapter 17 for details.
44
6.
Click on the instrument button to download the application:
7.
Once downloaded the dotted lines around the function blocks and the wires will
become solid to show that the application is now in the Mini8. The upper status line
also shows that 3 wires have been used out of those available. Max is 250 but quantity
depends on number of wires ordered (30, 60, 120 or 250).
8.
Put the Mini8 back into Operating mode by clicking the Access button:
9.
The Mini8 will now control the Loop1 as configured.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
3.6
Engineering Handbook
Graphical Wiring Editor
Select
monitor parameter values.
(GWE) to view and edit instrument wiring. You can also add comments and
1.
Drag and drop required function blocks into the graphical wiring from the list in the left pane
2.
Click on parameter to be wired from and drag the wire to the parameter to be wired to (do not hold
mouse button down)
3.
Right click to edit parameter values
4.
Select parameter lists and switch between parameter and wiring editors
5.
Download to instrument when wiring completed
6.
Add comments and notes
7.
Dotted lines around a function block show that the application requires downloading
Add comment
and notes
Blocks ‘clear’
when used
Indicates
execution
order
Right click to
edit parameter
values
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Click this button
to wire unshown
parameters
45
Engineering Handbook
3.6.1
Mini8 Controller
Graphical Wiring Toolbar
Download
Grab & Pan
Pan Drawing
Delete, Undo & Redo
IO Setup
3.6.2
Select
Zoom Drawing
Grid
on/off
Function Block
A Function Block is an algorithm that may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control
strategy. The Graphical Wiring Editor groups the instrument parameters into function blocks. Examples are:
a control loop and a mathematical calculation.
Each function block has inputs and outputs. Any parameter may be wired from, but only parameters that
are alterable may we wired to.
A function block includes any parameters that are needed to configure or operate the algorithm.
3.6.3
Wire
A wire transfers a value from one parameter to another. They are executed by the instrument once per
control cycle.
Wires are made from an output of a function block to an input of a function block. It is possible to create a
wiring loop, in this case there will be a single execution cycle delay at some point in the loop. This point is
shown on the diagram By a || symbol and it is possible to choose where that delay will occur.
3.6.4
Block Execution Order
The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired.
The order is automatically worked out so that the blocks execute on the most recent data.
3.6.5
Using Function Blocks
If a function block is not faded in the tree then it can be
dragged onto the diagram. The block can be dragged around
the diagram using the mouse.
A labelled loop block is shown here. The label at the top is
the name of the block.
When the block type information is alterable click on the box
with the arrow in it on the right to edit that value.
The inputs and outputs that are considered to be of most use
are always shown. In most cases all of these will need to be
wired up for the block to perform a useful task. There are
exceptions to this and the loop is one of those exceptions.
If you wish to wire from a parameter, which is not shown as a
recommended output click on the icon in the bottom right,
and a full list of parameters in the block will be shown, click
on one of these to start a wire.
To start a wire from a recommended output just click on it.
Click the icon in the bottom right hand corner to wire other function block parameters not shown on the
list on the right hand side.
46
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
3.6.5.1
Engineering Handbook
Function Block Context Menu
Right clicking displays the context menu with the following entries.
Function
Block View…
Re-Route
Wires
Re-Route
Input Wires
Re-Route
Output Wires
Show wires
using tags
Hide
Unwired
Connections
Copy
Delete
Undelete
Bring To
Front
Push To Back
Edit
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Properties
Parameter
Help
3.6.6
Brings up an iTools parameter list which shows all the parameters in the function block. If
the block has sub-lists these are shown in tabs
Throw away current wire route and do an auto-route of all wires connected to this block
Only do a re-route on the input wires
Only do a re-route on the output wires
Shows the beginning and end of each wire with a descriptor showing the source or
destination. Used to simplify a diagram with many wires.
Hides function block pins that are not used.
Right click over an input or output and copy will be enabled, this menu item will copy the
iTools "url" of the parameter which can then be pasted into a watch window or OPC Scope
If the block is downloaded mark it for delete, otherwise delete it immediately
This menu entry is enabled if the block is marked for delete and unmarks it and any wires
connected to it for delete
Bring the block to the front of the diagram. Moving a block will also bring it to the front
Push the block to the back of the diagram. Useful of there is something underneath it
This menu entry is enabled when the mouse is over an input or output parameter. When
selected it creates a parameter edit dialog so the value of that parameter can be changed
Selecting this entry brings up the parameter properties window. The parameter properties
window is updated as the mouse is moved over the parameters shown on the function block
Selecting this entry brings up the help window. The help window is updated as the mouse is
moved over the parameters shown on the function block. When the mouse is not over a
parameter name the help for the block is shown
Tooltips
Hovering over different parts of the block will bring up tooltips describing the part of the block beneath the
mouse.
If you hover over the parameter values in the block type information a tooltip showing the parameter
description, its OPC name, and, if downloaded, its value will be shown.
A similar tool-tip will be shown when hovering over inputs and outputs.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
47
Engineering Handbook
3.6.7
Mini8 Controller
Function Block State
The blocks are enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram, wiring it up, and
downloading it to the instrument
When the block is initially dropped onto the diagram it is drawn with dashed lines.
When in this state the parameter list for the block is enabled but the block itself is not
executed by the instrument.
Once the download button is pressed the block is added to the instrument function
block execution list and it is drawn with solid lines.
If a block which has been downloaded is deleted, it is shown on the diagram in a
ghosted form until the download button is pressed.
This is because it and any wires to/from it are still being executed in the instrument.
On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram.
A ghosted block can be undeleted using the context menu.
When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately.
48
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
3.6.8
Using Wires
3.6.8.1
Making A Wire Between Two Blocks
•
•
•
Drag two blocks onto the diagram from the function block tree.
•
Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output or clicking on the icon
at the bottom right corner of the block to bring up the connection dialog. The
connection dialog shows all the connectable parameters for the block, if the block
has sub-lists the parameters are shown in a tree. If you wish to wire a parameter
which is not currently available click the red button at the bottom of the
connection dialog. Recommended connections are shown with a green plug,
other parameters which are available are yellow and if you click the red button
the unavailable parameters are shown red. To dismiss the connection dialog
either press the escape key on the keyboard or click the cross at the bottom left
of the dialog.
•
Once the wire has started the cursor will change and a dotted wire will be drawn
from the output to the current mouse position.
To make the wire either click on a recommended input to make a wire to that parameter or click anywhere
except on a recommended input to bring up the connection dialog. Choose from the connection dialog as
described above.
The wire will now be auto-routed between the blocks.
New wires are shown dotted until they are downloaded
3.6.8.2
Wire Context Menu
The wire block context menu has the following entries on it.
Force Exec Break
If wires form a loop a break point has to be found
where the value which is written to the block input
comes from a block which was last executed during
the previous instrument execute cycle thus
introducing a delay. This option tells the instrument
that if it needs to make a break it should be on this
wire
Re-Route Wire
Throw away wire route and generate an automatic
route from scratch
Use Tags
If a wire is between blocks which are a long way apart,
then, rather than drawing the wire, the name of the wired
to/from parameter can be shown in a tag next to the
block. Draw the wire first then use this menu to toggle
this wire between drawing the whole wire and drawing it
as tags
Find Start
Find End
Delete
Undelete
Bring To Front
Push To Back
Find the source of the selected wire
Find the destination of the selected wire
If the wire is downloaded mark it for delete, otherwise delete it immediately
This menu entry is enabled if the wire is marked for delete and unmarks it for delete
Bring the wire to the front of the diagram. Moving a wire will also bring it to the front
Push the wire to the back of the diagram
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
49
Engineering Handbook
3.6.8.3
Mini8 Controller
Wire Colours
Wires can be the following colours:
Black
Red
Blue
Purple
3.6.8.4
Normal functioning wire.
The wire is connected to an input which is not alterable when the instrument is in operator mode and
so values which travel along that wire will be rejected by the receiving block
The mouse is hovering over the wire, or the block to which it is connected it selected. Useful for tracing
densely packed wires
The mouse is hovering over a 'red' wire
Routing Wires
When a wire is placed it is auto-routed. The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the
two blocks. A wire can be auto-routed again using the context menus or by double clicking the wire.
If you click on a wire segment you can drag it to manually route it. Once you have done this it is marked as
a manually routed wire and will retain it's current shape. If you move the block to which it is connected the
end of the wire will be moved but as much of the path as possible of the wire will be preserved.
If you select a wire by clicking on it, it will be drawn with small boxes on it's corners.
3.6.8.5
Tooltips
Hover the mouse over a wire and a tooltip showing the names of the parameters which are wired and, if
downloaded, their current values will also be shown.
3.6.9
Using Comments
Drag a comment onto the diagram and the comment edit dialog will
appear.
Type in a comment. Use new lines to control the width of the
comment, it is shown on the diagram as typed into the dialog. Click
OK and the comment text will appear on the diagram. There are no
restrictions on the size of a comment. Comments are saved to the
instrument along with the diagram layout information.
Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires. Hover the mouse over the bottom right of the
comment and a chain icon will appear, click on that icon and then on a block or a wire. A dotted wire will
be drawn to the top of the block or the selected wire segment.
3.6.9.1
Comment Context Menu
The comment context menu has the following entries on it.
Edit
Unlink
Delete
Undelete
Bring To Front
Push To Back
50
Open the comment edit dialog to edit this comment
If the comment is linked to a block or wire this will unlink it
If the comment is downloaded mark it for delete, otherwise
delete it immediately
This menu entry is enabled if the comment is marked for
delete and unmarks it for delete
Bring the comment to the front of the diagram. Moving a
comment will also bring it to the front
Push the comment to the back of the diagram. Useful if
there is something underneath it
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
3.6.10 Using Monitors
Drag a monitor onto the diagram and connect it to a block input or output or a wire as described in ‘Using
Comments’.
The current value (updated at the iTools parameter list update rate) will be shown in the monitor. By default
the name of the parameter is shown, double click or use the context menu to not show the parameter
name.
3.6.10.1 Monitor Context Menu
The monitor context menu has the following entries on it.
Show Names
Unlink
Delete
Undelete
Bring To Front
Push To Back
Show parameter names as well as values
If the monitor is linked to a block or wire this will unlink it
If the monitor is downloaded mark it for delete, otherwise delete it immediately
This menu entry is enabled if the monitor is marked for delete and unmarks it for delete
Bring the monitor to the front of the diagram. Moving a monitor will also bring it to the front
Push the monitor to the back of the diagram. Useful if there is something underneath it
3.6.11 Downloading
The wires have to be downloaded to the instrument together. When the wiring editor is opened the current
wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument. No changes are made to the instrument function
block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed.
When a block is dropped on the diagram instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for
that block available. If you make changes and close the editor without saving them there will be a delay
while the editor clears these parameters.
When you download, the wiring is written to the instrument that then calculates the block execution order
and starts executing the blocks. The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into
instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings. When you reopen the editor the diagram
will be shown positioned the same as when you last downloaded.
3.6.12 Selections
Wires are shown with small blocks at their corners when selected. All other items have a dotted line drawn
round them when they are selected.
3.6.12.1 Selecting Individual Items
Clicking on an item on the drawing will select it.
3.6.12.2 Multiple Selection
Control click an unselected item to add it to the selection, doing the same on a selected item unselects it.
Alternatively, hold the mouse down on the background and wipe it to create a rubber band, anything which
isn't a wire inside the rubber band will be selected.
Selecting two function blocks also selects any wires which join them. This means that if you select more
than one function block using the rubber band method any wires between them will also be selected.
Pressing Ctrl-A selects all blocks and wires.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
51
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
3.6.13 Colours
Items on the diagram are coloured as follows:
Red
Blue
Purple
Function blocks, comments and monitors which partially obscure or are partially obscured by other items are
drawn red. If a large function block like the loop is covering a small one like a math2 the loop will be drawn
red to show that it is covering another function block. Wires are drawn red when they are connected to an
input which is currently unalterable. Parameters in function blocks are coloured red if they are unalterable and
the mouse pointer is over them
Function blocks, comments and monitors which are not coloured red are coloured blue when the mouse
pointer is over them. Wires are coloured blue when a block to which the wire is connected is selected or the
mouse pointer is over it. Parameters in function blocks are coloured blue if they are alterable and the mouse
pointer is over them
A wire which is connected to an input which is currently unalterable and a block to which the wire is
connected is selected or the mouse pointer is over it is coloured purple (red + blue)
3.6.14 Diagram Context Menu
The diagram context menu has the following entries on it:Re-Route
Wires
Align Tops
Align Lefts
Space Evenly
Delete
Undelete
Copy Graphic
Save Graphic
52
Throw away current wire route and do an auto-route of all
selected wires. If no wires are selected this is done to all wires
on the diagram
Line up the tops of all the selected items except wires
Line up the left hand side of all the selected items except
wires
This will space the selected items such that their top left
corners are evenly spaced. Select the first item, then select
the rest by control-clicking them in the order you wish them
to be spaced, then choose this menu entry
Marks all selected items for deletion (will be deleted on next
download).
This menu entry is enabled if any of the selected items are
marked for deletion and unmarks them when selected
If there is a selection it is copied to the clipboard as a
Windows metafile, if there is no selection the whole diagram is
copied to the clipboard as a Windows metafile. Paste into
your favourite documentation tool to document your
application. Some programs render metafiles better than
others, the diagram may look messy on screen but it should
print well
Same as Copy Graphic but saves to a metafile rather than
putting it on the clipboard
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
3.6.15 Wiring Floats with Status Information
There is a subset of float values which may be derived from an input which may become faulty for some
reason, e.g. sensor break, overrange, etc. These values have been provided with an associated status which
is automatically inherited through the wiring. The list of parameters which have associated status is as
follows:Block
Loop.Main
Loop.SP
Math2
Input Parameters
PV
In1
In2
Programmer.Setup
Poly
Load
PVIn
In
Lin16
Txdr
IPMonitor
SwitchOver
In
InVal
In
In1
In2
In
In1 to 8
In1 to 8
Total
Mux8
Multi-oper
Lgc2
UsrVal
Humidity
IO.MOD
In1
In2
Val
WetTemp
DryTemp
PsychroConst
Pressure
1.PV to 32.PV
Output Parameters
PV
TrackPV
Out
Out
PVOut1
PVOut2
Out
OutVal
Out
Out
SumOut, MaxOut,
MinOut, AverageOut
Val
RelHumid
DewPoint
1.PV to 32.PV
Parameters appear in both lists where they can be used as inputs or outputs depending on configuration.
The action of the block on detection of a ‘Bad’ input is dependent upon the block. For example, the loop
treats a ‘Bad’ input as a sensor break and takes appropriate action; the Mux8 simply passes on the status
from the selected input to the output, etc.
The Poly, Lin16, SwitchOver, Multi-Operator, Mux8, IO.Mod.n.PV blocks can be configured to act on bad
status in varying ways. The options available are as follows:0: Clip Bad
The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to ‘BAD’, such that any function
block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example, control loop may hold its
output to the current value.
1: Clip Good
The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to ‘GOOD’, such that any
function block using this measurement may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy.
2: Fallback Bad
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value that has been set by the user. In addition the
status of the measured value will be set to ‘BAD’, such that any function block using this measurement can
operate its own fallback strategy. For example, control loop may hold its output to the current value.
3: Fallback Good
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value that has been set by the user. In addition the
status of the measured value will be set to ‘GOOD’, such that any function block using this measurement
may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
53
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
4: Up Scale
The measurement will be forced to adopt its high limit. This is like having a resistive pull up on an input
circuit. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to ‘BAD’, such that any function block using
this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example, the control loop may hold its output
to the current value.
5: Down Scale
The measurement will be forced to adopt its low limit. This is like having a resistive pull down on an input
circuit. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to ‘BAD’, such that any function block using
this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example, the control loop may hold its output
to the current value.
3.6.16 Edge Wires
If the Loop.Main.AutoMan parameter were wired from a logic input in the conventional manner it would be
impossible to put the instrument into manual via communications. Other parameters need to be controlled
by wiring but also need to be able to change under other circumstances, e.g. Alarm Acknowledgements. for
this reason some Boolean parameters are wired in an alternative way. These are listed as follows:SET DOMINANT
When the wired in value is 1 the parameter is always updated. This will have the effect of overriding any
changes through digital communications. When the wired in value changes to 0 the parameter is initially
changed to 0 but is not continuously updated. This permits the value to be changed through digital
communications.
Loop.Main.AutoMan
Programmer.Setup.ProgHold
Access.StandBy
RISING EDGE
When the wired in value changes from 0 to 1, a 1 is written to the parameter. At all other times the wire
does not update the parameter. This type of wiring is used for parameters that start an action and when
once completed the block clears the parameter. When wired to, these parameters can still be operated via
digital communications.
Loop.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Programmer.Setup.ProgRun
Programmer.Setup.AdvSeg
Programmer.Setup.SkipSeg
Txdr.ClearCal
Txdr.StartCal
Txdr.StartHighCal
Txdr.StartTare
IPMonitor.Reset
Alarm.Ack
DigAlarm.Ack
AlmSummary.GlobalAck
Instrument.Diagnostics.
ClearStats
BOTH EDGE
This type of edge is used for parameters which may need to be controlled by wiring or but should also be
able to be controlled through digital communications. If the wired in value changes then the new value is
written to the parameter by the wire. At all other times the parameter is free to be edited through digital
communications.
Loop.SP.RateDisable
54
Loop.OP.RateDisable
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
4. CHAPTER 4 MINI8 OVERVIEW
Input and output parameters of function blocks are wired together using software wiring to form a
particular control strategy within the Mini8. An overview of all the available functions and where to get
more detail is shown below.
Inputs
Mod.1 to Mod.32
Thermocouples
T/C, RTD, mA, mV
Chapter 7.5, 7.6
Setpoint
Loop/SP folder
Folder
Chapter 17.6
Input Linearisation
Lin 16 Folder
Chapter 15
Polynomial
Poly Folder
Chapter 15
FixedIO / IO
Dig Inputs
Logic Input
Chap. 7.8, 7.2
BCD Input
BCD In Folder
Chapter 9
Switchover
SwOver
Folder
Chapter 19
Transducer Scaling
Outputs
Loops 1 to 16
Mod.1 to
Mod.32
Logic Output
Loop Folder
Chapter 7.3
Chapter 17
Programmer
Prog Folder
Application specific
To plant
devices
FixedIO /IO
Relay O/P
Chapter 12
Chap. 7.8, 7.4
Alarm(s)
Alarm Folder
Chapter 8
Digital Alarms
Dig Alm Folder
Chapter 8.3
Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary
Folder
Chapter 8.7
Maths
Math2 & Mux8
Folder
Chapter 20
Maths
Lgc2 & Lgc8
Folder
Chapter 14
Chapter 21
Timer/Clock/
Counter/Totaliser
Current I/p
Chapter 11
IO.Current Monitor
Folder
Field Comms
Chapter 7.9
Chapter 7.7
Humidity Zirconia
Chapter 14
User Values
Mod.25 to
Mod.32
Analogue OP
Chapter 18
Txdr Folder
UsrVal Folder
Current
Transformers
Control Processes
Comms/FC Folder
PC, plc
Chapter 10
Figure 4-1: Controller Example
Mini8 series controllers are supplied unconfigured, and with those blocks included in the order code. Option
EC8 is supplied with function blocks pre-wired to give an 8 loop heat/cool controller suitable for Extrusion.
See data sheet HA028519.
The purpose of the PID control blocks is to reduce the difference between SP and PV (the error signal) to
zero by providing a compensating output to the plant via the output driver blocks.
The timer, programmer and alarms blocks may be made to operate on a number of parameters within the
controller, and digital communications provides an interface to data collection and control.
The controller can be customised to suit a particular process by ‘soft wiring’ between function blocks.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
55
Engineering Handbook
4.1
Mini8 Controller
Complete list of Function Blocks.
The list opposite represents an unconfigured
Mini8 that has been ordered with all features
enabled.
If a particular block or blocks do not appear in
your instrument then the option has not been
ordered. Check the order code of your
instrument and contact Eurotherm.
Examples of features that may not have been
enabled are:
Loops
Programmer
Recipe
Humidity
Once a block is dragged and dropped onto the
graphical wiring window, the block icon in the
block list opposite will be greyed out. At the
same time a folder containing the blocks
parameters will have been created in the
Browse List.
56
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
5. CHAPTER 5 ACCESS FOLDER
Folder: Access
Sub-folder: none
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
ClearMemory
Cold start the
instrument
No
App
LinTables
InitComms
Wires
AllMemory
Programs
CustomerID
Standby
Part No HA028581
Disabled
Mini8 memory reset but comms and linearisation
tables retained
Custom Linearisation tables are deleted
Comms ports reset to default configurations
Clear all wiring
All instrument memory is set to default values
All Programs cleared
Default
Access
Level
No
Conf
Customer Identifier
Reference number for customer use
0
Oper
Set Instrument to
standby
No / Yes
No
Oper
Issue 3
Sep-05
57
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
6. CHAPTER 6 INSTRUMENT FOLDER
6.1
Instrument / Enables
The following table lists the options that can be enabled in the instrument.
Enable flags are one bit for each item – i.e.Bit (0=1) enables item 1, Bit 1 (=2) item 2, Bit(3=4) item 3 and so
on to Bit7(=128) enables Item 8. All 8 items enabled adds up to 255.
☺ Tip:
Features are not normally enabled this way. Dragging and dropping a function block
onto the graphical wiring window automatically sets the required enable flag.
Folder: Instrument
Sub-folder: Enables
Name
Parameter Description
Value
AlarmEn1
Analogue alarms Enable Flags
Alarms 1 to 8
AlarmEn2
Default
Access
Level
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Analogue alarms Enable Flags
Alarms 9 to 16 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
AlarmEn3
Analogue alarms Enable Flags
Alarms 17 to 24 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
AlarmEn4
Analogue alarms Enable Flags
Alarms 25 to 32 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
BCDInEn
BCD switch input Enable Flags
BCD input 1 and 2
0
Conf
CounterEn
Counters Enable Flags
Counters1 and 2 0 (none) to 3 (both)
0
Conf
CurrentMon
Current Monitor Enable Flag
0 = Off 1 = On
0
Conf
DigAlmEn1
Digital alarms Enable Flags
Dig Alarms 1 to 8 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
DigAlmEn2
Digital alarms Enable Flags
Dig Alarms 9 to 16 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
DigAlmEn3
Digital alarms Enable Flags
Dig Alarms 17 to 24 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
DigAlmEn4
Digital alarms Enable Flags
Dig Alarms 25 to 32 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
HumidityEn
Humidity control Enable Flag
0 = off 1 = On
0
Conf
IP Mon En
Input monitor Enable Flags
Input Monitor 1 and 2
0 (none) to 3 (both)
0
Conf
Lgc2 En1
Logic operators Enable Flags
Logic operators 1 to 8 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Lgc2 En2
Logic operators Enable Flags
Logic operators 9 to 16 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Lgc2 En3
Logic operators Enable Flags
Logic operators 17 to 24 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Lgc8 En
Logic 8 operator Enable Flags
8 input Logic operators 1 & 2 0 (none) to 3 (both)
0
Conf
Lin16Pt En
Input linearisation 16 point
Input Linearisation 1 and 2
0
Conf
Load En
Load Enable Flags
Loads 1 to 8
As order
code
Conf
Load En2
Load Enable Flags
Loads 9 to 16
As order
code
Conf
Loop En
Loop Enable Flags
Loops 1 to 8
As order
code
Conf
Loop En2
Loop Enable Flags
Loops 9 to 16
As order
code
Conf
Math2 En1
Analogue (Maths) Operators
Enable Flags
Analogue operators 0 to 8 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Math2 En2
Analogue (Maths) Operators
Enable Flags
Analogue operators 9 to 16 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Math2 En3
Analogue (Maths) Operators
Enable Flags
Analogue operators 17 to 24 0 (none) to 255 (all
8)
0
Conf
0 (none) to 3 (both)
(Only if CT3
module fitted)
58
0 (none) to 3 (both)
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder: Instrument
Sub-folder: Enables
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
MultiOperEn
Analogue Multi- Operator
Enable Flags
Multi-operators 0 to 4 0 (none) to 15 (all 4)
0
Conf
Mux8 En
Multiplexor Enable Flags
8 input multiplexor 1 and 2 0 (none) to 3 (both)
0
Conf
Poly En
Polynomial linearisation block
Enable Flags
Poly Linearisation 1 and 2
0
Conf
Prog En
Programmer Enable Flags
0 = off, 1 to 8
0
Conf
RTClock En
Real time clock Enable Flags
0 = off 1 = On
0
Conf
SwOver En
Switch over block Enable
Flags
0 = off 1 = On
0
Conf
Timer En
Timers Enable Flags
Timers 1 to 4 0 = none to 15 = 4
0
Conf
Totalise En
Totalisers Enable Flags
Totalisers 1 & 2
0
Conf
TrScale En
Transducer scaling Enable
Flags
Transducer scalers 1 and 2
0
Conf
UsrVal En1
User values Enable Flags
User Values 1 to 8 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
UsrVal En2
User values Enable Flags
User Values 9 to 16 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
UsrVal En3
User values Enable Flags
User Values 17 to 24 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
UsrVal En4
User values Enable Flags
User Values 25 to 32 0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0
Conf
Zirconia En
Zirconia Input Functions
0 = off 1 = On
0
Conf
6.2
0 (none) to 3 (both)
0 (none) to 255 (all 8)
0 (none) to 3 (both)
0 (none) to 3 (both)
Instrument Options
Folder: Instrument
Sub-folder: Options
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Units
Units
°C,°F or Kelvin scale for all temperature parameters
DegC
Oper
ProgPVstart
To enable PV start
No, Yes – see section 18
No
Conf
6.3
Instrument / InstInfo
Folder: Instrument
Sub-folder: InstInfo
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
InstType
Default
Access
Level
Instrument Type
MINI8
NONE
Version
Version Identifier
-
NONE
Serial No
Serial Number
Passcode1
Passcode1
0 to 65535
Oper
Passcode2
Passcode2
0 to 65535
Oper
Passcode3
Passcode3
0 to 65535
Oper
CompanyID
CompanyID
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
NONE
1280
NONE
59
Engineering Handbook
6.4
Mini8 Controller
Instrument / Diagnostics
This list provides fault finding diagnostic information as follows:-
Folder:
Instrument
Sub-folder: Diagnostics
Name
Parameter Description
CPUFree
MinCPUFree
CtrlTicks
Max Con Tick
This is the amount of free CPU Time left. It shows the percentage of the tasks ticks that are idle.
A benchmark of the lowest reached value of the CPU free percentage.
This is the number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the control Task.
A benchmark of the maximum number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the
control Task
Resets the instrument performance benchmarks.
The number of errors logged since the last Clear Log. Note: If an error occurs multiple times only the first
occurrence will be logged each event will increment the count.
The first error
0 There is no error
to occur
1 Bad or unrecognised module ident. A module has been inserted and has a bad or unrecognised
The second
ident. Either the module is damaged or the module is unsupported.
error to occur
The third error 3 Factory calibration data bad. The factory calibration data has been read from an I/O module and
has not passed the checksum test. Either the module is damaged or has not been initialised.
to occur
The fourth
4 Module changed for one of a different type. A module has been changed for one of a different
error to occur
type. The configuration may now be incorrect
The fifth error
10 Calibration data write error. An error has occurred when attempting to write calibration data
to occur
back to an I/O module's EE.
The sixth error
11 Calibration data read error. An error occurred when trying to read calibration data back from the
to occur
EE on an I/O module.
The seventh
18 Checksum error. The checksum of the NVol Ram has failed. The NVol is considered corrupt and
error to occur
there the instrument configuration may be incorrect.
The eight
error to occur
20 Resistive identifier error. An error occurred when reading the resistive identifier from an i/o
Clear Stats
ErrCount
Err1
Err2
Err3
Err4
Err5
Err6
Err7
Err8
module. The module may be damaged.
43 Invalid custom linearisation table. One of the custom linearisation tables is invalid. Either it has
failed checksum tests or the table downloaded to the instrument is invalid.
55 The Instrument wiring is either invalid or corrupt.
56 Non-vol write to volatile. An attempt was made to perform a checksummed write to a nonchecksummed area
58 Recipe load failure. The selected recipe failed to load
59 Bad User CT calibration data. Corrupted or invalid user calibration data for the current monitor
60 Bad Factory CT calibration data. Corrupted or invalid factory calibration data for the current
monitor
62 to 65 Slot1 card DFC1 to DFC4 error
66 to 69 Slot2 card DFC1 to DFC4 error
70 to 73 Slot3 card DFC1 to DFC4 error
74 to 77 Slot4 card DFC1 to DFC4 error
Clear Log
UserStringCount
UserStringCharSpace
Segments Left
60
The generic I/O DFC
chip will not
communicate. This
could indicate a build
fault.
Clears the error log entries and count.
Number of User Strings Defined
Space Available For User Strings.
Number of Available Program Segments
Gives the number of unused program segments. Each time a segment is allocated to a program, this value is
reduced by one.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder:
Instrument
Sub-folder: Diagnostics
Name
Parameter Description
CtrlStack
Control Stack Free Space (words)
The number of words of un-used stack for the control task
Comms Stack Free Space (words)
The number of words of un-used stack for the comms task
Idle Stack Free Space (words)
The number of words of un-used stack for the idle (background) task.
Max number of setpoint programmer segments available
Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be configured for a single program
Indicates the amount of control overrun.
Shows type of PSU fitted 0 = Mains 1= 24V dc
Counts the number of times the instrument power has been switched off.
Name for custom linearisation table 1
Name for custom linearisation table 2
Name for custom linearisation table 3
CommsStack
IdleStack
Max segments
MaxSegsPerProg
CntrlOverrun
PSUident
PwrFailCount
Cust1Name
Cust2Name
Cust3Name
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
61
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
7. CHAPTER 7 I/O FOLDER
This lists the modules fitted into the instruments, all the IO channels, the fixed IO and the current
monitoring.
The IO folder lists all the channels of each of the IO boards in the 4 available slots. Each board has up to 8
inputs or outputs making a maximum of 32 channels. The channels are listed under Mod1 to Mod32.
Slot
Channels
1
IO.Mod.1 to IO.Mod.8
2
IO.Mod.9 to IO.Mod.16
3
IO.Mod.17 to IO.Mod.24
4
IO.Mod.25 to IO.Mod.32
Note that the current transformer input, CT3, is not included in this arrangement. There is a separate folder
for current monitoring under IO.CurrentMonitor. If this board is fitted into slot 2 the IO.Mod.9 to Mod.16
would not exist.
7.1
Module ID
Folder: IO
Sub-folder: ModIDs
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Module1
Module1Ident
0 NoMod – No Module
0
Read
Only
0
Read
24 DO8Mod – 8 logic outputs
Module2
Module2Ident
18 RL8Mod – 8 relay outputs
60 DI8 – 8 logic inputs
Only
90 CT3Mod – 3 current transformer inputs
Module3
Module3Ident
131 TC8Mod – 8 thermocouple/mV inputs
0
Read
133 TC4Mod – 4 thermocouple/mV inputs
Only
173 RT4 – 4 PT100 inputs
Module4
Module4Ident
201 AO8Mod – 8 0-20 mA outputs (Slot 4 only)
0
Read
Only
203 AO4Mod – 4 0-20 mA outputs (Slot 4 only)
7.1.1
Modules
The content of the Mod folders depends on the type of IO module fitted in each slot. These will be covered
in the following sections.
62
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.2
Engineering Handbook
Logic Input
Each DI8 card provides 8 logic input channels (voltage controlled) to the system. These can be wired to
provide digital inputs to any function block within the system.
7.2.1
Logic Input Parameters
Folder – IO
Sub-folder Mod.1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Channel Identity
LogicIn
IOType
IO Type
OnOff
On off input
Invert
Sets the sense of the logic input
No
No inversion
Yes
Inverted
On/Off
Value seen at the terminals
Measured Val
Measured Value
Default
Access
Level
Read
Only
Conf
No
Conf
Off
Read
Only
PV
Part No HA028581
Process Variable
Issue 3
Sep-05
On/Off
Value after allowing for
Invert
Off
Read
Only
63
Engineering Handbook
7.3
Mini8 Controller
Logic Output
If a slot is fitted with a DO8 board then 8 channels will be available to be configured and connected to Loop
outputs, alarms or other logic signals.
7.3.1
Logic Out Parameters
Folder – IO
Sub-folder Mod.1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Channel Identity
LogicOut
IOType
IO Type
OnOff
On off output
Time Prop
Time proportioning output
Sets the sense of the logic input or
output
No
No inversion
Yes
Inverted
Action taken by output when
instrument goes into Standby Mode
Off, On
Switches On/Off
Continue
Remains in its last state
Invert
SbyAct
Default
Access
Level
Read
Only
Conf
No
Conf
Off
Conf
Auto
Oper
The next five parameters are only shown when ‘IO Type’ = ‘Time Prop’ outputs
MinOnTime
Minimum output on/off time.
Prevents relays from switching too
rapidly
Auto
0.01 to 150.00
seconds
Auto = 20ms. This is the
fastest allowable update
rate for the output
DisplayHigh
The maximum displayable reading
0.00 to 100.00
100.00
Oper
DisplayLow
The minimum displayable reading
0.00 to 100.00
0.00
Oper
RangeHigh
The maximum (electrical) input/output
level
0.00 to 100.00
100
Oper
RangeLow
The minimum (electrical) input/output
level
0.00 to 100.00
0
Oper
The current value of the output
demand signal to the hardware
including the effect of the Invert
parameter.
0
Off
1
On
This is the desired output value, before
the Invert parameter is applied
0 to 100
Always displayed
MeasuredVal
PV
Read
only
Oper
or
0 to 1 (OnOff)
PV can be wired from the output of a function block. For example if it is used for control it may be wired
from the control loop output (Ch1 Output).
7.3.2
Logic Output Scaling
If the output is configured for time proportioning control, it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level
of PID demand signal can limit the operation of the output value.
By default, the output will be fully off for 0% power demand, fully on for 100% power demand and equal
on/off times at 50% power demand. You can change these limits to suit the process. It is important to note,
however, that these limits are set to safe values for the process. For example, for a heating process it may
be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature. This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0%
power demand which will maintain the output on for a period of time. Care must be taken to ensure that
this minimum on period does not cause the process to overheat.
64
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
If Range Hi is set to a value <100% the time proportioning output will switch at a rate depending on the
value - it will not switch fully on.
Similarly, if Range Lo is set to a value >0% it will not switch fully off.
PID Demand signal
Disp Hi
eg 100%
Disp Lo
eg 0%
Output state
Range Lo = 0%
Output permanently off
Range Hi = 100%
Output permanently on
Figure 7-1: Time Proportioning Output
7.3.3
Example: To Scale a Proportioning Logic Output
Access level must be configuration.
In this example the output will switch on for 8% of the time when the PID demand wired to ‘PV’ signal is at
0%.
Similarly, it will remain on for 90% of the time when the demand signal is at 100%
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
65
Engineering Handbook
7.4
Mini8 Controller
Relay Output
If slot 2 and/or 3 is fitted with a RL8 board then 8 channels will be available to be configured and connected
to Loop outputs, alarms or other logic signals.
7.4.1
Relay Parameters
Folder – IO
Sub-folder Mod.9 to .24
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Channel Identity
Relay
IOType
IO Type
OnOff
On off output
Time Prop
Time proportioning output
Sets the sense of the logic input or
output
No
No inversion
Yes
Inverted
Action taken by output when
instrument goes into Standby Mode
Off, On
Switches On/Off
Continue
Remains in its last state
Invert
SbyAct
Default
Access
Level
Read
Only
Conf
No
Conf
Off
Conf
Auto
Oper
The next five parameters are only shown when ‘IO Type’ = ‘Time Prop’ outputs
MinOnTime
Minimum output on/off time.
Prevents relays from switching too
rapidly
Auto
0.01 to 150.00
seconds
Auto = 220ms. This is the
fastest allowable update
rate for the output
DisplayHigh
The maximum displayable reading
0.00 to 100.00
100.00
Oper
DisplayLow
The minimum displayable reading
0.00 to 100.00
0.00
Oper
RangeHigh
The maximum (electrical) input/output
level
0.00 to 100.00
100
Oper
RangeLow
The minimum (electrical) input/output
level
0.00 to 100.00
0
Oper
The current value of the output
demand signal to the hardware
including the effect of the Invert
parameter.
0
Off
1
On
This is the desired output value, before
the Invert parameter is applied
0 to 100
Always displayed
MeasuredVal
PV
Read
only
Oper
or
0 to 1 (OnOff)
66
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.5
Engineering Handbook
Thermocouple Input
A TC4 offers 4 channels and the TC8 board offers 8 channels which may be configured as thermocouple
inputs or mV inputs.
7.5.1
Thermocouple Input Parameters
Folder – IO
Sub-headers: Mod .1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Ident
Channel Ident
TCinput
IO Type
IO Type
Thermocouple
For direct t/c connection
mV
For mV inputs, usually linear, scaled
to engineering units.
Access
Level
Read
Only
Conf
Lin Type
Input linearisation
see section
7.5.2
Conf
Units
Display units used for units
conversion
see section
7.5.2
Conf
Resolution
Resolution
XXXXX to
X.XXXX
Sets scaling for digital communications
using the SCADA table
CJC Type
To select the cold junction
compensation method
Internal
See description in section 7.3.3. for
further details
0oC
Conf
Internal
Conf
45oC
50oC
External
Off
SBrk Type
Low
Sensor break will be detected when its
impedance is greater than a ‘low’ value
High
Sensor break will be detected when its
impedance is greater than a ‘high’ value
Off
No sensor break
Sets the alarm action when
a sensor break condition is
detected
ManLatch
Manual latching
NonLatch
No latching
Off
No sensor break alarm
Sensor Break alarm
acknowledge
No
DisplayHigh
The maximum display value
in engineering units
-99999 to 99999
DisplayLow
The minimum display value
in engineering units
-99999 to 99999
RangeHigh
The maximum (electrical)
input mV
RangeLow to 70
RangeLow
The minimum (electrical)
input mV
-70 to RangeHigh
Fallback
Fallback Strategy
Downscale
Meas Value = Input range lo - 5%
See also section 7.5..5.
Upscale
Meas Value = Input range Hi + 5%
Fall Good
Meas Value = Fallback PV
Fall Bad
Meas Value = Fallback PV
SBrk Alarm
AlarmAck
Part No HA028581
Sensor break type
Issue 3
Sep-05
Conf
Oper
see also the alarm
Chapter 8 Alarms
No
Oper
100
Oper
For IO Type mV only
0
Oper
Limits apply to Linear and SqRoot
linearisation.
70
Oper
0
Oper
Yes
See 7.3.7
Conf
67
Engineering Handbook
Folder – IO
Name
Fallback PV
Mini8 Controller
Sub-headers: Mod .1 to .32
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Clip Good
Meas Value = Input range Hi/lo +/- 5%
Clip Bad
Meas Value = Input range Hi/lo +/- 5%
Fallback value
Instrument range
Access
Level
Conf
See also section 7.5.5.
Filter Time
Constant
Input filter time.
Off to 500:00 (hhh:mm)
1s600ms
Oper
An input filter provides damping of the
input signal. This may be necessary to
prevent the effects of excessive noise on
the PV input.
s:ms to hhh:mm
Measured Val
The current electrical value of the PV
input
PV
The current value of the PV input after
linearisation
Instrument range
LoPoint
Low Point
Lower cal point (See 7.5.6)
0.0
Oper
LoOffset
Low Offset
Offset at lower point
0.0
Oper
HiPoint
High Point
Higher cal point
0.0
Oper
HiOffset
High Offset
Offset at Higher point
0.0
Oper
Offset
Used to add a constant offset to the PV
Instrument range
0.0
Oper
CJC Temp
Reads the temperature of the rear
terminals at the thermocouple connection
R/O
SBrk Value
Sensor break Value
R/O
R/O
R/O
see section 75.7
Used for diagnostics only, and displays
the sensor break trip value
Cal State
Calibration State.
Calibration of the PV Input
is described in Chapter 22.3
Idle
Status
PV Status
0 - OK
Normal operation
The current status of the
PV.
1 - Startup
Initial startup mode
2 - SensorBreak
Input in sensor break
4 – Out of range
PV outside operating limits
6 - Saturated
Saturated input
8 – Not Calibrated
Uncalibrated channel
25 – No Module
No Module
SbrkOutput
68
Sensor Break Output
Conf
R/O
Off /On
R/O
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.5.2
Engineering Handbook
Linearisation Types and Ranges
Input Type
J
K
L
R
B
N
T
S
PL2
C
Linear
SqRoot
Custom
7.5.3
Thermocouple type J
Thermocouple type K
Thermocouple type L
Thermocouple type R
Thermocouple type B
Thermocouple type N
Thermocouple type T
Thermocouple type S
Thermocouple Platinel II
Custom
mV linear input
Square root
Customised linearisation tables
Min Range
Max Range
Units
Min Range
-210
-200
-200
-50
0
-200
-200
-50
0
1200
1372
900
1700
1820
1300
400
1768
1369
o
C
C
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
-238
-238
-238
-58
32
-238
-238
-58
32
-70
70
mV
o
Max
Range
2192
2498
1652
3124
3308
2372
752
3214
2466
F
F
oF
oF
oF
oF
oF
oF
oF
o
o
CJC Type
A thermocouple measures the temperature difference between the measuring
junction and the reference junction. The reference junction, therefore, must
either be held at a fixed known temperature or accurate compensation be used
for any temperature variations of the junction.
7.5.3.1
Units
Measuring
junction
Internal Compensation
The controller is provided with a temperature sensing device which senses the
temperature at the point where the thermocouple is joined to the copper wiring
of the instrument and applies a corrective signal.
Reference
junction
Where very high accuracy is needed and to accommodate multi-thermocouple installations, larger reference
units are used which can achieve an accuracy of ±0.1°C or better. These units also allow the cables to the
instrumentation to be run in copper. The reference units are contained basically under three techniques,
Ice-Point, Hot Box and Isothermal.
7.5.3.2
The Ice-Point
There are usually two methods of feeding the EMF from the thermocouple to the measuring
instrumentation via the ice-point reference, the bellows type and the temperature sensor type.
The bellows type utilises the precise volumetric increase which occurs when a known quantity of ultra pure
water changes state from liquid to solid. A precision cylinder actuates expansion bellows which control
power to a thermoelectric cooling device. The temperature sensor type uses a metal block of high thermal
conductance and mass, which is thermally insulated from ambient temperatures. The block temperature is
lowered to 0°C by a cooling element, and maintained there by a temperature sensing device.
Special thermometers are obtainable for checking the 0°C reference units and alarm circuits that detect any
movement from the zero position can be fitted.
7.5.3.3
The Hot Box
Thermocouples are calibrated in terms of EMF generated by the measuring junctions relative to the
reference junction at 0°C. Different reference points can produce different characteristics of
thermocouples, therefore referencing at another temperature does present problems. However, the ability
of the hot box to work at very high ambient temperatures, plus a good reliability factor has led to an
increase in its usage. The unit can consist of a thermally insulated solid aluminium block in which the
reference junctions are embedded.
The block temperature is controlled by a closed loop system, and a heater is used as a booster when initially
switching on. This booster drops out before the reference temperature, usually between 55°C and 65°C, is
reached, but the stability of the hot box temperature is now important. Measurements cannot be taken
until the hot box reaches the correct temperature.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
69
Engineering Handbook
7.5.3.4
Mini8 Controller
Isothermal Systems
The thermocouple junctions being referenced are contained in a block which is heavily thermally insulated.
The junctions are allowed to follow the mean ambient temperature, which varies slowly. This variation is
accurately sensed by electronic means, and a signal is produced for the associated instrumentation. The
high reliability factor of this method has favoured its use for long term monitoring.
7.5.3.5
CJC Options in Mini8 Series
0 – Internal
1 – 0C
2 – 45C
3 – 50C
4 – External
5 – Off
7.5.4
CJC measurement at instrument terminals
CJC based on external junctions kept at 0C (Ice Point)
CJC based on external junctions kept at 45C (Hot Box)
CJC based on external junctions kept at 50C (Hot Box)
CJC based on independent external measurement
CJC switched off
Sensor Break Value
The controller continuously monitors the impedance of a transducer or sensor connected to any analogue
input. This impedance, expressed as a % of the impedance which causes the sensor break flag to trip, is a
parameter called ‘SBrkValue’.
The table below shows the typical impedance which causes sensor break to trip for various types of input
and high and low SBrk Impedance readings. The impedance values are only approximate (±25%) as they are
not factory calibrated.
7.5.5
TC4/TC8 Input
SBrk Impedance – High
~ 12KΩ
Range -77 to +77mV
SBrk Impedance – Low
~ 3KΩ
Fallback
A Fallback strategy may be used to configure the default value for the PV in case of an error condition. The
error may be due an out of range value, a sensor break, lack of calibration or a saturated input.
The Status parameter would indicate the error condition and could be used to diagnose the problem.
Fallback has several modes and may be associated with the Fallback PV parameter
The Fallback PV may be used to configure the value assigned to the PV in case of an error condition. The
Fallback parameter should be configured accordingly.
The fallback parameter may be configured so as to force a Good or Bad status when in operation. This in
turn allows the user to choose to override or allow error conditions to affect the process.
70
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.5.6
Engineering Handbook
User Calibration (Two Point)
All ranges of the controller have been calibrated against traceable reference standards. However in a
particular application it may be necessary to adjust the displayed reading to overcome other effects within
the process. A two point calibration is offered allowing offset and slope adjustment. This is most useful
where the setpoints used in a process cover a wide range. The Low and High points should be set on or near
the extremities of the range.
Display
Reading
High offset
(e.g. 2.9°)
Factory
calibration
Low offset
(e.g. 1.1°)
Low point
(e.g. 50°)
7.5.7
High point
(e.g. 500°)
Measured Reading
PV Offset (Single Point)
All ranges of the controller have been calibrated against traceable reference standards. This means that if
the input type is changed it is not necessary to calibrate the controller. There may be occasions, however,
when you wish to apply an offset to the standard calibration to take account of known errors within the
process, for example, a known sensor error or a known error due to the positioning of the sensor. In these
instances it is not advisable to change the reference calibration, but to apply a user defined offset.
A single point offset is most useful where the process setpoint remains at nominally the same value.
PV Offset applies a single offset over the full display range of the controller and can be adjusted in Operator
Mode. It has the effect of moving the curve up a down about a central point as shown in the example
below:Display
Reading
Factory
calibration
Fixed offset
(e.g. 2.1°)
7.5.7.1
Example: To Apply an Offset:-
Measured Reading
•
Connect the input of the controller to the source device which you wish to calibrate to
•
Set the source to the desired calibration value
•
The controller will show the current measurement of the value
•
If the value is correct, the controller is correctly calibrated and no further action is necessary. If you
wish to offset the reading use the Offset parameter where
Corrected value (PV) = input value + Offset.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
71
Engineering Handbook
7.5.8
Mini8 Controller
Using TC4 or TC8 channel as a mV input
Example – a pressure sensor provides 0 to 33mV for 0 to 200 bar.
1.
Set IO type as mV
2.
Set the Linearisation Type as Linear
3.
Set DisplayHigh to 200 (bar)
4.
Set DisplayLow to 0 (bar)
5.
Set RangeHigh to 33 mV
6.
Set RangeLow to 0 mV
Note maximum input range is ± 70 mV
72
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.6
Engineering Handbook
Resistance Thermometer Input
The RT4 module offers 4 resistance inputs which can be linear or PT100.
7.6.1
RT Input Parameters
Folder – IO
Sub-headers: Mod .1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Channel Ident
RTinput
IO Type
IO Type
RTD2
RTD3
Default
Access
Level
Read
Only
For 2 wire, 3 wire or 4 wire
connections.
Conf
RTD4
Lin Type
Linearisation Type
See section
7.6.2
Conf
Units
Display units used for units
conversion
See section
7.6.2
Conf
Resolution
Resolution
XXXXX to
X.XXXX
Sets scaling for digital communications
using the SCADA table
Conf
SBrk Type
Sensor break type
Low
Sensor break will be detected when its
impedance is greater than a ‘low’ value
Conf
High
Sensor break will be detected when its
impedance is greater than a ‘high’ value
SBrk Alarm
AlarmAck
Fallback
Off
No sensor break
Sets the alarm action when
a sensor break condition is
detected
ManLatch
Manual latching
NonLatch
No latching
Off
No sensor break alarm
Sensor Break alarm
acknowledge
No
Fallback Strategy
Downscale
Meas Value = Input range lo - 5%
See also section 7.4..5.
Upscale
Meas Value = Input range Hi + 5%
Fall Good
Meas Value = Fallback PV
Fall Bad
Meas Value = Fallback PV
Clip Good
Meas Value = Input range Hi/lo +/- 5%
No
Oper
Yes
Clip Bad
Fallback PV
Oper
see also the alarm
Chapter 8 Alarms
Fallback value
Conf
Meas Value = Input range Hi/lo +/- 5%
Instrument range
Conf
See also section 7.4.5.
Filter Time
Constant
Input filter time.
Off to 500:00 (hhh:mm)
An input filter provides damping of the
input signal. This may be necessary to
prevent the effects of excessive noise on
the PV input.
s:ms to hhh:mm
Measured Val
The current electrical value of the PV
input
PV
The current value of the PV input after
linearisation
Instrument range
LoPoint
Low Point
Lower cal point (See 7.5.6)
0.0
Oper
LoOffset
Low Offset
Offset at lower cal point
0.0
Oper
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
1s600ms
Oper
R/O
R/O
73
Engineering Handbook
Folder – IO
Mini8 Controller
Sub-headers: Mod .1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
HiPoint
High Point
HiOffset
Offset
Value
Default
Access
Level
Higher cal point
0.0
Oper
High Offset
Offset at Higher cal point
0.0
Oper
Used to add a constant offset to the PV
Instrument range
0.0
Oper
see section 7.5.7
SBrk Value
Sensor break Value
R/O
Used for diagnostics only, and displays
the sensor break trip value
Cal State
Status
SbrkOutput
7.6.2
Calibration State.
Calibration of the PV Input
is described in Chapter 22.3
Idle
PV Status
0 - OK
Normal operation
The current status of the
PV.
1 - Startup
Initial startup mode
2 - SensorBreak
Input in sensor break
4 – Out of range
PV outside operating limits
6 - Saturated
Saturated input
8 – Not Calibrated
Uncalibrated channel
25 – No Module
No Module
Sensor Break Output
Conf
Off /On
R/O
Linearisation Types and Ranges
Input Type
Min Range
Max Range
Units
PT100
100 ohm platinum bulb
-200
850
o
Linear
Linear
50
450
ohms
7.6.3
R/O
C
Min Range
Max
Range
Units
-328
1562
o
F
Using RT4 as mA input
Wire the input with a 2.49 ohm resistor as shown in 1.4.11.
The PV is mapped from the input
using User Cal – see 7.5.6
Approximate Values for 4-20mA
input with 2.49 ohm resistor.
PV range
LoPoint
LoOffset
HiPoint
HiOffset
4 to 20
35.4
-31.4
169.5
-149.5
0 to 100
35.4
-35.4
169.5
-69.5
For best accuracy the input should
be calibrated against a reference.
Resistor values up to 5 ohms may
be used.
74
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.7
Engineering Handbook
Analogue Output
The AO4 offers 4 channels and the AO8 module 8 channels which maybe configured as mA outputs. An AO4
or AO8 may only be fitted in Slot 4.
Folder – IO
Sub-folder: Mod.25 to Mod.32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Channel ident
mAout
IO Type
mA
Resolution
To configure the output drive
signal
Display resolution
Disp Hi
Display high reading
Disp Lo
Display low reading
Range Hi
Electrical high input level
Range Lo
Electrical low input level
Meas Value
The current output value
Default
milli-amps dc
XXXXX to
Determines scaling for SCADA
X.XXXX
communications
-99999 to 99999 decimal points depend on resolution
0 to 20
Conf
Conf
100
Oper
0
Oper
20
Oper
4
Oper
R/O
PV
Oper
Status
7.7.1
Access
Level
R/O
PV Status
0 - OK
Normal operation
The current status of the PV.
1 - Startup
Initial startup mode
2 - SensorBreak
Input in sensor break
4 – Out of range
PV outside operating limits
6 - Saturated
Saturated input
8 – Not Calibrated
Uncalibrated channel
25 – No Module
No Module
R/O
Example – 4 to 20mA Analogue Output
In this example 0% (=Display Low) to 100% (=Display High) from a Loop PID Output is wired to this output
channel PV input which will give a 4mA (=Range Low) to 20mA (=Range High) control signal.
Here the PID demand is 50% giving a MeasuredVal output of 12mA.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
75
Engineering Handbook
7.8
Mini8 Controller
Fixed IO
There are two digital inputs, designated D1 and D2.
Folder: IO
Sub-folder: Fixed IO.D1 and .D2
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Ident
Channel Ident
LogicIn
LogicIn
Read
Only
IO Type
IO Type
Input
Input
Read
Invert
Invert
No/Yes – input sense is inverted
No
Conf
Measured Val
Measured Value
On/Off
Off
Read
Only
Value seen at the terminals
Only
PV
Process Variable
On/Off
Value after allowing for Invert
Off
Read
Only
There are two fixed relay outputs, designated A and B
Folder: IO
Sub-folder: Fixed IO.A and .B
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Ident
Channel Ident
Relay
Relay
Read
Only
IO Type
IO Type
OnOff
OnOff
Read
Only
Invert
Invert
No/Yes = output sense is inverted.
No
Conf
Measured Val
Measured Value
On/Off
Value seen at the terminals
after allowing for Invert.
Off
Read
Off
PV
Process Variable
On/Off
Requested output before
Invert
SbyAct
Action taken by output when
instrument goes into Standby Mode
Off, On
Switches On/Off
Continue
Remains in its last state
76
Part No HA028581
Only
Oper
Off
Issue 3
Sep-05
Conf
Mini8 Controller
7.9
Engineering Handbook
Current Monitor
The Mini8, with a CT3 card, has the capability of detecting failures of up to 16 heater loads by measuring the
current flowing through them via 3 current transformer inputs. The failures that can be detected are:
SSR Fault
If current is detected flowing through the heater when the controller is requesting it to be off then this
indicates that the SSR has a short circuit fault. If current is not detected when the controller is requesting
the heater to be on it indicates that the SSR has an open circuit fault.
Partial Load Fault (PLF)
If less current is detected flowing through the heater than the PLF threshold, which has been set for that
channel, then this indicates that the heater has a fault; in applications that use multiple heater elements in
parallel then it indicates that one or more of the elements has an open circuit fault.
Over Current Fault (OCF)
If more current is detected flowing through the heater than the OCF threshold then this indicates that the
heater has a fault; in applications that use multiple heater elements in parallel then it indicates that one or
more of the elements has lower than expected resistance value.
Heater failures are indicated via individual load status parameters and via four status words. In addition, a
global alarm parameter will indicate when a new CT alarm has been detected, which, will also be registered
in the alarm log.
7.9.1.1
Current Measurement
Individual LoadCurrent parameters indicate the current measured for each heater. The Current Monitor
function block utilises a cycling algorithm to measure the current flowing through one heater per
measurement interval (default 10s, user alterable). Compensation within the control loop minimises the
disturbance to the PV when current through a load is being measured.
The interval between successive measurements is dependent upon the average output power required to
maintain SP. The recommended absolute minimum interval can be calculated as follows:
Minimum interval (s) > 0.25 * (100/average output power to maintain SP).
For example, if average output power to maintain SP is 10%, using the above rule, the recommended
minimum interval is 2.5 seconds. The interval may need to be adjusted depending upon the response of the
heaters being used.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
77
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
7.9.2
Single Phase Configurations
7.9.2.1
Single SSR triggering
With this configuration, failures of individual heater loads can be detected. For example, if the current
detected flowing through Heater 3 is less than its PLF threshold then this will be indicated as Load3PLF
Example1 – Using one CT input
L
N
CT1
H1
OP1
H2
OP2
H3
OP3
H4
OP4
H5
MINI8
OP5
All time proportioning outputs assigned to
a single CT input
H6
OP6
Note: Maximum of 6 Heaters can be connected to one CT input
Example2 – Using three CT inputs
L
CT1
CT1
CT1
H1
OP1
H2
OP2
H3
OP3
H4
MINI8
OP4
This configuration also
identifies individual heater
failures
H5
OP5
H6
OP6
78
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.9.2.2
Engineering Handbook
Multiple SSR triggering
With this configuration, failure of a set of heater loads can be detected. For example, if the current
detected flowing through Heater Set 1 is less than Load1’s PLF threshold then this will be indicated as
Load1PLF. Further investigation will then be required to determine which heater within Set 1 has failed.
L
N
CT1
H1
OP1
H2
Heater Set 1
H3
H4
MINI8
OP2
H5
Heater Set 2
H6
7.9.2.3
Split Time Proportioning Outputs
This is where a single power demand is split and applied to two time proportioning outputs, that have been
scaled, allowing the loads to switch on incrementally as the output power increases. For example, Heater1
will deliver any demand from 0-50%, and Heater2 will deliver any demand from 50-100% (with Heater1 fully
on).
CurrentMonitor
L
CT1
Mod.17
H1
50
PV
0
Loop
Pre-Scaling
0
100
Ch1Out
Mod.18
100
H2
PV
50
MINI8
Pre-Scaling
0
100
As the Mini8 has the capability of detecting faults with up to 16 heater loads it can handle this type of
application even if all 8 loops have split time proportioning outputs.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
79
Engineering Handbook
7.9.3
Mini8 Controller
Three Phase Configuration
Configuration for Three Phase supply applications is similar to that for Single phase using three CT inputs.
Ph1
Ph2
Ph3
CT1
All currents passed
through an individual CT
must come from the same
phase
CT2
CT3
H1
OP1
H2
OP2
H3
OP3
MINI8
N/Ph2
OP4
OP5
OP6
Star with neutral or delta
connection is possible
H4
H5
N/Ph3
H6
N/Ph1
Note: Maximum of 6 Heaters can be connected to one CT input
80
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.9.4
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Configuration
If Current Monitor is enabled in the folder Instrument/Options/Current Monitor then the current monitor
configuration folder appears as a subfolder in IO.
Folder: IO
Sub-folder: CurrentMonitor/Config
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Commission
Commission CT
No
Oper
CommissionStatus
Commission Status
No
See Chapter 7.9.5
Auto
Manual
Accept
Abort
Not commissioned
Not commissioned
Commissioning in progress
Commissioning
There are no DO8/RL8 cards
NoDO8orRL8cards
installed in the instrument.
The digital outputs are either not
NoloopTPouts
configured as time proportioning or
are not wired from loop heater
channels.
Either a SSR short circuit or open
SSRfault
circuit fault is present.
More than 6 heaters have been
MaxLoadsCT1/2/3
connected to CT input 1or 2 or 3.
Commissioning failed
NotAccepted
Successfully auto commissioned
Passed
Configured manually
ManuallyConfigured
1s to 1m
Interval
Measurement
Interval
Inhibit
Inhibit
MaxLeakPh1
Max Leakage
Current Phase 1
MaxLeakPh2
0
Read
Only
10s
Oper
No – current is measured
Yes –current measurement is inhibited
0.25 to 1 amp
No
Oper
0.25
Oper
Max Leakage
Current Phase 2
0.25 to 1 amp
0.25
Oper
MaxLeakPh3
Max Leakage
Current Phase 3
0.25 to 1 amp
0.25
Oper
CT1Range*
CT input 1 range
10 to 1000 amps (Ratio to 50mA)
10
Oper
CT2Range*
CT input 2 range
10 to 1000 amps (Ratio to 50mA)
10
Oper
CT3Range*
CT input 3 range
10 to 1000 amps (Ratio to 50mA)
10
Oper
CalibrateCT1
Calibrate CT1
Idle
Oper
CalibrateCT2
Calibrate CT2
Idle
See Chapter 7.6.6
0mA
-70mA
LoadFactorCal
SaveUserCal
As CT1
Idle
Oper
Calibrate CT3
As CT1
Idle
Oper
CalibrateCT3
•
The current rating of the CT used for each of the CT input channels should cover only the single largest
load current proposed for its group of heaters. e.g. if CT1 has heaters of 15A, 15A & 25A it would need a
CT capable of at least 25A.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
81
Engineering Handbook
7.9.5
Commissioning
7.9.5.1
Auto Commission
Mini8 Controller
Auto commissioning of the Current Monitor is a feature that automatically detects which time proportioning
outputs drive individual heaters (or heater sets), detects which CT input individual heaters are associated
with and determines the Partial Load and Over Current thresholds using a 1:8 ratio. If auto commissioning
fails, a status parameter indicates the reason why.
Note: In order for the auto commissioning to operate successfully the process must be enabled for full
operation of the heating circuit with the digital outputs configured as Time Proportioning and ‘soft’ wired to
the appropriate loop heater channels. During auto commissioning digital outputs will switch on and off.
.How to Auto Commission
1.
Put instrument into Operator Mode.
2.
Set Commission to Auto and CommissionStatus will display ‘Commissioning’.
3.
If successful, CommissionStatus will display Passed and configured load parameters will become
available. If unsuccessful, CommissionStatus displays the offending fault.
If unsuccessful, CommissionStatus displays the offending fault:
82
NoDO8orRL8Cards
Indicates that there are no DO8 or RL8 cards installed in the instrument.
NoLoopTPOuts
Indicates that the digital outputs are either not configured as time
proportioning or are not wired from loop heater channels.
SSRFault
Indicates that either a SSR short circuit or open circuit fault is present.
MaxLoadsCT1
Indicates that more than 6 heaters have been connected to CT input 1
(or 2,3)
(or 2,3)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
7.9.5.2
Engineering Handbook
Manual Commission
Manual Commissioning is also available and is intended for those users who want to commission the Current
Monitor off-line or do not want to accept auto commissioned settings.
How to Manual Commission
1.
Set Commission to Manual. CommissionStatus will display Commissioning and Load1 configuration
parameters will become available
2.
Set Load1DrivenBy to the IO Module that is connected to the heater load.
3.
Set Load1CTInput to the CT input number that is connected to the heater load.
4.
Set Load1PLFthreshold and Load1OCFthreshold to appropriate values for the heater load.
5.
Repeat for other loads.
6.
To use the commissioned settings set Commission to ‘Accept’. CommissionStatus will display
ManuallyConfigured.
7.
To stop manual commissioning set Commission to ‘Abort’. CommissionStatus will display
NotCommissioned.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
83
Engineering Handbook
7.9.6
Mini8 Controller
Calibration
A Mini8 supplied from factory with the CT3 card already installed the CT inputs will have been factory
calibrated. If the CT3 card is installed at a later date then default calibration values are automatically loaded
into the instrument. However, three calibration parameters, one for each CT input, are provided to allow
the inputs to be calibrated in the field.
Note: DC Current Source, capable of outputting a –70mA signal, is required to calibrate the inputs.
The 3 CT inputs are calibrated individually.
How to Calibrate
1.
Apply the stimulus (0mA or –70mA) from the DC current source to the CT input to be calibrated.
2.
Set CalibrateCT1, to reflect the stimulus being applied to the input.
3.
CalibrateCT1 displays ‘Confirm’. Select ‘Go’ to proceed with the calibration process.
4.
After selecting Go, CalibrateCT1 displays ‘Calibrating’.
5.
If calibration was successful, CalibrateCT1 displays ‘Passed’. Select ‘Accept’ to keep the calibration
values.
6.
If calibration was unsuccessful, CalibrateCT1 displays ‘Failed’. Select ‘Abort’ to reject the
calibration.
7.
Select ‘SaveUserCal’ to save the calibration values into non-volatile memory.
8.
Select ‘LoadFactCal’ to restore calibration values to the factory calibrated or default settings.
9.
Note: It is possible to stop the calibration process at anytime by selecting ‘Abort’.
Follow the same procedure for CT2 and CT3.
84
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
8. CHAPTER 8 ALARMS
Alarms are used to alert the system when a pre-set level has been exceeded or a particular condition has
changed state. As the Mini8 has no display to show alarms the alarm flags are all available over
communications in status words See Alarm Summary (Section 8.7) . They may also be wired directly or via
logic to an output such as a relay.
Alarms can be divided into two main types. These are:Analogue alarms - operate by monitoring an analogue variable such as the process variable and comparing
it with a set threshold.
Digital alarms – operate when the state of a boolean variable changes, for example, sensor break.
Number of Alarms - up to 32 analogue and 32 digital alarms may be configured.
8.1
Further Alarm Definitions
Hysteresis
is the difference between the point at which the alarm switches ‘ON’ and the point at which
it switches ‘OFF’. It is used to provide a definite indication of the alarm condition and to
prevent alarm relay chatter.
Latch
used to hold the alarm condition once an alarm has been detected. It may be configured
as:None
Non
latching
A non latching alarm will reset itself when the alarm condition is
removed
Auto
Automatic
An auto latching alarm requires acknowledgement before it is
reset. The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the condition
causing the alarm is removed.
Manual
Manual
The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is
removed AND the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement
can only occur AFTER the condition causing the alarm is removed.
Event
Event
Alarm output will activate.
Block
The alarm may be masked during start up. Blocking prevents the alarm from being activated
until the process has first achieved a safe state. It is used, for example, to ignore start up
conditions which are not representative of running conditions. A blocking alarm is reinitiated after a setpoint change.
Delay
A short time can be set for each alarm which prevents the output from going into the alarm
state. The alarm is still detected as soon as it occurs, but if it cancels before the end of the
delay period then no output is triggered. The timer for the delay is then reset. It is also
reset if an alarm is changed from being inhibited to uninhibited.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
85
Engineering Handbook
8.2
Mini8 Controller
Analogue Alarms
Analogue alarms operate on variables such as PV, output levels, etc. They can be soft wired to these
variables to suit the process.
8.2.1
Analogue Alarm Types
Absolute High - an alarm occurs when the PV exceeds a set high threshold.
Absolute Low - an alarm occurs when the PV exceeds a set low threshold.
Deviation High - an alarm occurs when the PV is higher than the setpoint by a set threshold
Deviation Low - an alarm occurs when the PV is lower than the setpoint by a set threshold
Deviation Band - an alarm occurs when the PV is higher or lower than the setpoint by a set threshold
These are shown graphically below for changes in PV plotted against time. (Hysteresis set to zero)
Alarm Type
PV
Abs High
Process Variable (PV)
Dev High
Dev Bnd
Setpoint (SP)
Dev Low
Abs Low
Output State
Abs Low
Dev Low
Time
On
On
Dev High
Dev Bnd
Abs High
86
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
8.3
Engineering Handbook
Digital Alarms
Digital alarms operate on Boolean variables. They can be soft wired to any suitable Boolean parameter such
as digital inputs or outputs.
8.3.1
Digital Alarm Types
Pos Edge
Neg Edge
Edge
High
Low
8.4
The alarm will trigger when the input changes from a low to high condition
The alarm will trigger when the input changes from a high to low condition
The alarm will trigger on any change of state of the input signal
The alarm will trigger when the input signal is high
The alarm will trigger when the input signal is low
Alarm Outputs
Alarms can operate a specific output (usually a relay). Any individual alarm can operate an individual output
or any combination of alarms can operate an individual output. They are wired as required in configuration
level.
Each source may be
chosen from:Analogue Alarms 1 to 32
Digital Alarms 1 to 32
Any alarms
New alarm/ New CT Alarm
Loop break alarms
8.4.1
No
OR
Invert
Output
Yes
How Alarms are Indicated
Alarm states are all embedded in 16 bit status words. See Alarm Summary in Section 8.7
8.4.2
To Acknowledge an Alarm
Set the appropriate alarm acknowledge flag to acknowledge that particular alarm. Alternatively the
GlobalAck in the AlmSummary folder can be used to acknowledge ALL alarms that require acknowledging in
the instrument.
The action, which now takes place, will depend on the type of latching, which has been configured
8.4.2.1
Non Latched Alarms
8.4.2.2
If the alarm condition is present when the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm output will be continuously
active. This state will continue for as long as the alarm condition remains. When the alarm condition clears
the output will go off.
If the alarm condition clears before it is acknowledged the alarm output goes off as soon as the condition
disappears.
Automatic Latched Alarms
8.4.2.3
The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged.
The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the condition causing the alarm is removed.
Manual Latched Alarms
The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged.
The acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the condition causing the alarm is removed.
8.5
Alarm Parameters
Four groups of eight analogue alarms are available. The following table shows the parameters to set up and
configure alarms.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
87
Engineering Handbook
Folder: Alarm
Mini8 Controller
Sub-folders: 1 to 32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Type
Selects the type of alarm
Conf
In
This is the parameter that will be monitored and
compared against the threshold value to see if an
alarm condition has occurred
The reference value is used in deviation alarms and
the threshold is measured from this reference and not
from its absolute value.
The threshold is the value that the input is compared
against to determine if an alarm has occurred.
The output indicates whether the alarm is on or off
depending on:
the alarm condition, latching and acknowledge,
inhibiting and blocking.
Inhibit is an input to the Alarm function. It allows the
alarm to be switched OFF. Typically the Inhibit is
connected to a digital input or event so that during a
phase of the process alarms do not activate. For
Example, if the door to a furnace is opened the alarms
may be inhibited until the door is closed again.
Hysteresis is used to prevent signal noise from causing
the Alarm output to oscillate. Alarm outputs become
active as soon as the PV exceeds the Alarm Setpoint.
They return to inactive after the PV has returned to
the safe region by more than the hysterisis value.
Typically the Alarm hysterisis is set to a value that is
greater than the oscillations seen on the instrument
display
Determine the type of latching the alarm will use, if
any. Auto latching allows acknowledgement while the
alarm condition is still active, whereas manual latching
needs the condition to revert back to safe before the
alarm can be acknowledged.
See also the description at the beginning of this
chapter
Used in conjunction with the latching parameter. It is
set when the user responds to an alarm.
Alarm Blocking is used to prevent alarms from
activating during start-up. In some applications, the
measurement at start-up is in an alarm condition until
the system has come under control. Blocking causes
the alarms to be ignored until the system is under
control (in the safe state), after this any deviations
trigger the alarm
This is a small delay between sensing the alarm
condition and displaying it. If in the time between the
two, the alarm goes safe, then no alarm is shown and
the delay timer is reset. It can be used on systems
that are prone to noise.
Alarm not configured
None
Full Scale High
Abs Hi
Full Scale Low
Abs Lo
Deviation High
Dev Hi
Dev Lo Deviation Low
Deviation band
Dv
Bnd
Instrument range
Instrument range
Oper
Instrument range
Oper
Off
On
Alarm output
deactivated
Alarm output activated
R/O
No
Yes
Alarm not inhibited
Inhibit function active
Oper
Reference
Threshold
Out
Inhibit
Hysteresis
Latch
Ack
Block
Delay
88
Default
Access
Level
Oper
Instrument range
Oper
None
Auto
Manual
Event
No latching is used
Automatic
Manual
Event
Oper
No
Yes
No
Yes
Not acknowledged
Acknowledged
No blocking
Blocking
Oper
0:00.0 to 500
mm:ss.s
hh:mm:ss
hhh:mm
Part No HA028581
Oper
0:00.0
Issue 3
Sep-05
Oper
Mini8 Controller
8.5.1
Engineering Handbook
Example: To Configure Alarm 1
Change Access level to configuration.
In this example the high alarm will be detected when the measured value exceeds 100.00.
The current measured value is 27.79 as measured by the ‘Input’ parameter. This parameter will normally be
wired to an internal source such as a thermocouple input. In this example the alarm will set when the
measured value exceeds the threshold 100.0 and will clear when the input decreases 0.50 units below the
threshold level (i.e. at 99.5 units).
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
89
Engineering Handbook
8.6
Mini8 Controller
Digital Alarm Parameters
Four groups of eight digital alarms are available. The following table shows the parameters to set up and
configure alarms.
Folder: DigAlarm
Sub-folders: 1 to 32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Type
Selects the type of alarm
In
This is the parameter that will be monitored and
checked according to the AlarmType to see if an
alarm condition has occurred
The output indicates whether the alarm is on or
off depending on:
the alarm condition, latching and acknowledge,
inhibiting and blocking.
Inhibit is an input to the Alarm function. It allows
the alarm to be switched OFF. Typically the
Inhibit is connected to a digital input or event so
that during a phase of the process alarms do not
activate. For Example, if the door to a furnace is
opened the alarms may be inhibited until the
door is closed again.
Determine the type of latching the alarm will use,
if any. Auto latching allows acknowledgement
while the alarm condition is still active, whereas
manual latching needs the condition to revert
back to safe before the alarm can be
acknowledged.
See also the description at the beginning of this
chapter
Used in conjunction with the latching parameter.
It is set when the user responds to an alarm.
Alarm Blocking is used to prevent alarms from
activating during start-up. In some applications,
the measurement at start-up is in an alarm
condition until the system has come under
control. Blocking causes the alarms to be ignored
until the system is under control (in the safe
state), after this any deviations trigger the alarm
This is a small delay between sensing the alarm
condition and displaying it. If in the time between
the two, the alarm goes safe, then no alarm is
shown and the delay timer is reset. It can be used
on systems that are prone to noise.
None
PosEdge
NegEdge
Edge
High
Low
0 to 1
Out
Inhibit
Latch
Ack
Block
Delay
8.6.1
Default
Conf
Alarm not configured
On rising edge
On falling edge
On change
High (1)
Low (0)
Oper
Off
On
Alarm output
deactivated
Alarm output activated
R/O
No
Yes
Alarm not inhibited
Inhibit function active
Oper
None
Auto
Manual
Event
No latching is used
Automatic
Manual
Event
Oper
No
Yes
No
Yes
Not acknowledged
Acknowledged
No blocking
Blocking
Oper
Oper
0:00.0
0:00.0 to 500
mm:ss.s
hh:mm:ss
hhh:mm
Example: To Configure DigAlarm 1
Change Access level to configuration.
In this example the digital alarm will come on if Timer 1 expires.
Timer.1.Out is wired to the alarm input. The DigAlarm.1.Out will turn on if the timer expires.
90
Access
Level
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Oper
Mini8 Controller
8.7
Engineering Handbook
Alarm Summary
This is a summary of all the alarms in the Mini8. It provides global alarm and acknowledge flags as well as 16
bit status words which can be read over communications by the supervisory system.
Folder: AlmSummary
Sub-folders: General
Name
Parameter Description
Value
NewAlarm
Off/On
AnAlarmStatus1
A new alarm has occurred since the last
reset (excludes CT alarms)
Resets the NewAlarm flag
A new Current alarm has occurred since the
last reset
Resets the NewCTAlarm flag
Any new alarm since the last reset
Acknowledges every alarm in the Mini8
requiring acknowledgement. Also resets
NewAlarm and NewCTAlarm flags.
16 bit word for analogue alarms 1 to 8
AnAlarmStatus2
AnAlarmStatus3
AnAlarmStatus4
16 bit word for analogue alarms 9 to 16
16 bit word for analogue alarms 17 to 24
16 bit word for analogue alarms 25 to 32
RstNewAlarm
NewCTAlarm
RstNewCTAlarm
AnyAlarm
GlobalAck
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Default
Access
Level
R/O
Yes / No
Off/On
No
Oper
R/O
Yes / No
Off/On
No
Yes
No
Oper
R/O
Oper
Not acknowledged
Acknowledged
Alarm 1 active
Bit 0
Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 1
Alarm 2 active
Bit 2
Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 3
Alarm 3 active
Bit 4
Alarm 3 not ack’d
Bit 5
Alarm 4 active
Bit 6
Alarm 4 not ack’d
Bit 7
Alarm 5 active
Bit 8
Alarm 5 not ack’d
Bit 9
Alarm 6 active
Bit 10
Alarm 6 not ack’d
Bit 11
Alarm 7 active
Bit 12
Alarm 7 not ack’d
Bit 13
Alarm 8 active
Bit 14
Alarm 8 not ack’d
Bit 15
Same format as above
Same format as above
Same format as above
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
91
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Folder: AlmSummary
Sub-folders: General
Name
Parameter Description
Value
DigAlarmStatus1
16 bit word for digital alarms 1 to 8
DigAlarmStatus2
DigAlarmStatus3
DigAlarmStatus4
SBrkAlarmStatus1
16 bit word for digital alarms 9 to 16
16 bit word for digital alarms 17 to 24
16 bit word for digital alarms 25 to 32
16 bit word for IO channels Mod.1 to 8
SbrkAlarmStatus2
SbrkAlarmStatus3
SbrkAlarmStatus4
CTAlarmStatus1
16 bit word for IO channels Mod.9 to 16
16 bit word for IO channels Mod.17 to 24
16 bit word for IO channels Mod.25 to 32
16 bit word for CT alarms 1 to 5
Alarm 1 active
Bit 0
Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 1
Alarm 2 active
Bit 2
Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 3
Alarm 3 active
Bit 4
Alarm 3 not ack’d
Bit 5
Alarm 4 active
Bit 6
Alarm 4 not ack’d
Bit 7
Alarm 5 active
Bit 8
Alarm 5 not ack’d
Bit 9
Alarm 6 active
Bit 10
Alarm 6 not ack’d
Bit 11
Alarm 7 active
Bit 12
Alarm 7 not ack’d
Bit 13
Alarm 8 active
Bit 14
Alarm 8 not ack’d
Bit 15
Same format as above
Same format as above
Same format as above
Mod.1 fault
Bit 0
Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 1
Mod.2 fault
Bit 2
Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 3
Mod.3 fault
Bit 4
Alarm 3 not ack’d
Bit 5
Mod.4 fault
Bit 6
Alarm 4 not ack’d
Bit 7
Mod.5 fault
Bit 8
Alarm 5 not ack’d
Bit 9
Mod.6 fault
Bit 10
Alarm 6 not ack’d
Bit 11
Mod.7 fault
Bit 12
Alarm 7 not ack’d
Bit 13
Mod.8 fault
Bit 14
Alarm 8 not ack’d
Bit 15
Same format as above
Same format as above
Same format as above
Load1 SSR fail
Bit 0
Load1 PLF
Bit 1
Load1 OCF
Bit 2
Load2 SSR fail
Bit 3
Load2 PLF
Bit 4
Load2 OCF
Bit 5
Load3 SSR fail
Bit 6
Load3 PLF
Bit 7
Load3 OCF
Bit 8
Load4 SSR fail
Bit 9
Load4 PLF
Bit 10
Load4 OCF
Bit 11
Load5 SSR fail
Bit 12
Load5 PLF
Bit 13
Load5 OCF
Bit 14
Bit 15
92
Default
Part No HA028581
Access
Level
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
R/O
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder: AlmSummary
Sub-folders: General
Name
Parameter Description
Value
CTAlarmStatus2
16 bit word for CT alarms 6 to 10
CTAlarmStatus3
CTAlarmStatus4
16 bit word for CT alarms 11 to 15
16 bit word for CT alarm 16
Load6 SSR fail
Bit 0
Load6 PLF
Bit 1
Load6 OCF
Bit 2
Load7 SSR fail
Bit 3
Load7 PLF
Bit 4
Load7 OCF
Bit 5
Load8 SSR fail
Bit 6
Load8 PLF
Bit 7
Load8 OCF
Bit 8
Load9 SSR fail
Bit 9
Load9 PLF
Bit 10
Load9 OCF
Bit 11
Load10 SSR fail
Bit 12
Load10 PLF
Bit 13
Load10 OCF
Bit 14
Bit 15
Same format as CTAlarmStatus1
Same format as CTAlarmStatus1
8.8
Default
Access
Level
R/O
R/O
R/O
Alarm Log
A list of the last 32 alarms to have occurred is maintained in an Alarm Log.
Folder: AlmSummary
Sub-folder: AlmLog
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
ClearLog
Entry1Ident
Clear Alarm Log
Most recent alarm activation
No
NoEntry
Oper
R/O
Entry1Day
Entry1Time
Entry2Ident
The day the first entry activated
The time the first entry activated
2nd most recent alarm activation
NoEntry
0
NoEntry
R/O
R/O
R/O
Entry2Day
Entry2Time
…etc
Entry32Ident
The day the second entry activated
The time the second entry activated
Yes/No
All analogue alarms
All digital alarms
All sensor break alarms
All current alarms
NoEntry, Monday/Tuesday…Sunday.
hh:mm:ss
All analogue alarms
All digital alarms
All sensor break alarms
All current alarms
NoEntry, Monday/Tuesday…Sunday.
hh:mm:ss
NoEntry
0
R/O
R/O
NoEntry
R/O
Entry32Day
Entry32Time
The day the 32nd entry activated
The time the 32nd entry activated
NoEntry
0
R/O
R/O
32nd most recent alarm activation
All analogue alarms
All digital alarms
All sensor break alarms
All current alarms
NoEntry, Monday/Tuesday…Sunday.
hh:mm:ss
Note that EntryDay and EntryTime parameters require the Real Time Clock to be set up (Section 11.4) to
record meaningful values.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
93
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
9. CHAPTER 9 BCD INPUT
The Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) input function block uses a number of digital inputs and combines them to
make a numeric value. A very common use for this feature is to select a setpoint program number from
panel mounted BCD decade switches.
The block uses 4 bits to generate a single digit.
Two groups of four bits are used to generate a two digit value (0 to 99)
The block outputs four results
1.
Units Value: The BCD value taken from the first four bits (range 0 – 9)
2.
Tens Value: The BCD value taken from the second four bits (range 0 – 9)
3.
BCD Value: The combined BCD value taken from all 8 bits (range 0 – 99)
4.
Decimal Value: The decimal numeric equivalent of Hexadecimal bits (range 0 – 255)
The following table shows how the input bits combine to make the output values.
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Units value ( 0 – 9)
BCD value (0 – 99)
Decimal value (0 – 255)
Tens value ( 0 – 9)
Since the inputs cannot all be guaranteed to change simultaneously, the output will only update after all the
inputs have been stable for two samples.
9.1
BCD Parameters
Folder – BCDInput
Sub-Folders: 1 and 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
In 1
Digital Input 1
On or Off
In 2
Digital Input 2
On or Off
In 3
Digital Input 3
In 4
Default
Access
Level
Off
Oper
Off
Oper
On or Off
Off
Oper
Digital Input 4
On or Off
Off
Oper
In 5
Digital Input 5
On or Off
Off
Oper
In 6
Digital Input 6
On or Off
Off
Oper
In 7
Digital Input 7
On or Off
Off
Oper
In 8
Digital Input 8
On or Off
Off
Oper
Dec Value
Decimal value of the inputs
0 – 255
See examples below
BCD Value
Reads the value (in BCD) of the
switch as it appears on the
digital inputs
0 – 99
See examples below
Units
Units value of the first switch
0–9
See examples below
R/O
Tens
Units value of the second
switch
0–9
See examples below
R/O
94
Alterable from the operator
interface if not wired
Part No HA028581
R/O
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
In 1
1
1
0
1
9.1.1
Engineering Handbook
In 2
0
1
0
1
In 3
0
1
0
1
In 4
0
1
0
1
In 5
0
0
1
1
In 6
0
0
1
1
In 7
0
0
1
1
In 8
0
0
1
1
Dec
1
15
240
255
BCD
1
9
90
99
Units
1
9
0
9
Tens
0
0
9
9
Example: To wire a BCD Input
The BCD digital input parameters may be wired to digital input terminals of the controller. a DI8 module
may be used and there are also two standard digital input terminals in FixedIO, D1 and D2.
This example shows a BCD switch selecting one of eight values, In1 to In8 on the Mux8.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
95
Engineering Handbook
10.
Mini8 Controller
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Digital Communications (or ‘comms’ for short) allows the Mini8 to be part of a system by communicating
with a PC or a programmable logic controller (PLC).
The Mini8 also has a configuration port for ‘cloning’ or saving/loading instrument configurations for future
expansion of the plant or to allow you to recover a system after a fault.
10.1 Configuration Port
The configuration port is on an RJ11 socket, just to the right of the power supply connections. This will
normally be connected to a personal computer running iTools. Eurotherm supply a standard cable to
connect a serial COM port on a computer to the RJ11 socket, part no. SubMini8/cable/config.
This port conforms to MODBUS RTU ® protocol a full description of which can be found on
www.modbus.org.
9 pin DF to PC
COM port (RS232)
RJ11
Function
Pin
-
6
N/c
3 (Tx)
5
Rx
2 (Rx)
4
Tx
5 (0v)
3
0v (gnd)
2
N/c
1
Reserved
Pin 6
Pin 1
10.1.1 Configuration Communications Parameters
Folder - Comms
Sub-folders: CC (Config Comms)
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Ident
Identification of the module
fitted.
Modbus always.
Modbus
R/O
Protocol
Digital communications protocol
MODBUS
MODBUS
R/O
Baud
Communications baud rate
4800
19200
Conf
None
Conf
1
Oper
No
Conf
non-iso
9600
19k2 (19200)
Parity
Communications parity
Address
Instrument address
Wait
Rx/tx wait states
96
None
No parity
Even
Even parity
Odd
Odd parity
1 to 254
No
No delay
Yes
Fixed delay. This inserts a delay
between Rx and Tx to ensure that
the drivers used by intelligent
RS232/RS485 converters have
sufficient time to switch over.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
When connecting to iTools the instrument on this port will be found at address 255. iTools will also optimise
the baud rate to suit the conditions.
This port can be used as a ‘permanent’ connection but it is limited to one instrument, it is a RS232 point to
point connection.
Configuration is also possible through the Field Communications port but ONLY if that port is Modbus or
ModbusTCP. In that situation the Mini8s can be multi-dropped to iTools.
10.2 Field Communications Port
The Min8 controller has a number of communication options. These have to be ordered from the factory as
part of the instrument build. A change of protocol is not usually possible in the field. The physical port and
the connections will vary depending on the field communications protocol. Mini8 version 1.xx offers
Modbus and DeviceNet, Version 2.xx adds CANopen, Profibus and Ethernet Modbus-TCP.
10.3 Modbus
This port conforms to MODBUS RTU ® protocol a full description of which can be found on
www.modbus.org.
10.3.1 Modbus Connections
This uses two parallel RJ45 connectors for use with screened Cat5e patch cables. The connection is usually 2
wire but 4 wire is also available. This is selected by the top switch of the address switches below the RJ45
ports – OFF (to the left) 2 wire, ON (to the right) 4 wire.
RJ45 pin
3 wire
5 wire
8
A
RxA
7
B
RxB
6
Ground
Ground
3
Ground
Ground
2
A
TxA
1
B
TxB
Pin 8
5
4
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Pin 1
97
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.3.2 Communications Parameters
The following table shows the parameters available.
Folder – Comms
Sub-folder: FC (Field Communications
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Ident
Comms Module Identity
Modbus
R/O
Protocol
Digital communications protocol
MODBUS
Conf
Baud
Communications baud rate
Communications parity
9600
125k
125k
None
Conf
Parity
Address
Instrument address
1
Oper
Network Status
Network Status
Wait
Rx/tx delay time
Broadcast
Enabled
Broadcast
Address
To enable broadcast master
communications. (See 10.4)
Address of the parameter being
written to slaves.
Modbus / DeviceNet/CANopen/Profibus/
Ethernet
MODBUS / DeviceNet/CANopen/Profibus/
Ethernet
Modbus: 4800, 9600 or 19k2 (19200)
DeviceNet: 125k, 250k, or 500k
CANopen: 125k, 250k, 500k, or 1M
None
No parity
Even
Even parity
Odd
Odd parity
1 to 254
Only writable if DIP switches are set to 0.
For Profibus,CANopen and DeviceNet only.
Displays status of the network and connection
No
No delay
Yes
Fixed delay. This inserts a delay
between Rx and Tx to ensure that
the drivers used by intelligent
RS232/RS485 converters have
sufficient time to switch over.
No
Not enabled
Yes
Enabled
0 to
See Appendix A for addresses of all
32767
Mini8 parameters.
Conf
R/O
No
Conf
No
!
Broadcast
Value
Value to be sent to instruments
on the network. This would
normally be wired to a parameter
within the master
Range of the parameter wired.
In the case of a Boolean the value will be 0 or 1.
10.3.3 Communications Identity
The instrument recognizes the type of communication board fitted. The identity ‘Ident’ is displayed to show
that the instrument is built as required.
98
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.3.4 Modbus Address Switch
On a network of instruments an address is used to specify a particular instrument. Each instrument on a
network MUST have a unique address. Address 255 is reserved for configuration using the configuration
port or the configuration clip
The switch is situated at the bottom of the Comms module. The switch gives addresses from 1 to 31. If
Address 0 is set the Mini8 will then take the address and parity settings entered in the configuration of the
instrument, see folder above. This allows for addresses above 31.
S
w
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
3 wire
NO Parity
Even
-
4 wire
Parity
Odd
Address 16
Address 8
Address 4
Address 2
Address 1
8
Example shows 4 wire and
address 1
1
OFF ↔ ON
10.3.5 Baud Rate
The baud rate of a communications network specifies the speed that data is transferred between instrument
and master. A baud rate of 9600 equates to 9600 Bits per second. Since a single character requires 8 bits of
data plus start, stop, and optional parity, up to 11 bits per byte may be transmitted. 9600 baud equates
approximately to 1000 Bytes per second. 4800 baud is half the speed – approx. 500 Bytes per second.
In calculating the speed of communications in your system it is often the Latency between a message being
sent and a reply being started that dominates the speed of the network.
For example, if a message consists of 10 characters (10msec at 9600 Baud) and the reply consists of 10
characters, then the transmission time would be 20 msec. However, if the Latency is 20msec, then the
transmission time has become 40msec.
10.3.6 Parity
Parity is a method of ensuring that the data transferred between devices has not been corrupted.
Parity is the lowest form of integrity in the message. It ensures that a single byte contains either an even or
an odd number of ones or zero in the data.
In industrial protocols, there are usually layers of checking to ensure that the first byte transmitted is good.
Modbus applies a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to the data to ensure that the package is correct.
10.3.7 RX/TX Delay Time
In some systems it is necessary to introduce a delay between the instrument receiving a message and its
reply. This is sometimes caused by communications converter boxes which require a period of silence on
the transmission to switch over the direction of their drivers.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
99
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.4 Modbus Broadcast Master Communications
Broadcast master communications allow the Mini8 controllers to send a single value to any slave instruments
using a Modbus broadcast using function code 6 (Write single value). This allows the Mini8 to link through
digital communications with other products without the need for a supervisory PC to create a small system
solution.
Example applications include multi-zone profiling applications or cascade control using a second controller.
The facility provides a simple and precise alternative to analogue retransmission.
!
Warning
When using broadcast master communications, be aware that updated values are sent many times a second.
Before using this facility, check that the instrument to which you wish to send values can accept continuous
writes. Note that in common with many third party lower cost units, the Eurotherm 2200 series and
the 3200 series prior to version V1.10 do not accept continuous writes to the temperature setpoint.
Damage to the internal non-volatile memory could result from the use of this function. If in any
doubt, contact the manufacturer of the device in question for advice.
When using the 3200 series fitted software version 1.10 and greater, use the Remote Setpoint variable at
Modbus address 26 if you need to write to a temperature setpoint. This has no write restrictions and may
also have a local trim value applied. There is no restriction on writing to the 2400, 3500 or Mini8 series.
10.4.1 Mini8 Broadcast Master
The Mini8 broadcast master can be connected to up to 31 slaves if no segment repeaters are used. If
repeaters are used to provide additional segments, 32 slaves are permitted in each new segment. The
master is configured by selecting a Modbus register address to which a value is to be sent. The value to send
is selected by wiring it to the Broadcast Value. Once the function has been enabled, the instrument will send
this value out over the communications link every control cycle typically every 110ms.
Notes:1.
The parameter being broadcast must be set to the same decimal point resolution in both master
and slave instruments.
2.
If iTools, or any other Modbus master, is connected to the port on which the broadcast master is
enabled, then the broadcast is temporarily inhibited. It will restart approximately 30 seconds after
iTools is removed. This is to allow reconfiguration of the instrument using iTools even when
broadcast master communications is operating.
A typical example might be a multi zone application where the setpoint of each zone is required to follow,
with digital accuracy, the setpoint of a master.
Master
Min8
1
Mini8
2
Mini8
31
Figure 10-1: Broadcast Comms
100
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.4.2 Wiring Connections
The Digital Communications module for the master must be the Field Comms and is only RS485/RS422.
RS232 is not available.
The Digital Communications module for the slave can be the Config port (RS232 only) or the Field Comms
port (Not RS232)..
Standard patch cables cannot be used, as the connections do not ‘cross over.’ Wire using twisted pair(s)
cable and crimp on the appropriate RJ45 or RJ11 plug.
RS485 2-wire
Connect A (+) in the master to A (+) of the slave
Connect B (-) in the master to B (-) of the slave
This is shown diagrammatically below
Mini8
Master
RS485
A (+)
A (+)
B (-)
B (-)
Com
Com
Slave 1
RS485
Figure 10-2: Rx/Tx Connections RS485 2-wire
RS422, RS485 4-wire
Rx connections in the master are wired to Tx connections of the slave
Tx connections in the master are wired to Rx connections of the slave
Mini8
Master
RS422
RS485
4-wire
Tx+
Tx+
Tx-
Tx-
Rx+
Rx+
Rx-
Rx-
Com
Com
Slave 1
RS422
RS485
4-wire
Figure 10-3: Rx/Tx Connections for RS422, RS485 4-wire
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
101
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.5 DeviceNet
Only 2 parameters have to be set on the Mini8 for use with DeviceNet, baud rate and address. Both can be
set on the hardware address switch situated under the DeviceNet connector. Each Mini8 must have a unique
address on the DeviceNet network and all units must be set to the same Baud rate. The switch gives
addresses from 0 to 63.
S
w
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
Baud rate
Baud rate
-
Baud rate
Baud rate
Address 32
Address 16
Address 8
Address 4
Address 2
Address 1
S
w
Baud rate
125k 250k
500k
8
7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
8
Example shows 500k baud rate
and address 5
1
OFF ↔ ON
Use 500k unless the total length of the DeviceNet network is longer than 100m.
In iTools the DeviceNet Network Status is available and will return the following status:
Offline:
Ready:
Running:
102
No DeviceNet traffic detected
DeviceNet traffic detected but not for this address
DeviceNet traffic detected addressing this instrument.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.6 CANopen
10.6.1 Instrument setup
Up to 127 Nodes can be connected to a standard CANopen Network, for nodes 1 – 31 the address can be
set via the comms DIP switches. For nodes 32 – 127 the address switches must be set to OFF making the
Address parameter alterable in the Config Comms List, which then can be used to set the Node address.
S
w
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
Baud rate
Baud rate
-
Baud rate
Baud rate
Address 32
Address 16
Address 8
Address 4
Address 2
Address 1
S
w
Baud rate
125k 250k
500k
1M
8
7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
Example shows 1M baud rate
and address 4
1
OFF ↔ ON
A standard CANopen Network is designed to work at data transfer rates of up to 1Mbits/s (depending upon
bus length). Four baud rate settings are set on the comms DIP switches: 125K, 250K, 500K and 1M.
10.6.2 Mini8 CANopen Features
The main features of the Mini8 CANopen Slave Interface are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CANopen-to-Modbus Gateway
Generic Device
4 Receive PDOs (dynamic)
4 Transmit PDOs (dynamic)
PDO communication and mapping object values can be stored in non-volatile memory
1 Server SDO
200 Parameter Pick List (re-definable)
PDO Mappings cloneable via CommsTab function block
CANopen is a higher layer object based CAN network protocol that supports direct access to device parameters,
transmission of time critical process data and network management diagnostics via a standardised object
dictionary.
The generic CANopen model shows that the device (Node) is connected to a CAN network on one side and
application specific I/O data on the other.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
103
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.3 Communication Interface
CANopen is based on communication profiles, which specifies the basic communication mechanisms (PDOs, SDOs
and NMT messages) and an object directory that specifies device parameters and functions.
10.6.3.1 Object Dictionary
The object dictionary is divided into a section containing general device information (device identification,
manufacturer name etc), communication parameters, and a section that describes the specific device
data/functionality whether by a device profile (part of CANopen specifications) or manufacturer specified.
Index
Description
0000h
0001h – 025Fh
0260h – 0FFFh
1000h – 1FFFh
1200h – 127Fh
1280h – 12FFh
1300h – 13FFh
1400h – 15FFh
1600h – 17FFh
1800h – 19FFh
1A00h – 1BFFh
1C00h – 1FFFh
2000h – 5FFFh
6000h – 9FFFh
A000h - BFFFh
C000h - FFFFh
Reserved
Data Type Definitions
Reserved
General communication parameters
Communication parameters for server SDOs
Communication parameters for client SDOs
Reserved
Communication parameters for receive PDOs
Mapping parameter for receive PDOs
Communication parameters for transmit PDOs
Mapping parameter for transmit PDOs
Reserved for extensions (i.e. DSP-302)
Manufacturer Specific Profile objects
Standardised Device Profiles
Interface profile specific objects
Reserved
Range
Data Types
Communication Profile
Application Objects
Interface Profile
10.6.3.2 Process Data Objects (PDOs)
The transfer of process data between devices on a network is the main purpose of a CAN-based communication
system. In CANopen, this is performed by PDOs, which map process data from an application object(s) (similar to
DeviceNet Class 0x64) into communication objects (similar to DeviceNet Class 0x66).
PDOs are separated into two groups, Transmit PDOs and Receive PDOs. Each PDO message is capable of
containing 8 bytes of data (four 16-bit scaled integer parameters). Transmit PDOs are typically used to transmit
critical instrument data to other nodes on the network, for example, alarm status’. Receive PDOs are typically
used to configure instrument settings, for example, TargetSP.
For the Mini8 the number of PDOs is limited to 4 transmit PDOs and 4 receive PDOs, giving a maximum of 16
transmit and 16 receive scaled integer parameters.
Note Transmit PDO = transmitted from the Mini8 (READ), Receive PDO = received by Mini8 (WRITE).
10.6.3.3 Service Data Objects (SDOs)
To access entries in the Object dictionary CANopen uses SDOs, peer to peer communication channels (similar to
explicit messaging in DeviceNet), generally used during system configuration or to request non-critical process
data.
This gives access to Network Management, Device & Manufacturer Information, Error Messages, Reconfiguration
and control of PDOs, Store & restore of configuration, Heartbeat & Node Guarding,
104
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.6.4 Network Management (NMT)
CANopen slave nodes include the following state machine, which allows the slaves to be in different operating
states.
Initialisation
Boot Up
FC LED: Off
Pre-operational
SDO communications
Emergency
Heartbeat/Node Guard
Sync
FC LED: blinking
Stopped
Heartbeat/Node Guard
Operational
FC LED: Off
PDO communications
SDO communications
Heartbeat/NG
Emergency
Sync
FC LED: On
Transitions between some states are made automatically by the slaves themselves, whereas others can only be
made upon receiving the corresponding NMT Master message.
Upon power-up the slave node comes out of the Power-On Reset state and goes into initialisation. It then
initialises the application and communication interface. It then attempts to transmit a boot-up message. When
the boot-up message has been successfully transmitted the node enters the Pre-Operational state where it is
possible for the network master to configure individual nodes via SDO messages. The master can then switch
individual nodes or all nodes to the Operational state (allowing PDO communications i.e. the running state) or the
Stopped state.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
105
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.4.1 Heartbeat & Node Guarding
The Mini8 interface supports both Node Guarding and the Heartbeat Protocol. With Node Guarding it is the
responsibility of a Master device to guard (poll) all connected slaves for their current NMT state. With the
Heartbeat method, each slave device transmits a heartbeat (a 1-byte message containing the current NMT state)
periodically.
The Heartbeat protocol is the most widely used.
10.6.4.2 Emergencies (EMCY)
Each CANopen slave device is assigned an emergency message. If the slave device has recognised that a
fault/error exists it transmits an emergency message to inform the network of the problem.
10.6.5 Device Profile DS-404
DS-404 is the Device Profile for Measuring Devices and Closed Loop Controllers. It specifies in which object each
Input, Output, Alarm and Control parameters for each channel should reside. DS-404 is not considered
appropriate for the Mini8 instrument due to its inherent modular and versatile architecture which allows different
alarms, IO etc to be associated with different channels.
The Mini8 is classed as a Generic Device as its CANopen application objects have been specified by Eurotherm
using the range from 2000h.
10.6.6 Default PDOs
Transmit PDOs are typically used to transmit critical instrument data to other nodes on the network, for example,
alarm status’. Receive PDOs are typically used to configure instrument settings, for example, TargetSP.
The Mini8 PDOs are preconfigured with a standard set of parameters. PDO blocks may be Enabled or Disabled via
SDO communications. In the Mini8 the transmit PDOs can also be set to transmit cyclically, or on change of state,
or both.
The parameters in the PDO blocks may be replaced by other ones if required. There are 2 methods to achieve this:
-
using Commstab blocks to redirect the CANopen object to a different Modbus parameter. This
has the advantage that an instrument clone will behave in the same way as the original.
-
using CANopen communications to reconfigure the PDO block.
Both of these methods will be described.
10.6.6.1 Letter Boxing
The number of PDOs is limited to 4 transmit PDOs and 4 receive PDOs, giving a maximum of 16 transmit and 16
receive scaled integer parameters. This is very restrictive for the Mini8, which has up to 16 loops, therefore, some
loop parameters are ‘letter boxed’ whereby the user can specify to which loop the data is intended.
For example in Transmit PD03 if the parameter ‘Loop Number’ has the value 0 then the PV, TargetSP and
ActiveOut are all from Loop 1. This will cycle around all enabled loops at a rate set in the Mini8 parameter
Comms.FC.TxPDO3InstTime. If this time is zero then the CANopen master may write a value to the Loop Number
parameter to get whichever Loop PV, TargetSP and ActiveOut it requires.
106
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.6.6.2 Transmit PDO1
This contains the Analogue Alarm Status words. As default it is Enabled and configured to transmit when any of the
status word values change.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1A00h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
AlmSummary.AnAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.AnAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.AnAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.AnAlarmStatus4
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.3 Transmit PDO2
This contains the Sensor Break Alarm Status words. As default it is Enabled and configured to transmit when any of
the status word values change.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1A01h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
AlmSummary.SBrkAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.SBrkAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.SBrkAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.SBrkAlarmStatus4
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.4 Transmit PDO3
This contains Loop.n operational data. As default it is Enabled and configured to transmit cyclically. The Loop Number
will be cycled round the enabled loops with the time between each change in the loop number being set by
Comms.FC.TxPDO3InstTime. If this time is set to ‘0’ then the loop number will not be cycled, instead the user sets the
loop number via SDO communications.
Object
Index
1A02h
Sub
Index
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Parameter
Data Type
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Loop Number [0….15 corresponding to n=1….16]
Loop.n.Main.PV
Loop.n.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.n.Main.ActiveOut
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.5 Transmit PDO4
This contains Programmer.n operational data. As default it is Enabled and configured to transmit cyclically. The
Programmer Number will be cycled round the enabled programmers with the time between each change in
programmer number being set by Comms.FC.TxPDO4InstTime. If this time is set to ‘0’ then the programmer number
will not be cycled, instead the user sets the programmer number via SDO communications.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1A03h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Programmer Number [0.…7 corresponding to n=1….8]
Programmer.n.Run.CurProg
Programmer.n.Run.ProgStatus
Programmer.n.Run.ProgTimeLeft
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
107
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.6.6 Receive PDO1
This contains control loop Operational parameters, the loop number must be specified in order for the Mini8 to set
the correct loop instance parameters.
Object
Index
1600h
Sub
Index
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Parameter
Data Type
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Loop Number [0.…15 corresponding to n=1….16]
Loop.n.Main.TargetSP
Loop.n.Main.AutoMan
Loop.n.OP.ManualOutVal
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.7 Receive PDO2
This contains control loop PID parameters, the loop number must be specified in order for the Mini8 to set the
correct loop instance parameters.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1601h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Loop Number [0.…15 corresponding to n=1….16]
Loop.n.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.n.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.n.PID.DerivativeTime
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.8 Receive PDO3
This will contain control loop SP parameters, the loop number must be specified in order for the Mini8 to set the
correct loop instance parameters.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1602h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Loop Number [0.…15 corresponding to n=1….16]
Loop.n.SP.SP1
Loop.n.SP.SP2
Loop.n.SP.SPSelect
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
10.6.6.9 Receive PDO4
This contains Programmer Operational parameters, the programmer number must be specified in order for the Mini8
to set the correct programmer instance parameters.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
1603h
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
Number of Supported Entries [4]
Programmer Number [0.…7 corresponding to n=1….8]
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgRun
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgHold
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgReset
Unsigned8
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
108
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.6.7 Enabling and Disabling PDO Communications
The Mini8 is supplied with all 8 PDOs enabled.
Every PDO has a mapping object and a communication object as shown. The PDO is enabled by resetting the
appropriate bit and disabled by setting the appropriate bit. This is done using SDO communications.
PDO
Mapping Object
Receive PDO1
Receive PDO2
Receive PDO3
Receive PDO4
Transmit PDO1
Transmit PDO2
Transmit PDO3
Transmit PDO4
Communication Object
PDO Enable
Object Sub-index / bit
1400h
1401h
1402h
1403h
1800h
1801h
1802h
1803h
1400h 1h /31
1401h 1h /31
1402h 1h /31
1403h 1h /31
1800h 1h /31
1801h 1h /31
1802h 1h /31
1803h 1h /31
1600h
1601h
1602h
1603h
1A00h
1A01h
1A02h
1A03h
10.6.8 Changing PDO Mapping
If the parameters included as default above are not those required they may be replaced by others. The
recommended way to do this is to redirect using the Commstab tables.
The Manufacturer Object Pick List is in Appendix C. The first 32 items map directly onto the default PDOs which use
Modbus addresses 15816 to 15847. The Commstab tables can map any instrument parameter onto these addresses.
Modbus Address
Manufacturer Object
Pick List
Default PDOs
Mapping Object
15816 - 15819
2000h 01h – 04h
1600h 01h – 04h
15820 - 15823
2000h 05h – 08h
1601h 01h – 04h
15824 - 15827
2000h 09h – 0Ch
1602h 01h – 04h
15828 - 15831
2000h 0Dh – 104h
1603h 01h – 04h
15832 - 15835
2000h 11h – 14h
1A00h 01h – 04h
15836 - 15839
2000h 15h – 18h
1A01h 01h – 04h
15840 - 15843
2000h 19h – 1Ch
1A02h 01h – 04h
15844 - 15847
2000h 0Dh – 20h
1A03h 01h – 04h
15840
2000h 21h
to
to
16015
2000h C8h
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
109
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.8.1 Commstab Example 1
Remap Receive PDO 1 with UsrVal.1-4.Vals:
Receive PDO1 from the Object pick list in Appendix C is shown below
Object
Index
2000h
Sub
Parameter
Data Type
Index
Receive PDO1 Note: Sub indices 02h – 04h are letter boxed via sub index 01h.
01h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum1)
Integer16
02h
Loop.n.Main.TargetSP
Integer16
03h
Loop.n.Main.AutoMan
Integer16
04h
Loop.n.OP.ManualOutVal
Integer16
SCADA
Address
15816
15817
15818
15819
Similarly with Commstab 3 and 4 which will give a final Receive PDO 1 as shown in the diagram below. Note there is
now no letterbox parameter as the indexing parameter has been replaced.
Modbus Address
Pick List
Rx PDO 1
1
CommsTab Source
UsrVal.1.Val
15816
2000h 01h
1600h 01h
2
UsrVal.2.Val
15817
2000h 02h
1600h 02h
3
UsrVal.3.Val
15818
2000h 03h
1600h 03h
4
UsrVal.4.Val
15819
2000h 04h
1600h 04h
10.6.8.2 Commstab Example 2
Remap Transmit PDO 3 sub index 04h with Loop.Main.AutoMan, using letter boxing for the loop instance.
Receive PDO3 from the Object pick list in Appendix C is shown below.
Object
Index
2000h
110
Sub
Parameter
Data Type
Index
Transmit PDO3 Note: Sub indices 1Ah – 1Ch are letter boxed via sub index 19h.
19h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum5)
Integer16
1Ah
Loop.n.Main.PV
Integer16
1Bh
Loop.n.Main.WorkingSP
Integer16
1Ch
Loop.n.Main.ActiveOut
Integer16
Part No HA028581
SCADA
Address
15840
15841
15842
15843
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Enter 15843 as the Modbus Destination, and pick Loop.1.Main.AutoMan for the Source and set LetterBox to Yes.
CommsTab Source
15
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan
Modbus Address
Pick List
Tx PDO 3
15843
2000h 1Ch
1A02h 04h
10.6.8.3 Commstab Example 3
Remap Transmit PDO 3 sub index 04h with UsrVal.3.Val, not using letter boxing so that no matter what the loop
instance UsrVal.3.Val will be transmitted:
CommsTab Source
15
UsrVal.3.Val
Modbus Address
Pick List
Tx PDO 3
15843
2000h 1Ch
1A02h 04h
☺ Use Commstab to remap PDO blocks. It is simpler and the remapping is saved in the Mini8 clone file.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
111
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.9 Remapping over the network
10.6.9.1 Using SDO communications
It is possible to remap any of the PDOs with entries from the Pick List using SDO communications. The following
procedure must be followed:
1. Disable PDO by setting bit 31 sub index 1 of the PDOs communication object.
2. Deactivate PDO mapping object by writing ‘0’ to sub index 0 of the PDOs mapping object.
3. Re-map sub indices 1 – 4 with the new mappings
4. Activate PDO mapping object by writing the number of entries to sub index 0 of the PDOs mapping object
5. Enable PDO by resetting bit 31 sub index 1 of the PDOs communication object.
For example, remapping Receive PDO1 of a Mini8 with a node address of 1 with UsrVal.1-4.Vals the following 8
“writes” must be executed:
This is the screen shot of the first write in section 3
above.
This uses the Node Manager (a simple CANopen
master) to write the values.
The Node Manager is a software tool supplied by
IXXAT
IXXAT
Leibnizstr. 15
D 88250
Weingarten.
www.ixaat.de
info@ixxat.de
112
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.6.9.2 Using Device Configuration Software.
This shows one step of the example above using configuration software.
From the CANopen parameter tables in Appendix C UserVal 1 to 4 have sub-ibex C3h to C6h, or 195 to 198 so delete
the existing elements in the Mapped Objects and add elements 195 to 198.
Screen shot of the CANopen Configuration Studio, a software tool supplied by IXXAT.
The remapping of a PDO, as shown in both examples above, is retained in RAM and would be lost if the instrument
was turned off or if the PDO was remapped again. If the remapping needs to be retained then it must be ‘STORED’ in
Non Volatile memory. See Store & Restore in General Communication Parameters.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
113
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.6.10 Enabling & Disabling PDO Change of State transmission.
It is possible to change the way a tramsmit PDO works – either cyclically or on change of state (COS), or both. Object
Index 2002h allows COS transmission of PDOs to be enabled or disabled.
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
Values
2002h
00h
TxPDO COS Enables
Unsigned8
Bit Mask i.e.
0 = No TxPDOs transmitted on COS
1 = TxPDO 1 transmitted on COS
2 = TxPDO 2 transmitted on COS
3 = TxPDOs 1 & 2 transmitted on COS
...
16 = TxPDOs 1- 4 transmitted on COS
As default PDO 1 & 2 only transmit on
change of state, 3 & 4 transmit cyclically so
the default bit mask value is 3 (0011).
To make PDO 3 also transmit on change of
state the third bit must be set so the value
must be written as 7 (0111).
In order for PDOs to be transmitted cyclically, sub-index 05h of the PDOs communication object should be set with
the time required in multiples of 1ms. A value of 0 will disable the cyclic PDO transmission.
10.6.11 General Communication Objects
10.6.11.1
114
Device Type Information
Index
Sub Index
Bit
Description
Value (U32)
1000h
00h
0 – 15
16 – 31
Device Profile Number:
Additional Information:
0 (Generic Device)
0 (Generic Device)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
10.6.11.2
Engineering Handbook
Error Register
Index
Sub Index
Bit
Description
Value (U32)
Bit set = error
1001h
00h
0
Generic Error:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Current:
Voltage:
Temperature:
Communication Error:
Device Profile Defined Error:
Reserved:
Manufacture Specific Error:
Mandatory
Bit set = ANY error
not supported
not supported
not supported
Bit set = error
not supported
Always zero
not supported
10.6.11.3
Manufacturer Device Name
Index
Sub Index
Description
Value (String)
1008h
00h
Manufacturer Device Name
EurothermMini8
Select ASCII as the format
and the text name will be
displayed.
10.6.11.4
Manufacturer Hardware Version
This will indicate the issue of the CANopen daughter board.
Index
Sub Index
Description
Value (String)
1009h
00h
Manufacturer Hardware Version
e.g. Iss1
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
115
Engineering Handbook
10.6.11.5
Mini8 Controller
Manufacturer Software Version
This will indicate the software version of the instrument firmware.
Index
Sub Index
Description
Value (String)
100Ah
00h
Formal Release (n: Phase m: Minor Revision)
Vn.mm
Engineering Release (n: Phase m: Minor Revision)
En.mm
10.6.11.6
Store & Restore
The Mini8 CANopen Interface allows the saving of PDO Mapping and Communication objects in non-volatile memory
giving them three possible settings: Factory/Default settings, Power-On settings and Current settings. This allows the
specified objects to be loaded with or set to different values upon certain events. The following diagram depicts the
operational usage of each of the three settings:
Factory/Default Settings
(Hard Coded)
Copy initiated by Restore
Power-On Settings
(NVOL)
Copy initiated by Store
Copy upon hardware reset
Current Settings
(RAM)
Object
Index
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
Values
2001h
00h
Non-volatile Memory Status
Unsigned8
0 = Nonvol Data Invalid
1 = Data in the process of being stored
2 = Nonvol Data Valid
Store
Index
1010h
Sub Index
00h
01h
Description
Largest Sub-Index supported (1)
Save all parameters (PDO mapping & Communication Objects)
The Mini8 CANopen Interface supports the saving of parameters on request only i.e. does not support the saving of
parameters autonomously. This is indicated when sub-index 01h is read:
Bit
31 - 2
1
0
116
Value
0
0
1
Meaning
Reserved
Device does not save parameters autonomously
Device saves parameters on command
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
In order to avoid saving parameters by mistake, saving is only executed when a specific signature is written to subindex 01h. The signature is “save”:
ASCII:
Hex:
MSB
e
65h
v
76h
a
61h
LSB
s
73h
Or Using the IXXAT Node Manager, select ASCII Data and write ‘save’
It should be noted that whilst in the process of saving the parameter data to non-volatile memory it is not possible to
write to the parameters that are currently being saved.
Restore
Index
1011h
Sub Index
00h
01h
Description
Largest Sub-Index supported (1)
Restore all parameters (PDO mapping & Communication Objects)
In order to avoid restoring parameters back to default settings by mistake, restoring is only executed when a specific
signature is written to sub-index 01h. The signature is “load”:
ASCII:
Hex:
MSB
d
64h
a
61h
o
6Fh
LSB
l
6Ch
On reception of the correct signature the default parameter values are set to valid but will only take effect upon
device reset or after a power cycle.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
117
Engineering Handbook
10.6.11.7
Mini8 Controller
Heartbeat Time
A heartbeat message will be generated cyclically at this interval (specified in ms). The default value is 0 indicating that
the heartbeat messages are disabled.
Index
Sub Index
Description
Value milli-secs (U32)
1017h
00h
Heartbeat Message Interval
0 = disabled.
0
10.6.11.8
Identity Object
Index
SubIndex
Description
1018h
0
1
2
3
Number of Sub Index entries = 4
Unique Vendor ID = 0x000001BC
Product Code = E800
Revision Number =
Bits
Description
0 – 15
Minor Revision Number (Initially: 0001h)
16 – 31
Major Revision Number (Initially: 0001h)
Serial Number (32-bit interface board number entered by Eurotherm)
4
118
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.7 Profibus
Up to 127 Nodes can be connected to a Profibus Network and the address is set via the comms DIP switches.
The Baud Rate is auto-detected and set by the master.
S
w
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
8
Not Used
Address 64
Address 32
Address 16
Address 8
Address 4
Address 2
Address 1
Example shows an address 68
1
OFF ↔ ON
A description of Profibus is given in the Profibus Communications Handbook Part No HA026290.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
119
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
10.8 Ethernet
10.8.1
Instrument setup
It is recommended that you setup the communications settings for each instrument before connecting it to any
Ethernet network. This is not essential but network conflicts may occur if the default settings interfere with
equipment already on the network. By default the instruments are set to a fixed IP address of 192.168.111.222 with a
default SubNet Mask setting of 255.255.255.0.
IP Addresses are usually presented in the form "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". In the instrument Comms folder each element of the
IP Address is shown and configured separately.
"IP address 1" relates to the first set of three digits, IP address 2 to the second set of three digits and so on. This also
applies to the SubNet Mask, Default Gateway and Preferred master IP Address.
Each Ethernet module contains a unique MAC address, normally presented as a 12 digit hexadecimal number in the
format "aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff".
In the Mini8 instruments MAC addresses are shown as 6 separate decimal values in iTools. MAC1 shows the first pair
of digits in decimal, MAC2 shows the second pair of digits and so on.
10.8.2 Unit Identity
The Modbus TCP Specification includes the ‘normal’ Modbus address as part of the packaged Modbus message –
where it is called the Unit Identifier. If such a message is sent to an Ethernet / Serial gateway, the Unit Ident is
essential to identify the slave instrument on the serial port. When a stand alone Ethernet instrument is addressed
however, the Unit Ident is surplus to requirements since the IP address fully identifies the instrument. To allow for
both situations the Unit Ident Enable parameter is used to enable or disable checking of the Unit Ident received from
TCP. The enumerations produce the following actions:
‘Instr’:
the received Unit Ident must match the Modbus address in the instrument or there will be no
response.
‘Loose’:
the received Unit Ident value is ignored, thus causing a reply regardless of the received Unit Ident.
‘Strict’:
the received Unit Ident value must be 0xFF or there will be no reply.
10.8.3 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Settings
IP addresses may be ‘fixed’ – set by the user, or dynamically allocated by a DHCP server on the network.
This is set by Switch 8 on the DIL address switch.
If the IP Addresses are to be dynamically allocated the server uses the instrument MAC address to uniquely identify it.
For fixed IP Addresses set the IP address as well as the SubNet Mask. These must be configured into the instrument
using iTools. Remember to note the allocated addresses.
10.8.3.1 Fixed IP Addressing
Address Switch 8 OFF. In the "Comms" folder of the instrument the "DHCP enable" parameter will be set to "Fixed".
Set the IP address and SubNet Mask as required.
10.8.3.2 Dynamic IP Addressing
Address Switch 8 ON. In the "Comms" folder of the instrument the "DHCP enable" parameter will be set to
"Dynamic". Once connected to the network and powered, the instrument will acquire its "IP address", "SubNet
Mask" and "Default gateway" from the DHCP Server and display this information within a few seconds.
120
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
10.8.3.3 Default Gateway
The "Comms" tab also includes configuration settings for "Default Gateway", these parameters will be set
automatically when Dynamic IP Addressing is used. When fixed IP addressing is used these settings are only required
if the instrument needs to communicate wider than the local area network i.e. over the internet.
10.8.3.4 Preferred Master
The "Comms" tab also includes configuration settings for "Preferred Master". Setting this IP address to the IP
Address of a particular PC will guarantee that one of the 4 available Ethernet sockets will always be reserved for that
PC (reducing the number of available sockets for anonymous connections to 3).
S
w
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10.8.4
OFF
ON
DHCP fixed
Not used
Not used
-
DHCP dynamic
Modbus Address 16
Modbus Address 8
Modbus Address 4
Modbus Address 2
Modbus Address 1
8
Example shows dynamic DHCP
and Modbus address 5
1
OFF ↔ ON
iTools Setup
iTools configuration package, version V5.60 or later, may be used to configure Ethernet communications.
The following instructions configure Ethernet.
To include a Host Name/Address within the iTools scan:1.
Ensure iTools is NOT running before taking the following steps
2.
Within Windows, click ‘Start’, the ‘Settings’, then ‘Control Panel’
3.
In control panel select ‘iTools’
4.
Within the iTools configuration settings select the ‘TCP/IP’ tab
5.
Click the ‘Add’ button to add a new connection
6.
Enter a name for this TCP/IP connection
7.
Click the ‘Add’ button to add the host name or IP address of the instrument in the ‘Host Name/ Address’
section
8.
Click ‘OK’ to confirm the new Host Name/IP Address you have entered
9.
Click ‘OK’ to confirm the new TCP/IP port you have entered
10. You should now see the TCT/IP port you have configured within the TCP/IP tab of the iTools control panel
settings
iTools is now ready to communicate with an instrument at the Host Name/IP Address you have configured
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
121
Engineering Handbook
10.8.5
Mini8 Controller
Ethernet Parameters
Folder - Comms
Sub-folder: FC
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ident
Identifies that the comms module
is fitted.
None
No module fitted
Comms
Communications module fitted
Protocol
Digital communications protocol
MODBUS; Profibus; DeviceNet;
Ethernet,CANopen
Address
Comms Address
1 to 253
UnitID Enable
Unit Identity Enable
Strict
Unit ID must be 0xFF (255)
Loose
Unit ID ignored
Instr
Unit ID must be instrument address
DHCP Type
Fixed
Manually set IP addresses
SET BY Address switch 8
Dynamic
(Sw 8 OFF)
DHCP enable
Default
Access
Level
R/O
Conf
1
Oper
Strict
Conf
RO
IP addresses set by DCHP server
(Sw 8 ON)
IP Address 1
1st Byte IP address
0 to 255
192
Conf
IP Address 2
2nd Byte IP address
0 to 255
168
Conf
IP Address 3
3rd Byte IP address
0 to 255
111
Conf
IP Address 4
4th Byte IP address
0 to 255
222
Conf
Subnet Mask 1
1st Byte Subnet Mask
0 to 255
255
Conf
Subnet mask 2
2nd Byte Subnet Mask
0 to 255
255
Conf
Subnet Mask 3
3rd Byte Subnet Mask
0 to 255
255
Conf
Subnet Mask 4
4th Byte Subnet Mask
0 to 255
0
Conf
Default Gateway 1
1st Byte Default Gateway
0 to 255
0
Conf
Default Gateway 2
2nd Byte Default Gateway
0 to 255
0
Conf
Default Gateway 3
3rd Byte Default Gateway
0 to 255
0
Conf
Default Gateway 4
4th Byte Default Gateway
0 to 255
0
Conf
Pref mstr IP 1
1st Byte Preferred Master IP
address
0 to 255
0
Conf
Pref mstr IP 2
2nd Byte Preferred Master IP
address
0 to 255
0
Conf
Pref mstr IP 3
3rd Byte Preferred Master IP
address
0 to 255
0
Conf
Pref mstr IP 4
4th Byte Preferred Master IP
address
0 to 255
0
Conf
MAC1
MAC address 1
R/O
MAC2
MAC address 2
R/O
MAC3
MAC address 3
R/O
MAC4
MAC address 4
R/O
MAC5
MAC address 5
R/O
MAC6
MAC address 6
R/O
122
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder - Comms
Sub-folder: FC
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ethernet Status
Ethernet network status
Running
Network connected and working
Offline
Network not connected or
working
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Default
Access
Level
R/O
123
Engineering Handbook
11.
Mini8 Controller
CH. 11 COUNTERS, TIMERS, TOTALISERS, RT CLOCK
A series of function blocks are available which are based on time/date information. These may be used as
part of the control process.
11.1 Counters
Up to two counters are available. They provide a synchronous edge triggered event counter.
Direction
Enable
Clock
Target
Counter
Function
Block
Count
Overflow
RippleCarry
Reset
Clear Overflow
Figure 11-1: Counter Function Block
When configured as an Up counter, Clock events increment Count until reaching the Target. On reaching
Target RippleCarry is set true. At the next clock pulse, Count returns to zero. Overflow is latched true and
RippleCarry is returned false.
When configured as a down counter, Clock events decrement Count until it reaches zero. On reaching zero
RippleCarry is set true. At the next clock pulse, Count returns to the Target count. Overflow is latched true
and RippleCarry is reset false
Counter blocks can be cascaded as shown in the diagram below
Direction
Enable
Clock
Target
Reset
Clear Overflow
Count
Counter
Function
Block 1
Overflow
RippleCarry
Direction
Enable
Clock
Target
Reset
Count
Counter
Function
Block 1
Overflow
RippleCarry
Clear Overflow
Figure 11-2: Cascading Counters
The RippleCarry output of one counter acts as an enabling input for the next counter. In this respect the
next counter in sequence can only detect a clock edge if it was enabled on the previous clock edge. This
means that the Carry output from a counter must lead its Overflow output by one clock cycle. The Carry
output is, therefore, called a RippleCarry as it is NOT generated on an Overflow (i.e. Count > Target) but
rather when the count reaches the target (i.e. Count = Target). The timing diagram below illustrates the
principle for the Up Counter.
124
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Count =
Target -1
Clock
Count =
Target
Count = 0
RippleCarry
Overflow
Figure 11-3: Timing Diagram for an Up Counter
11.1.1 Counter Parameters
Folder - Counter
Sub-folders: 1 to 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Enable
Counter enable.
Yes
Enabled
Counter 1 or 2 is enabled in the
Instrument Options folder but they
can also be turned on or off in this
list
No
Disabled
Defines count up or count down.
Up
Up counter
This is not intended for dynamic
operation (i.e. subject to change
during counting). It can only be set
in configuration level.
Down
Down counter
Ripple Carry
Ripple carry to act as an enabling
input to the next counter. It is
turned On when the counter
reaches the target set
Off
Overflow
Overflow flag is turned on when
the counter reaches zero
Clock
Tick period to increment or
decrement the count. This is
normally wired to an input source
such as a digital input.
0
No clock input
1
Clock input present
Target
Level to which the counter is
aiming
0 to 99999
Count
Counts each time a clock input
occurs until the target is reached.
0 to 99999
Reset
Resets the counter
Direction
Clear Overflow
Part No HA028581
Clear overflow flag
Issue 3
Sep-05
Default
Access
Level
No
Oper
Up
Conf
R/O
R/O
0
R/O if
wired
9999
Oper
R/O
No
Not in reset
Yes
Reset
No
Not cleared
Yes
Cleared
No
Oper
No
Oper
125
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
11.2 Timers
Up to eight timers can be configured. Each one can be configured to a different type and can operate
independently of one another.
11.2.1 Timer Types
Each timer block can be configured to operate in four different modes. These modes are explained below
11.2.2 On Pulse Timer Mode
This timer is used to generate a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger.
•
The output is set to On when the input changes from Off to On.
•
The output remains On until the time has elapsed
•
•
If the ‘Trigger’ input parameter recurs while the Output is On, the Elapsed Time will reset to zero and
the Output will remain On
The triggered variable will follow the state of the output
The diagram illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Input
Output
Time
Time
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Input Interval > Time
Input
Output
Time
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Figure 11-4: On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions
126
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
11.2.3 On Delay Timer Mode
This timer provides a delay between the trigger event and the Timer output. If the input pulse is less than
the set delay time there is no output pulse.
•
The Output is set to Off when the Input changes from Off to On.
•
The Output remains Off until the Time has elapsed.
•
If the Input returns to Off before the time has elapsed, the Timer will cease and there will be no output.
•
If the Input remains on until the Time has elapsed, the Output will be set to On.
•
The Output will remain On until the Input is cleared to Off.
•
The Triggered variable will be set to On by the Input changing from Off to On. It will remain On until
both the Time has elapsed and the Output has reset to Off.
The diagram illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Input
Time
Output
Time
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Figure 11-5: On Delay Timer under Different Input Conditions
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
127
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
11.2.4 One Shot Timer Mode
This timer behaves like a simple oven timer.
•
When the Time is edited to a non-zero value the Output is set to On
•
The Time value is decremented until it reaches zero. The Output is then cleared to Off
•
The Time value can be edited at any point to increase or decrease the duration of the On time
•
Once set to zero, the Time is not reset to a previous value, it must be edited by the operator to start
the next On-Time
•
The Input is used to gate the Output. If the Input is set, the time will count down to zero. If the Input
is cleared to Off, then the Time will hold and the Output will switch Off until the Input is next set.
Note: since the Input is a digital wire, it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it, and set the Input value
to On which permanently enables the timer.
•
The Triggered variable will be set to On as soon as the Time is edited. It will reset when the Output is
cleared to Off.
The behaviour of the timer under different input conditions is shown below.
Input
Time Edited
Time Edited
Output
B
A
Time
A+B = Time
Time
Elapsed Time
Triggered
This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold
Input
Time Edited
Output
A+B+C+D = Time
A
B
C
D
Figure 11-6: One Shot Timer
128
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
11.2.5 Minimum On Timer or Compressor Mode
This timer has been targeted at guaranteeing that the output remains On for a duration after the input
signal has been removed. It may be used, for example, to ensure that a compressor is not cycled
excessively.
•
The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On.
•
When the Input changes from On to Off, the elapsed time will start incrementing towards the set Time.
•
The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time. The Output will then
switch Off.
•
If the Input signal returns to On while the Output is On, the elapsed time will reset to 0, ready to begin
incrementing when the Input switches Off.
•
The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is >0. It will indicate that the timer is counting.
The diagram illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Time
Time
Triggered
Figure 11-7: Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
129
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
11.2.6 Timer Parameters
Folder – Timer
Sub-folders: 1 to 4
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Type
Timer type
Off
Timer not configured
On Pulse
Generates a fixed length pulse from an
edge trigger
Off Delay
Provides a delay between input trigger
event and timer putput
One Shot
Simple oven timer which reduces to zero
before switching off
Min-On Ti
Compressor timer guaranteeing that the
output remains ON for a time after the
input signal has been removed
Time
Default
Access
Level
Off
Conf
0:00.0
Oper
Duration of the timer. For
re-trigger timers this value
is entered once and copied
to the time remaining
parameter whenever the
timer starts. For pulse
timers the time value itself
is decremented.
Timer elapsed time
0:00.0 to 99:59:59
In
Trigger/Gate input. Turn
On to start timing
Off
Off
On
Start timing
Out
Timer output
Off
On
Output off
Timer has timed out
R/O
Triggered
Timer triggered (timing).
This is a status output to
indicate that the timers
input has been detected
Off
Not timing
R/O
On
Timer timing
Elapsed Time
R/O
0:00.0 to 99:59:59
Off
Oper
The above table is repeated for Timers 2 to 4.
130
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
11.3 Totalisers
There are two totaliser function blocks which are used to measure the total quantity of a measurement
integrated over time. A totaliser can, by soft wiring, be connected to any measured value. The outputs
from the totaliser are its integrated value and an alarm state. The user may set a setpoint which causes the
alarm to activate once the integration exceeds the setpoint.
The totaliser has the following attributes:1.
Run/Hold/Reset
In Run the totaliser will integrate its input and continuously test against an alarm setpoint.
In Hold the totaliser will stop integrating its input but will continue to test for alarm conditions.
In Reset the totaliser will be zeroed, and alarms will be reset.
2.
Alarm Setpoint
If the setpoint is a positive number, the alarm will activate when the total is greater than the setpoint.
If the setpoint is a negative number, the alarm will activate when the total is lower (more negative) than the
setpoint.
If the totaliser alarm setpoint is set to 0.0, the alarm will be off. It will not detect values above or below.
The alarm output is a single state output. It may be cleared by resetting the totaliser, or by changing the
alarm setpoint.
3.
Limits
The total is limited to a maximum of 9,999,999,999 and a minimum of -9,999,999,999.
4.
Resolution
The totaliser ensures that resolution is maintained when integrating small values onto a large total.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
131
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
11.3.1 Totaliser Parameters
Folder – Total
Sub-Folders: 1 to 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
TotalOut
In
The totalised value
The value to be totalised
-9999.9 to 9999.9.
±9,999,999,999
Access
Level
R/O
Oper
Note:- the totaliser stops accumulating if the input is ‘Bad’.
Units
Totaliser units
None
AbsTemp
V, mV, A, mA,
PH, mmHg, psi, Bar, mBar, %RH, %, mmWG, inWG, inWW,
Ohms, PSIG, %O2, PPM, %CO2, %CP, %/sec,
RelTemp
mBar/Pa/T
sec, min, hrs,
Resolution
Totaliser resolution
XXXXX
Conf
XXXXX
Conf
XXXX.X
XXX.XX
XX.XXX
X.XXXX
Alarm SP
AlarmOut
Run
Hold
Reset
132
Sets the totalised value at
which an alarm will occur
This is a read only value
which indicates the alarm
output On or Off.
The totalised value can be
a positive number or a
negative number.
If the number is positive
the alarm occurs when
Total > + Alarm Setpoint
If the number is negative
the alarm occurs when
Total > - Alarm Setpoint
Runs the totaliser
Holds the totaliser at its
current value
Note:
The Run & Hold parameters
are designed to be wired to
(for example) digital inputs.
Run must be ‘on’ and Hold
must be ‘off’ for the
totaliser to operate.
Resets the totaliser
±9,999,999,999
Oper
Off
On
Alarm inactive
Alarm output active
Off
Oper
No
Yes
No
Yes
Totaliser not running
Select Yes to run the totaliser
Totaliser not in hold
Hold totaliser
No
Oper
No
Oper
No
Totaliser not in reset
No
Oper
Yes
Totaliser in reset
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
11.4 Real Time Clock
A real time clock (day of week and time only) is used to provide a daily and weekly scheduling facility and
provides two corresponding outputs. The configuration for an output is an On-Day and an On-Time and an
Off-Day and an Off-Time.
The Real Time Clock also provides the time stamping in the AlarmLog (Section 8.8).
The day options supported are:Day Option
Never
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Mon-Fri
Mon-Sat
Sat-Sun
Everyday
Description
Disables the output feature
Output will only be available on a Monday
Output will only be available on a Tuesday
Output will only be available on a Wednesday
Output will only be available on a Thursday
Output will only be available on a Friday
Output will only be available on a Saturday
Output will only be available on a Sunday
Output will only be available between Monday to Friday
Output will only be available on between Monday to Saturday
Output will only be available on between Saturday to Sunday
Output always available
For example, it is possible to configure an output to be activated at 07:30 on Monday and deactivated at
17:15 on Friday
The output from the Real Time Clock outputs may be used to place the instrument in standby or to
sequence a batch process.
The Real Time Clock function will set/clear the outputs only at the configured time. Therefore it is possible
to override the outputs manually, by editing the output to On/Off between output activations.
The Real Time Clock does not display date or year.
11.4.1 Real Time Clock Parameters
Folder – RTClock
Sub Folders: None
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Mode
This parameter can be used to set
the clock
Running
Edit
Stopped
Day
Displays the day or allows the day
to be set when in Edit mode
Displays the time or allows the time
to be set when in Edit mode
Days when output 1 and 2 are
activated
Time of day when output 1 and 2
are activated
Days when output 1 and 2 are deactivated
Time of day when output 1 and 2
are de-activated
Output 1 and 2
Monday to Sunday
Oper
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
Oper
See table above
Oper
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
Oper
See table above
Oper
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
Oper
Off
On
Oper
Time
On Day1
On Day2
On Time1
On Time2
Off Day1
Off Day2
Off Time1
Off Time2
Out1
Out2
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Normal operation
Allows the clock to be set
Clock stopped (saves battery life)
Output not activated
Output activated
Default
Access
Level
Stopped
Oper
133
Engineering Handbook
12.
Mini8 Controller
CHAPTER 12 APPLICATIONS
12.1 Humidity
12.1.1 Overview
Humidity (and altitude) control is a standard feature of the Mini8 controller. In these applications the
controller may be configured to generate a setpoint profile (see Section 18 ‘Setpoint Programmer’).
Also the controller may be configured to measure humidity using either the traditional Wet/Dry bulb
method or it may be interfaced to a solid state sensor.
The controller output may be configured to turn a refrigeration compressor on and off, operate a bypass
valve, and possibly operate two stages of heating and/or cooling
12.1.2 Temperature Control of an Environmental Chamber
The temperature of an environmental chamber is controlled as a single loop with two control outputs. The
heating output time proportions electric heaters, usually via a solid state relay. The cooling output operates
a refrigerant valve which introduces cooling into the chamber. The controller automatically calculates when
heating or cooling is required.
12.1.3 Humidity Control of an Environmental Chamber
Humidity in a chamber is controlled by adding or removing water vapour. Like the temperature control
loop two control outputs are required, i.e. Humidify and Dehumidify.
To humidify the chamber water vapour may be added by a boiler, an evaporating pan or by direct injection
of atomised water.
If a boiler is being used adding steam increases the humidity level. The humidify output from the controller
regulates the amount of steam from the boiler that is allowed into the chamber.
An evaporating pan is a pan of water warmed by a heater. The humidify output from the controller
humidity regulates the temperature of the water.
An atomisation system uses compressed air to spray water vapour directly into the chamber. The humidify
output of the controller turns on or off a solenoid valve.
Dehumidification may be accomplished by using the same compressor used for cooling the chamber. The
dehumidify output from the controller may control a separate control valve connected to a set of heat
exchanger coils.
134
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
12.1.4 Humidity Parameters
List Folder – Humidity
Sub-folder: None
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Resolution
Resolution of the relative
humidity
Psychro Const
The psychrometric constant at a
given pressure (6.66E-4 at
standard atmospheric pressure).
The value is dependent on the
speed of air-flow across the wet
bulb, and hence the rate of
evaporation. 6.66E-4 is for the
ASSMANN ventilated
Psychrometer.
Atmospheric Pressure
XXXXX
XXXX.X
XXX.XX
XX.XXX
X.XXXX
0.0 to 10.0
Pressure
WetTemp
WetOffset
DryTemp
RelHumid
Wet Bulb Temperature
Wet bulb temperature offset
Dry Bulb Temperature
Relative Humidity is the ratio of
actual water vapour
pressure (AVP) to the saturated
water vapour pressure (SVP) at a
particular temperature and
pressure
The dew point is the temperature
to which air would need to cool
(at constant pressure and water
vapour content) in order to reach
saturation
Indicates that one of the probes
is broken.
DewPoint
Sbrk
Default
Access
Level
Conf
0.0 to 2000.0
Range units
-100.0 to 100.0
Range units
0.0 to 100.0
6.66
Oper
1013.0
mbar
Oper
0.0
Oper
100
R/O
-999.9 to 999.9
R/O
No
Yes
Conf
No sensor break detection
Sensor break detection enabled
12.2 Zirconia (Carbon Potential) Control
A Mini8 controller has a Zirconia function block which may be used to control Carbon potential. The
controller is often a programmer which generates carbon potential profiles. In this section it is assumed
that a programmer is used.
Calculation of PV: The Process Variable can be Carbon Potential, Dewpoint or Oxygen concentration. The
PV is derived from the probe temperature input, the probe mV input and remote gas reference input values.
Various probe makes are supported. In the 3500 Carbon Potential and Dewpoint can be displayed together.
The following definitions may be useful:-
12.2.1
Temperature Control
The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is common for a
separate thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating output which may be connected to
gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements. In some applications a cooling output may
also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
135
Engineering Handbook
12.2.2
Mini8 Controller
Carbon Potential Control
The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference
side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace.
The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actual percentage of
carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two outputs. One output is connected to a valve
which controls the amount of an enrichment gas supplied to the furnace. The second output controls the
level of dilution air.
12.2.3
Sooting Alarm
In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller, the 3500 can trigger an alarm when
the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace.
The alarm may be connected to an output (e.g. relay) to initiate an external alarm.
12.2.4
Automatic Probe Cleaning
The Zirconia function block has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur
between batches or manually requested. At the start of the cleaning process a ‘snapshot’ of the probe mV is
taken, and a short blast of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have
accumulated on the probe. A minimum and maximum cleaning time can be set by the user. If the probe
mV has not recovered to within 5% of the snapshot value within the maximum recovery time set then an
alarm is given. This indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. During the
cleaning and recovery cycle the PV is frozen, thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation. A flag
‘PvFrozen’ is set which can be used in an individual strategy, for example to hold the integral action during
cleaning.
12.2.5
Endothermic Gas Correction
A gas analyser may be used to determine the CO concentration of the endothermic gas. If a 4-20mA output
is available from the analyser, it can be fed into the 3500 to automatically adjust the calculated % carbon
reading. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.
12.2.6
Clean Probe
As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning. Cleaning (Burn Off) is
performed by forcing compressed air through the probe. Cleaning can be initiated either manually or
automatically using a timed period. During cleaning the PV output is frozen.
12.2.7
Probe Status
After cleaning an alarm output, MinCalcT, is generated if the PV does not return to 95% of its previous value
within a specified time. This indicates that the probe is deteriorating and should be replaced.
136
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
12.2.8 Zirconia Parameters
Folder - Zirconia
Sub-folders: None
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Probe Type
Configures the type of probe to
be used
Resolution
Resolution of the calculated
result
Drayton
Accucarb
SSI
MacDhui
%O2
LogO2
BoschO2
ZircoDew
ProbeMV
BoschCarb
BarberC
MMICarb
AACC
XXXXX
XXXX.X
XXX.XX
XX.XXX
X.XXXX
Default
Drayton
Accucarb
SSI
MacDhui
Oxygen
Log Oxygen
Bosch Oxygen
Dewpoint.
Probe mV
Bosch Carbon
Barber-Colman
MMI Carbon
AACC
Access
Level
Op
X
Op
20.0
Op
0.0
Op
0
Op
-99999 to 99999
720
Op
Parameters shown in shaded rows below are not applicable to O2 probes
GasRef
Gas reference value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
RemGasRef
Remote gas reference value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
RemGasEn
0
1
OxygenExp
Enable the remote gas
reference. This can be an
internal value from the user
interface or from an external
source
Minimum calculation
temperature
Oxygen exponent
Tolerance
Tolerance of the sooting
-9999.9 to 9999.9
1.0
Op
CleanFreq
Frequency of the cleaning
process
Sets the duration of the clean
0:00:00 to 99:59:59 or 100:00 to 500:00
4:00:00
Op
0:00:00 to 99:59:59 or 100:00 to 500:00
0:00:00
Op
0:00:00 to 99:59:59 or 100:00 to 500:00
0:00:00
Op
0:00:00 to 99:59:59 or 100:00 to 500:00
0:10:00
Op
Temp range
-99999 to 99999
0
ProbeInput
Minimum recovery time after
purging
Maximum recovery time after
purging
Zirconia probe temperature
input value
Sets a temperature offset for
the probe
Zirconia probe mV input
ProbeOffset
Zirconia probe mV offset
-99999 to 99999
0
Oxygen
Calculated oxygen
0
CarbonPot
Calculated carbon potential
0
R/O
DewPoint
Zirconia control process value
The O2 or dew point value
derived from temperature and
remote gas reference inputs
Probe sooting alarm output
0
R/O
No
R/O
MinCalTemp
CleanTime
MinRcovTime
MaxRcovTime
TempInput
TempOffset
SootAlm
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Internal
External
Op
Op
Op
No
Yes
No alarm output
In alarm
Op
137
Engineering Handbook
Folder - Zirconia
Mini8 Controller
Sub-folders: None
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
ProbeFault
Probe fault
No
Op
PvFrozen
This is a Boolean which freezes
the PV during a purging cycle.
It may have been wired, for
example, to disable control
output during purging
Enable the clean valve
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
R/O
No
Yes
Waiting
Cleaning
Recovering
No
Yes
No
R/O
CleanValve
CleanState
The burn off state of the
zirconia probe
CleanProbe
Enable clean probe
This may be wired to initiate
automatically or if un-wired can
be set by the user
Time to next clean
Time2Clean
ProbeStatus
138
Indicates the status of the
probe
R/O
Do not clean probe
Initiate probe clean
0:00:00 to 99:59:59 or 100:00 to 500:00
OK
MVSbr
TempSbr
MinCalcT
No
Op
0
R/O
Normal working
Probe input in sensor break
Temperature input in sensor break
Probe deteriorating
Part No HA028581
R/O
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
13.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 13 INPUT MONITOR
13.1 Description
There are two Input monitors. Each input monitor may be wired to any variable in the controller. It then
provides three functions:1.
Maximum detect
2.
Minimum detect
3.
Time above threshold
13.1.1 Maximum Detect
This function continuously monitors the input value. If the value is higher than the previously recorded
maximum, it becomes the new maximum.
This value is retained following a power fail.
13.1.2 Minimum Detect
This function continuously monitors the input value. If the value is lower than the previously recorded
minimum, it becomes the new minimum.
This value is retained following a power fail.
13.1.3 Time Above Threshold
This function increments a timer whenever the input is above a threshold value. If the timer exceeds 24
hours per day, a counter is incremented. The maximum number of days is limited to 255. A time alarm can
be set on the timer so that once the input has been above a threshold for a period, an alarm output is given.
Applications include:•
Service interval alarms. This sets an output when the system has been running for a number of days
(up to 255 days)
•
Material stress alarms - if the process cannot tolerate being above a level for a period. This is a style of
‘policeman’ for processes where the high operating point degrades the life of the machine.
•
In internal wiring applications in the controller
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
139
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
13.2 Input Monitor Parameters
Folder - IPMonitor
Sub-Folders: 1 or 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
In
The input value to be monitored
May be wired to an input source. The range will
depend on the source
Oper
R/O if
wired
Max
The maximum measured value
recorded since the last reset
The minimum measured value
recorded since the last reset
The input timer accumulates the
time the input PV spends above
this trigger value.
Accumulated days the input has
spent above threshold since the
last reset.
As above
R/O
As above
R/O
As above
Oper
Days is an integer count of the 24 hour periods
only. The Days value should be combined with
the Time value to make the total time above
threshold.
The time value accumulates from 00:00.0 to
23:59.9. Overflows are added to the days value
0 to 255
R/O
0
Oper
0:00.0 to 99:59:59
0:00.0
Oper
Min
Threshold
Days Above
Time Above
AlarmDays
AlarmTime
Out
Reset
In Status
140
Accumulated time above the
‘Threshold’ since last reset.
Days threshold for the monitors
time alarm. Used in combination
with the Alarm Time parameter.
The ‘Out’ is set to true if the
inputs accumulated time above
threshold is higher than the timer
high parameters.
Time threshold for the monitors
time alarm. Used in combination
with the Alarm Days parameter.
The ‘Out’ is set to true if the
inputs accumulated time above
threshold is higher than the timer
high parameters.
Set true if the accumulated time
that the input spends above the
trigger value is higher than the
alarm threshold.
Resets the Max and Min values
and resets the time above
threshold to zero.
Monitors the status of the input
Default
Off
On
Normal operation
time above setpoint exceeded
No
Yes
Normal operation
Reset values
Good
Bad
Normal operation
The input may be incorrectly wired
R/O
R/O
No
Part No HA028581
Access
Level
Oper
R/O
Oper
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
14.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 14 LOGIC AND MATHS OPERATORS.
14.1 Logic Operators
Logic Operators allow the controller to perform logical calculations on two input values. These values can
be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values, User Values and Digital Values.
The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed, input value inversion and ‘fallback’ value
are determined in Configuration level.
There are 24 separate calculations – they do not have to be in sequence. When logic operators are enabled
a Folder ‘Lgc2’ exists where the 2 denotes two input logic operators.
Logic input 1
Logic operator
(Oper)
Invert
Logic input 2
Output Value
(result of calculation)
Invert
Figure 14-1: 2 Input Logic Operators
Logic Operators are found under the folder ‘Lgc2’. Note that the logic operators can also be enable by
dragging a block onto the graphical wiring screen in iTools.
14.1.1 Logic 8
Logic 8 operators can perform logic calculations on up to eight inputs. The calculations are limited to
AND,OR,XOR. Up to two 8 input operators can be enabled. The folder is labelled ‘Lgc8’ to denote eight
input logic operators.
Logic input 1
Invert
Logic input 2
Invert
Logic input 3
Invert
Logic input 4
Invert
Logic input 5
Invert
Output Value
(result of calculation)
Logic operator
(Oper)
Invert
Logic input 6
Invert
Logic input 7
Invert
Logic input 8
Invert
Figure 14-2: 8 Input Logic Operators
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
141
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.1.2 2 input Logic Operations
The following calculations can be performed:
Oper
0: OFF
Operator description
The selected logic operator is turned off
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Invert =
None
1: AND
The output result is ON when both Input 1
and Input 2 are ON
0
0
Off
1
0
Off
0
1
Off
1
1
On
0
0
Off
1
0
On
0
1
On
1
1
On
0
0
Off
1
0
On
0
1
On
1
1
Off
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
On
1
0
Off
0
1
Off
1
1
On
0
0
Off
1
0
On
0
1
On
1
1
Off
0
0
Off
1
0
On
0
1
Off
1
1
Off
0
0
Off
1
0
Off
0
1
On
2: OR
3: XOR
4: Latch
5: Equal (==)
6: Not equal (<>)
7: Greater than (>)
8: Less than (<)
9: Equal to or
Greater than (=>)
10: Less than or
Equal to (<=)
The output result is ON when either Input 1
or Input 2 is ON
Exclusive OR. The output result is true
when one and only one input is ON. If both
inputs are ON the output is OFF.
Input 1 sets the latch, Input 2 resets the
latch.
The output result is ON when Input 1 =
Input 2
The output result is ON when Input 1 does
not equal Input 2
The output result is ON when Input 1 >
Input 2
The output result is ON when Input 1 <
Input 2
The output result is ON when Input 1 >
Input 2
The output result is ON when Input 1 <
Input 2
1
1
Off
0
0
On
1
0
On
0
1
Off
1
1
On
0
0
On
1
0
Off
0
1
On
1
1
On
Note 1: The numerical value is the value of the enumeration
Note 2: For options 1 to 4 an input value of less than 0.5 is considered false and greater than or equal to
0.5 as true.
142
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
14.1.3 Logic Operator Parameters
Folder – Lgc2 (2 Input Operators)
Sub-Folders: 1 to 24
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Oper
To select the type of operator
See previous table
None
Conf
In1
In2
FallbackType
Input 1
Input 2
The fallback state of the output
if one or both of the inputs is
bad
Normally wired to a logic, analogue or user value.
May be set to a constant value if not wired.
0
OPER
0: FalseBad
1: TrueBad
2: FalseGood
3: TrueGood
Invert
The sense of the input value,
may be used to invert one or
both of the inputs
Out
The output from the operation
is a boolean (true/false) value.
The status of the result value
Status
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
0: None
1: Input1
2: Input2
3: Both
On
Off
Good
Bad
The output value is FALSE and
the status is GOOD.
The output value is FALSE and
the status is BAD
The output value is TRUE and
the status is GOOD
The output value is TRUE and
the status is BAD.
Neither input inverted
Invert input 1
Invert input 2
Invert both inputs
Output activated
Output not activated
Conf
Conf
R/O
R/O
143
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.2 Eight Input Logic Operators
The eight input logic operator may be used to perform the following operations on eight inputs.
Oper
0: OFF
1: AND
2: OR
3: XOR
Operator description
The selected logic operator is turned off
The output result is ON when ALL eight inputs are ON
The output result is ON when one or more of the 8 inputs are ON
Exclusive OR – the output is true if an odd number of inputs are
true.
(In1 ⊕ In2) ⊕ (In3 ⊕ In4) ⊕ (In5 ⊕ In6) ⊕ (In7 ⊕ In8)
Eight Input Logic Operator Parameters
Folder – Lgc8 (8 Input Operators)
Sub-Folders: 1 to 4
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Oper
To select the type of operator
0: OFF
Operator turned off
1: AND
Output ON when all inputs are ON
2: OR
Output ON when one input is ON
3: XOR
Exclusive OR
NumIn
InInvert
This parameter is used to
configure the number of inputs
for the operation
Used to invert selected inputs
prior to operation.
This is a status word with one bit
per input, the left hand bit inverts
input 1.
Out Invert
Invert the output
In1 to In8
Input state 1 to 8
Out
Output result of the operator
144
Default
Access
Level
OFF
Conf
1 to 8
2
Conf
The invert parameter is interpreted as a bitfield
where:
1 (0x1) - input 1
2 (0x2) - input 2
4 (0x4) - input 3
8 (0x8) - input 4
16 (0x10) - input 5
32 (0x20) - input 6
64 (0x40)- input 7
128 (0x80)- input 8 (e.g. 255 = all eight)
No
Output not inverted
Yes
Output inverted
Normally wired to a logic, analogue or user value.
When wired to a floating point, values less than or
equal to –0.5 or greater than or equal to 1.5 will
be rejected (e.g. the value of the lgc8 block will
not change).
Values between –0.5 and 1.5 will be interpreted as
ON when greater than or equal to 0.5 and OFF
when less than 0.5.
May be set to a constant value if not wired.
On
Output activated
Off
Output not activated
0
Oper
No
Oper
Off
Oper
Part No HA028581
R/O
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
14.3 Maths Operators
Maths Operators (sometimes known as Analogue Operators) allow the controller to perform mathematical
operations on two input values. These values can be sourced from any available parameter including
Analogue Values, User Values and Digital Values. Each input value can be scaled using a multiplying factor
or scalar.
The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable limits of the calculation
are determined in Configuration level. In normal operation the values of each of the scalars may be
changed via communications or iTools.
There are 24 separate calculations – they do not have to be in sequence. When maths operators are
enabled (in Instrument/Options folder) a Folder ‘Math2’ exists (where the 2 denotes two input maths
operators).
Output Value
(result of calculation)
Input 1
Input 1 Scalar
Math operator
Input 2
Input 2 Scalar
Figure 14-3: 2 Input Math Operators
8 input multiplexers are also available and are described in section 14.5.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
145
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.3.1 Math Operations
The following operations can be performed:
0: Off
1: Add
2: Subtract (Sub)
3: Multiply (Mul)
4: Divide (Div)
5: Absolute
Difference (AbsDif)
6: Select Max
(SelMax)
7: Select Min
(SelMin)
8: Hot Swap
(HotSwp)
9: Sample and Hold
(SmpHld)
10: Power
11: Square Root
(Sqrt)
12: Log
13: Ln
14: Exp
15: 10 x
51: Select
The selected analogue operator is turned off
The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2
The output result is the difference between Input 1 and Input 2
where Input 1 > Input 2
The output result is the Input 1 multiplied by Input 2
The output result is Input 1 divided by Input 2
The output result is the absolute difference between Input 1 and 2
The output result is the maximum of Input 1 and Input 2
The output result is the minimum of Input 1 and Input 2
Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is ‘good’. If input 1 is ‘bad’ then input 2 value
will appear at the output. An example of a bad input occurs during a sensor break condition.
Normally input 1 will be an analogue value and input B will be digital.
The output tracks input 1 when input 2 = 1 (Sample).
The output will remain at the current value when input 2 = 0 (Hold).
If input 2 is an analogue value then any non zero value will be interpreted as ‘Sample’.
The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value at input 2. I.e. input 1input 2
The output result is the square root of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
The output is the logarithm (base 10) of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect
The output is the logarithm (base n) of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect
The output result is the exponential of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect
The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 value. I.e. 10input 1. Input 2 has no effect
Select input is used to control which Analogue Input is switched to the output of the Analogue
Operator. If the select input is true input 2 is switched through to the output. If false input 1
is switched through to the output. See example below:Select input
An
input 1
An
input 2
Select
Logic 1
If Select Input = 1, then An input 2 is selected
If Select Input = 0, then An input 1 is selected
An Op 1
When Boolean parameters are used as inputs to analogue wiring, they will be cast to 0.0 or 1.0 as
appropriate. Values <= -0.5 or >= 1.5 will not be wired. This provides a way to stop a Boolean updating.
Analogue wiring (whether simple re-routing or involving calculations) will always output a real type result,
whether the inputs were booleans, integers or reals.
Note: The numerical value is the value of the enumeration
146
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
14.3.2 Math Operator Parameters
Folder – Math2 (2 Input Operators)
Sub-Folders: 1 to 24
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Oper
To select the type of operator
See previous table
None
Conf
In1Mul
Scaling factor on input 1
Limited to max float *
1.0
Oper
In2 Mul
Scaling factor on input 2
Limited to max float *
1.0
Oper
Units
Units applicable to the output
value
None
AbsTemp
V, mV, A, mA,
PH, mmHg, psi, Bar, mBar, %RH, %, mmWG, inWG,
inWW, Ohms, PSIG, %O2, PPM, %CO2, %CP, %/sec,
RelTemp
mBar/Pa/T
None
Conf
sec, min, hrs,
Resolution
Resolution of the output value
XXXXX. XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX
Conf
LowLimit
To apply a low limit to the output
Conf
HighLimit
To apply a high limit to the
output
The state of the Output and
Status parameters in case of a
fault condition. This parameter
could be used in conjunction with
fallback value
Max float* to High limit (decimal point depends
on resolution)
Low limit to Max float* (decimal point depends
on resolution)
Descriptions, see section 3.4.5.
Clip Bad
Clip Good
Fall Bad
Fall Good
Upscale
DownScale
Limited to max float * (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Fallback
Fallback Val
In1
In2
Out
Status
Defines (in accordance with
Fallback) the output value during
fault conditions.
Input 1 value (normally wired to
an input source – could be a User
Value)
Input 2 value (normally wired to
an input source – could be a User
Value)
Indicates the analogue value of
the output
This parameter is used in
conjunction with Fallback to
indicate the status of the
operation. Typically, status is
used to flag fault conditions and
may be used as an interlock for
other operations.
Conf
Conf
Conf
Limited to max float * (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Oper
Limited to max float * (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Oper
Between high and low limits
R/O
Good
Bad
R/O
* Max float in this instrument is +9,999,999,999
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
147
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.3.3 Sample and Hold Operation
The diagram below shows the operation of the sample and hold feature.
10
5
IP1
0
-5
-10
True
False
IP2
10
5
Result
0
-5
-10
Figure 14-4: Sample and Hold
148
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
14.4 Multiple Input Operator Block
The Multiple Input Operator Block simultaneously outputs the Sum, Average, Minimum and Maximum values
of up to 8 valid inputs. The outputs will be clipped to user-defined limits or be replaced by a fallback value
based on the selected fallback strategy.
Num Casc In
Num Valid Ins
Casc In
In1
In2
Sum
MultiOper
Min
Max
In3
Average
In4
Input status
In5
In6
In7
In8
Units
Res’n
Out Hi Limit
Out Lo Limit
Fallback Val
Fallback Typ
‘Num In’ determines the number of inputs made available for use. This is settable by the user and is defaulted
to two. The user should be careful not to set this number to a value higher than the desired number of inputs
as any unused inputs are seen as valid inputs to the block (zero value by default). Num Casc In and Casc In will
always be available.
‘Input Status’ gives an indication of the status of the inputs in priority order. Casc In has the highest priority,
In1 the next highest up to In8 the lowest. Should more than one input be bad then the input with the highest
priority is shown as bad. When the highest priority bad status is cleared the next highest priority bad status is
shown. When all inputs are OK a status of OK is shown.
‘Number of valid inputs’ provides a count of the number of inputs used to perform the calculation within the
block. This is required for cascaded operation and is detailed below.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
149
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.4.1 Cascaded operation
Multiple input operator blocks may be cascaded to allow operations on more than eight inputs (33 max for
four instances of the block). shows how two blocks should be configured to find the average of more than
eight inputs. If required the second block could then be cascaded to a third to provide up to eight more
inputs.
NumCascIn
MultiOper
Casc In
In1
In2
NumValid Ins
NumCascIn
Sum
Casc In
Min
In1
Max
In2
MultiOper
NumValid Ins
Sum
Min
Max
Average
Average
Input
status
Input
status
If ‘CascIn’ is has Good status, and ‘NumCascIn’ is not equal to zero we can assume that the block is in cascade
and these values are used for calculations within the block, and the value given by ‘NumCascIn’ is added to
‘NumValidIns’. When in cascade the sum, min, max and average outputs treat Casc In as an additional input to
the block. For example if Casc In is greater than any number on the rest of the inputs then its value will be
output as the max.
14.4.2 Fallback Strategy
The user is able to select the fallback strategy during config. The options are:Clip Good
The status of the outputs is always good
If an output is out of range then it is clipped to limits
If all inputs are bad, all outputs = 0 (Or clipped to limits if 0 is not within the output range)
Clip Bad
The status of all outputs is bad if one or more of the inputs are bad
If an output is out of range then it is clipped to limits and the status of that output is set to bad
If all inputs are bad, all outputs = 0 and all status’ are set to bad (Or clipped to limits if 0 is not within the
output range)
Fall Good
The status of the outputs is always good
If an output is out of range then it is set to the fallback value
If all inputs are bad, all outputs = fallback value
Fall Bad
The status of all outputs is bad if one or more of the inputs are bad
If an output is out of range then it is set to the fallback value and the status is set to bad
If all inputs are bad, all outputs are set to the fallback value and all statuses are set to bad
150
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
14.4.3 Multiple Input Operator Block Parameters
Folder – MultiOper (Multi Operator)
Sub-folders: 1 to 4
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
NumIn
CascNumIn
Number of inputs selected to use.
Number of cascaded inputs from
the previous block
The cascaded input from a
previous block
Input 1
2 to 8
0 to 255
2
0
Config
R/O
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
Uint8 (nvol)
X to X.XXX
0
R/O
0
R/O
None
X
Config
Config
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
0
Config
0
Config
0
Config
Clip Good
Config
0
R/O
0
R/O
0
R/O
0
R/O
0
R/O
0
R/O
CascIn
In 1 to In 8
Units
Resolution
OutHi Limit
Selected units for the I/O
Selected resolution of the
Outputs
Upper limit of the outputs.
OutLo Limit
Lower limit of the outputs.
Fallback Val
Value to be output depending on
Input status and fallback type
selected.
Fallback Type selected.)
Fallback Typ
NumValidIn
Sum Out
Max Out
Min Out
Average Out
Input Status
Part No HA028581
Number of inputs used in the
calculated outputs (Output)
Sum of the valid inputs (Output)
Max value of the valid inputs
(Output)
Min value of the valid inputs
(Output)
Average value of the valid inputs
(Output)
Status of the inputs (Output)
Issue 3
Sep-05
Clip Bad
Clip Good
Fall Bad
Fall Good
Upscale
DownScale
2 to 8
See 14.4.2
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
Resolution)
151
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
14.5 Eight Input Analog Multiplexers
The eight Input analogue multiplexers may be used to switch one of eight inputs to an output. It is usual to
wire inputs to a source within the controller that selects that input at the appropriate time or event.
14.5.1 Multiple Input Operator Parameters
Folder – Mux8 (8 Input Multiplexers)
Sub-folders: 1 to 4
Name
Parameter Description
Value
LowLimit
The high limit for all inputs and
the fall back value.
The low limit for all inputs and
the fall back value.
The state of the Output and
Status parameters in case of a
fault condition. This parameter
could be used in conjunction with
Fallback Val.
-99999 to High limit (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Low limit to 99999 (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Descriptions see section 14.5.1
Clip Bad
Clip Good
Fall Bad
Fall Good
Upscale
DownScale
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
resolution)
HighLimit
Fallback
Fallback Val
Select
In1 to 8
Out
Status
Used (in accordance with
Fallback) to define the output
value during fault conditions
Used to select which input value
is assigned to the output.
Input values (normally wired to
an input source)
Indicates the analogue value of
the output
Used in conjunction with Fallback
to indicate the status of the
operation. Typically, status is used
to flag fault conditions and may
be used as an interlock for other
operations.
Default
Access
Level
Conf
Conf
Conf
Conf
Input1 to Input8
Oper
-99999 to 99999 (decimal point depends on
resolution)
Between high and low limits
Oper
Good
Bad
R/O
R/O
14.5.2 Fallback
The fallback strategy will come into effect if the status of the input value is bad or if the input value is
outside the range of Input Hi and Input Lo.
In this case the fallback strategy may be configured as:Fallback Good – the output value will be the fallback value and the output status will be ‘Good’.
Fallback Bad – the output value will be the fallback value and the output status will be ‘Bad’.
Clip Good – If the input is outside a limit the output will be clipped to the limit and the status will be
‘Good’.
Clip Bad – If the input is outside a limit the output will be clipped to the limit and the status will be ‘Bad’.
Upscale – the output value will be Output Hi and the output status will be ‘Bad’.
Downscale – the output value will be Output Lo and the output status will be ‘Bad’.
152
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
15.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 15 INPUT CHARACTERISATION
15.1 Input Linearisation
The Lin16 function block converts an input signal into an output PV using a series of up to 15 straight lines
to characterise the conversion.
The function block provides the following behaviour.
1.
The Input values must be monotonic and constantly rising.
2.
To convert the MV to the PV, the algorithm will search the table of inputs until the matching
segment is found. Once found, the points either side will be used to interpolate the output value.
3.
If during the search, a point is found which is not above the previous (below for inverted) then the
search will be terminated and the segment taken from the last good point to the extreme (In HiOut Hi) see following diagram.
Out Hi
Terminated
search
Output 1 ( to 14)
Ignored data
points
Out Lo
In Lo
Input 1( to 14)
In Hi
Figure 15-1: Linearisation Example
Notes:
1.
The linearisation block works on rising inputs/rising outputs or rising inputs/falling outputs. It is
not suitable for outputs which rise and fall on the same curve.
2.
Input Lo/Output Lo and Input Hi/Output Hi are entered first to define the low and high points of
the curve. It is not necessary to define all 15 intermediate points if the accuracy is not required.
Points not defined will be ignored and a straight line fit will apply between the last point defined
and the Input Hi/Output Hi point. If the input source has a bad status (sensor break, or overrange) then the output value will also have a bad status.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
153
Engineering Handbook
1.
2.
3.
Mini8 Controller
If the input value is outside the
translated range then the
output status will indicate Bad,
and the value will be limited to
the nearest output limit.
Out Low
Note:
Out Low > Out
High
The units and resolution
parameters will be used for the
output values. The input values
resolution and units will be
specified by the source of the
wire.
First nonmonatonic
data point
If the ‘Out Low’ is higher than
the ‘Out High’ then the
translation will be inverted.
Ignored
data
points
Terminated
search
Out High
In Low
In High
Figure 15-2: How an Inverted Curve will Terminate its search when it detects non-monatonic data
15.1.1 Compensation for Sensor Non-Linearities
The custom linearisation feature can also be used to compensate for errors in the sensor or measurement
system. The intermediate points are, therefore, available in Level 1 so that known discontinuities in the
curve can be calibrated out. The diagram below shows an example of the type of discontinuity which can
occur in the linearisation of a temperature sensor.
Output Hi
eg 1000oC
Cal Point 6
Output 1 ( to 14)
Cal Point 5
Cal Point 4
Cal Point 3
Cal Point 2
Cal Point 1
Input 1 ( to 14)
Output Lo
eg 0oC
Input Hi eg 1000oC
Input Lo eg 0oC
Figure 15-3: Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities
The calibration of the sensor uses the same procedure as described above. Adjust the output (displayed)
value against the corresponding input value to compensate for any errors in the standard linearisation of the
sensor.
154
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
15.1.2 Input Linearisation Parameters
List Folder – Lin16
Sub-folders: 1 to 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Units
Units of the linearised output
None
AbsTemp
V, mV, A, mA,
PH, mmHg, psi, Bar, mBar, %RH, %, mmWG, inWG,
inWW, Ohms, PSIG, %O2, PPM, %CO2, %CP, %/sec,
RelTemp
mBar/Pa/T
Resolution
Resolution of the output value
XXXXX. XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX
In
Input measurement to linearise.
Wire to the source for the
custom linearisation
Fallback Type
The fallback strategy will come
into effect if the status of the
input value is bad or if the
input value is outside the range
of input high scale and input
low scale. In this case the
fallback strategy may be
configured as:
Between InLowLimit and InHighLimit
0
Oper
Clip Bad
ClipBad
Oper
0
Oper
Out
If the input is outside a limit the
output will be clipped to the limit
and the status will be BAD
Clip Good
If the input is outside a limit the
output will be clipped to the limit
and the status will be GOOD
Fall Bad
The output value will be the
fallback value and the output
status will be BAD
Fall Good
The output value will be the
fallback value and the output
status will be GOOD
Upscale
The output value will be output
high scale and the output status
will be BAD
DownScale
The output value will be the
output low scale and the output
status will be BAD
In the event of a bad status, the output may be configured to adopt the fallback
value. This allows the strategy to dictate a safe output in the event of a fault being
detected.
Linearisation Result
Between OutLowLimit and OutHighLimit
InLowLimit
Adjust to the low input value
-99999 to InHighLimit
0
Conf
OutLowLimit
Adjust to correspond to the
low input value
Adjust to the high input value
-99999 to OutHighLimit
0
Conf
InLowLimit to 99999
0
Conf
OutLowLimit to 99999
0
Conf
In1
Adjust to correspond to the
high input value
Adjust to the first break point
0
Oper
Out1
Adjust to correspond to input 1
0
Oper
Conf
sec, min, hrs,
FallbackType
Fallback Value
InHighLimit
OutHighLimit
…etc up to
Conf
R/O
0
In14
Adjust to the last break point
0
Oper
Out14
Adjust to correspond to input
14
Status of the block. A value of
zero indicates a healthy
conversion.
0
Oper
Status
Good
Bad
Within operating limits
A bad output may be caused by a bad
input signal (perhaps the input is in
sensor break) or an output which is
out of range
R/O
The 16 point linearisation does not require you to use all 16 points. If fewer points are required, then the
curve can be terminated by setting the first unwanted value to be less than the previous point.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
155
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Conversely if the curve is a continuously decreasing one, then it may be terminated by setting the first
unwanted point above the previous one.
15.2 Polynomial
Folder – Poly
Sub-Folders: 1 to 2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
LinType
J , K, L, R, B, N, T, S, PL2, C, PT100,
Linear, SqRoot
J
Conf
Units
To select the input type.
The linearisation type selects which of the
instruments linearisation curves is applied to the
input signal. The instrument contains a number of
thermocouple and RTD linearisations as standard.
In addition there are a number of custom
linearisations that may be downloaded using
iTools to provide linearisations of nontemperature sensors.
Units of the output
None
Conf
Resolution
Resolution of the output value
None
AbsTemp
V, mV, A, mA,
PH, mmHg, psi, Bar, mBar, %RH, %,
mmWG, inWG, inWW, Ohms, PSIG,
%O2, PPM, %CO2, %CP, %/sec,
RelTemp
mBar/Pa/T
sec, min, hrs,
XXXXX. XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX,
X.XXXX
XXXXX
Conf
In
Range of the input wired from
Out
Input Value
The input to the linearisation block
Output value
InHighScale
Input high scale
In Low to99999
0
Oper
InLowScale
Input low scale
-99999 to In High
0
Oper
OutHighScale
Output high scale
Out Low to 99999
0
Oper
OutLowScale
Output low scale
-99999 to Out High
0
Oper
Fallback Type
Fallback Type
The fallback strategy will come into effect if the
status of the input value is bad or if the input
value is outside the range of input high scale and
input low scale. In this case the fallback strategy
may be configured as:
Clip Bad
Between Out Low and Out High
Clip
Good
Fall Bad
Fall
Good
Upscale
156
Oper
R/O
If the input is outside a
limit the output will be
clipped to the limit and
the status will be BAD
If the input is outside a
limit the output will be
clipped to the limit and
the status will be
GOOD
The output value will
be the fallback value
and the output status
will be BAD
The output value will
be the fallback value
and the output status
will be GOOD
The output value will
be output high scale
and the output status
will be BAD
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Conf
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder – Poly
Name
Sub-Folders: 1 to 2
Parameter Description
Value
DownScale
FallbackValue
Status
Value to be adopted by the output in the event of
Status = Bad
Indicates the status of the linearised output:
Default
Access
Level
The output value will
be the output low scale
and the output status
will be BAD
Oper
Good
Bad
Good indicates the
value is within range
and the input is not
in sensor break.
R/O
Indicates the Value
is out of range or
the input is in
sensor break.
Note: This is also
effected by the
configured fallback
strategy
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
157
Engineering Handbook
16.
Mini8 Controller
CHAPTER 16 LOAD
The load simulation block provides styles of load which can be used to allow an instrument configuration to
be tested before connection to the process plant. In the current issue of firmware the simulated loads
available are Oven and Furnace.
16.1 Load Parameters
Folder – Load
Sub-Folders: None
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Type
Oven
Simulates the
characteristics of a
typical oven
Furnace
Simulates the
characteristics of a
typical furnace
Resolution
The type of load simulation to use. Oven is a
simple load of 3 first order lags, providing a
single process value for connection to the
control loop. Furnace consists of 12
interactive first order lags giving a slave PV,
followed by 6 interactive first order lags
giving a master PV.
The display resolution of the resultant PV Out.
Units
The Units of the resultant PV.
Conf
Gain
The gain of the load, the input power is
multiplied by gain, before use by the load.
The time constant of lag 1 in the Oven load
and slave lags (1-12) of the Furnace load. The
time constant has units of seconds.
The time constant of lag 2/3 of the Oven load
and master lags (13-18) of the furnace load.
Attenuation Between PV1 and PV2 Stages.
Used in the advanced furnace load and
defines an attenuation factor between the
slave and master lags
Defines the relative gain when cooling is
requested, applied to the input power when
the power requested is < 0.
The load function block provides 2 PV
outputs, sensor fault can be used to generate
a fault condition on these PV's such that the
bad status is passed along a wire to be
consumed by another block such as the loop.
The sensor fault can be confiured as:
Oper
TimeConst1
TimeConst2
Attenuation
(Furnace load
only)
Ch 2 Gain
PVFault
PV Out1
PV Out2
(Furnace load
only)
LoopOutCh1
158
Default
Access
Level
Oven
Conf
Conf
Oper
Oper
Oper
Oper
None
No fault conditions.
PVOut1
Fault on the first output
(slave).
PVOut2
Fault on the second
output (master).
Both
A fault on first and
second outputs (master
and slave).
Oper
First Process Value
The PV in Process Value an Oven load or the
Slave PV in a furnace load.
Second Process Value
Second process value, lagged from PVOut1,
used as a cascade master input. The Master
PV in the Furnace load.
Loop output channel 1 input.
The output of the loop as wired to the load
simulation, this is the power requested of the
load. This can be used as the heat demand.
R/O
R/O
Oper
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder – Load
Sub-Folders: None
Name
Parameter Description
LoopOutCh2
Loop output channel 2 input.
The output of the loop as wired to the load
simulation, this is the power requested of the
load. This can be used as the cool demand.
Noise Added to PV
This is used to make the PV of the load
appear noisy, and hence more like a real
measurement.
Process offset
Used to configure an offset in the process. In
a temperature application this could
represent the ambient operating temperature
of the plant.
Noise
Offset
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Value
Default
Access
Level
Oper
Off
1 to
99999
The amount of noise is
specified in engineering
units.
Off
Oper
Oper
159
Engineering Handbook
17.
Mini8 Controller
CHAPTER 17 CONTROL LOOP SET UP
The Mini8 has up to 16 loops of control. Each Loop has two outputs, Channel 1 and Channel 2, each of
which can be configured for PID or On/Off.
The control function block is divided into a number of sections the parameters of which are all listed under
the Folder ‘Loop’.
The ‘Loop’ folder contains sub-folders for each section as shown diagrammatically below.
17.1 What is a Control Loop?
An example of a heat only temperature control loop is shown below:Control
Method
PID/OnOff
Setpoint
Generator
Control
Output
Error
Power
Regulator
Control
Loop
PV
Simplified Control Function Block
Process
under
control
Heater
Measured
temperature
Figure 17-1: Single Loop Single Channel
The actual temperature measured at the process (PV) is connected to the input of the controller. This is
compared with a setpoint (or required) temperature (SP). If there is an error between the set and measured
temperature the controller calculates an output value to call for heating or cooling. The calculation
depends on the process being controlled but normally uses a PID algorithm. The output(s) from the
controller are connected to devices on the plant which cause the heating (or cooling) demand to be
adjusted which in turn is detected by the temperature sensor. This is referred to as the control loop.
160
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.2 Loop Parameters - Main
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-Folder: Main
Name
Parameter Description
Value
AutoMan
To select Auto or Manual operation.
Auto
Man
PV
Inhibit
TargetSP
WorkingSP
ActiveOut
IntHold
The process variable input value. This is
typically wired from an analogue input.
Used to stop the loop controlling. If
enabled the loop will stop control and the
output of the loop will be set to the safe
output value. On exit from inhibit the
transfer will be bumpless.
This may be wired to an external source
The value of setpoint at which the control
loop is aiming. It may come from a
number of different sources, such as
internal SP and remote SP.
The current value of the setpoint being
used by the control loop. It may come
from a number of different sources, such
as internal SP and Remote SP. The
working setpoint is always read-only as it
is derived from other sources.
The actual output of the loop before it is
split into the channel 1 and channel 2
outputs.
Stops Integral action
Automatic (closed loop)
operation
Manual (output power adjusted
by the user) operation
Default
Access
Level
Auto
Oper
Range of the input source
No
Inhibit disabled
Yes
Inhibit enabled
Oper
No
Oper
Between setpoint limits
Oper
Between setpoint limits
R/O
R/O
No
Oper
Default
Access
Level
PID
Conf
Rev
Conf
Eng
Conf
17.3 Loop Set up
These parameters configure the type of control.
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: Setup
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Ch1
ControlType
Selects the channel 1 control
algorithm. You may select
different algorithms for channels
1 and 2. In temperature control
applications, Ch1 is usually the
heating channel, Ch2 is the
cooling channel.
Control type for channel 2
Off
Channel turned off
OnOff
On/off control
PID
3 term or PID control
Control Action
Rev
Reverse acting. The output increases
when the PV is below SP. This is the
best setting for heating control.
Dir
Direct acting. The output increases
when the PV is above SP. This is the
best setting for cooling control
EngUnits
Engineering units eg C or F
Percent
Per cent of loop span (range Hi Range Lo)
Ch2
ControlType
Control Action
PB Units
Part No HA028581
Proportional band units.
Issue 3
Sep-05
161
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: Setup
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Derivative
Type
Selects whether the derivative
acts only on PV changes or on
Error (either PV or Setpoint
changes).
PV
Only changes in PV cause changes to
the derivative output.
Error
Changes to either PV or SP will cause
a derivative output.
Default
Access
Level
PV
Conf
The above two parameters appear if either Ch1 or Ch2 are configured for PID control
17.3.1 Types of Control Loop
17.3.1.1 On/Off Control
On/Off control simply turns heating power on when the PV is below setpoint and off when it is above
setpoint. If cooling is used, cooling power is turned on when the PV is above setpoint and off when it is
below. The outputs of such a controller will normally be connected to relays – hysteresis may be set as
described in the Alarms section to prevent relay chatter or to provide a delay in the control output action.
17.3.1.2 PID Control
PID control, also referred to as ‘Three Term Control’, is a technique used to achieve stable straight line
control at the required setpoint. The three terms are:
P = Proportional band
I = Integral time
D = Derivative time
The output from the controller is the sum of the contributions from these three terms. The combined
output is a function of the magnitude and duration of the error signal, and the rate of change of the process
value. It is possible to turn off integral and derivative terms and control on only proportional, proportional
plus integral or proportional plus derivative.
17.4 PID Control
The PID controller consists of the following parameters:-
Parameter
Proportional
Band ‘PB’
162
Meaning or Function
The proportional term, in display units or %, delivers an output that is proportional to the size of
the error signal.
Integral Time ‘Ti’
Removes steady state control offsets by ramping the output up or down in proportion to the
amplitude and duration of the error signal.
Derivative Time
‘Td’
Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate of change in the measured value. It is
used to prevent overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV rapidly if there is a sudden
change in demand.
High Cutback
‘CBH’
The number of display units, above setpoint, at which the controller will increase the output power,
in order to prevent undershoot on cool down.
Low Cutback
‘CBL’
The number of display units, below setpoint, at which the controller will cutback the output power,
in order to prevent overshoot on heat up.
Relative Cool
Gain ‘R2G’
Only present if cooling has been configured. Sets the cooling proportional band, which equals the
heat proportional band value divided by the cool gain value.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.4.1 Proportional Term
The proportional term delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the error signal. An example
of this is shown below, for a temperature control loop, where the proportional band is 10OC and an error of
3OC will produce an output of 30%.
Output
Proportional
band
100%
30%
10OC
3OC error
0%
Temperature
Setpoint
Figure 17-2: Proportional Action
Proportional only controllers will, in general, provide stable straight line control, but with an offset
corresponding to the point at which the output power equals the heat loss from the system.
The proportional term may be set in engineering units, as shown in the above example, or as a percentage
of the controller range. In the above example, if the inout range is 0 to 1000oC the proportional band is set
to 1%.
17.4.2 Integral Term
The integral term removes steady state control offset by ramping the output up or down in proportion to
the amplitude and duration of the error signal. The ramp rate (reset rate) is the integral time constant, and
must be longer than the time constant of the process to avoid oscillations.
17.4.3 Derivative Term
The derivative term is proportional to the rate of change of the temperature or process value. It is used to
prevent overshoot and undershoot of the setpoint by introducing an anticipatory action. The derivative
term has another beneficial effect. If the process value falls rapidly, due, for example, an oven door being
opened during operation, and a wide proportional band is set the response of a PI controller can be quite
slow. The derivative term modifies the proportional band according to this rate of change having the effect
of narrowing the proportional band. Derivative action, therefore, improves the recovery time of a process
automatically when the process value changes rapidly.
Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error. For applications such as furnace control, it
is common practice to select Derivative on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of
output following a change in setpoint.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
163
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
17.4.4 High and Low Cutback
While the PID parameters are optimised for steady state control at or near the setpoint, high and low
cutback parameters are used to reduce overshoot and undershoot for large step changes in the process.
They respectively set the number of degrees above and below setpoint at which the controller will start to
increase or cutback the output power.
Undershoot
Overshoot
To reduce the overshoot
increase the low cutback value
To reduce the undershoot
decrease the low cutback value
Figure 17-3: High and Low Cutback
17.4.5 Integral action and manual reset
In a full three-term controller (that is, a PID controller), the integral term automatically removes steady state
errors from the setpoint. If the controller is set as a PD controller, the integral term will be set to ‘OFF’.
Under these conditions the measured value may not settle precisely at setpoint. The Manual Reset
parameter (M R ) represents the value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. You
must set this value manually in order to remove the steady state error.
17.4.6 Relative Cool Gain
The gain of channel 2 control output, relative to the channel 1 control output.
Relative Ch2 Gain compensates for the different quantities of energy needed to heat, as opposed to that
needed to cool, a process. For example: water cooling applications might require a relative cool gain of 4
(cooling is 4 times faster than the heat-up process).
(This parameter is set automatically when Autotune is used). A nominal setting of around 4 is often used.
17.4.7 Loop Break Time
The loop is considered to be broken if the PV does not respond to a change in the output. Since the time
of response will vary from process to process the Loop Break Time parameter allows a time to be set before
a loop break alarm is initiated. In these circumstances the output power will drive to high or low limit. For
a PID controller, if the PV has not moved by 0.5 x Pb in the loop break time the loop is considered to be in
break. The loop break time is set by the Autoune, a typical value is 12 x Td. For an On/Off controller Loop
Break Time is not shown and loop break alarm is inhibited.
17.4.8 Cooling Algorithm
The method of cooling may vary from application to application.
For example, an extruder barrel may be cooled by forced air (from a fan), or by circulating water or oil
around a jacket. The cooling effect will be different depending on the method. The cooling algorithm may
be set to linear where the controller output changes linearly with the PID demand signal, or it may be set to
water, oil or fan where the output changes non-linearly against the PID demand. The algorithm provides
optimum performance for these methods of cooling.
164
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.4.9 Gain Scheduling
Gain scheduling is the automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values and another. It may be
used in very non-linear systems where the control process exhibits large changes in response time or
sensitivity, see diagram below. This may occur, for example, over a wide range of PV, or between heating
and cooling where the rates of response may be significantly different. The number of sets depends on the
non-linearity of the system. Each PID set is chosen to operate over a limited (approximately linear) range.
In the Mini8 controller, this is done at a preset strategy defined by the parameter ‘Scheduler Type’. The
choices are:
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Type
Off
Set
SP
PV
Error
OP
6
Rem Sched IP
Description
Just one fixed set of PID values
The PID set can be selected manually or from a digital input
The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the SP
The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the PV
The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the error
The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the OP
demand
The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value from a remote
source for example, a digital input
The Mini8 controller has three sets of PID values for each loop – the maximum number, which you may wish
to use, is set by ‘Num Sets’ parameter.
SP or PV or OP
2 / 3 Boundary
1 / 2 Boundary
Controlled
Variable
PID Set 1
PID Set 2
PID Set 3
Figure 17-4: Gain Scheduling in a Non-Linear System
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
165
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
17.4.10 PID Parameters
Control loops must be specifically ordered – Order Code MINI8 – 4LP, 8LP or 16LP. To enable a loop place one of the
Loop function blocks on the graphical wiring page.
Folder – Loop
Sub-folders: Loop1.PID to Loop16.PID
Name
Parameter Description
Value
SchedulerType
To choose the type of gain
scheduling
Off
Set
SP
PV
Error
OP
Rem
Num Sets
Scheduler
RemoteInput
Active Set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
ProportionalBand
1, 2, 3
IntegralTime 1, 2,
3
DerivativeTime 1,
2, 3
RelCh2Gain 1, 2,
3
CutbackHigh 1, 2,
3
CutbackLow 1, 2,
3
ManualReset 1,
2, 3
LoopBreakTime
1, 2, 3
OutputHi 1, 2, 3
OutputLo 1, 2, 3
166
See above for explanation
Default
Access
Level
Off
Oper
Parameters displayed will vary
depending on type of scheduling
selected.
Selects the number of PID sets
to present.
Allows the lists to be reduced if
the process does not require
the full range of PID sets.
Scheduler Remote Input
1 to 3
1
Oper
1 to 3 (if SchedulerType is ‘Remote’)
1
R/O
Currently working set
Set1
Set2
Set3
Set1
R/O
except
type ’Set’
Sets the level at which PID set 1
changes to PID set 2
Sets the level at which PID set 2
changes to PID set 3
Proportional band
Set1/Set2/Set3
Integral term Set1/Set2/Set3
Range units
0
Oper
Range units
0
Oper
0 to 99999 Eng units
300
Oper
360s
Oper
Derivative term Set1/Set2/Set3
60s
Oper
Relative cool gain
Set1/Set2/Set3
Cutback high Set1/Set2/Set3
1
Oper
Auto
Oper
Cutback low Set1/Set2/Set3
Auto
Oper
Manual reset Set1/Set2/Set3.
This must be set to 0.0 when
the integral term is set to a
value
Loop break time Set1/Set2/Set3
0.0
Oper
100
Oper
Output High Limit
Set1/Set2/Set3
Output Low Limit
Set1/Set2/Set3
100
Oper
-100
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.5 Tuning
In tuning, you match the characteristics (PID parameters) of the controller to those of the process being
controlled in order to obtain good control. Good control means:
Stable, ‘straight-line’ control of the PV at setpoint without fluctuation
No overshoot, or undershoot, of the PV setpoint
Quick response to deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances, thereby rapidly restoring
the PV to the setpoint value.
Tuning involves calculating and setting the value of the parameters listed in Section 17.4.
17.5.1 Automatic Tuning
This controller uses a one-shot tuner that automatically sets up the initial values of the parameters listed in
Section 17.4.
17.5.2 One-shot Tuning
The ‘one-shot’ tuner works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in the measured
value. From the amplitude and period of the oscillation, it calculates the tuning parameter values.
If the process cannot tolerate full heating or cooling being applied, then the levels can be restricted by
setting the high power limit (‘Output Hi’) and low power limit (‘Output Lo’ ). However, the measured value
must oscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values.
A One-shot Tune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only once during the initial
commissioning of the process. However, if the process under control subsequently becomes unstable
(because its characteristics have changed), you can re-tune again for the new conditions.
It is best to start tuning with the process at ambient conditions and with the SP close to the normal
operating level. This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately the low cutback and high cutback values
which restrict the amount of overshoot, or undershoot.
Typical automatic tuning cycle
PV
Setpoint
Autotune starts 1 minute after being turned on to determine steady
state conditions.
Tuning normally takes place at a PV which has a value of setpoint x 0.7.
The power is automatically turned on and off to cause oscillations.
From the results the PID, cutback & relative cool values are calculated
Time
17.5.3 Calculation of the cutback values
Low cutback and High cutback are values that restrict the amount of overshoot, or undershoot, that occur
during large step changes in PV (for example, under start-up conditions).
If either low cutback, or high cutback, is set to ‘Auto’ the values are fixed at three times the proportional
band, and are not changed during automatic tuning.
To tune the cutback values, first set them to values other than Auto, and then perform a tune as usual.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
167
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
17.5.4 Manual Tuning
If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, you can tune the controller manually. There
are a number of standard methods for manual tuning. The one described here is the Ziegler-Nichols
method.
With the process at its normal running conditions:
Set the Integral Time and the Derivative Time to OFF.
Set High Cutback and Low Cutback to ‘Auto’.
Ignore the fact that the PV may not settle precisely at the setpoint.
If the PV is stable, reduce the proportional band so that the PV just starts to oscillate. If PV is already
oscillating, increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating. Allow enough time between each
adjustment for the loop to stabilise. Make a note of the proportional band value ‘PB’ and the period of
oscillation ‘T’.
Set the proportional band, integral time and derivative time parameter values according to the calculations
given in the table below:-
Type of control
Proportional band
(PB)
Integral time (Ti)
seconds
Derivative time
(Td) seconds
Proportional only
2xPB
OFF
OFF
P + I control
2.2xPB
0.8xT
OFF
P + I + D control
1.7xPB
0.5xT
0.12xT
17.5.5 Setting the Cutback Values
The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of
overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large step changes in PV, then manually set the
cutback parameters.
Proceed as follows:
Set the low and high cutback values to three proportional bandwidths (that is to say, ‘CBH’= ‘CBL’ = 3 x
PB).
Note the level of overshoot, or undershoot, that occurs for large PV changes (see the diagrams below).
In example (a) increase Low Cutback by the undershoot value. In example (b) reduce Low Cutback by the
overshoot value.
Example (a)
Example (b)
Where the PV approaches setpoint from above, you can set High Cutback in a similar manner.
168
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.5.6 Multi-zone applications.
The tuning of one loop can be unduly influenced by the controlling effect of adjacent zone(s). Ideally the
zone either side of the one being tuned should be turned OFF, or put in manual with the power level set to
keep its temperature at about the usual operating level.
17.5.7 Tune Parameters
Folder – Loop.Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: Tune
Name
Parameter Description
Value
AutoTune
Enable
To start self tuning
Off
On
OutputHigh
Limit
Set this to limit the maximum
output power level which the
controller will supply during the
tuning process.
If the high output power limit set
in the output list is lower the
autotune high limit will be
clipped to this value.
Set this to limit the minimum %
output power level which the
controller will supply during the
tuning process.
If the low output power limit set
in the output list is higher the
autotune low limit will be clipped
to this value.
Shows if self tuning is in progress
OFF
R/O
Shows the progress of the self
tuning
Time in the particular stage
Reset
R/O
OutputLow
Limit
State
Stage
Stage Time
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Default
Access
Level
Stop
Oper
Between Low Output and 100.0
!00.0
Oper
Between High Output and 0.0
0.0
Oper
Stop
Start
R/O
169
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
17.6 Setpoint Function Block
For each of the 16 loops, the controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint that may come from a number of
alternative sources. This is the value ultimately used to control the process variable in each loop.
The working setpoint may be derived from:1.
SP1 or SP2, both of which are individually set, can be selected by an external signal or via the SPSelect
parameter over communications.
2.
From an external (remote) analogue source
3.
The output of a programmer function block and will, therefore, vary in accordance with the program in
use.
The setpoint function block also provides the facility to limit the rate of change of the setpoint before it is
applied to the control algorithm. It will also provide upper and lower limits. These are defined as setpoint
limits for the local setpoints and instrument range high and low for other setpoint sources. All setpoints are
ultimately subject to a limit of range hi and range lo.
User configurable methods for tracking are available, such that the transfer between setpoints and between
operational modes will not cause a bump in the setpoint.
17.6.1 Setpoint Function Block
PSP High Lim
Programmer SP
PSP1
PSP2
PSP3
Prog
PSP Low Lim
Enable Rem SP
Range Max
Local
Local
SP2 High Limit
Target SP
Remote
Range Min
SP2
SP2 Enab
SP2 Low Limit
SP1 Enab
SP1 High Limit
SP1
SP1 Low Limit
Trim High
Local SP +
RemoteTrim
+
Trim Low
Remote only
Remote SP
Local Trim
+
Remote Type
Remote +
Local Trim
Other inputs:
PV
Ramp rate
Servo
SP changed
Range
Max
Target SP
Working SP
Ramp
Range
Min
Ramp
Status
Figure 17-5: Setpoint Function Block
170
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.6.2 SP Tracking
When setpoint tracking is enabled and the local setpoint is selected, the local setpoint is copied to ‘TrackSP’.
Tracking now ensures that the alternate SP follows or tracks this value. When the alternate setpoint is
selected it initially takes on the tracked value thus ensuring that no bump takes place. The new setpoint is
then adopted gradually. A similar action takes place when returning to the local setpoint.
17.6.3 Manual Tracking
When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP tracks the PV. When the
controller resumes automatic control there will be no step change in the resolved SP.
17.6.4 Rate Limit
Rate limit will control the rate of change of setpoint. It is enabled by the ‘Rate’ parameter. If this is set to
Off then any change made to the setpoint will be effective immediately. If it is set to a value then any
change in the setpoint will be effected at the value set in units per minute. Rate limit also acts on SP2 and
when switching between SP1 and SP2.
When rate limit is active the ‘RateDone’ parameter will display ‘No’. When the setpoint has been reached
this parameter will change to ‘Yes’.
When ‘Rate’ is set to a value (other than Off) an additional parameter ‘SPRate Disable’ is displayed which
allows the setpoint rate limit to be turned off and on without the need to adjust the ‘Rate’ parameter
between Off and a value.
17.6.5 Setpoint Parameters
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: SP
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Range High
Full range of the input type
SP Select
The Range limits provide a set of absolute
maximums and minimums for setpoints
within the control loop.
Any derived setpoints are ultimately clipped
to be within the Range limits.
If the Proportional Band is configured as %
of Span, the span is derived from the Range
limits.
Select local or alternate setpoint
SP1
Primary setpoint for the controller
SP2
Setpoint 2 is the secondary setpoint of the
controller. It is often used as a standby
setpoint.
Maximum limit allowed for the local
setpoints
Minimum limit allowed for the local
setpoints
To enable the alternative setpoint to be
used. This may be wired to a source such
as the programmer Run input.
This may be wired to an alternative source
such as the programmer or remote setpoint
Range Low
SP HighLimit
SP LowLimit
Alt SP Select
Alt SP
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Default
Access
Level
Conf
Conf
SP1
Setpoint 1
SP2
Setpoint 2
Between SP high and SP low limits
SP1
Oper
Oper
Oper
Between Range Hi and Range Lo
Oper
Oper
No
Alternative setpoint disabled
Yes
Alternative setpoint enabled
Oper
Oper
171
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: SP
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Rate
Limits the maximum rate at which the
working setpoint can change.
The rate limit may be used to protect the
load from thermal shock which may be
caused by large step changes in setpoint.
Flag which indicates when the setpoint is
changing or completed
Off or 0.1 to 9999.9 engineering units
per minute
Off
Oper
Rate Disable
Setpoint rate disable
SP Trim
Trim is an offset added to the setpoint. The
trim may be either positive or negative, the
range of the trim may be restricted by the
trim limits
Setpoint trims may be used in a
retransmission system. A master zone may
retransmit the setpoint to the other zones,
a local trim may be applied to each zone to
produce a profile along the length of the
machine
Setpoint trim high limit
RateDone
SPTrim
HighLimit
SPTrim
LowLimit
ManualTrack
SP Track
Track PV
Track SP
172
No
Setpoint changing
Yes
Complete
No
Enabled
Yes
Disabled
R/O
Oper
Between SP Trim Hi and SP Trim Lo
Oper
Oper
Setpoint trim low limit
To enable manual tracking. When the loop
is switched from Manual to Auto, the
Setpoint is set to the current PV. This is
useful if the load is started in Manual Mode,
then later switched to Auto to maintain the
operating point.
Setpoint tracking ensures bumpless transfer
in setpoint when switching between a local
and an alternate setpoint such as the
programmer.
This enables the tracking interface provided
by TrackPV and TrackVal, which is used by
the programmer and other setpoint
providers external to the control loop
The programmer tracks the PV when it is
servoing or tracking.
Manual Tracking Value.
The SP to track for manual tracking.
Oper
Off
Manual tracking disabled
On
Manual tracking enabled
Off
Setpoint tracking disabled
On
Setpoint tracking enabled
R/O
Conf
R/O
R/O
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.7 Output Function Block
The output function block allows you to set up output conditions from the control block, such as output
limits, hysteresis, output feedforward, behaviour in sensor break, etc.
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: OP
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Output High
Limit
Maximum output power delivered by
channels 1 and 2.
By reducing the high power limit, it is
possible to reduce the rate of change of the
process, however, care should be taken as
reducing the power limit will reduce the
controllers ability to react to disturbance.
Minimum (or maximum negative) output
power delivered by channels 1 and 2
Channel 1 (Heat) output.
The Ch1 output is the positive power values
(0 to Output Hi) used by the heat output.
Typically this is wired to the control output
(time proportioning or DC output).
The Ch2 output is negative portion of the
control output (0 – Output Lo) for
heat/cool applications. It is inverted to be a
positive number so that it can be wired into
one of the outputs (time proportioning or
DC outputs).
Ch1/Ch2 Deadband is a gap in percent
between output 1 going off and output 2
coming on and vice versa.
For on/off control this is taken as a
percentage of the hysteresis.
Limits the rate at which the output from the
PID can change in % change per second.
Output rate limit is useful in preventing
rapid changes in output from damaging the
process or the heater elements.
Output rate disable
Between Output Lo and 100.0%
100.0
Oper
Between Output Hi and -100.0%
-100.0
Output Low
Limit
Ch1 Out
Ch2 Out
Ch2 DeadBand
Rate
Rate Disable
Ch1 OnOff
Hysteresis
Ch2 OnOff
Hysteresis
SensorBreak
Mode
Safe OP Val
SbrkOp
Part No HA028581
Channel hysteresis only shown when
channel 1 is configured as OnOff.
Hysteresis sets the difference between
output on and output off to prevent (relay)
chatter.
Defines the action taken if the Process
Variable is bad, i.e. the sensor has failed.
This can be configured as hold, in which
case the output of the loop is held at its last
good value. Alternately the output can
switch to a safe output power defined at
configuration.
Sets the output level to be adopted when
loop is inhibited
Sets the output level to be adopted when in
sensor break condition.
Issue 3
Sep-05
Between output Hi and Output Lo
R/O
Between output Hi and Output Lo
R/O
Off to 100.0%
Off
Oper
Off to 9999.9 engineering units per
minute
Off
Oper
No
Enabled
Yes
Disabled
Oper
0.0 to 200.0
10.0
Oper
0.0 to 200.0
10.0
Oper
Safe
Oper
Between output Hi and Output Lo
0
Oper
Between output Hi and Output Lo
0
Oper
Safe
To select the level set by
‘Safe OP’
Hold
To hold the current output
level at the point when
sensor break occurs
173
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Folder – Loop.1 to Loop.16
Sub-folder: OP
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Manual Mode
Selects the mode of manual operation.
Track
Step
Default
In auto the manual output
tracks the control output
such that a change to
manual mode will not
result in a bump in the
output.
Access
Level
Oper
on transition to manual the
output will be the manual
op value as last set by the
operator.
ManualOutVal
Cool Type
The output when the loop is in manual.
Note: In manual mode the controller will
still limit the maximum power to the power
limits, however, it could be dangerous if the
instrument is left unattended at a high
power setting. It is important that the over
range alarms are configured to protect your
process.
We recommend that all processes are fitted
with an independent over range "policeman"
Selects the type of cooling channel
characterisation to be used. Can be
configured as water, oil or fan cooling.
Between output Hi and Output Lo
R/O
Linear
Conf
Feedforward type
The following four parameters appear if FF
Type ≠ None
None
No signal fed forward
Remote
A remote signal fed
forward
SP
Setpoint fed forward
PV
PV fed forward
Oil
Water
These are set to match the
type of cooling medium
applicable to the process
Fan
FeedForward
Type
FeedForward
Gain
FeedForward
Offset
FeedForward
Trim Limit
FF_Rem
FeedForward
Val
TrackOutVal
Track Enable
RemOPL
RemOPH
174
Defines the gain of the feedforward value,
the feed forward value is multiplied by the
gain
Defines the offset of the feedforward value
this is added to the scaled feedforward.
Feedforward trim limits the effect of the
PID output.
Defines symmetrical limits around the PID
output, such that this value is applied to the
feedforward signal as a trim.
Remote Feedforward signal. Allows an
another signal to be used as Feedforward.
None
Conf
Oper
Oper
This is not affected by FeedForward
Gain or Offset
R/O
The calculated Feedforward Value.
Value for the loop output to track when OP
Track is Enabled.
When enabled, the output of the loop will
follow the track output value. The loop will
bumplessly return to control when tracking
is turned off.
Remote output low limit.
Can be used to limit the output of the loop
from a remote source or calculation. This
must always be within the main limits.
Remote output high limit
Conf
R/O
Off
Disabled
On
Enabled
Oper
-100.0 to 100.0
Oper
-100.0 to 100.0
Oper
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
17.7.1 Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband
For temperature control ‘Loop.1.Control Action’ will be set to ‘Reverse’. For a PID controller this means that the
heater power decreases as the PV increases. For an on/off controller output 1 (usually heat) will be on (100%) when
PV is below the setpoint and output 2 (usually cool) will be on when PV is above the setpoint
Hysteresis applies to on/off control only. It defines the difference in temperature between the output switching off
and switching back on again. The examples below show the effect in a heat/cool controller.
Deadband (Ch2 DeadB) can operate on both on/off control or PID control where it has the effect of widening the
period when no heating or cooling is applied. However, in PID control its effect is modified by both the integral and
derivative terms. Deadband might be used in PID control, for example, where actuators take time to complete their
cycle thus ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same time. Deadband is likely to be used,
therefore, in on/off control only. The second example below adds a deadband of 20 to the above example.
HYST.C
Heating and Cooling
Type both on/off
SP 300oC
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300oC
Control Action = reverse
Heating Hysteresis = 8oC
Cooling Hysteresis =
10oC
Deadband = OFF
OP1 On
Heating 100%
No OP
OP2 On
Cooling 100%
Heating off
at SP
(300oC)
Cooling on at
SP + HYST.C
(310oC)
Cooling off
at SP
(300oC)
Heating on at
SP – HYST.H
(292oC)
HYST.C
Heating and Cooling Type
both on/off
D.BAND
SP 300oC
Setpoint = 300oC
HYST.H
Control Action = reverse
Heating Hysteresis = 8oC
Cooling Hysteresis = 10oC
Deadband 50% of cooling
hysteresis = 5oC
OP1 On
Heating 100%
No OP
OP2 On
Cooling 100%
Power deadband
Heating
off at SP
(300oC)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Cooling on at
SP + HYST.C
(310oC)
Cooling off
at D.BAND
(305oC)
Heating on at
SP – HYST.H
(292oC)
175
Engineering Handbook
18.
Mini8 Controller
SETPOINT PROGRAMMER
In a setpoint programmer you can set up a profile in the controller in which the setpoint varies in a predetermined way over a period of time. Temperature is a very common application where it is required to
‘ramp’ the process value from one level to another over a set period of time.
The Program is divided into a flexible number of Segments - each being of a single time duration.
It is often necessary to switch external devices at particular times during the program. Up to eight digital
‘event’ outputs can be programmed to operate during those segments.
An example of a program and two event outputs is shown below.
Program
PV
Segment
Segment 1
Time
Profile
Setpoint
Segment 1
Target
Start (Run)
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
Time
1
2
8 X Digital Events
Figure 18-1: A Setpoint Program
18.1.1
Time to Target Programmer
Each segment consists of a single duration parameter and a set of target values for the profiled variables.
1.
The duration specifies the time that the segment takes to change the profiled variables from their
current values to the new targets.
2.
A dwell type segment is set up by leaving the target setpoint at the previous value.
3.
A Step type segment is set up by setting the segment time to zero.
A program with all segments configured as Time-to-Target is shown below.
Setpoint
100
Time
Time
Time
Time
4 min
3 min
4 min
2 min
50
0
Time
Figure 18-2: Time to Target Programmer
176
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
18.1.2
Engineering Handbook
Ramp Rate Programmer
A ramp rate programmer specifies it's ramp segments as maximum setpoint changes per time unit.
Each segment can be specified by the operator as Ramp Rate, Dwell or Step.
1. Ramp Rate – the setpoint changes at a rate in units/time
2. Dwell – the time period is set – there is no need to set the target value as this is inherited from the
previous segment
3. Step – specify target setpoint only – the controller will use that setpoint when the segment is reached
The diagram below shows an example of a ramp rate programmer.
Setpoint
100
Ramp
Dwell
Ramp
Ramp
50
0
25 per min
3 min
12.5 per min
Figure 18-3: Ramp Rate Programmer
25 min
Time
18.2 Mini8 Programmer Block(s)
Mini8 Version 2.xx have 8 programmer blocks available. Each of these blocks has one program of up to 16
segments. One block may be wired to all 16 loops or up to 8 loops may have their own programmer block.
In this situation Loop 1, Programmer block 1 and program 1 are associated together, Loop 2, Programmer
block 2 and program 2 are associated together, and so on up to Loop 8, Programmer block 8 and program 8
being associated together.
Mini8 Version 1.xx have a single programmer block. The total number of segments available is 200 or 50
per program and it is possible to store up to 50 separate programs. Parameter tables of this version are
included in Appendix D.
Note: Version 1.xx Mini8 clone files with programs included will not load correctly into a version 2.xx
Mini8.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
177
Engineering Handbook
18.3
Mini8 Controller
Segment Types
Depending on the type of program configured, a segment may be set as:-
18.3.1
Rate
A Ramp segment provides a controlled change of setpoint from an original to a target
setpoint. The duration of the ramp is determined by the rate of change specified. Two
styles of ramp are possible in the range, Ramp-Rate or Time-To-Target.
The segment is specified by the target setpoint and the desired ramp rate. The ramp rate
parameter is presented in engineering units (oC, oF, Eng.) per real time units (Seconds,
Minutes or Hours). If the units are changed, all ramp rates are re-calculated to the new units and clipped if
necessary
18.3.2
Dwell
The setpoint remains constant for a specified period at the specified target. The operating
setpoint of a dwell is inherited from the previous segment.
18.3.3
Step
The setpoint changes instantaneously from its current value to a new value at the beginning
of a segment. A Step segment has a minimum duration of 1 second.
18.3.4
Time
A time segment defines the duration of the segment. In this case the target setpoint is defined and the time
taken to reach this value. A dwell period is set by making the target setpoint the same value as the previous
setpoint.
18.3.5
GoBack
Go Back allows segments in a program to be
repeated a set number of times. The diagram
shows an example of a program which is
required to repeat the same section a number
of times and then continue the program.
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 7
Segments 3 to 6
At this point Go Back To
segment 3
When planning a program it is advisable to
ensure that the end and start setpoints of the
program are the same otherwise it will step to
the different levels. A Go Back segment is
defined when editing a program.
Segment 6 is defined as a
Go Back segment
This section is repeated ‘n’
times
‘Goback Seg’ specifies the segment to go back to
‘Goback Cycles’ specifies the number of times the goback loop is executed
Overlapping Goback loops are disallowed
Note 1. If a second or more ‘Go Back’ segments
are created, they cannot return to a segment
before the previous ‘Go Back’ segment as shown.
In this diagram a Go Back segment can be
created from 3 to 2 or 1. Go Back segments can
also be created from 7 to 6 or 5 or 4 but not
from 7 to 2 or 1
Not
allowable
OK
1
4
OK
2
3 - Go Back
OK
OK
OK
5
6
7 - Go Back
Segments
178
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
18.3.6
Engineering Handbook
Wait
Wait specifies the criterion for which a segment cannot proceed to the next segment. Any segment can be
defined as ‘Wait’ in the ‘Program Edit’ page. The next parameter is then ‘Wait For’ and here you define the
criterion.
‘Wait For’ criteria:None
No action
PrgIn1
Wait until Input 1 is true
PrgIn2
Wait until Input 2 is true
PrgIn1n2
Wait until Input 1 AND Input 2 are true
PrgIn1or2
Wait until Input 1 OR Input 2 is true
PVWaitIP Wait until PV has met the criteria against the parameter ‘WaitVal’ as shown:
‘Wait For’ set to ‘PVWaitIP’
PVWait
Abs Hi
Dev Lo
Abs Lo
Dev Hi
PSP = 100
‘WaitVal’ = 5
Segment will wait until
PVWaitIP >= 5
PVWaitIP >= 95
PVWaitIP <= 5
PVWaitIP <= 105
Example where the temperature must have reached 550 °C before the program continues:
This and subsequent screen shots are from the Programmer editor in iTools.
Wait segments do not have Events or Holdback.
18.3.7
End
A program may contain one End segment. This allows the program to be truncated to the number of
segments required.
The end segment can be configured to have an indefinite dwell at the last target setpoint or to reset to the
start of the program or to go to a defined level of power output (SafeOP). This is selectable by the user.
If a number of program cycles are specified for the program, then the End segment is not executed until the
last cycle has completed
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
179
Engineering Handbook
18.4
Mini8 Controller
Output Events
Program segments have configurable events. ‘Wait’ ‘GoBack’ and ‘End’ segments do not have events.
There are up to 8 digital events, PV Events and Time Events.
18.4.1 Digital Events
These are digital flags which can be set on or off for each of the segments.
These are enabled by setting Programmer.n.Setup.MaxEvents to the required maximum number of events
(>0 and <=8).
Clicking the icon on the right in an ‘EventOuts’ cell opens digital events window:
In this example Programmer.n.Setup.MaxEvents has been set to 4. Tick the boxes of the outputs that are
required. The value shown is the bit mask for the outputs (10 = 2 + 8 I.e. outputs 2 and 4)
The EventOuts row above shows this setup for each segment.
180
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
18.4.2
Engineering Handbook
PV Event & User Value
PV Events are essentially a simplified analogue alarm per segment based on the programmer PV input. For
this feature the Programmer.n.Setup.EnablePVEvent must be set to ‘Yes’. The PV Event Output (PVEventOP)
may be used to trigger the required response.
•
Each Segment has one PV Event Type (Off, Hi, Lo, Dev Hi, Dev Lo, Dev Band*)
•
Each Segment has one PV Threshold
* Dev refers to deviation of the PV parameter from Programmer Setpoint (i.e. there is no reference
input).
If the PVEvent type is set to None in a segment then the User value may be used as a general purpose
analogue value per segment. For this feature the Programmer.n.Setup.EnableUValue must be set to ‘Yes’. By
default, the parameter is named ‘UserVal’ – it may be renamed in Programmer.n.Setup.UValName.
In segment 1 there is no PVEvent so the UserVal may be set but in segment 3 the PVEvent type is not ‘None’
so only the PVThreshold may be set.
The event output is Programmer.n.Setup.PVEventOP, the UserVal output is Programmer.n.Setup.UserValOP
18.4.3
Time Event
Digital events can simply be the turning on of a digital output for the duration of a segment. An extension
of this is the Time Event. For this feature Programmer.n.Setup.MaxEvents must be > 0 and the
Programmer.n.Setup.EnableTimeEvent must be set to ‘Yes’. In this case the first digital event Event1 can have
a delay (On Time) and an (Off Time) specified. ‘On Time’ defines when the digital output will turn on after
the beginning of the segment and ‘Off Time’ defines when the digital output will turn off. The reference
point for the On and Off times is the start of the segment.
•
Only the first digital event Event1 may be configured as a Time Event.
•
Each segment has one Time Event parameter (OFF, Event1).
•
The first digital event cannot be set (read only if TimeEvent is not OFF).
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
181
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
The following example of a timed event in segment 3 shows that Programmer.n.Setup.EventOut1 will be on
for 10 minutes during segment 3 starting 10 minutes after segment 3 begins.
Editing of the Time Events follows a number of simple rules to make programming easier for the operator these are shown in the 3 diagrams below:
Segment
1
TimeEvent = Event1
2
TimeEvent = Off
TimeEvent = Event1
TimeEvent = Off
OffTime = 0
Event Output
OnTime = 0
OffTime = 0
Event Output
OnTime = t1
t1
TimeEvent = Off
TimeEvent = Event1
OffTime = t2
Event Output
t2
OnTime = t1
182
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Segment
OffTime
1
TimeEvent = Event1
OffTime * = 0
2
TimeEvent = On
OffTime >0
Event Output
OnTime=0
OnTime
Time Event = Event1
Time Event = Off
Time Event = Event1
TimeEvent = Off
OffTime
Event Output
OnTime = 0
OffTime
Error : OffTime > segment 1 duration
Event Output
OnTime
•
To configure an event which straddles two segments configure Ton in Segment n and Toff in segment n+1.
Segment
1
Time Event = Event1
2
Time Event = Off
OffTime
Error : OnTime = OffTime
Event OP = Off
OnTime
Event Output Off
Time Event = Event1
Time Event = Off
OffTime
Error : OnTime > OffTime
Event OP = Off
OnTime
Event Output Off
Time Event = Event1
Time Event = Off
OffTime
Error : OnTime > seg 1 duration
OnTime Event OP = Off
Event Output Off
OnTime and OffTime are extended by G.Soak periods. If OnTime = 0, the output goes hi at the start of the
segment but OffTime is not decremented while Gsoak Wait is applied. Timed event outputs are on a total
of Gsoak Wait + (OffTime – OnTime).
In the event of a power fail, time events timing will be unaffected.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
183
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
18.5 Holdback
Holdback freezes the program if the process value (PV) does not track the setpoint (SP) by more than a user
defined amount. The programmer will remain in HOLDBACK until the PV returns to within the requested
deviation from setpoint.
In a Ramp it indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than the set amount and that the program is
waiting for the process to catch up.
Holdback maintains the correct soak period for the product – see Guaranteed Soak below.
Each program can be configured with a holdback value. Each segment determines the holdback function.
Holdback will cause the execution time of the program to extend, if the process cannot match the
demanded profile.
Holdback state will not change access to the parameters. The parameters will behave as if in the RUN state.
The diagram below demonstrates that the demanded setpoint (SP) will only change at the rate specified by
the program when the PV's deviation is less than the holdback value. When the Deviation between the
setpoint and PV is greater than the holdback value (HBk Val) the setpoint ramp will pause until the deviation
returns to within the band.
The next segment will not start until the deviation between Setpoint and PV is less than the holdback value.
Four types of Holdback are available:-
18.5.1
None
Holdback is disabled for this segment.
High
Holdback is entered when the PV is greater than the Setpoint plus HBk Val.
Low
Holdback is entered when the PV is lower than the Setpoint minus HBk Val.
Band
Holdback is entered when the PV is either greater than the Setpoint plus HBk Val or lower than
the Setpoint minus HBk Val
Guaranteed Soak
Guaranteed Soak (guaranteed time workpiece stays at SP within a specified tolerance) is achieved in the
previous single programmer version by using Holdback Band during a dwell segment. Since only one
holdback value per program is available, this imposes a limitation where different tolerance values are
required to guarantee the soak.
In 2.xx Mini8 Holdback Type in Dwell segments is replaced by a Guaranteed Soak Type (G.Soak) which can
be set as Off, Lo, Hi or Band. A Guaranteed Soak Value (G.Soak Val) is available in Dwell segments and this
provides the ability to set different values in any Dwell segment.
Dwell starts when PV
reaches correct value
SP/PV
PV lags SP.
Holdback stops the
ramp until SP catches
up.
Set Holdback Type to
low
184
Dwell held if PV
falls beyond limits
Dwell extended
by t1+t2
t2
t1
SP as set in the
program
PV
SP as modified by holdback follows the
rate at which the process is capable
Part No HA028581
Time
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.6 PID Select
It is possible to set up three sets of PID values, see Chapter 17.4. Any one of these sets may be activated in
any segment of the program, except if the segment is configures as Wait, Goback or End. For this feature
Programmer.n.Setup.EnablePIDSched must be set to ‘Yes’. The last PID set in the program (SET1 by default)
will be applied during these segments. When reset the usual PID strategy for the loop takes over.
In the following example the ramp uses PID set 1 and the dwell uses PID set 2.
It also shows that the segment 2 dwell guarantees that the PV will be above 595 °C for the full 30 minutes.
18.7
Program Cycles
If the Program Cycles parameter is chosen as greater than 1, the program will execute all its segments then
repeat from the beginning. The number of cycles is determined by the parameter value. The Program
Cycles parameter has a range of 0 to 999 where 0 is enumerated to CONTinuous.
18.7.1 Servo
Servo can be set in configuration so that when a program is run the setpoint can start from the initial
controller setpoint or from the current process value. Whichever it is, the starting point is called the servo
point. This can be set in the program.
Servo to PV will produce a smooth and bumpless start to the process.
Servo to SP may be used in a Ramp Rate programmer to guarantee the time period of the first segment.
(Note: in a Time to Target programmer the segment duration will always be determined by the setting of
the Segment Duration parameter.)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
185
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
18.8 Power Fail Recovery
In the event of power fail to the Mini8, a strategy may be set in configuration level, which defines how the
controller behaves on restoration of the power.
The action on power failure is selecte3d using Programmer.n.Setup.PowerFailAct and offers:
Ramp
Reset
Continue
This will servo the program setpoint to the measured value (the PV Input parameter
value), then return to the target setpoint at the current (or previous) ramp rate.
(Default). The setpoint is not allowed to step change the program setpoint. The outputs
will take the state of the segment which was active before power was interrupted. See
examples below.
The process is aborted by resetting the program. All event outputs will take the reset
state.
The program setpoint returns immediately to its last value prior to the power down. This
may cause full power to be applied to the process for a short period to heat the process
back to its value prior to the power failure.
18.8.1.1 Ramp (Power fail during Dwell segments.)
If the interrupted segment was a Dwell, then the ramp rate will
be determined by the previous ramp segment.
Setpoint
T1 + T2 = segment Dwell time
T1
T2
On achieving the Dwell setpoint, the dwell will continue from the
point at which the power was interrupted.
Note: If a previous ramp segment does not exist, i.e. the first
segment of a program is a dwell, then the Dwell will continue at
the "servo to PV" setpoint.
Power Off
Seg n
Time
Seg n+1
Setpoint
18.8.1.2 Ramp (power fail during Ramp segments)
Tgt Setpoint
If the interrupted segment was a ramp, then the programmer will
servo the program setpoint to the PV, then ramp towards the
target setpoint at the previous ramp rate. Previous ramp rate is
the ramp rate at power fail.
Servo to new PV lev
Power Off
Time
Setpoint
18.8.1.3 Ramp (power fail during Time-to-target segments)
Ramp Rate preserved
Tgt Setpoint
If the programmer was defined as a Time-to-Target programmer
then when the power is returned the previous ramp rate will be
recovered. The Time remaining will be recalculated. The rule is
to maintain RAMP RATE, but alter TIME REMAINING.
Servo to
PV level
Power Off
186
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Time
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.9 To Run, Hold or Reset a Program
The program is operated via parameters found in the Program Setup lists, Programmer.n.Setup.ProgRun,
.ProgReset, .ProgHold, .ProgRunReset and .ProgRunHold. These parameters can be wired to digital inputs or
written to over comms.
The status of the program is in Program.n.Run.ProgStatus
18.9.1 Run
A program will always run – non configured programs will default to a single Dwell end segment. In run the
programmer working setpoint varies in accordance with the profile set in the active program. Parameters
are Programmer.n.Setup.ProgRun or Programmer.n.Setup.ProgRunReset.
ProgRun runs the program when input goes from false to true.
ProgRunReset runs the program if true, resets it if false.
18.9.2 Reset
In reset the programmer is inactive and the controller behaves as a standard controller. It will:1.
Continue to control with the setpoint determined by the next available source, SP1, SP2,
Alternative Setpoint.
2.
Allow edits to all segments
3.
Return all controlled outputs to the configured reset state.
Parameters are Programmer.n.Setup.ProgReset or Programmer.n.Setup.ProgRunReset.
ProgReset resets the program when input goes from false to true.
ProgRunReset resets the program if false, runs it if true.
18.9.3 Hold
A programmer may only be placed in Hold from the Run or Holdback state. In hold the setpoint is frozen at
the current programmer setpoint and the time remaining parameter frozen at its last value. In this state you
can make temporary changes to program parameters such as a target setpoint, ramp rates and times. These
changes will only remain effective until the end of the currently running segment, when they will be
overwritten by the stored program values.
Parameters are Programmer.n.Setup.ProgHold or Programmer.n.Setup.ProgRunHold.
ProgHold holds the program when input goes from false to true.
ProgRunHold runs the program if true, holds it if false.
18.9.4 Skip segment
Skip jumps immediately to the beginning of next segment and starts that segment from the current setpoint
value.
Parameter is Programmer.n.Setup.SkipSeg and will skip to next segment when input goes from false to true.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
187
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
18.9.5 Advance segment
Advance sets the program setpoint equal to the target setpoint and moves to the next segment.
Parameter is Programmer.n.Setup.AdvSeg and will advance to next segment when input goes from false to
true.
18.9.6 Fast
Executes the program at 10x the normal speed. It is provided so that programs can be tested but the
process should not be run in this state.
Parameter is Programmer.n.Run.FastRun .
18.10 PV Start
When Run is initiated PV start (for each channel) allows the program to automatically advance to the correct
point in the profile which corresponds to the current PV. For example, if the process is already at PV3 when
run is initiated then the program will start from the third segment as shown in the diagram below.
Initial PV
PV3
Seg 2
PV2
Rising PV
Seg 3
Rising PV
Seg 1
Rising PV
PV1
The user may specify the start point based on a Rising PV as shown in the diagram above or on a Falling PV
as shown below depending on type of profile being run.
Initial PV
PV1
PV2
PV3
Falling PV
Falling PV
Falling PV
When PV Start is used, the program always servos to PV (i.e. servo to SP will be ignored).
PV Start is enabled by setting parameter Instrument.Options.ProgPVstart to ‘Yes’.
188
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.11 Configuring the Programmer
Programmer.n.Setup contains the general configuration settings for the Programmer Block and the
parameters used to operate the programmer.
Programs are created and stored in the Program Folder.
The Programmer status can be viewed using the parameters in the Programmer.n.Run folder.
The program can also be operated by setting the Programmer.n.Run.ProgStatus parameter to the required
state.
Folder – Programmer.1 to .8
Sub-folder: Setup
Name
Parameter Description
Value
SyncIn
0
1
Units
The synchronise input is a way of synchronising
programs. At the end of a segment the
programmer will inspect the sync. input, if it is
True (1) then the programmer will advance to
the next segment. It is typically wired from the
end of segment output of another programmer.
Only appears if ‘SyncMode’ = ‘Yes’
Units of the Output
Resolution
Programmer Output resolution
RateResolution
Default
This will normally be
wired to the ‘End of
Seg’ parameter.
Access
Level
Oper
None
Conf
X to X.XXXX
X
Conf
Ramp Rate Resolution
X to X.XXXX
X.X
Conf
PVIn
The programmer uses the PV input for a
number of functions
In holdback, the PV is monitored against the
setpoint, and if a deviation occurs the program
is paused.
The programmer can be configured to start its
profile from the current PV value (servo to PV).
The programmer monitors the PV value for
Sensor Break. The programmer holds in sensor
break.
Conf
SPIn
The programmer needs to know the working
setpoint of the loop it is trying to control. The
SP input is used in the servo to setpoint start
type.
The transfer of program setpoint to PV Input
(normally the Loop PV) or the SP Input
(normally the Loop setpoint).
Power fail recovery strategy
The PV Input is normally wired
from the loop TrackPV parameter.
Note: This input is automatically
wired when the programmer and
loop are enabled and there are no
existing wires to track interface
parameters.
Track interface parameters are
Programmer.Setup, PVInput,
SPInput, Loop.SP, AltSP, Loop.SP,
AltSPSelect.
SP Input is normally wired from the
loop Track SP parameter as the PV
input.
PV
SP
See also section
18.1.5.
Conf
Ramp
Reset
Cont
1 to 8
See section 18.1.12.
Conf
Servo
PowerFailAct
Max Events
EnablePVevent
EnableTime
Part No HA028581
To set the maximum number of output events
required for the program. This is for
convenience to avoid having to scroll through
unwanted events when setting up each segment
Enable PV Event provides an alarm facility on
Programmer's PVInput. PV Event Type and
Threshold are defined in each Segment.
Enables the first Event Output to be configured
Issue 3
Sep-05
No
Yes
No
Conf
Conf
No
PV Event parameters
are listed in the
Program Edit page.
Conf
No
189
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Folder – Programmer.1 to .8
Sub-folder: Setup
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Event
as a Time Event - each segment may then
specify an on and an off time, with respect to
the start of the segment, for the event.
Yes
EnableUserVal
Enables a single analogue value to be set in
every segment.
It is only available if Ch1/Ch2Event = None in
the Program Edit page.
User Value Name
No
Yes
EnableGsoak
Enable Guaranteed soak ensures that the work
piece remains at the specified dwell setpoint for
a minimum of the specified duration.
This parameter is only shown for SyncStart
programmers
No
Yes
Enable
DelayedStart
Enables a time period to be set between
starting Run and the program actually running
No
UValName
Yes
Enable
PID Set
Enables PID set. The setting configured in each
segment will automatically select the relevant
PID Set for the loop wired to the Programmer.
Upon completion of the program, PID setting of
the loop will be reset to values prior to
execution of the program
EnableImmPSP
Enable immediate PSP
Prog Reset
Resets program on transition to true
No/Yes
Prog Run
Runs program on transition to true
No/Yes
Prog Hold
Holds program on transition to true
No/Yes
ProgRunHold
Program runs if true
Program holds if false
ProgRunReset
AdvSeg
No
Default
Time Event
parameters are listed
in the Program Edit
page
User value not shown
User value shown in
every segment
No guaranteed
Guaranteed soak
parameters are listed
in the Program Edit
page for all Dwell
segments.
The program will run
immediately
Delayed start is listed
in the Program Status
page. It is also listed
in the pop up
associated with the
RUN/HOLD key.
Each segment uses
the same PID values
Access
Level
Conf
No
Conf
UserVal
Conf
No
Conf
No
Conf
No
Conf
No
Yes
Oper
No
Oper
No
Oper
No/Yes
No
Oper
Program runs if true
Program holds if false
No/Yes
No
Oper
No/Yes
Oper
No/Yes
Oper
EventOut1 to 8
Set output to target setpoint and advance to
next segment
Skip to the next setpoint and start the segment
at the current output value.
Programmer Digital Input 1 and 2
These are events and can be wired to any
parameter. They are used in ‘wait’ segments to
prevent the program continuing until the event
becomes true
Flags showing event states
No/Yes
R/O
End of Seg
Flag showing end of segment state
No/Yes
R/O
ProgError
Program Error
0 No error
1 Sensor Break
2 Empty Program
3 Overrange
R/O
SkipSeg
PrgIn1 & 2
190
Off/On
Can be wired from
logic inputs to
provide remote
program control
Used in Wait
segment
Part No HA028581
off
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.12 Programmer Run Status
The ‘Run’ folder shows the current program status. The program can also be operated by setting the
ProgStatus parameter to the required state.
Folder – Programmer.1 to .8
Sub-folder: Run
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
CurProg
Current Program Number
1
1
R/O
DelayedStart
Time for Delayed start. Enabled in
Programmer.n.Setup.EnableDelayedStart
hh:mm:ss
0
Oper
CurrSeg
Current Running Segment
1 to 255
1
R/O
ProgStatus
Program Status
Reset –
Run –
Hold –
Holdback –
End –
End
Rate
Time
Dwell
Step
Call
CurSegType
Current Segment type
PSP
Programmer Setpoint
CyclesLeft
Number of Cycles Remaining
SegTimeLeft
Segment Time Remaining
Oper
End
R/O
0
R/O
0 to 1000
0
R/O
Hr Min Sec Millisec
0
R/O
SegDuration
SegTarget
Current Target Setpoint Value
SegRate
Segment Ramp Rate
0.1 to 9999.9
0
R/O
ProgTimeLeft
Program Time Remaining
Hrs Min Sec Millisec
0
R/O
Goback
CyclesLeft
FastRun
Fast Run
No
Oper
EndOutput
End Output
Off
R/O
EventsOut
Event Outputs
0
R/O
ResetEventOuts
Reset Event Outputs
No (0) Normal
Yes (1) Program executes at 10
times real time
Off (0) Program not in End
On (1) Program at End
0 to 255, each bit represents an
output.
0 to 255, each bit resets its
corresponding output
0
Oper
ResetUVal
Reset User Value
ImmSP
Immediate Programmer SP
R/O
CyclesLeft
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
191
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
18.13 Creating a Program
A folder exists for each Program containing a few key parameters listed below. This folder would normally be viewed
via the iTools Program Editor under the Program Parameters tab. The Program Editor is used to create the segments
of Program itself using the Segment Editor tab.
Folder – Program
Sub-folder: 1 to 50
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Name
Program Name
Up to 8 characters
Null
Oper
Holdback
Value
Minimum setting 0
0
Oper
Ramp Units
Deviation between SP and PV at which holdback
is applied. This value applies to the whole
program.
Time units applied to the segments
sec
Oper
Cycles
Number of times the whole program repeats
Sec
Min
Hour
Cont (0)
1 to 999
1
Oper
Seconds
Minutes
Hours
Repeats continuously
Program executes
once to 999 times
18.14 Program Editor
The Program Editor in iTools provides the method of entering and editing programs directly in the
controller. Setpoint programs can be created graphically, stored and downloaded into the controller. From
the iTools menu select ‘Program Editor OR Press
Figure 18-4: Blank Programmer editor – use
192
to create/edit a Program.
or Right Click to add segment
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.14.1 Analog View
This view is used for editing the analogue setpoints.
- 1 in this example.
1.
Select a program number using
2.
Double click
and enter a name for the program - “Example”
3.
Double click
and enter a name for the TargetSP - “Temperature”
4.
Right click in the blank area and choose ‘Add Segment’
Segment Type
End
Description
Ends Program
Parameters
Reset
Rate
Ramp at a rate
Time
Ramp to a target over an
interval
Soak at a fixed SP
Waits for an event
Target SP
Ramp rate
Target SP
Duration
Duration
Wait For
Dwell
Wait
Values
Reset – returns to Loop
setpoint
Dwell – remains at final
setpoint
SafeOP – goes to SafeOP
value
SP range
0.1 – 9999.9
SP range
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
PrgIn1
In 1
PrgIn2
In 2
PrgIn1n2
In1 AND In
PrgIn1or2
2
PVWaitIP
In1 OR In 2
PV wait
5.
Use the drop down to select segment type. Each segment type has the necessary parameters to suit.
6.
Right click to insert more segments. End with an ‘End’ segment.
Figure 18-5: Spreadsheet Editor with 4 different segment types
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
193
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Note PSP1 tab shown in Config
mode.
This tab displays all the parameters
in Programmer.1.Setup folder.
With 8 Programmers enabled 8 PSP
tabs would be shown.
Figure 18-6: PSP tabs
7.
Click on ‘EventOuts’ to set up the event outputs for each segment. Note only 4 events have been
enabled.
Figure 18-7: EventOuts with Out 4 set
In the Example program, the dots in EventOuts show which are on in each segment – O/P 1 in segment 1,
O/P in segment 2 etc.
194
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.14.2 Digital View
Alternatively click the icon and the Digital Editor is shown (or hit Cntrl D)
Figure 18-8: Digital Editor showing event outputs
8.
Once the program is complete it may be saved to file, or loaded to another programmer in this Mini8
or in any other Min8 also connected.
18.14.3 Saving & Loading Programs
If you are online to an instrument the program is already ‘loaded’. Use
to save it to file. This example
would be saved as ‘Example.uip’ and the programs for ALL the enabled programmer blocks will be saved to
this file.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
195
Engineering Handbook
Use
Mini8 Controller
to load a set of programs from disk to ALL the programmer blocks.
to copy a program from one programmer to another. For this to succeed the source and
Use
destination programmer blocks must have the same features enabled – i.e. EventsOut, UserVal etc.
Firstly select the instrument on the network, COM1.ID001-Mini8 (or any other Mini8 on the network).
Then set the target programmer number and click OK. In this case the program in Programmer 1 will be
sent to Programmer 2. Note it could be sent to a programmer block in any instrument on the network.
18.14.4 Printing a Program
☺ If you select all segments, Cntrl A (or right click ‘Select All’) and copy spreadsheet cells they are put on
the clipboard as tab separated values which can be pasted into Microsoft Excel.
There is no direct printing support in the Programmer Editor, but you can generate a report using Microsoft
Excel as follows:
•
Right click on the graph and choose 'Copy Chart'.
•
Open a new spreadsheet in Excel and paste the chart, position to taste.
•
Go back to the Programmer Editor and Choose 'Edit|Select All' followed by 'Edit|Copy'.
•
Switch to Excel, choose the top left cell for the segment data and then choose 'Edit|Paste'.
•
Optionally delete any columns that have no settings and format the cells.
•
Print the spreadsheet.
The program is listed down rather than across the page so long programs can be printed.
196
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
18.15 Wiring the Programmer Function Block.
The Programmer block is invariably used with the Loop blocks. When a programmer block is placed on the
graphical wiring editor it will automatically make the essential connections between itself and its associated
Loop block i.e. Programmer 1 with Loop1 etc.
These connections ensure that the program setpoint goes to the loop and that ‘servo’ and other program
options work correctly. Note that for 8 loops & 8 programmers at least 60 wires are required.
Figure 18-9: Wiring Programmer to Loop Block
When placing a loop block and a programmer block on the graphical wiring editor, if they are the same
number (i.e. Loop.1 and Programmer.1), they will automatically wire themselves together as shown. Use this
if you require up to 8 loops, each with their own programmer.
In the situation where there are multiple programmer blocks, it is possible to synchronise the programmer
blocks by wiring the AND of all the ‘Programmer.n.Setup.EndOfSeg’ outputs to all the
‘Programmer.n.Setup.SyncIn’ Inputs.
Programmer 1
Programmer 2
Programmer 3
Sync Input
Sync Input
Sync Input
End Of Segment
End Of Segment
End Of Segment
Figure 18-10: Synchronisation of programmer blocks
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
197
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
If a single programmer block is used, wired to several loops then a plan has to be made about the SP & PV
feedback to the programmer block. In the design below the AVERAGE PV of the 3 loops has been used for
the PV but for the Setpoint Loop1 has been selected as the ‘master’ and the programmer SP feedback just
taken from Loop 1.
Figure 18-11: Single Programmer with 3 loops.
198
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
19.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 19 SWITCH OVER
This facility is commonly used in temperature applications which operate over a wide temperature range. A
thermocouple may be used to control at lower temperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high
temperatures. Alternatively two thermocouples of different types may be used.
The diagram below shows a process heating over time with boundaries which define the switching points
between the two devices. The higher boundary (2 to 3) is normally set towards the top end of the
thermocouple range and this is determined by the ‘Switch High’ parameter. The lower boundary (1 to 2) is
set towards the lower end of the pyrometer (or second thermocouple) range using the parameter ‘Switch
Low’. The controller calculates a smooth transition between the two devices.
Input 1
Low temperature thermocouple
Mini8 Module
Input 2
High temperature thermocouple
↑
Controller operates entirely on
the higher temperature device
↑
Temperature
Boundary 2/3
←Controller operates on a
combination of both devices
Boundary 1/2
Controller operates entirely on
the lower temperature device
↓
Time →
Figure 19-1: Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching
19.1.1 Example: To Set the Switch Over Levels
Set Access to configuration level
1.
Open the ‘SwitchOver’ Folder
2.
Set ‘SwitchHigh’ to a value which is suitable for the pyrometer (or high temperature thermocouple) to
take over the control of the process
3.
Set ‘SwitchLow’ to a value which is suitable for the low temperature thermocouple to control the
process
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
199
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
19.1.2 Switch Over Parameters
Folder – SwitchOver
Sub-folders: .1
Name
Parameter Description
Value
InHigh
Sets the high limit for the switch
over block. It is the highest
reading from input 2 since it is
the high range input sensor.
Sets the low limit for the switch
over block. It is the lowest
reading from input 1 since it is
the low range input sensor
Defines the high boundary of the
switchover region
Defines the low boundary of the
switchover region.
The first input value. This must
be the low range sensor.
Input range
InLow
Switch High
Switch Low
In1
In2
The second input value. This
must be the high range sensor
Fallback Value
In the event of a bad status, the
output may be configured to
adopt the fallback value. This
allows the strategy to dictate a
safe output in the event of a fault
being detected
Fall back type
Fallback Type
Default
Access
Level
Oper
Oper
Between Input Hi and Input Lo
Oper
Oper
R/O if
wired
These will normally be wired to the
thermocouple/pyrometer input sources via the PV
Input or Analogue Input Module. The range will
be the range of the input chosen.
R/O if
wired
Between Input Hi and Input Lo
0.0
Oper
Clip Bad
Clip Bad
Conf
Clip Good
Fall Bad
Fall Good
Upscale
Downscale
SelectIn
Indicates which input is currently
selected
Input 1
0: Input 1 has been selected
Input 2
1: Input 2 has been selected
R/O
2: Both inputs are used to
calculate the output
ErrMode
The action taken if the selected
input is BAD
UseGood
0: Assumes the value of a good
input
Use
Conf
Good
If the currently selected input is
BAD the output will assume the
value of the other input if it is
GOOD
ShowBad
Out
Status
Output produced from the 2
input measurements
Status of the switchover block
1: If selected input is BAD the
output is BAD
R/O
Good
R/O
Bad
200
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
20.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 20 TRANSDUCER SCALING
The Mini8 controller includes two transducer calibration function blocks. These are a software function
blocks that provide a method of offsetting the calibration of the input when compared to a known input
source. Transducer scaling is often performed as a routine operation on a machine to take out system
errors. For this reason it can be carried out in operator mode.
Transducer scaling can be applied to any TC8 input set up as a linear PV input. They can be wired to the
transducer scaling inputs.
Three types of calibration are explained in this chapter:•
Auto-tare
•
Load Cell Calibration
•
Comparison Calibration
20.1 Auto-Tare Calibration
The auto-tare function is used, for example, when it is required to weigh the contents of a container but not
the container itself.
The procedure is to place the empty container on the weigh bridge and ‘zero’ the controller. Since it is
likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto-tare feature is always available.
Further parameters are available which are used to pre-configure the tare measurement or for interrogation
purposes. Tare calibration may be carried out no matter what type of transducer is in use.
New Scale High
Tare
offset
Scale High
New Scaling
Tare value
PV at tare point
New Scale Low
Scale Low
Original Scaling
Tare offset
Tare offset
Input Low
Input at autotare point
Input High
Figure 20-1: Effect of Auto Tare
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
201
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
20.2 Load Cell
A load cell provides a mV analogue output which may be connected to a linear TC8 input.
When no load is placed on the cell the output is normally zero. However, in practice there may be a
residual output and this can be calibrated out in the controller.
The high end is calibrated by placing a reference weight on the load cell and performing a high end
calibration in the controller.
20.3 Comparison Calibration
Comparison calibration is used to calibrate the controller against a second reference instrument.
The load is removed (or taken to a minimum) from the reference device. The controller low end calibration
is done using the ‘Cal Enable’ parameter and entering the reading from the reference instrument.
Add a weight and when the reading has become stable select the ‘Cal Hi Enable’ parameter then enter the
new reading from the reference instrument.
20.4 Transducer Scaling Parameters
Folder – Txdr
Sub-folders: .1 or .2
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Cal Type
Used to select the type of
transducer calibration to perform
See descriptions at the beginning
of this chapter.
1: Off
Transducer type unconfigured
1: Shunt
Shunt calibration
2: Load Cell
Load Cell
3: Compare
Comparison
No
Not ready
Yes
Ready
Cal Enable
Range Max
Range Min
Start Tare
To make the transducer ready for
calibration.
Must be set to Yes to allow
calibration to be done at L1. This
includes Tare Cal.
The maximum permissible range
of the scaling block
The minimum permissible range
of the scaling block
Begin tare calibration
Default
Access
Level
Off
Conf
No
Conf
Range min to 99999
1000
Conf
-19999 to Range max
0
Conf
No
No
Oper if
‘Cal
Enable’ =
‘Yes’
No
Oper if
‘Cal
Enable’ =
‘Yes’
No
Oper if
‘Cal
Enable’ =
‘Yes’
No
Oper
Yes
Start Cal
Start HighCal
Clear Cal
Tare Value
202
Starts the Calibration process.
Note: for Load Cell and
Comparison calibration ‘Start Cal’
starts the first calibration point.
No
For Load Cell and Comparison
calibration the ‘Start High Cal’
must be used to start the second
calibration point.
No
Clears the current calibration
constants. This returns the
calibration to unity gain
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Start tare calibration
Start calibration
Start high calibration
To delete previous calibration
values
Enter the tare value of the
container
Conf
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Folder – Txdr
Sub-folders: .1 or .2
Name
Parameter Description
InHigh
Sets the scaling input high point
Oper
InLow
Sets the scaling input low point
Oper
Scale High
Sets the scaling output high
point. Usually the same as the
‘Input Lo’
Sets the scaling output low point.
Usually 80% of ‘Input Hi’
The calibration algorithms use
the threshold to determine if the
value has settled. When
switching in the shunt resistor,
the algorithm waits for the value
to settle to within the threshold
before starting the high
calibration point.
The adjust is used in the
Comparison Calibration method.
Oper
Scale Low
Cal Band
CalAdjust
ShuntOut
Cal Active
Indicates when the internal shunt
calibration resistor is switched in.
Only appears if ‘Cal Type’ =
‘Shunt’
Indicates calibration taking place
InVal
The input value to be scaled.
OutVal
The Input Value is scaled by the
block to produce the Output
Value
The status of the output
accounting for sensor fail signals
passed to the block and the state
of the scaling.
Indicates the progress of
calibration
Status
Cal Status
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Value
Default
Access
Level
Oper
Conf
When edited, the Adjust parameter can be set to
the desired value. On confirm, the new adjust
value is used to set the scaling constants
Oper
Off
Resistor not switched in
Oper
On
Resistor switched in
Off
Inactive
On
Active
-9999.9 to 9999.9
R/O
Oper
Oper
Good
Conf
Bad
0: Idle
No calibration in progress
1: Active
Calibration in progress
2: Passed
Calibration Passed
3: Failed
Calibration Failed
L1 R/O
203
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
20.4.1 Parameter Notes
Enable Cal
This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If not wired, then the value may be changed.
When enabled the transducer parameters may be altered as described in the previous sections. When the
parameter has been turned On it will remain on until turned off manually even if the controller is powered
cycled.
This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If not wired, then the value may be changed.
This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If not wired, then the value may be changed.
It starts the calibration procedure for:
Shunt Calibration
The low point for Load Cell Calibration
The low point for Comparison Calibration
This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If not wired, then the value may be changed.
It starts:The high point for Load Cell Calibration
The high point for Comparison Calibration
This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If not wired, then the value may be changed.
When enabled the input will reset to default values. A new calibration will overwrite the previous
calibration values if Clear Cal is not enabled between calibrations.
Start Tare
Start Cal
Start Hi Cal
Clear Cal
20.4.2 Tare Calibration
The Mini8 controller has an auto-tare function that is used, for example, when it is required to weigh the
contents of a container but not the container itself.
The procedure is to place the empty container on the weighbridge and ‘zero’ the controller. The procedure
is as follows:-
204
1.
Place container on weighbridge
2.
Go to Txdr.1 (or .2) Folder.
3.
Transducer calibration Type must be ‘Load Cell’.
4.
CalEnable must be set to ‘Yes’.
5.
Set StartTare to ‘yes’
6.
The controller automatically calibrates the to the tare weight which is measured by the transducer
and stores this value.
7.
During this measurement Cal Status will show progress. If the cal fails it is probably an ‘out of
range’ problem.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
20.4.3 Load Cell
A load cell output must be within the range 0 to 77 mV to go into a TC8 input. Use a shunt for mA inputs,
mV can possibly go direct, Volt inputs must use a potential divider.
To calibrate a load cell.
1.
Remove all load from the transducer to establish a zero reference.
2.
Go to Txdr.1 (or .2) Folder.
3.
Transducer calibration Type must be ‘Load Cell’.
4.
CalEnable must be set to ‘Yes’.
5.
Set Start Cal to ‘yes’
6.
The controller will calibrate the low point.
7.
Set StartHighCal to ‘yes’
8.
The controller will calibrate the high point.
Cal Status advises progress and result.
20.4.4 Comparison Calibration
Comparison calibration is used to calibrate the input against a second reference instrument. Typically this
might be a local display on the weighing device itself.
To calibrate against a known reference source:1.
Add a load at the low end of the scale range
2.
Go to Txdr.1 (or .2) Folder.
3.
Transducer calibration Type must be ‘Comparision’.
4.
CalEnable must be set to ‘Yes’.
5.
Enter the reading from the reference instrument into ‘Cal Adjust’.
6.
Add a load at the high end of the scale.
7.
Set StartHighCal to ‘yes’
8.
The controller will calibrate the high point.
Cal Status advises progress and result.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
205
Engineering Handbook
21.
Mini8 Controller
CHAPTER 21 USER VALUES
User values are registers provided for use in calculations. They may be used as constants in equations or
temporary storage in extended calculations. Up to 32 User Values are available. They are arranged in 4
groups of 8. Each User Value can then be set up in the ‘UserVal’ folder.
21.1 User Value Parameters
Folder – UsrVal
Sub-Folders: .1 to .32
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Units
Units assigned to the User Value
None
Abs Temp oC/oF/oK,
V, mV, A, mA,
PH, mmHg, psi, Bar, mBar, %RH, %, mmWG, inWG,
inWW, Ohms, PSIG, %O2, PPM, %CO2, %CP, %/sec,
RelTemp oC\oF\oK(rel),
Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3, Custom 4, Custom
5, Custom 6,
sec, min, hrs,
Conf
Resolution
Resolution of the User Value
XXXXX to X.XXXX
Conf
High Limit
The high limit may be set for
each user value to prevent the
value being set to an out-ofbounds value.
The low limit of the user value
may be set to prevent the user
value from being edited to an
illegal value. This is important if
the user value is to be used as a
setpoint.
To set the value within the range
limits
Can be used to force a good or
bad status onto a user value. This
is useful for testing status
inheritance and fallback
strategies.
Low Limit
Val
Status
Default
Access
Level
Oper
Oper
See note 1
Good
Oper
See note 1
Oper
Bad
Note 1.
If ‘Val’ is wired into but ‘Status’ is not, then, instead of being used to force the Status it will indicate the
status of the value as inherited form the wired connection to ‘Val’.
206
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
22.
Engineering Handbook
CHAPTER 22 CALIBRATION
In this chapter calibration refers to calibration of the inputs of the TC4 / TC8 modules and the RT4 module.
Calibration is accessed using the ‘Cal State’ parameter that is only available in configuration level. Since the
controller is calibrated during manufacture to traceable standards for every input range, it is not necessary
to calibrate the controller when changing ranges. Furthermore, a continuous automatic check and
correction of the calibration during the controllers’ normal operation means that it is calibrated for life.
However, it is recognised that, for operational reasons, it may be a requirement to check or re-calibrate the
controller. This new calibration is saved as a User Calibration. It is always possible to revert to the factory
calibration if necessary.
☺ Tip: Consider using the ‘Offset’ parameter for User Cal (e.g. Mod.1.Offset). This can be set to correct any
measured difference between the Mini8 given PV and a calibration value obtained from another source. This
is useful where the process setpoint remains at about the same value during use.
Alternatively, if the setpoint range is wide use the two point calibration with the ‘LoPoint’, ‘LoOffset’, and
‘HiPoint’, ‘HiOffset’ parameters.
22.1 TC4 / TC8 User calibration
22.1.1 Set Up
No pre-calibration warm-up is required.
As calibration is a single-point on 8 channels, quick enough (a few minutes) to avoid self-heating effects,
there are no special environmental, mounting position or ventilation requirements for calibration.
Calibration should be performed at a reasonable ambient temperature (15oC to 35oC). Calibration outside
these limits will compromise the expected working accuracy.
Every channel of every TC8 card must be individually connected to the calibrator source using thick copper
wire (so the sensor-break voltage drop in the wires and source impedance is minimal).
The voltage source, monitor DVM and the target Mini8 should be at the same temperature (to eliminate
added series e.m.f. due to thermocouple effects).
The Mini8 must be in Configuration Mode.
22.1.2 Zero Calibration
No “zero” calibration point is required for TC4/TC8 input channels
22.1.3
Voltage Calibration
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the Calibrator voltage source to an accurate 50.005mV. (The extra 5uV is to compensate for selfheating tempco effect).
Connect the 50mV to channel 1
Set Mod.1.CalState to HiCal (23) and then select ‘Confirm’
When complete set CalState to SaveUser(25)
Exit configuration mode.
22.1.4 CJC Calibration
No CJC calibration required; the sampled values are ratio metric, providing uncalibrated uncertainty of ±1oC.
22.1.5 Sensor-Break Limit Check
Apply a 900Ω resistor to each channel in turn, Sensor Break Type to ‘Low’, filter to off (0). Verify the
SBrkValue is greater than 24.0 and less than 61.0
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
207
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
22.2 To Return to TC4/TC8 Factory Calibration
To clear the User calibration and restore the calibration from the factory.
1.
Put Mini8 into Configuration Mode
2.
Set the ‘Mod.1.Calibration State’ to LoadFact (24).
3.
Return Instrument to Operating Mode.
22.3 RT4 User calibration
22.3.1 Set Up
No pre-calibration warm-up is required.
There are no special environmental, mounting position or ventilation requirements for calibration.
Calibration should be performed at a reasonable ambient temperature (15oC to 35oC). Calibration outside
these limits will compromise the expected working accuracy.
Each channel of the RT4 card must be individually connected to the calibrated resistance box using the 4
wire connection.
The Mini8 must be in Configuration Mode.
22.3.2 Calibration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Wire the resistance box to channel 1 using the four wire connection.
Set the Resistance box to 150.0 ohms ±0.02%.
Set Mod.1.CalState to LoCal (42) and then select ‘Confirm’
When complete set CalState to SaveUser(45)
Set the Resistance box to 400.0 ohms ±0.02%.
Set Mod.1.CalState to HiCal (43) and then select ‘Confirm’
When complete set CalState to SaveUser(45)
Exit configuration mode.
22.4 To Return to RT4 Factory Calibration
To clear the User calibration and restore the calibration from the factory.
208
4.
Put Mini8 into Configuration Mode
5.
Set the ‘Mod.1.Calibration State’ to LoadFact (44).
6.
Return Instrument to Operating Mode.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
22.5 Calibration Parameters
List Header - IO
Sub-headers: Mod.1 to Mod.32
Name
Parameter
Description
Value
Cal State
Calibration
state of the
input
Idle
Hi-50mV
Load Fact
Save User
Confirm
Go
Busy
Passed
Failed
Status
PV Status
The current
status of the
PV.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Normal operation
High input calibration for mV ranges
Restore factory calibration values
Save the new calibration values
To start the calibration procedure when one of the
above has been selected
Starting the automatic calibration procedure
Calibration in progress
Calibration successful
Calibration unsuccessful
Normal operation
Initial startup mode
Input in sensor break
PV outside operating limits
Saturated input
Uncalibrated channel
No Module
Default
Access
Level
Idle
Conf
R/O
The above list shows the values of CalState, which appear during a normal calibration procedure. The full
list of possible values follows – the number is the enumeration for the parameter.
1: Idle
2: Low calibration point for Volts range
3: High calibration point for Volts range
4: Calibration restored to factory default values
5: User calibration stored
6: Factory calibration stored
11: Idle
12: Low calibration point for HZ input
13: High calibration point for the HZ input
14: Calibration restored to factory default values
15: User calibration stored
16: Factory calibration stored
20: Calibration point for factory rough calibration
21: Idle
22: Low calibration point for the mV range
23: Hi calibration point for the mV range
24: Calibration restored to factory default values
25: User calibration stored
26: Factory calibration stored
30: Calibration point for factory rough calibration
31: Idle
32: Low calibration point for the mV range
33: High calibration point for the mV range
34: Calibration restored to factory default values
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
35: User calibration stored
36: Factory calibration stored
41: Idle
42: Low calibration point for RTD calibration (150 ohms)
43: Low calibration point for RTD calibration (400 ohms)
44: Calibration restored to factory default values
45: User calibration stored
46: Factory calibration stored
51: Idle
52: CJC calibration used in conjunction with Term Temp parameter
54: Calibration restored to factory default values
55: User calibration stored
56: Factory calibration stored
200: Confirmation of request to calibrate
201: Used to start the calibration procedure
202: Used to abort the calibration procedure
210: Calibration point for factory rough calibration
212: Indication that calibration is in progress
213: Used to abort the calibration procedure
220: Indication that calibration completed successfully
221: Calibration accepted but not stored
222: Used to abort the calibration procedure
223: Indication that calibration failed
209
Engineering Handbook
23.
Mini8 Controller
APPENDIX A MODBUS SCADA TABLE
These parameters are single register Modbus values for use with Third Party Modbus masters in SCADA
packages or plcs. Scaling of the parameters has to be configured – the Modbus master scaling has to match
the Mini8 parameter resolution to ensure the decimal point is in the correct position.
23.1 Comms Table
The tables that follow do not include every parameter in the Mini8. The Comms Table is used to make most
parameters available at any SCADA address.
Folder – Commstab
Sub-folders: .1 to .250
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Destination
Modbus Destination
Not used
Conf
Source
Source Parameter
Not Used
1 to 16011
Taken from source parameter
Native
Native Data Format
Integer
Conf
ReadOnly
Read Only
Read/Write only if source is R/W
Minutes
Units in which time is scaled.
0 Integer
1 Native (i.e. Float or long)
0 Read/Write
1 Read Only
0 Seconds
1 Minutes
R/W
Conf
Seconds.
Conf
Minutes
Conf
Entering a value in the Source parameter may be done in two ways:
1 - drag the required parameter into the Source
2 - right click the Source parameter, select Edit Wire and browse to the required parameter.
In the Example below the PV of Loop 1 would be available at addresses 200 and 201 as a two register
floating point number - its native data type.
There are 250 comms table entries available.
23.2 SCADA Table
The parameters in the tables following are available in scaled integer format, accessed via their associated
Modbus address.
Wherever possible use an OPC client with the iTools OPCserver as the server. In this arrangement the
parameters are all referenced by name and the values are floating point so the decimal point for all
parameters is inherited.
210
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Access.CustomerID
Access.InstrumentMode
Alarm.1.Ack
Alarm.1.Block
Alarm.1.Delay
Alarm.1.Hysteresis
Alarm.1.Inhibit
Alarm.1.Latch
Alarm.1.Out
Alarm.1.Reference
Alarm.1.Threshold
Alarm.1.Type
Alarm.2.Ack
Alarm.2.Block
Alarm.2.Delay
Alarm.2.Hysteresis
Alarm.2.Inhibit
Alarm.2.Latch
Alarm.2.Out
Alarm.2.Reference
Alarm.2.Threshold
Alarm.2.Type
Alarm.3.Ack
Alarm.3.Block
Alarm.3.Delay
Alarm.3.Hysteresis
Alarm.3.Inhibit
Alarm.3.Latch
Alarm.3.Out
Alarm.3.Reference
Alarm.3.Threshold
Alarm.3.Type
Alarm.4.Ack
Alarm.4.Block
Alarm.4.Delay
Alarm.4.Hysteresis
Alarm.4.Inhibit
Alarm.4.Latch
Alarm.4.Out
Alarm.4.Reference
Alarm.4.Threshold
Alarm.4.Type
Alarm.5.Ack
Alarm.5.Block
Alarm.5.Delay
Alarm.5.Hysteresis
Alarm.5.Inhibit
Alarm.5.Latch
Alarm.5.Out
Alarm.5.Reference
Alarm.5.Threshold
Alarm.5.Type
Alarm.6.Ack
Alarm.6.Block
Alarm.6.Delay
Alarm.6.Hysteresis
Alarm.6.Inhibit
Alarm.6.Latch
Alarm.6.Out
Alarm.6.Reference
Alarm.6.Threshold
Alarm.6.Type
Alarm.7.Ack
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
4739
199
10250
10246
10248
10242
10247
10244
10249
10243
10241
10240
10266
10262
10264
10258
10263
10260
10265
10259
10257
10256
10282
10278
10280
10274
10279
10276
10281
10275
10273
10272
10298
10294
10296
10290
10295
10292
10297
10291
10289
10288
10314
10310
10312
10306
10311
10308
10313
10307
10305
10304
10330
10326
10328
10322
10327
10324
10329
10323
10321
10320
10346
HEX
1283
00C7
280A
2806
2808
2802
2807
2804
2809
2803
2801
2800
281A
2816
2818
2812
2817
2814
2819
2813
2811
2810
282A
2826
2828
2822
2827
2824
2829
2823
2821
2820
283A
2836
2838
2832
2837
2834
2839
2833
2831
2830
284A
2846
2848
2842
2847
2844
2849
2843
2841
2840
285A
2856
2858
2852
2857
2854
2859
2853
2851
2850
286A
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Alarm.7.Block
Alarm.7.Delay
Alarm.7.Hysteresis
Alarm.7.Inhibit
Alarm.7.Latch
Alarm.7.Out
Alarm.7.Reference
Alarm.7.Threshold
Alarm.7.Type
Alarm.8.Ack
Alarm.8.Block
Alarm.8.Delay
Alarm.8.Hysteresis
Alarm.8.Inhibit
Alarm.8.Latch
Alarm.8.Out
Alarm.8.Reference
Alarm.8.Threshold
Alarm.8.Type
Alarm.9.Ack
Alarm.9.Block
Alarm.9.Delay
Alarm.9.Hysteresis
Alarm.9.Inhibit
Alarm.9.Latch
Alarm.9.Out
Alarm.9.Reference
Alarm.9.Threshold
Alarm.9.Type
Alarm.10.Ack
Alarm.10.Block
Alarm.10.Delay
Alarm.10.Hysteresis
Alarm.10.Inhibit
Alarm.10.Latch
Alarm.10.Out
Alarm.10.Reference
Alarm.10.Threshold
Alarm.10.Type
Alarm.11.Ack
Alarm.11.Block
Alarm.11.Delay
Alarm.11.Hysteresis
Alarm.11.Inhibit
Alarm.11.Latch
Alarm.11.Out
Alarm.11.Reference
Alarm.11.Threshold
Alarm.11.Type
Alarm.12.Ack
Alarm.12.Block
Alarm.12.Delay
Alarm.12.Hysteresis
Alarm.12.Inhibit
Alarm.12.Latch
Alarm.12.Out
Alarm.12.Reference
Alarm.12.Threshold
Alarm.12.Type
Alarm.13.Ack
Alarm.13.Block
Alarm.13.Delay
Alarm.13.Hysteresis
DEC
10342
10344
10338
10343
10340
10345
10339
10337
10336
10362
10358
10360
10354
10359
10356
10361
10355
10353
10352
10378
10374
10376
10370
10375
10372
10377
10371
10369
10368
10394
10390
10392
10386
10391
10388
10393
10387
10385
10384
10410
10406
10408
10402
10407
10404
10409
10403
10401
10400
10426
10422
10424
10418
10423
10420
10425
10419
10417
10416
10442
10438
10440
10434
211
HEX
2866
2868
2862
2867
2864
2869
2863
2861
2860
287A
2876
2878
2872
2877
2874
2879
2873
2871
2870
288A
2886
2888
2882
2887
2884
2889
2883
2881
2880
289A
2896
2898
2892
2897
2894
2899
2893
2891
2890
28AA
28A6
28A8
28A2
28A7
28A4
28A9
28A3
28A1
28A0
28BA
28B6
28B8
28B2
28B7
28B4
28B9
28B3
28B1
28B0
28CA
28C6
28C8
28C2
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Alarm.13.Inhibit
Alarm.13.Latch
Alarm.13.Out
Alarm.13.Reference
Alarm.13.Threshold
Alarm.13.Type
Alarm.14.Ack
Alarm.14.Block
Alarm.14.Delay
Alarm.14.Hysteresis
Alarm.14.Inhibit
Alarm.14.Latch
Alarm.14.Out
Alarm.14.Reference
Alarm.14.Threshold
Alarm.14.Type
Alarm.15.Ack
Alarm.15.Block
Alarm.15.Delay
Alarm.15.Hysteresis
Alarm.15.Inhibit
Alarm.15.Latch
Alarm.15.Out
Alarm.15.Reference
Alarm.15.Threshold
Alarm.15.Type
Alarm.16.Ack
Alarm.16.Block
Alarm.16.Delay
Alarm.16.Hysteresis
Alarm.16.Inhibit
Alarm.16.Latch
Alarm.16.Out
Alarm.16.Reference
Alarm.16.Threshold
Alarm.16.Type
Alarm.17.Ack
Alarm.17.Block
Alarm.17.Delay
Alarm.17.Hysteresis
Alarm.17.Inhibit
Alarm.17.Latch
Alarm.17.Out
Alarm.17.Reference
Alarm.17.Threshold
Alarm.17.Type
Alarm.18.Ack
Alarm.18.Block
Alarm.18.Delay
Alarm.18.Hysteresis
Alarm.18.Inhibit
Alarm.18.Latch
Alarm.18.Out
Alarm.18.Reference
Alarm.18.Threshold
Alarm.18.Type
Alarm.19.Ack
Alarm.19.Block
Alarm.19.Delay
Alarm.19.Hysteresis
Alarm.19.Inhibit
Alarm.19.Latch
Alarm.19.Out
212
Mini8 Controller
DEC
10439
10436
10441
10435
10433
10432
10458
10454
10456
10450
10455
10452
10457
10451
10449
10448
10474
10470
10472
10466
10471
10468
10473
10467
10465
10464
10490
10486
10488
10482
10487
10484
10489
10483
10481
10480
10506
10502
10504
10498
10503
10500
10505
10499
10497
10496
10522
10518
10520
10514
10519
10516
10521
10515
10513
10512
10538
10534
10536
10530
10535
10532
10537
HEX
28C7
28C4
28C9
28C3
28C1
28C0
28DA
28D6
28D8
28D2
28D7
28D4
28D9
28D3
28D1
28D0
28EA
28E6
28E8
28E2
28E7
28E4
28E9
28E3
28E1
28E0
28FA
28F6
28F8
28F2
28F7
28F4
28F9
28F3
28F1
28F0
290A
2906
2908
2902
2907
2904
2909
2903
2901
2900
291A
2916
2918
2912
2917
2914
2919
2913
2911
2910
292A
2926
2928
2922
2927
2924
2929
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Alarm.19.Reference
Alarm.19.Threshold
Alarm.19.Type
Alarm.20.Ack
Alarm.20.Block
Alarm.20.Delay
Alarm.20.Hysteresis
Alarm.20.Inhibit
Alarm.20.Latch
Alarm.20.Out
Alarm.20.Reference
Alarm.20.Threshold
Alarm.20.Type
Alarm.21.Ack
Alarm.21.Block
Alarm.21.Delay
Alarm.21.Hysteresis
Alarm.21.Inhibit
Alarm.21.Latch
Alarm.21.Out
Alarm.21.Reference
Alarm.21.Threshold
Alarm.21.Type
Alarm.22.Ack
Alarm.22.Block
Alarm.22.Delay
Alarm.22.Hysteresis
Alarm.22.Inhibit
Alarm.22.Latch
Alarm.22.Out
Alarm.22.Reference
Alarm.22.Threshold
Alarm.22.Type
Alarm.23.Ack
Alarm.23.Block
Alarm.23.Delay
Alarm.23.Hysteresis
Alarm.23.Inhibit
Alarm.23.Latch
Alarm.23.Out
Alarm.23.Reference
Alarm.23.Threshold
Alarm.23.Type
Alarm.24.Ack
Alarm.24.Block
Alarm.24.Delay
Alarm.24.Hysteresis
Alarm.24.Inhibit
Alarm.24.Latch
Alarm.24.Out
Alarm.24.Reference
Alarm.24.Threshold
Alarm.24.Type
Alarm.25.Ack
Alarm.25.Block
Alarm.25.Delay
Alarm.25.Hysteresis
Alarm.25.Inhibit
Alarm.25.Latch
Alarm.25.Out
Alarm.25.Reference
Alarm.25.Threshold
Alarm.25.Type
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
10531
10529
10528
10554
10550
10552
10546
10551
10548
10553
10547
10545
10544
10570
10566
10568
10562
10567
10564
10569
10563
10561
10560
10586
10582
10584
10578
10583
10580
10585
10579
10577
10576
10602
10598
10600
10594
10599
10596
10601
10595
10593
10592
10618
10614
10616
10610
10615
10612
10617
10611
10609
10608
10634
10630
10632
10626
10631
10628
10633
10627
10625
10624
Sep-05
HEX
2923
2921
2920
293A
2936
2938
2932
2937
2934
2939
2933
2931
2930
294A
2946
2948
2942
2947
2944
2949
2943
2941
2940
295A
2956
2958
2952
2957
2954
2959
2953
2951
2950
296A
2966
2968
2962
2967
2964
2969
2963
2961
2960
297A
2976
2978
2972
2977
2974
2979
2973
2971
2970
298A
2986
2988
2982
2987
2984
2989
2983
2981
2980
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Alarm.26.Ack
Alarm.26.Block
Alarm.26.Delay
Alarm.26.Hysteresis
Alarm.26.Inhibit
Alarm.26.Latch
Alarm.26.Out
Alarm.26.Reference
Alarm.26.Threshold
Alarm.26.Type
Alarm.27.Ack
Alarm.27.Block
Alarm.27.Delay
Alarm.27.Hysteresis
Alarm.27.Inhibit
Alarm.27.Latch
Alarm.27.Out
Alarm.27.Reference
Alarm.27.Threshold
Alarm.27.Type
Alarm.28.Ack
Alarm.28.Block
Alarm.28.Delay
Alarm.28.Hysteresis
Alarm.28.Inhibit
Alarm.28.Latch
Alarm.28.Out
Alarm.28.Reference
Alarm.28.Threshold
Alarm.28.Type
Alarm.29.Ack
Alarm.29.Block
Alarm.29.Delay
Alarm.29.Hysteresis
Alarm.29.Inhibit
Alarm.29.Latch
Alarm.29.Out
Alarm.29.Reference
Alarm.29.Threshold
Alarm.29.Type
Alarm.30.Ack
Alarm.30.Block
Alarm.30.Delay
Alarm.30.Hysteresis
Alarm.30.Inhibit
Alarm.30.Latch
Alarm.30.Out
Alarm.30.Reference
Alarm.30.Threshold
Alarm.30.Type
Alarm.31.Ack
Alarm.31.Block
Alarm.31.Delay
Alarm.31.Hysteresis
Alarm.31.Inhibit
Alarm.31.Latch
Alarm.31.Out
Alarm.31.Reference
Alarm.31.Threshold
Alarm.31.Type
Alarm.32.Ack
Alarm.32.Block
Alarm.32.Delay
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
10650
10646
10648
10642
10647
10644
10649
10643
10641
10640
10666
10662
10664
10658
10663
10660
10665
10659
10657
10656
10682
10678
10680
10674
10679
10676
10681
10675
10673
10672
10698
10694
10696
10690
10695
10692
10697
10691
10689
10688
10714
10710
10712
10706
10711
10708
10713
10707
10705
10704
10730
10726
10728
10722
10727
10724
10729
10723
10721
10720
10746
10742
10744
HEX
299A
2996
2998
2992
2997
2994
2999
2993
2991
2990
29AA
29A6
29A8
29A2
29A7
29A4
29A9
29A3
29A1
29A0
29BA
29B6
29B8
29B2
29B7
29B4
29B9
29B3
29B1
29B0
29CA
29C6
29C8
29C2
29C7
29C4
29C9
29C3
29C1
29C0
29DA
29D6
29D8
29D2
29D7
29D4
29D9
29D3
29D1
29D0
29EA
29E6
29E8
29E2
29E7
29E4
29E9
29E3
29E1
29E0
29FA
29F6
29F8
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Alarm.32.Hysteresis
Alarm.32.Inhibit
Alarm.32.Latch
Alarm.32.Out
Alarm.32.Reference
Alarm.32.Threshold
Alarm.32.Type
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus4
AlmSummary.General.AnyAlarm
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus4
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus4
AlmSummary.General.GlobalAck
AlmSummary.General.NewAlarm
AlmSummary.General.NewCTAlarm
AlmSummary.General.RstNewAlarm
AlmSummary.General.RstNewCTAlarm
AlmSummary.General.SBrkAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.SBrkAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.SBrkAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.SBrkAlarmStatus4
Comms.FC.Ident
DigAlarm.1.Ack
DigAlarm.1.Block
DigAlarm.1.Delay
DigAlarm.1.Inhibit
DigAlarm.1.Latch
DigAlarm.1.Out
DigAlarm.1.Type
DigAlarm.2.Ack
DigAlarm.2.Block
DigAlarm.2.Delay
DigAlarm.2.Inhibit
DigAlarm.2.Latch
DigAlarm.2.Out
DigAlarm.2.Type
DigAlarm.3.Ack
DigAlarm.3.Block
DigAlarm.3.Delay
DigAlarm.3.Inhibit
DigAlarm.3.Latch
DigAlarm.3.Out
DigAlarm.3.Type
DigAlarm.4.Ack
DigAlarm.4.Block
DigAlarm.4.Delay
DigAlarm.4.Inhibit
DigAlarm.4.Latch
DigAlarm.4.Out
DigAlarm.4.Type
DigAlarm.5.Ack
DigAlarm.5.Block
DigAlarm.5.Delay
DigAlarm.5.Inhibit
DigAlarm.5.Latch
DEC HEX
10738 29F2
10743 29F7
10740 29F4
10745 29F9
10739 29F3
10737 29F1
10736 29F0
10176 27C0
10177 27C1
10178 27C2
10179 27C3
10213 27E5
4192 1060
4193 1061
4194 1062
4195 1063
10188 27CC
10189 27CD
10190 27CE
10191 27CF
10214 27E6
10212 27E4
4196 1064
10215 27E7
4197 1065
10200 27D8
10201 27D9
10202 27DA
10203 27DB
12963 32A3
11274 2C0A
11270 2C06
11272 2C08
11271 2C07
11268 2C04
11273 2C09
11264 2C00
11290 2C1A
11286 2C16
11288 2C18
11287 2C17
11284 2C14
11289 2C19
11280 2C10
11306 2C2A
11302 2C26
11304 2C28
11303 2C27
11300 2C24
11305 2C29
11296 2C20
11322 2C3A
11318 2C36
11320 2C38
11319 2C37
11316 2C34
11321 2C39
11312 2C30
11338 2C4A
11334 2C46
11336 2C48
11335 2C47
11332 2C44
213
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
DigAlarm.5.Out
DigAlarm.5.Type
DigAlarm.6.Ack
DigAlarm.6.Block
DigAlarm.6.Delay
DigAlarm.6.Inhibit
DigAlarm.6.Latch
DigAlarm.6.Out
DigAlarm.6.Type
DigAlarm.7.Ack
DigAlarm.7.Block
DigAlarm.7.Delay
DigAlarm.7.Inhibit
DigAlarm.7.Latch
DigAlarm.7.Out
DigAlarm.7.Type
DigAlarm.8.Ack
DigAlarm.8.Block
DigAlarm.8.Delay
DigAlarm.8.Inhibit
DigAlarm.8.Latch
DigAlarm.8.Out
DigAlarm.8.Type
DigAlarm.9.Ack
DigAlarm.9.Block
DigAlarm.9.Delay
DigAlarm.9.Inhibit
DigAlarm.9.Latch
DigAlarm.9.Out
DigAlarm.9.Type
DigAlarm.10.Ack
DigAlarm.10.Block
DigAlarm.10.Delay
DigAlarm.10.Inhibit
DigAlarm.10.Latch
DigAlarm.10.Out
DigAlarm.10.Type
DigAlarm.11.Ack
DigAlarm.11.Block
DigAlarm.11.Delay
DigAlarm.11.Inhibit
DigAlarm.11.Latch
DigAlarm.11.Out
DigAlarm.11.Type
DigAlarm.12.Ack
DigAlarm.12.Block
DigAlarm.12.Delay
DigAlarm.12.Inhibit
DigAlarm.12.Latch
DigAlarm.12.Out
DigAlarm.12.Type
DigAlarm.13.Ack
DigAlarm.13.Block
DigAlarm.13.Delay
DigAlarm.13.Inhibit
DigAlarm.13.Latch
DigAlarm.13.Out
DigAlarm.13.Type
DigAlarm.14.Ack
DigAlarm.14.Block
DigAlarm.14.Delay
DigAlarm.14.Inhibit
DigAlarm.14.Latch
214
Mini8 Controller
DEC
11337
11328
11354
11350
11352
11351
11348
11353
11344
11370
11366
11368
11367
11364
11369
11360
11386
11382
11384
11383
11380
11385
11376
11402
11398
11400
11399
11396
11401
11392
11418
11414
11416
11415
11412
11417
11408
11434
11430
11432
11431
11428
11433
11424
11450
11446
11448
11447
11444
11449
11440
11466
11462
11464
11463
11460
11465
11456
11482
11478
11480
11479
11476
HEX
2C49
2C40
2C5A
2C56
2C58
2C57
2C54
2C59
2C50
2C6A
2C66
2C68
2C67
2C64
2C69
2C60
2C7A
2C76
2C78
2C77
2C74
2C79
2C70
2C8A
2C86
2C88
2C87
2C84
2C89
2C80
2C9A
2C96
2C98
2C97
2C94
2C99
2C90
2CAA
2CA6
2CA8
2CA7
2CA4
2CA9
2CA0
2CBA
2CB6
2CB8
2CB7
2CB4
2CB9
2CB0
2CCA
2CC6
2CC8
2CC7
2CC4
2CC9
2CC0
2CDA
2CD6
2CD8
2CD7
2CD4
Parameter Description / Modbus address
DigAlarm.14.Out
DigAlarm.14.Type
DigAlarm.15.Ack
DigAlarm.15.Block
DigAlarm.15.Delay
DigAlarm.15.Inhibit
DigAlarm.15.Latch
DigAlarm.15.Out
DigAlarm.15.Type
DigAlarm.16.Ack
DigAlarm.16.Block
DigAlarm.16.Delay
DigAlarm.16.Inhibit
DigAlarm.16.Latch
DigAlarm.16.Out
DigAlarm.16.Type
DigAlarm.17.Ack
DigAlarm.17.Block
DigAlarm.17.Delay
DigAlarm.17.Inhibit
DigAlarm.17.Latch
DigAlarm.17.Out
DigAlarm.17.Type
DigAlarm.18.Ack
DigAlarm.18.Block
DigAlarm.18.Delay
DigAlarm.18.Inhibit
DigAlarm.18.Latch
DigAlarm.18.Out
DigAlarm.18.Type
DigAlarm.19.Ack
DigAlarm.19.Block
DigAlarm.19.Delay
DigAlarm.19.Inhibit
DigAlarm.19.Latch
DigAlarm.19.Out
DigAlarm.19.Type
DigAlarm.20.Ack
DigAlarm.20.Block
DigAlarm.20.Delay
DigAlarm.20.Inhibit
DigAlarm.20.Latch
DigAlarm.20.Out
DigAlarm.20.Type
DigAlarm.21.Ack
DigAlarm.21.Block
DigAlarm.21.Delay
DigAlarm.21.Inhibit
DigAlarm.21.Latch
DigAlarm.21.Out
DigAlarm.21.Type
DigAlarm.22.Ack
DigAlarm.22.Block
DigAlarm.22.Delay
DigAlarm.22.Inhibit
DigAlarm.22.Latch
DigAlarm.22.Out
DigAlarm.22.Type
DigAlarm.23.Ack
DigAlarm.23.Block
DigAlarm.23.Delay
DigAlarm.23.Inhibit
DigAlarm.23.Latch
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
11481
11472
11498
11494
11496
11495
11492
11497
11488
11514
11510
11512
11511
11508
11513
11504
11530
11526
11528
11527
11524
11529
11520
11546
11542
11544
11543
11540
11545
11536
11562
11558
11560
11559
11556
11561
11552
11578
11574
11576
11575
11572
11577
11568
11594
11590
11592
11591
11588
11593
11584
11610
11606
11608
11607
11604
11609
11600
11626
11622
11624
11623
11620
Sep-05
HEX
2CD9
2CD0
2CEA
2CE6
2CE8
2CE7
2CE4
2CE9
2CE0
2CFA
2CF6
2CF8
2CF7
2CF4
2CF9
2CF0
2D0A
2D06
2D08
2D07
2D04
2D09
2D00
2D1A
2D16
2D18
2D17
2D14
2D19
2D10
2D2A
2D26
2D28
2D27
2D24
2D29
2D20
2D3A
2D36
2D38
2D37
2D34
2D39
2D30
2D4A
2D46
2D48
2D47
2D44
2D49
2D40
2D5A
2D56
2D58
2D57
2D54
2D59
2D50
2D6A
2D66
2D68
2D67
2D64
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
DigAlarm.23.Out
DigAlarm.23.Type
DigAlarm.24.Ack
DigAlarm.24.Block
DigAlarm.24.Delay
DigAlarm.24.Inhibit
DigAlarm.24.Latch
DigAlarm.24.Out
DigAlarm.24.Type
DigAlarm.25.Ack
DigAlarm.25.Block
DigAlarm.25.Delay
DigAlarm.25.Inhibit
DigAlarm.25.Latch
DigAlarm.25.Out
DigAlarm.25.Type
DigAlarm.26.Ack
DigAlarm.26.Block
DigAlarm.26.Delay
DigAlarm.26.Inhibit
DigAlarm.26.Latch
DigAlarm.26.Out
DigAlarm.26.Type
DigAlarm.27.Ack
DigAlarm.27.Block
DigAlarm.27.Delay
DigAlarm.27.Inhibit
DigAlarm.27.Latch
DigAlarm.27.Out
DigAlarm.27.Type
DigAlarm.28.Ack
DigAlarm.28.Block
DigAlarm.28.Delay
DigAlarm.28.Inhibit
DigAlarm.28.Latch
DigAlarm.28.Out
DigAlarm.28.Type
DigAlarm.29.Ack
DigAlarm.29.Block
DigAlarm.29.Delay
DigAlarm.29.Inhibit
DigAlarm.29.Latch
DigAlarm.29.Out
DigAlarm.29.Type
DigAlarm.30.Ack
DigAlarm.30.Block
DigAlarm.30.Delay
DigAlarm.30.Inhibit
DigAlarm.30.Latch
DigAlarm.30.Out
DigAlarm.30.Type
DigAlarm.31.Ack
DigAlarm.31.Block
DigAlarm.31.Delay
DigAlarm.31.Inhibit
DigAlarm.31.Latch
DigAlarm.31.Out
DigAlarm.31.Type
DigAlarm.32.Ack
DigAlarm.32.Block
DigAlarm.32.Delay
DigAlarm.32.Inhibit
DigAlarm.32.Latch
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
11625
11616
11642
11638
11640
11639
11636
11641
11632
11658
11654
11656
11655
11652
11657
11648
11674
11670
11672
11671
11668
11673
11664
11690
11686
11688
11687
11684
11689
11680
11706
11702
11704
11703
11700
11705
11696
11722
11718
11720
11719
11716
11721
11712
11738
11734
11736
11735
11732
11737
11728
11754
11750
11752
11751
11748
11753
11744
11770
11766
11768
11767
11764
HEX
2D69
2D60
2D7A
2D76
2D78
2D77
2D74
2D79
2D70
2D8A
2D86
2D88
2D87
2D84
2D89
2D80
2D9A
2D96
2D98
2D97
2D94
2D99
2D90
2DAA
2DA6
2DA8
2DA7
2DA4
2DA9
2DA0
2DBA
2DB6
2DB8
2DB7
2DB4
2DB9
2DB0
2DCA
2DC6
2DC8
2DC7
2DC4
2DC9
2DC0
2DDA
2DD6
2DD8
2DD7
2DD4
2DD9
2DD0
2DEA
2DE6
2DE8
2DE7
2DE4
2DE9
2DE0
2DFA
2DF6
2DF8
2DF7
2DF4
Parameter Description / Modbus address
DigAlarm.32.Out
DigAlarm.32.Type
Humidity.DewPoint
Humidity.DryTemp
Humidity.Pressure
Humidity.PsychroConst
Humidity.RelHumid
Humidity.Resolution
Humidity.SBrk
Humidity.WetOffset
Humidity.WetTemp
Instrument.Diagnostics.CntrlOverrun
Instrument.Diagnostics.ErrCount
Instrument.Diagnostics.PSUident
Instrument.InstInfo.CompanyID
Instrument.InstInfo.InstType
Instrument.InstInfo.Version
Instrument.Options.Units
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CalibrateCT1
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CalibrateCT2
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CalibrateCT3
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Commission
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CommissionStatus
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT1Range
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT1Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT2Range
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT2Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT3Range
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.CT3Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Inhibit
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Interval
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load1CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load1DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load1OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load1PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load1Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load2CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load2DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load2OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load2PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load2Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load3CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load3DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load3OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load3PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load3Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load4CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load4DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load4OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load4PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load4Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load5CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load5DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load5OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load5PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load5Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load6CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load6DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load6OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load6PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load6Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load7CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load7DrivenBy
DEC
11769
11760
13317
13318
13313
13315
13316
13320
13314
13312
13319
4737
4736
13027
121
122
107
4738
4170
4171
4172
4096
4097
4103
4198
4104
4199
4105
4200
4099
4098
4107
4106
4109
4108
4201
4111
4110
4113
4112
4202
4115
4114
4117
4116
4203
4119
4118
4121
4120
4204
4123
4122
4125
4124
4205
4127
4126
4129
4128
4206
4131
4130
215
HEX
2DF9
2DF0
3405
3406
3401
3403
3404
3408
3402
3400
3407
1281
1280
32E3
0079
007A
006B
1282
104A
104B
104C
1000
1001
1007
1066
1008
1067
1009
1068
1003
1002
100B
100A
100D
100C
1069
100F
100E
1011
1010
106A
1013
1012
1015
1014
106B
1017
1016
1019
1018
106C
101B
101A
101D
101C
106D
101F
101E
1021
1020
106E
1023
1022
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load7OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load7PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load7Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load8CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load8DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load8OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load8PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load8Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load9CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load9DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load9OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load9PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load9Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load10CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load10DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load10OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load10PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load10Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load11CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load11DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load11OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load11PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load11Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load12CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load12DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load12OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load12PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load12Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load13CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load13DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load13OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load13PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load13Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load14CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load14DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load14OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load14PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load14Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load15CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load15DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load15OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load15PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load15Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load16CTInput
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load16DrivenBy
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load16OCFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load16PLFthreshold
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.Load16Resolution
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.MaxLeakPh1
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.MaxLeakPh2
IO.CurrentMonitor.Config.MaxLeakPh3
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load1Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load2Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load3Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load4Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load5Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load6Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load7Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load8Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load9Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load10Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load11Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load12Current
216
Mini8 Controller
DEC
4133
4132
4207
4135
4134
4137
4136
4208
4139
4138
4141
4140
4209
4143
4142
4145
4144
4210
4147
4146
4149
4148
4211
4151
4150
4153
4152
4212
4155
4154
4157
4156
4213
4159
4158
4161
4160
4214
4163
4162
4165
4164
4215
4167
4166
4169
4168
4216
4100
4101
4102
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
HEX
1025
1024
106F
1027
1026
1029
1028
1070
102B
102A
102D
102C
1071
102F
102E
1031
1030
1072
1033
1032
1035
1034
1073
1037
1036
1039
1038
1074
103B
103A
103D
103C
1075
103F
103E
1041
1040
1076
1043
1042
1045
1044
1077
1047
1046
1049
1048
1078
1004
1005
1006
104D
104E
104F
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
Parameter Description / Modbus address
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load13Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load14Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load15Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load16Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Ph1AllOff
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Ph2AllOff
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Ph3AllOff
IO.Mod.1.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.1.HiOffset
IO.Mod.1.HiPoint
IO.Mod.1.LoOffset
IO.Mod.1.LoPoint
IO.Mod.1.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.1.PV
IO.Mod.2.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.2.HiOffset
IO.Mod.2.HiPoint
IO.Mod.2.LoOffset
IO.Mod.2.LoPoint
IO.Mod.2.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.2.PV
IO.Mod.3.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.3.HiOffset
IO.Mod.3.HiPoint
IO.Mod.3.LoOffset
IO.Mod.3.LoPoint
IO.Mod.3.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.3.PV
IO.Mod.4.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.4.HiOffset
IO.Mod.4.HiPoint
IO.Mod.4.LoOffset
IO.Mod.4.LoPoint
IO.Mod.4.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.4.PV
IO.Mod.5.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.5.HiOffset
IO.Mod.5.HiPoint
IO.Mod.5.LoOffset
IO.Mod.5.LoPoint
IO.Mod.5.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.5.PV
IO.Mod.6.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.6.HiOffset
IO.Mod.6.HiPoint
IO.Mod.6.LoOffset
IO.Mod.6.LoPoint
IO.Mod.6.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.6.PV
IO.Mod.7.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.7.HiOffset
IO.Mod.7.HiPoint
IO.Mod.7.LoOffset
IO.Mod.7.LoPoint
IO.Mod.7.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.7.PV
IO.Mod.8.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.8.HiOffset
IO.Mod.8.HiPoint
IO.Mod.8.LoOffset
IO.Mod.8.LoPoint
IO.Mod.8.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.8.PV
IO.Mod.9.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.9.HiOffset
IO.Mod.9.HiPoint
IO.Mod.9.LoOffset
IO.Mod.9.LoPoint
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
426
442
438
435
432
429
422
426
442
438
435
432
429
422
426
442
439
435
432
429
423
426
442
439
435
432
429
423
426
442
439
436
432
429
423
426
442
439
436
432
429
423
426
442
439
436
433
429
423
426
442
439
436
433
429
423
426
442
439
436
433
Sep-05
HEX
1059
105A
105B
105C
105D
105E
105F
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c4
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c5
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c6
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c7
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c8
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10c9
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10ca
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10cb
108
10ac
114c
112c
110c
10ec
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
IO.Mod.9.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.9.PV
IO.Mod.10.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.10.HiOffset
IO.Mod.10.HiPoint
IO.Mod.10.LoOffset
IO.Mod.10.LoPoint
IO.Mod.10.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.10.PV
IO.Mod.11.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.11.HiOffset
IO.Mod.11.HiPoint
IO.Mod.11.LoOffset
IO.Mod.11.LoPoint
IO.Mod.11.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.11.PV
IO.Mod.12.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.12.HiOffset
IO.Mod.12.HiPoint
IO.Mod.12.LoOffset
IO.Mod.12.LoPoint
IO.Mod.12.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.12.PV
IO.Mod.13.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.13.HiOffset
IO.Mod.13.HiPoint
IO.Mod.13.LoOffset
IO.Mod.13.LoPoint
IO.Mod.13.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.13.PV
IO.Mod.14.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.14.HiOffset
IO.Mod.14.HiPoint
IO.Mod.14.LoOffset
IO.Mod.14.LoPoint
IO.Mod.14.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.14.PV
IO.Mod.15.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.15.HiOffset
IO.Mod.15.HiPoint
IO.Mod.15.LoOffset
IO.Mod.15.LoPoint
IO.Mod.15.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.15.PV
IO.Mod.16.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.16.HiOffset
IO.Mod.16.HiPoint
IO.Mod.16.LoOffset
IO.Mod.16.LoPoint
IO.Mod.16.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.16.PV
IO.Mod.17.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.17.HiOffset
IO.Mod.17.HiPoint
IO.Mod.17.LoOffset
IO.Mod.17.LoPoint
IO.Mod.17.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.17.PV
IO.Mod.18.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.18.HiOffset
IO.Mod.18.HiPoint
IO.Mod.18.LoOffset
IO.Mod.18.LoPoint
IO.Mod.18.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.18.PV
IO.Mod.19.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.19.HiOffset
IO.Mod.19.HiPoint
IO.Mod.19.LoOffset
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
430
423
426
442
439
436
433
430
423
427
443
439
436
433
430
423
427
443
439
436
433
430
423
427
443
440
436
433
430
424
427
443
440
436
433
430
424
427
443
440
437
433
430
424
427
443
440
437
433
430
424
427
443
440
437
434
430
424
427
443
440
437
434
430
424
427
443
440
437
HEX
10cc
108c
10a
114
112
110
10e
10cd
108
10a
114
112
110
10e
10ce
108
10af
114f
112f
110f
10ef
10cf
108f
10b
115
113
111
10f0
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f1
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f2
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f3
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f4
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f5
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
Parameter Description / Modbus address
IO.Mod.19.LoPoint
IO.Mod.19.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.19.PV
IO.Mod.20.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.20.HiOffset
IO.Mod.20.HiPoint
IO.Mod.20.LoOffset
IO.Mod.20.LoPoint
IO.Mod.20.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.20.PV
IO.Mod.21.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.21.HiOffset
IO.Mod.21.HiPoint
IO.Mod.21.LoOffset
IO.Mod.21.LoPoint
IO.Mod.21.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.21.PV
IO.Mod.22.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.22.HiOffset
IO.Mod.22.HiPoint
IO.Mod.22.LoOffset
IO.Mod.22.LoPoint
IO.Mod.22.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.22.PV
IO.Mod.23.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.23.HiOffset
IO.Mod.23.HiPoint
IO.Mod.23.LoOffset
IO.Mod.23.LoPoint
IO.Mod.23.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.23.PV
IO.Mod.24.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.24.HiOffset
IO.Mod.24.HiPoint
IO.Mod.24.LoOffset
IO.Mod.24.LoPoint
IO.Mod.24.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.24.PV
IO.Mod.25.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.25.HiOffset
IO.Mod.25.HiPoint
IO.Mod.25.LoOffset
IO.Mod.25.LoPoint
IO.Mod.25.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.25.PV
IO.Mod.26.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.26.HiOffset
IO.Mod.26.HiPoint
IO.Mod.26.LoOffset
IO.Mod.26.LoPoint
IO.Mod.26.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.26.PV
IO.Mod.27.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.27.HiOffset
IO.Mod.27.HiPoint
IO.Mod.27.LoOffset
IO.Mod.27.LoPoint
IO.Mod.27.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.27.PV
IO.Mod.28.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.28.HiOffset
IO.Mod.28.HiPoint
IO.Mod.28.LoOffset
IO.Mod.28.LoPoint
IO.Mod.28.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.28.PV
IO.Mod.29.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.29.HiOffset
IO.Mod.29.HiPoint
DEC
434
431
424
427
443
440
437
434
431
424
428
444
444
437
434
431
424
428
444
440
437
434
431
424
428
444
441
437
434
431
425
428
444
441
437
434
431
425
428
444
441
438
434
431
425
428
444
441
438
434
431
425
428
444
441
438
435
431
425
428
444
441
438
435
431
425
428
444
441
217
HEX
10f6
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f7
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f8
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10f9
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10fa
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10fb
10d
109
10bc
115c
113c
111c
10fc
10dc
109c
10b
115
113
111
10fd
10d
109
10b
115
113
111
10fe
10d
109
10bf
115f
113f
111f
10ff
10df
109f
10c0
116
114
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
IO.Mod.29.LoOffset
IO.Mod.29.LoPoint
IO.Mod.29.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.29.PV
IO.Mod.30.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.30.HiOffset
IO.Mod.30.HiPoint
IO.Mod.30.LoOffset
IO.Mod.30.LoPoint
IO.Mod.30.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.30.PV
IO.Mod.31.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.31.HiOffset
IO.Mod.31.HiPoint
IO.Mod.31.LoOffset
IO.Mod.31.LoPoint
IO.Mod.31.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.31.PV
IO.Mod.32.AlarmAck
IO.Mod.32.HiOffset
IO.Mod.32.HiPoint
IO.Mod.32.LoOffset
IO.Mod.32.LoPoint
IO.Mod.32.MinOnTime
IO.Mod.32.PV
IO.ModIDs.Module1
IO.ModIDs.Module2
IO.ModIDs.Module3
IO.ModIDs.Module4
IPMonitor.1.Max
IPMonitor.1.Min
IPMonitor.1.Reset
IPMonitor.1.Threshold
IPMonitor.1.TimeAbove
IPMonitor.2.Max
IPMonitor.2.Min
IPMonitor.2.Reset
IPMonitor.2.Threshold
IPMonitor.2.TimeAbove
Lgc2.1.In1
Lgc2.1.In2
Lgc2.1.Out
Lgc2.2.In1
Lgc2.2.In2
Lgc2.2.Out
Lgc2.3.In1
Lgc2.3.In2
Lgc2.3.Out
Lgc2.4.In1
Lgc2.4.In2
Lgc2.4.Out
Lgc2.5.In1
Lgc2.5.In2
Lgc2.5.Out
Lgc2.6.In1
Lgc2.6.In2
Lgc2.6.Out
Lgc2.7.In1
Lgc2.7.In2
Lgc2.7.Out
Lgc2.8.In1
Lgc2.8.In2
Lgc2.8.Out
Lgc2.9.In1
Lgc2.9.In2
218
Mini8 Controller
DEC
438
435
432
425
428
444
441
438
435
432
425
429
445
441
438
435
432
425
429
445
441
438
435
432
425
12707
12771
12835
12899
4915
4916
4919
4917
4918
4920
4921
4924
4922
4923
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
HEX
112
110
10e
10a
10c1
116
114
112
110
10e
10a
10c2
116
114
112
110
10e
10a
10c3
116
114
112
110
10e
10a
31A3
31E3
3223
3263
1333
1334
1337
1335
1336
1338
1339
133C
133A
133B
12D6
12D7
12D8
12D9
12DA
12DB
12DC
12DD
12DE
12DF
12E0
12E1
12E2
12E3
12E4
12E5
12E6
12E7
12E8
12E9
12EA
12EB
12EC
12ED
12EE
12EF
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Lgc2.9.Out
Lgc2.10.In1
Lgc2.10.In2
Lgc2.10.Out
Lgc2.11.In1
Lgc2.11.In2
Lgc2.11.Out
Lgc2.12.In1
Lgc2.12.In2
Lgc2.12.Out
Lgc2.13.In1
Lgc2.13.In2
Lgc2.13.Out
Lgc2.14.In1
Lgc2.14.In2
Lgc2.14.Out
Lgc2.15.In1
Lgc2.15.In2
Lgc2.15.Out
Lgc2.16.In1
Lgc2.16.In2
Lgc2.16.Out
Lgc2.17.In1
Lgc2.17.In2
Lgc2.17.Out
Lgc2.18.In1
Lgc2.18.In2
Lgc2.18.Out
Lgc2.19.In1
Lgc2.19.In2
Lgc2.19.Out
Lgc2.20.In1
Lgc2.20.In2
Lgc2.20.Out
Lgc2.21.In1
Lgc2.21.In2
Lgc2.21.Out
Lgc2.22.In1
Lgc2.22.In2
Lgc2.22.Out
Lgc2.23.In1
Lgc2.23.In2
Lgc2.23.Out
Lgc2.24.In1
Lgc2.24.In2
Lgc2.24.Out
Lgc8.1.In1
Lgc8.1.In2
Lgc8.1.In3
Lgc8.1.In4
Lgc8.1.In5
Lgc8.1.In6
Lgc8.1.In7
Lgc8.1.In8
Lgc8.1.Out
Lgc8.2.In1
Lgc8.2.In2
Lgc8.2.In3
Lgc8.2.In4
Lgc8.2.In5
Lgc8.2.In6
Lgc8.2.In7
Lgc8.2.In8
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
Sep-05
HEX
12F0
12F1
12F2
12F3
12F4
12F5
12F6
12F7
12F8
12F9
12FA
12FB
12FC
12FD
12FE
12FF
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
130A
130B
130C
130D
130E
130F
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
131A
131B
131C
131D
131E
131F
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
132A
132B
132C
132D
132E
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Lgc8.2.Out
Lin16.In
Lin16.In1
Lin16.In2
Lin16.In3
Lin16.In4
Lin16.In5
Lin16.In6
Lin16.In7
Lin16.In8
Lin16.In9
Lin16.In10
Lin16.In11
Lin16.In12
Lin16.In13
Lin16.In14
Lin16.InHighLimit
Lin16.InLowLimit
Lin16.Out
Lin16.Out1
Lin16.Out2
Lin16.Out3
Lin16.Out4
Lin16.Out5
Lin16.Out6
Lin16.Out7
Lin16.Out8
Lin16.Out9
Lin16.Out10
Lin16.Out11
Lin16.Out12
Lin16.Out13
Lin16.Out14
Lin16.OutHighLimit
Lin16.OutLowLimit
Loop.1.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.Error
Loop.1.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.1.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.1.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.SBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.1.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.1.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.1.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.1.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan
Loop.1.Main.Inhibit
Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.1.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.1.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.1.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
4911
4960
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4928
4961
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4944
119
113
118
116
114
117
120
32
33
35
34
37
38
29
36
31
30
115
4
10
20
1
2
5
84
82
16
85
HEX
132F
1360
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
134A
134B
134C
134D
134E
134F
1340
1361
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
135A
135B
135C
135D
135E
135F
1350
0077
0071
0076
0074
0072
0075
0078
0020
0021
0023
0022
0025
0026
001D
0024
001F
001E
0073
0004
000A
0014
0001
0002
0005
0054
0052
0010
0055
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.1.OP.CoolType
Loop.1.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.1.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.1.OP.ManualMode
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.1.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.OP.Rate
Loop.1.OP.RateDisable
Loop.1.OP.RemOPH
Loop.1.OP.RemOPL
Loop.1.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.1.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.1.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.1.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.1.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.1.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.1.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.1.PID.NumSets
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.1.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.1.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.1.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.1.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.1.Setup.LoopType
DEC
83
93
91
95
96
97
94
98
103
90
3
92
80
81
86
87
102
101
89
88
100
99
28
26
27
18
46
56
17
47
57
9
45
55
8
44
54
40
49
59
39
48
58
64
41
51
61
42
52
62
6
43
53
19
50
60
65
63
22
23
7
25
21
219
HEX
0053
005D
005B
005F
0060
0061
005E
0062
0067
005A
0003
005C
0050
0051
0056
0057
0066
0065
0059
0058
0064
0063
001C
001A
001B
0012
002E
0038
0011
002F
0039
0009
002D
0037
0008
002C
0036
0028
0031
003B
0027
0030
003A
0040
0029
0033
003D
002A
0034
003E
0006
002B
0035
0013
0032
003C
0041
003F
0016
0017
0007
0019
0015
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.1.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.1.SP.AltSP
Loop.1.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.1.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.1.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.1.SP.RangeLow
Loop.1.SP.Rate
Loop.1.SP.RateDisable
Loop.1.SP.RateDone
Loop.1.SP.SP1
Loop.1.SP.SP2
Loop.1.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPSelect
Loop.1.SP.SPTrack
Loop.1.SP.SPTrim
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.TrackPV
Loop.1.SP.TrackSP
Loop.1.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.1.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.Tune.Stage
Loop.1.Tune.StageTime
Loop.1.Tune.State
Loop.1.Tune.StepSize
Loop.1.Tune.Type
Loop.2.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.Error
Loop.2.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.2.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.2.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.SBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.2.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.2.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.2.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.2.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan
Loop.2.Main.Inhibit
Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.2.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.2.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.2.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.2.OP.CoolType
Loop.2.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardType
220
Mini8 Controller
DEC
24
68
69
75
12
11
70
71
79
13
14
66
67
15
76
72
73
74
77
78
108
105
106
111
112
110
109
104
375
369
374
372
370
373
376
288
289
291
290
293
294
285
292
287
286
371
260
266
276
257
258
261
340
338
272
341
339
349
347
351
352
353
350
HEX
0018
0044
0045
004B
000C
000B
0046
0047
004F
000D
000E
0042
0043
000F
004C
0048
0049
004A
004D
004E
006C
0069
006A
006F
0070
006E
006D
0068
0177
0171
0176
0174
0172
0175
0178
0120
0121
0123
0122
0125
0126
011D
0124
011F
011E
0173
0104
010A
0114
0101
0102
0105
0154
0152
0110
0155
0153
015D
015B
015F
0160
0161
015E
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.2.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.2.OP.ManualMode
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.2.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.OP.Rate
Loop.2.OP.RateDisable
Loop.2.OP.RemOPH
Loop.2.OP.RemOPL
Loop.2.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.2.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.2.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.2.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.2.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.2.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.2.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.2.PID.NumSets
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.2.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.2.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.2.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.2.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.2.Setup.LoopType
Loop.2.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.2.SP.AltSP
Loop.2.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.2.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.2.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.2.SP.RangeLow
Loop.2.SP.Rate
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
354
359
346
259
348
336
337
342
343
358
357
345
344
356
355
284
282
283
274
302
312
273
303
313
265
301
311
264
300
310
296
305
315
295
304
314
320
297
307
317
298
308
318
262
299
309
275
306
316
321
319
278
279
263
281
277
280
324
325
331
268
267
326
Sep-05
HEX
0162
0167
015A
0103
015C
0150
0151
0156
0157
0166
0165
0159
0158
0164
0163
011C
011A
011B
0112
012E
0138
0111
012F
0139
0109
012D
0137
0108
012C
0136
0128
0131
013B
0127
0130
013A
0140
0129
0133
013D
012A
0134
013E
0106
012B
0135
0113
0132
013C
0141
013F
0116
0117
0107
0119
0115
0118
0144
0145
014B
010C
010B
0146
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.2.SP.RateDisable
Loop.2.SP.RateDone
Loop.2.SP.SP1
Loop.2.SP.SP2
Loop.2.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPSelect
Loop.2.SP.SPTrack
Loop.2.SP.SPTrim
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.TrackPV
Loop.2.SP.TrackSP
Loop.2.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.2.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.Tune.Stage
Loop.2.Tune.StageTime
Loop.2.Tune.State
Loop.2.Tune.StepSize
Loop.2.Tune.Type
Loop.3.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.3.Diag.Error
Loop.3.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.3.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.3.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.3.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.3.Diag.SBrk
Loop.3.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.3.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.3.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.3.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.3.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.3.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.3.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.3.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.3.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.3.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.3.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.3.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.3.Main.AutoMan
Loop.3.Main.Inhibit
Loop.3.Main.PV
Loop.3.Main.TargetSP
Loop.3.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.3.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.3.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.3.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.3.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.3.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.3.OP.CoolType
Loop.3.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.3.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.3.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.3.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.3.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.3.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.3.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.3.OP.ManualMode
Loop.3.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.3.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.3.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.3.OP.OutputLowLimit
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
327
335
269
270
322
323
271
332
328
329
330
333
334
364
361
362
367
368
366
365
360
631
625
630
628
626
629
632
544
545
547
546
549
550
541
548
543
542
627
516
522
532
513
514
517
596
594
528
597
595
605
603
607
608
609
606
610
615
602
515
604
592
593
HEX
0147
014F
010D
010E
0142
0143
010F
014C
0148
0149
014A
014D
014E
016C
0169
016A
016F
0170
016E
016D
0168
0277
0271
0276
0274
0272
0275
0278
0220
0221
0223
0222
0225
0226
021D
0224
021F
021E
0273
0204
020A
0214
0201
0202
0205
0254
0252
0210
0255
0253
025D
025B
025F
0260
0261
025E
0262
0267
025A
0203
025C
0250
0251
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.3.OP.Rate
Loop.3.OP.RateDisable
Loop.3.OP.RemOPH
Loop.3.OP.RemOPL
Loop.3.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.3.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.3.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.3.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.3.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.3.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.3.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.3.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.3.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.3.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.3.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.3.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.3.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.3.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.3.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.3.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.3.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.3.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.3.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.3.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.3.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.3.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.3.PID.ManualReset
Loop.3.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.3.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.3.PID.NumSets
Loop.3.PID.OutputHi
Loop.3.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.3.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.3.PID.OutputLo
Loop.3.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.3.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.3.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.3.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.3.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.3.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.3.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.3.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.3.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.3.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.3.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.3.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.3.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.3.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.3.Setup.LoopType
Loop.3.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.3.SP.AltSP
Loop.3.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.3.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.3.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.3.SP.RangeLow
Loop.3.SP.Rate
Loop.3.SP.RateDisable
Loop.3.SP.RateDone
Loop.3.SP.SP1
Loop.3.SP.SP2
Loop.3.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.3.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.3.SP.SPSelect
DEC
598
599
614
613
601
600
612
611
540
538
539
530
558
568
529
559
569
521
557
567
520
556
566
552
561
571
551
560
570
576
553
563
573
554
564
574
518
555
565
531
562
572
577
575
534
535
519
537
533
536
580
581
587
524
523
582
583
591
525
526
578
579
527
221
HEX
0256
0257
0266
0265
0259
0258
0264
0263
021C
021A
021B
0212
022E
0238
0211
022F
0239
0209
022D
0237
0208
022C
0236
0228
0231
023B
0227
0230
023A
0240
0229
0233
023D
022A
0234
023E
0206
022B
0235
0213
0232
023C
0241
023F
0216
0217
0207
0219
0215
0218
0244
0245
024B
020C
020B
0246
0247
024F
020D
020E
0242
0243
020F
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.3.SP.SPTrack
Loop.3.SP.SPTrim
Loop.3.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.3.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.3.SP.TrackPV
Loop.3.SP.TrackSP
Loop.3.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.3.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.3.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.3.Tune.Stage
Loop.3.Tune.StageTime
Loop.3.Tune.State
Loop.3.Tune.StepSize
Loop.3.Tune.Type
Loop.4.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.4.Diag.Error
Loop.4.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.4.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.4.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.4.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.4.Diag.SBrk
Loop.4.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.4.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.4.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.4.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.4.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.4.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.4.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.4.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.4.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.4.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.4.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.4.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.4.Main.AutoMan
Loop.4.Main.Inhibit
Loop.4.Main.PV
Loop.4.Main.TargetSP
Loop.4.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.4.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.4.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.4.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.4.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.4.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.4.OP.CoolType
Loop.4.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.4.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.4.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.4.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.4.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.4.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.4.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.4.OP.ManualMode
Loop.4.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.4.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.4.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.4.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.4.OP.Rate
Loop.4.OP.RateDisable
Loop.4.OP.RemOPH
Loop.4.OP.RemOPL
Loop.4.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.4.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.4.OP.TrackEnable
222
Mini8 Controller
DEC
588
584
585
586
589
590
620
617
618
623
624
622
621
616
887
881
886
884
882
885
888
800
801
803
802
805
806
797
804
799
798
883
772
778
788
769
770
773
852
850
784
853
851
861
859
863
864
865
862
866
871
858
771
860
848
849
854
855
870
869
857
856
868
HEX
024C
0248
0249
024A
024D
024E
026C
0269
026A
026F
0270
026E
026D
0268
0377
0371
0376
0374
0372
0375
0378
0320
0321
0323
0322
0325
0326
031D
0324
031F
031E
0373
0304
030A
0314
0301
0302
0305
0354
0352
0310
0355
0353
035D
035B
035F
0360
0361
035E
0362
0367
035A
0303
035C
0350
0351
0356
0357
0366
0365
0359
0358
0364
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.4.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.4.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.4.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.4.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.4.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.4.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.4.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.4.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.4.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.4.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.4.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.4.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.4.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.4.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.4.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.4.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.4.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.4.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.4.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.4.PID.ManualReset
Loop.4.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.4.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.4.PID.NumSets
Loop.4.PID.OutputHi
Loop.4.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.4.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.4.PID.OutputLo
Loop.4.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.4.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.4.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.4.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.4.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.4.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.4.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.4.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.4.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.4.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.4.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.4.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.4.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.4.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.4.Setup.LoopType
Loop.4.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.4.SP.AltSP
Loop.4.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.4.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.4.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.4.SP.RangeLow
Loop.4.SP.Rate
Loop.4.SP.RateDisable
Loop.4.SP.RateDone
Loop.4.SP.SP1
Loop.4.SP.SP2
Loop.4.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.4.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.4.SP.SPSelect
Loop.4.SP.SPTrack
Loop.4.SP.SPTrim
Loop.4.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.4.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.4.SP.TrackPV
Loop.4.SP.TrackSP
Loop.4.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
867
796
794
795
786
814
824
785
815
825
777
813
823
776
812
822
808
817
827
807
816
826
832
809
819
829
810
820
830
774
811
821
787
818
828
833
831
790
791
775
793
789
792
836
837
843
780
779
838
839
847
781
782
834
835
783
844
840
841
842
845
846
876
Sep-05
HEX
0363
031C
031A
031B
0312
032E
0338
0311
032F
0339
0309
032D
0337
0308
032C
0336
0328
0331
033B
0327
0330
033A
0340
0329
0333
033D
032A
0334
033E
0306
032B
0335
0313
0332
033C
0341
033F
0316
0317
0307
0319
0315
0318
0344
0345
034B
030C
030B
0346
0347
034F
030D
030E
0342
0343
030F
034C
0348
0349
034A
034D
034E
036C
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.4.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.4.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.4.Tune.Stage
Loop.4.Tune.StageTime
Loop.4.Tune.State
Loop.4.Tune.StepSize
Loop.4.Tune.Type
Loop.5.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.5.Diag.Error
Loop.5.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.5.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.5.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.5.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.5.Diag.SBrk
Loop.5.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.5.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.5.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.5.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.5.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.5.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.5.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.5.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.5.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.5.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.5.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.5.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.5.Main.AutoMan
Loop.5.Main.Inhibit
Loop.5.Main.PV
Loop.5.Main.TargetSP
Loop.5.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.5.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.5.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.5.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.5.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.5.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.5.OP.CoolType
Loop.5.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.5.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.5.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.5.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.5.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.5.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.5.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.5.OP.ManualMode
Loop.5.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.5.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.5.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.5.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.5.OP.Rate
Loop.5.OP.RateDisable
Loop.5.OP.RemOPH
Loop.5.OP.RemOPL
Loop.5.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.5.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.5.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.5.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.5.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.5.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.5.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.5.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.5.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.5.PID.CutbackHigh3
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
873
874
879
880
878
877
872
1143
1137
1142
1140
1138
1141
1144
1056
1057
1059
1058
1061
1062
1053
1060
1055
1054
1139
1028
1034
1044
1025
1026
1029
1108
1106
1040
1109
1107
1117
1115
1119
1120
1121
1118
1122
1127
1114
1027
1116
1104
1105
1110
1111
1126
1125
1113
1112
1124
1123
1052
1050
1051
1042
1070
1080
HEX
0369
036A
036F
0370
036E
036D
0368
0477
0471
0476
0474
0472
0475
0478
0420
0421
0423
0422
0425
0426
041D
0424
041F
041E
0473
0404
040A
0414
0401
0402
0405
0454
0452
0410
0455
0453
045D
045B
045F
0460
0461
045E
0462
0467
045A
0403
045C
0450
0451
0456
0457
0466
0465
0459
0458
0464
0463
041C
041A
041B
0412
042E
0438
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.5.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.5.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.5.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.5.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.5.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.5.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.5.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.5.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.5.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.5.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.5.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.5.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.5.PID.ManualReset
Loop.5.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.5.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.5.PID.NumSets
Loop.5.PID.OutputHi
Loop.5.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.5.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.5.PID.OutputLo
Loop.5.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.5.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.5.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.5.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.5.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.5.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.5.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.5.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.5.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.5.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.5.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.5.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.5.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.5.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.5.Setup.LoopType
Loop.5.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.5.SP.AltSP
Loop.5.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.5.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.5.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.5.SP.RangeLow
Loop.5.SP.Rate
Loop.5.SP.RateDisable
Loop.5.SP.RateDone
Loop.5.SP.SP1
Loop.5.SP.SP2
Loop.5.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.5.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.5.SP.SPSelect
Loop.5.SP.SPTrack
Loop.5.SP.SPTrim
Loop.5.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.5.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.5.SP.TrackPV
Loop.5.SP.TrackSP
Loop.5.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.5.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.5.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.5.Tune.Stage
Loop.5.Tune.StageTime
Loop.5.Tune.State
Loop.5.Tune.StepSize
Loop.5.Tune.Type
DEC
1041
1071
1081
1033
1069
1079
1032
1068
1078
1064
1073
1083
1063
1072
1082
1088
1065
1075
1085
1066
1076
1086
1030
1067
1077
1043
1074
1084
1089
1087
1046
1047
1031
1049
1045
1048
1092
1093
1099
1036
1035
1094
1095
1103
1037
1038
1090
1091
1039
1100
1096
1097
1098
1101
1102
1132
1129
1130
1135
1136
1134
1133
1128
223
HEX
0411
042F
0439
0409
042D
0437
0408
042C
0436
0428
0431
043B
0427
0430
043A
0440
0429
0433
043D
042A
0434
043E
0406
042B
0435
0413
0432
043C
0441
043F
0416
0417
0407
0419
0415
0418
0444
0445
044B
040C
040B
0446
0447
044F
040D
040E
0442
0443
040F
044C
0448
0449
044A
044D
044E
046C
0469
046A
046F
0470
046E
046D
0468
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.6.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.6.Diag.Error
Loop.6.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.6.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.6.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.6.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.6.Diag.SBrk
Loop.6.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.6.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.6.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.6.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.6.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.6.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.6.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.6.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.6.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.6.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.6.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.6.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.6.Main.AutoMan
Loop.6.Main.Inhibit
Loop.6.Main.PV
Loop.6.Main.TargetSP
Loop.6.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.6.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.6.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.6.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.6.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.6.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.6.OP.CoolType
Loop.6.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.6.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.6.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.6.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.6.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.6.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.6.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.6.OP.ManualMode
Loop.6.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.6.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.6.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.6.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.6.OP.Rate
Loop.6.OP.RateDisable
Loop.6.OP.RemOPH
Loop.6.OP.RemOPL
Loop.6.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.6.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.6.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.6.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.6.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.6.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.6.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.6.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.6.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.6.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.6.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.6.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.6.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.6.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.6.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.6.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.6.PID.IntegralTime
224
Mini8 Controller
DEC
1399
1393
1398
1396
1394
1397
1400
1312
1313
1315
1314
1317
1318
1309
1316
1311
1310
1395
1284
1290
1300
1281
1282
1285
1364
1362
1296
1365
1363
1373
1371
1375
1376
1377
1374
1378
1383
1370
1283
1372
1360
1361
1366
1367
1382
1381
1369
1368
1380
1379
1308
1306
1307
1298
1326
1336
1297
1327
1337
1289
1325
1335
1288
HEX
0577
0571
0576
0574
0572
0575
0578
0520
0521
0523
0522
0525
0526
051D
0524
051F
051E
0573
0504
050A
0514
0501
0502
0505
0554
0552
0510
0555
0553
055D
055B
055F
0560
0561
055E
0562
0567
055A
0503
055C
0550
0551
0556
0557
0566
0565
0559
0558
0564
0563
051C
051A
051B
0512
052E
0538
0511
052F
0539
0509
052D
0537
0508
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.6.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.6.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.6.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.6.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.6.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.6.PID.ManualReset
Loop.6.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.6.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.6.PID.NumSets
Loop.6.PID.OutputHi
Loop.6.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.6.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.6.PID.OutputLo
Loop.6.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.6.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.6.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.6.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.6.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.6.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.6.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.6.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.6.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.6.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.6.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.6.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.6.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.6.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.6.Setup.LoopType
Loop.6.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.6.SP.AltSP
Loop.6.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.6.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.6.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.6.SP.RangeLow
Loop.6.SP.Rate
Loop.6.SP.RateDisable
Loop.6.SP.RateDone
Loop.6.SP.SP1
Loop.6.SP.SP2
Loop.6.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.6.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.6.SP.SPSelect
Loop.6.SP.SPTrack
Loop.6.SP.SPTrim
Loop.6.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.6.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.6.SP.TrackPV
Loop.6.SP.TrackSP
Loop.6.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.6.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.6.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.6.Tune.Stage
Loop.6.Tune.StageTime
Loop.6.Tune.State
Loop.6.Tune.StepSize
Loop.6.Tune.Type
Loop.7.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.7.Diag.Error
Loop.7.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.7.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.7.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.7.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.7.Diag.SBrk
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
1324
1334
1320
1329
1339
1319
1328
1338
1344
1321
1331
1341
1322
1332
1342
1286
1323
1333
1299
1330
1340
1345
1343
1302
1303
1287
1305
1301
1304
1348
1349
1355
1292
1291
1350
1351
1359
1293
1294
1346
1347
1295
1356
1352
1353
1354
1357
1358
1388
1385
1386
1391
1392
1390
1389
1384
1655
1649
1654
1652
1650
1653
1656
Sep-05
HEX
052C
0536
0528
0531
053B
0527
0530
053A
0540
0529
0533
053D
052A
0534
053E
0506
052B
0535
0513
0532
053C
0541
053F
0516
0517
0507
0519
0515
0518
0544
0545
054B
050C
050B
0546
0547
054F
050D
050E
0542
0543
050F
054C
0548
0549
054A
054D
054E
056C
0569
056A
056F
0570
056E
056D
0568
0677
0671
0676
0674
0672
0675
0678
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.7.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.7.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.7.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.7.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.7.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.7.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.7.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.7.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.7.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.7.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.7.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.7.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.7.Main.AutoMan
Loop.7.Main.Inhibit
Loop.7.Main.PV
Loop.7.Main.TargetSP
Loop.7.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.7.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.7.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.7.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.7.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.7.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.7.OP.CoolType
Loop.7.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.7.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.7.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.7.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.7.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.7.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.7.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.7.OP.ManualMode
Loop.7.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.7.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.7.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.7.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.7.OP.Rate
Loop.7.OP.RateDisable
Loop.7.OP.RemOPH
Loop.7.OP.RemOPL
Loop.7.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.7.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.7.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.7.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.7.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.7.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.7.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.7.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.7.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.7.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.7.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.7.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.7.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.7.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.7.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.7.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.7.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.7.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.7.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.7.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.7.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.7.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.7.PID.ManualReset
Loop.7.PID.ManualReset2
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
1568
1569
1571
1570
1573
1574
1565
1572
1567
1566
1651
1540
1546
1556
1537
1538
1541
1620
1618
1552
1621
1619
1629
1627
1631
1632
1633
1630
1634
1639
1626
1539
1628
1616
1617
1622
1623
1638
1637
1625
1624
1636
1635
1564
1562
1563
1554
1582
1592
1553
1583
1593
1545
1581
1591
1544
1580
1590
1576
1585
1595
1575
1584
HEX
0620
0621
0623
0622
0625
0626
061D
0624
061F
061E
0673
0604
060A
0614
0601
0602
0605
0654
0652
0610
0655
0653
065D
065B
065F
0660
0661
065E
0662
0667
065A
0603
065C
0650
0651
0656
0657
0666
0665
0659
0658
0664
0663
061C
061A
061B
0612
062E
0638
0611
062F
0639
0609
062D
0637
0608
062C
0636
0628
0631
063B
0627
0630
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.7.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.7.PID.NumSets
Loop.7.PID.OutputHi
Loop.7.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.7.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.7.PID.OutputLo
Loop.7.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.7.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.7.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.7.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.7.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.7.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.7.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.7.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.7.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.7.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.7.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.7.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.7.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.7.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.7.Setup.LoopType
Loop.7.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.7.SP.AltSP
Loop.7.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.7.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.7.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.7.SP.RangeLow
Loop.7.SP.Rate
Loop.7.SP.RateDisable
Loop.7.SP.RateDone
Loop.7.SP.SP1
Loop.7.SP.SP2
Loop.7.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.7.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.7.SP.SPSelect
Loop.7.SP.SPTrack
Loop.7.SP.SPTrim
Loop.7.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.7.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.7.SP.TrackPV
Loop.7.SP.TrackSP
Loop.7.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.7.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.7.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.7.Tune.Stage
Loop.7.Tune.StageTime
Loop.7.Tune.State
Loop.7.Tune.StepSize
Loop.7.Tune.Type
Loop.8.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.8.Diag.Error
Loop.8.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.8.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.8.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.8.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.8.Diag.SBrk
Loop.8.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.8.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.8.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.8.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.8.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.8.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.8.Diag.SchedPB
DEC
1594
1600
1577
1587
1597
1578
1588
1598
1542
1579
1589
1555
1586
1596
1601
1599
1558
1559
1543
1561
1557
1560
1604
1605
1611
1548
1547
1606
1607
1615
1549
1550
1602
1603
1551
1612
1608
1609
1610
1613
1614
1644
1641
1642
1647
1648
1646
1645
1640
1911
1905
1910
1908
1906
1909
1912
1824
1825
1827
1826
1829
1830
1821
225
HEX
063A
0640
0629
0633
063D
062A
0634
063E
0606
062B
0635
0613
0632
063C
0641
063F
0616
0617
0607
0619
0615
0618
0644
0645
064B
060C
060B
0646
0647
064F
060D
060E
0642
0643
060F
064C
0648
0649
064A
064D
064E
066C
0669
066A
066F
0670
066E
066D
0668
0777
0771
0776
0774
0772
0775
0778
0720
0721
0723
0722
0725
0726
071D
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.8.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.8.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.8.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.8.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.8.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.8.Main.AutoMan
Loop.8.Main.Inhibit
Loop.8.Main.PV
Loop.8.Main.TargetSP
Loop.8.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.8.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.8.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.8.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.8.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.8.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.8.OP.CoolType
Loop.8.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.8.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.8.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.8.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.8.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.8.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.8.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.8.OP.ManualMode
Loop.8.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.8.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.8.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.8.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.8.OP.Rate
Loop.8.OP.RateDisable
Loop.8.OP.RemOPH
Loop.8.OP.RemOPL
Loop.8.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.8.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.8.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.8.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.8.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.8.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.8.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.8.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.8.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.8.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.8.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.8.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.8.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.8.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.8.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.8.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.8.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.8.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.8.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.8.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.8.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.8.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.8.PID.ManualReset
Loop.8.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.8.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.8.PID.NumSets
Loop.8.PID.OutputHi
Loop.8.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.8.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.8.PID.OutputLo
Loop.8.PID.OutputLo2
226
Mini8 Controller
DEC
1828
1823
1822
1907
1796
1802
1812
1793
1794
1797
1876
1874
1808
1877
1875
1885
1883
1887
1888
1889
1886
1890
1895
1882
1795
1884
1872
1873
1878
1879
1894
1893
1881
1880
1892
1891
1820
1818
1819
1810
1838
1848
1809
1839
1849
1801
1837
1847
1800
1836
1846
1832
1841
1851
1831
1840
1850
1856
1833
1843
1853
1834
1844
HEX
0724
071F
071E
0773
0704
070A
0714
0701
0702
0705
0754
0752
0710
0755
0753
075D
075B
075F
0760
0761
075E
0762
0767
075A
0703
075C
0750
0751
0756
0757
0766
0765
0759
0758
0764
0763
071C
071A
071B
0712
072E
0738
0711
072F
0739
0709
072D
0737
0708
072C
0736
0728
0731
073B
0727
0730
073A
0740
0729
0733
073D
072A
0734
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.8.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.8.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.8.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.8.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.8.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.8.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.8.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.8.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.8.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.8.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.8.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.8.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.8.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.8.Setup.LoopType
Loop.8.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.8.SP.AltSP
Loop.8.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.8.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.8.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.8.SP.RangeLow
Loop.8.SP.Rate
Loop.8.SP.RateDisable
Loop.8.SP.RateDone
Loop.8.SP.SP1
Loop.8.SP.SP2
Loop.8.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.8.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.8.SP.SPSelect
Loop.8.SP.SPTrack
Loop.8.SP.SPTrim
Loop.8.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.8.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.8.SP.TrackPV
Loop.8.SP.TrackSP
Loop.8.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.8.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.8.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.8.Tune.Stage
Loop.8.Tune.StageTime
Loop.8.Tune.State
Loop.8.Tune.StepSize
Loop.8.Tune.Type
Loop.9.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.9.Diag.Error
Loop.9.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.9.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.9.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.9.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.9.Diag.SBrk
Loop.9.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.9.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.9.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.9.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.9.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.9.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.9.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.9.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.9.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.9.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.9.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.9.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.9.Main.AutoMan
Loop.9.Main.Inhibit
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
1854
1798
1835
1845
1811
1842
1852
1857
1855
1814
1815
1799
1817
1813
1816
1860
1861
1867
1804
1803
1862
1863
1871
1805
1806
1858
1859
1807
1868
1864
1865
1866
1869
1870
1900
1897
1898
1903
1904
1902
1901
1896
2167
2161
2166
2164
2162
2165
2168
2080
2081
2083
2082
2085
2086
2077
2084
2079
2078
2163
2052
2058
2068
Sep-05
HEX
073E
0706
072B
0735
0713
0732
073C
0741
073F
0716
0717
0707
0719
0715
0718
0744
0745
074B
070C
070B
0746
0747
074F
070D
070E
0742
0743
070F
074C
0748
0749
074A
074D
074E
076C
0769
076A
076F
0770
076E
076D
0768
0877
0871
0876
0874
0872
0875
0878
0820
0821
0823
0822
0825
0826
081D
0824
081F
081E
0873
0804
080A
0814
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.9.Main.PV
Loop.9.Main.TargetSP
Loop.9.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.9.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.9.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.9.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.9.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.9.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.9.OP.CoolType
Loop.9.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.9.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.9.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.9.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.9.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.9.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.9.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.9.OP.ManualMode
Loop.9.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.9.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.9.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.9.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.9.OP.Rate
Loop.9.OP.RateDisable
Loop.9.OP.RemOPH
Loop.9.OP.RemOPL
Loop.9.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.9.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.9.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.9.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.9.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.9.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.9.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.9.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.9.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.9.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.9.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.9.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.9.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.9.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.9.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.9.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.9.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.9.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.9.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.9.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.9.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.9.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.9.PID.ManualReset
Loop.9.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.9.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.9.PID.NumSets
Loop.9.PID.OutputHi
Loop.9.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.9.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.9.PID.OutputLo
Loop.9.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.9.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.9.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.9.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.9.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.9.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.9.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.9.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
2049
2050
2053
2132
2130
2064
2133
2131
2141
2139
2143
2144
2145
2142
2146
2151
2138
2051
2140
2128
2129
2134
2135
2150
2149
2137
2136
2148
2147
2076
2074
2075
2066
2094
2104
2065
2095
2105
2057
2093
2103
2056
2092
2102
2088
2097
2107
2087
2096
2106
2112
2089
2099
2109
2090
2100
2110
2054
2091
2101
2067
2098
2108
HEX
0801
0802
0805
0854
0852
0810
0855
0853
085D
085B
085F
0860
0861
085E
0862
0867
085A
0803
085C
0850
0851
0856
0857
0866
0865
0859
0858
0864
0863
081C
081A
081B
0812
082E
0838
0811
082F
0839
0809
082D
0837
0808
082C
0836
0828
0831
083B
0827
0830
083A
0840
0829
0833
083D
082A
0834
083E
0806
082B
0835
0813
0832
083C
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.9.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.9.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.9.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.9.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.9.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.9.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.9.Setup.LoopType
Loop.9.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.9.SP.AltSP
Loop.9.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.9.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.9.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.9.SP.RangeLow
Loop.9.SP.Rate
Loop.9.SP.RateDisable
Loop.9.SP.RateDone
Loop.9.SP.SP1
Loop.9.SP.SP2
Loop.9.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.9.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.9.SP.SPSelect
Loop.9.SP.SPTrack
Loop.9.SP.SPTrim
Loop.9.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.9.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.9.SP.TrackPV
Loop.9.SP.TrackSP
Loop.9.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.9.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.9.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.9.Tune.Stage
Loop.9.Tune.StageTime
Loop.9.Tune.State
Loop.9.Tune.StepSize
Loop.9.Tune.Type
Loop.10.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.10.Diag.Error
Loop.10.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.10.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.10.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.10.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.10.Diag.SBrk
Loop.10.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.10.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.10.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.10.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.10.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.10.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.10.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.10.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.10.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.10.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.10.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.10.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.10.Main.AutoMan
Loop.10.Main.Inhibit
Loop.10.Main.PV
Loop.10.Main.TargetSP
Loop.10.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.10.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.10.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.10.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.10.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
DEC
2113
2111
2070
2071
2055
2073
2069
2072
2116
2117
2123
2060
2059
2118
2119
2127
2061
2062
2114
2115
2063
2124
2120
2121
2122
2125
2126
2156
2153
2154
2159
2160
2158
2157
2152
2423
2417
2422
2420
2418
2421
2424
2336
2337
2339
2338
2341
2342
2333
2340
2335
2334
2419
2308
2314
2324
2305
2306
2309
2388
2386
2320
2389
227
HEX
0841
083F
0816
0817
0807
0819
0815
0818
0844
0845
084B
080C
080B
0846
0847
084F
080D
080E
0842
0843
080F
084C
0848
0849
084A
084D
084E
086C
0869
086A
086F
0870
086E
086D
0868
0977
0971
0976
0974
0972
0975
0978
0920
0921
0923
0922
0925
0926
091D
0924
091F
091E
0973
0904
090A
0914
0901
0902
0905
0954
0952
0910
0955
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.10.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.10.OP.CoolType
Loop.10.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.10.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.10.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.10.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.10.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.10.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.10.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.10.OP.ManualMode
Loop.10.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.10.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.10.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.10.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.10.OP.Rate
Loop.10.OP.RateDisable
Loop.10.OP.RemOPH
Loop.10.OP.RemOPL
Loop.10.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.10.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.10.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.10.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.10.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.10.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.10.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.10.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.10.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.10.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.10.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.10.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.10.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.10.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.10.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.10.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.10.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.10.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.10.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.10.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.10.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.10.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.10.PID.ManualReset
Loop.10.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.10.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.10.PID.NumSets
Loop.10.PID.OutputHi
Loop.10.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.10.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.10.PID.OutputLo
Loop.10.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.10.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.10.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.10.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.10.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.10.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.10.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.10.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.10.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.10.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.10.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.10.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.10.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.10.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.10.Setup.LoopType
228
Mini8 Controller
DEC
2387
2397
2395
2399
2400
2401
2398
2402
2407
2394
2307
2396
2384
2385
2390
2391
2406
2405
2393
2392
2404
2403
2332
2330
2331
2322
2350
2360
2321
2351
2361
2313
2349
2359
2312
2348
2358
2344
2353
2363
2343
2352
2362
2368
2345
2355
2365
2346
2356
2366
2310
2347
2357
2323
2354
2364
2369
2367
2326
2327
2311
2329
2325
HEX
0953
095D
095B
095F
0960
0961
095E
0962
0967
095A
0903
095C
0950
0951
0956
0957
0966
0965
0959
0958
0964
0963
091C
091A
091B
0912
092E
0938
0911
092F
0939
0909
092D
0937
0908
092C
0936
0928
0931
093B
0927
0930
093A
0940
0929
0933
093D
092A
0934
093E
0906
092B
0935
0913
0932
093C
0941
093F
0916
0917
0907
0919
0915
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.10.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.10.SP.AltSP
Loop.10.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.10.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.10.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.10.SP.RangeLow
Loop.10.SP.Rate
Loop.10.SP.RateDisable
Loop.10.SP.RateDone
Loop.10.SP.SP1
Loop.10.SP.SP2
Loop.10.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.10.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.10.SP.SPSelect
Loop.10.SP.SPTrack
Loop.10.SP.SPTrim
Loop.10.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.10.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.10.SP.TrackPV
Loop.10.SP.TrackSP
Loop.10.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.10.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.10.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.10.Tune.Stage
Loop.10.Tune.StageTime
Loop.10.Tune.State
Loop.10.Tune.StepSize
Loop.10.Tune.Type
Loop.11.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.11.Diag.Error
Loop.11.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.11.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.11.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.11.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.11.Diag.SBrk
Loop.11.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.11.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.11.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.11.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.11.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.11.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.11.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.11.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.11.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.11.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.11.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.11.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.11.Main.AutoMan
Loop.11.Main.Inhibit
Loop.11.Main.PV
Loop.11.Main.TargetSP
Loop.11.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.11.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.11.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.11.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.11.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.11.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.11.OP.CoolType
Loop.11.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.11.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.11.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.11.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.11.OP.FeedForwardType
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
2328
2372
2373
2379
2316
2315
2374
2375
2383
2317
2318
2370
2371
2319
2380
2376
2377
2378
2381
2382
2412
2409
2410
2415
2416
2414
2413
2408
2679
2673
2678
2676
2674
2677
2680
2592
2593
2595
2594
2597
2598
2589
2596
2591
2590
2675
2564
2570
2580
2561
2562
2565
2644
2642
2576
2645
2643
2653
2651
2655
2656
2657
2654
Sep-05
HEX
0918
0944
0945
094B
090C
090B
0946
0947
094F
090D
090E
0942
0943
090F
094C
0948
0949
094A
094D
094E
096C
0969
096A
96F
0970
096E
096D
0968
0A77
0A71
0A76
0A74
0A72
0A75
0A78
0A20
0A21
0A23
0A22
0A25
0A26
0A1D
0A24
0A1F
0A1E
0A73
0A04
0A0A
0A14
0A01
0A02
0A05
0A54
0A52
0A10
0A55
0A53
0A5D
0A5B
0A5F
0A60
0A61
0A5E
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.11.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.11.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.11.OP.ManualMode
Loop.11.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.11.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.11.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.11.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.11.OP.Rate
Loop.11.OP.RateDisable
Loop.11.OP.RemOPH
Loop.11.OP.RemOPL
Loop.11.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.11.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.11.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.11.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.11.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.11.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.11.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.11.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.11.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.11.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.11.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.11.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.11.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.11.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.11.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.11.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.11.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.11.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.11.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.11.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.11.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.11.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.11.PID.ManualReset
Loop.11.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.11.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.11.PID.NumSets
Loop.11.PID.OutputHi
Loop.11.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.11.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.11.PID.OutputLo
Loop.11.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.11.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.11.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.11.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.11.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.11.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.11.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.11.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.11.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.11.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.11.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.11.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.11.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.11.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.11.Setup.LoopType
Loop.11.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.11.SP.AltSP
Loop.11.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.11.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.11.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.11.SP.RangeLow
Loop.11.SP.Rate
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
2658
2663
2650
2563
2652
2640
2641
2646
2647
2662
2661
2649
2648
2660
2659
2588
2586
2587
2578
2606
2616
2577
2607
2617
2569
2605
2615
2568
2604
2614
2600
2609
2619
2599
2608
2618
2624
2601
2611
2621
2602
2612
2622
2566
2603
2613
2579
2610
2620
2625
2623
2582
2583
2567
2585
2581
2584
2628
2629
2635
2572
2571
2630
HEX
0A62
0A67
0A5A
0A03
0A5C
0A50
0A51
0A56
0A57
0A66
0A65
0A59
0A58
0A64
0A63
0A1C
0A1A
0A1B
0A12
0A2E
0A38
0A11
0A2F
0A39
0A09
0A2D
0A37
0A08
0A2C
0A36
0A28
0A31
0A3B
0A27
0A30
0A3A
0A40
0A29
0A33
0A3D
0A2A
0A34
0A3E
0A06
0A2B
0A35
0A13
0A32
0A3C
0A41
0A3F
0A16
0A17
0A07
0A19
0A15
0A18
0A44
0A45
0A4B
0A0C
0A0B
0A46
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.11.SP.RateDisable
Loop.11.SP.RateDone
Loop.11.SP.SP1
Loop.11.SP.SP2
Loop.11.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.11.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.11.SP.SPSelect
Loop.11.SP.SPTrack
Loop.11.SP.SPTrim
Loop.11.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.11.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.11.SP.TrackPV
Loop.11.SP.TrackSP
Loop.11.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.11.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.11.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.11.Tune.Stage
Loop.11.Tune.StageTime
Loop.11.Tune.State
Loop.11.Tune.StepSize
Loop.11.Tune.Type
Loop.12.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.12.Diag.Error
Loop.12.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.12.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.12.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.12.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.12.Diag.SBrk
Loop.12.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.12.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.12.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.12.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.12.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.12.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.12.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.12.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.12.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.12.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.12.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.12.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.12.Main.AutoMan
Loop.12.Main.Inhibit
Loop.12.Main.PV
Loop.12.Main.TargetSP
Loop.12.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.12.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.12.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.12.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.12.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.12.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.12.OP.CoolType
Loop.12.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.12.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.12.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.12.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.12.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.12.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.12.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.12.OP.ManualMode
Loop.12.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.12.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.12.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.12.OP.OutputLowLimit
DEC
2631
2639
2573
2574
2626
2627
2575
2636
2632
2633
2634
2637
2638
2668
2665
2666
2671
2672
2670
2669
2664
2935
2929
2934
2932
2930
2933
2936
2848
2849
2851
2850
2853
2854
2845
2852
2847
2846
2931
2820
2826
2836
2817
2818
2821
2900
2898
2832
2901
2899
2909
2907
2911
2912
2913
2910
2914
2919
2906
2819
2908
2896
2897
229
HEX
0A47
0A4F
0A0D
0A0E
0A42
0A43
0A0F
0A4C
0A48
0A49
0A4A
0A4D
0A4E
0A6C
0A69
0A6A
0A6F
0A70
0A6E
0A6D
0A68
0B77
0B71
0B76
0B74
0B72
0B75
0B78
0B20
0B21
0B23
0B22
0B25
0B26
0B1D
0B24
0B1F
0B1E
0B73
0B04
0B0A
0B14
0B01
0B02
0B05
0B54
0B52
0B10
0B55
0B53
0B5D
0B5B
0B5F
0B60
0B61
0B5E
0B62
0B67
0B5A
0B03
0B5C
0B50
0B51
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.12.OP.Rate
Loop.12.OP.RateDisable
Loop.12.OP.RemOPH
Loop.12.OP.RemOPL
Loop.12.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.12.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.12.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.12.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.12.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.12.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.12.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.12.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.12.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.12.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.12.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.12.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.12.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.12.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.12.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.12.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.12.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.12.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.12.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.12.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.12.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.12.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.12.PID.ManualReset
Loop.12.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.12.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.12.PID.NumSets
Loop.12.PID.OutputHi
Loop.12.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.12.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.12.PID.OutputLo
Loop.12.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.12.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.12.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.12.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.12.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.12.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.12.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.12.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.12.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.12.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.12.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.12.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.12.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.12.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.12.Setup.LoopType
Loop.12.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.12.SP.AltSP
Loop.12.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.12.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.12.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.12.SP.RangeLow
Loop.12.SP.Rate
Loop.12.SP.RateDisable
Loop.12.SP.RateDone
Loop.12.SP.SP1
Loop.12.SP.SP2
Loop.12.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.12.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.12.SP.SPSelect
230
Mini8 Controller
DEC
2902
2903
2918
2917
2905
2904
2916
2915
2844
2842
2843
2834
2862
2872
2833
2863
2873
2825
2861
2871
2824
2860
2870
2856
2865
2875
2855
2864
2874
2880
2857
2867
2877
2858
2868
2878
2822
2859
2869
2835
2866
2876
2881
2879
2838
2839
2823
2841
2837
2840
2884
2885
2891
2828
2827
2886
2887
2895
2829
2830
2882
2883
2831
HEX
0B56
0B57
0B66
0B65
0B59
0B58
0B64
0B63
0B1C
0B1A
0B1B
0B12
0B2E
0B38
0B11
0B2F
0B39
0B09
0B2D
0B37
0B08
0B2C
0B36
0B28
0B31
0B3B
0B27
0B30
0B3A
0B40
0B29
0B33
0B3D
0B2A
0B34
0B3E
0B06
0B2B
0B35
0B13
0B32
0B3C
0B41
0B3F
0B16
0B17
0B07
0B19
0B15
0B18
0B44
0B45
0B4B
0B0C
0B0B
0B46
0B47
0B4F
0B0D
0B0E
0B42
0B43
0B0F
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.12.SP.SPTrack
Loop.12.SP.SPTrim
Loop.12.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.12.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.12.SP.TrackPV
Loop.12.SP.TrackSP
Loop.12.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.12.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.12.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.12.Tune.Stage
Loop.12.Tune.StageTime
Loop.12.Tune.State
Loop.12.Tune.StepSize
Loop.12.Tune.Type
Loop.13.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.13.Diag.Error
Loop.13.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.13.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.13.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.13.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.13.Diag.SBrk
Loop.13.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.13.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.13.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.13.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.13.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.13.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.13.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.13.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.13.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.13.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.13.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.13.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.13.Main.AutoMan
Loop.13.Main.Inhibit
Loop.13.Main.PV
Loop.13.Main.TargetSP
Loop.13.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.13.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.13.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.13.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.13.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.13.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.13.OP.CoolType
Loop.13.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.13.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.13.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.13.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.13.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.13.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.13.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.13.OP.ManualMode
Loop.13.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.13.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.13.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.13.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.13.OP.Rate
Loop.13.OP.RateDisable
Loop.13.OP.RemOPH
Loop.13.OP.RemOPL
Loop.13.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.13.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.13.OP.TrackEnable
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
2892
2888
2889
2890
2893
2894
2924
2921
2922
2927
2928
2926
2925
2920
3191
3185
3190
3188
3186
3189
3192
3104
3105
3107
3106
3109
3110
3101
3108
3103
3102
3187
3076
3082
3092
3073
3074
3077
3156
3154
3088
3157
3155
3165
3163
3167
3168
3169
3166
3170
3175
3162
3075
3164
3152
3153
3158
3159
3174
3173
3161
3160
3172
Sep-05
HEX
0B4C
0B48
0B49
0B4A
0B4D
0B4E
0B6C
0B69
0B6A
0B6F
0B70
0B6E
0B6D
0B68
0C77
0C71
0C76
0C74
0C72
0C75
0C78
0C20
0C21
0C23
0C22
0C25>
0C26
0C1D
0C24
0C1F
0C1E
0C73
0C04
0C0A
0C14
0C01
0C02
0C05
0C54
0C52
0C10
0C55
0C53
0C5D
0C5B
0C5F
0C60
0C61
0C5E
0C62
0C67
0C5A
0C03
0C5C
0C50
0C51
0C56
0C57
0C66
0C65
0C59
0C58
0C64
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.13.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.13.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.13.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.13.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.13.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.13.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.13.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.13.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.13.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.13.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.13.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.13.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.13.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.13.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.13.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.13.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.13.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.13.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.13.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.13.PID.ManualReset
Loop.13.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.13.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.13.PID.NumSets
Loop.13.PID.OutputHi
Loop.13.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.13.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.13.PID.OutputLo
Loop.13.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.13.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.13.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.13.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.13.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.13.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.13.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.13.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.13.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.13.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.13.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.13.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.13.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.13.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.13.Setup.LoopType
Loop.13.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.13.SP.AltSP
Loop.13.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.13.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.13.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.13.SP.RangeLow
Loop.13.SP.Rate
Loop.13.SP.RateDisable
Loop.13.SP.RateDone
Loop.13.SP.SP1
Loop.13.SP.SP2
Loop.13.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.13.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.13.SP.SPSelect
Loop.13.SP.SPTrack
Loop.13.SP.SPTrim
Loop.13.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.13.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.13.SP.TrackPV
Loop.13.SP.TrackSP
Loop.13.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
3171
3100
3098
3099
3090
3118
3128
3089
3119
3129
3081
3117
3127
3080
3116
3126
3112
3121
3131
3111
3120
3130
3136
3113
3123
3133
3114
3124
3134
3078
3115
3125
3091
3122
3132
3137
3135
3094
3095
3079
3097
3093
3096
3140
3141
3147
3084
3083
3142
3143
3151
3085
3086
3138
3139
3087
3148
3144
3145
3146
3149
3150
3180
HEX
0C63
0C1C
0C1A
0C1B
0C12
0C2E
0C38
0C11
0C2F
0C39
0C09
0C2D
0C37
0C08
0C2C
0C36
0C28
0C31
0C3B
0C27
0C30
0C3A
0C40
0C29
0C33
0C3D
0C2A
0C34
0C3E
0C06
0C2B
0C35
0C13
0C32
0C3C
0C41
0C3F
0C16
0C17
0C07
0C19
0C15
0C18
0C44
0C45
0C4B
0C0C
0C0B
0C46
0C47
0C4F
0C0D
0C0E
0C42
0C43
0C0F
0C4C
0C48
0C49
0C4A
0C4D
0C4E
0C6C
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.13.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.13.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.13.Tune.Stage
Loop.13.Tune.StageTime
Loop.13.Tune.State
Loop.13.Tune.StepSize
Loop.13.Tune.Type
Loop.14.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.14.Diag.Error
Loop.14.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.14.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.14.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.14.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.14.Diag.SBrk
Loop.14.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.14.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.14.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.14.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.14.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.14.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.14.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.14.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.14.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.14.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.14.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.14.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.14.Main.AutoMan
Loop.14.Main.Inhibit
Loop.14.Main.PV
Loop.14.Main.TargetSP
Loop.14.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.14.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.14.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.14.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.14.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.14.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.14.OP.CoolType
Loop.14.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.14.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.14.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.14.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.14.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.14.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.14.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.14.OP.ManualMode
Loop.14.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.14.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.14.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.14.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.14.OP.Rate
Loop.14.OP.RateDisable
Loop.14.OP.RemOPH
Loop.14.OP.RemOPL
Loop.14.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.14.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.14.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.14.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.14.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.14.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.14.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.14.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.14.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.14.PID.CutbackHigh3
DEC
3177
3178
3183
3184
3182
3181
3176
3447
3441
3446
3444
3442
3445
3448
3360
3361
3363
3362
3365
3366
3357
3364
3359
3358
3443
3332
3338
3348
3329
3330
3333
3412
3410
3344
3413
3411
3421
3419
3423
3424
3425
3422
3426
3431
3418
3331
3420
3408
3409
3414
3415
3430
3429
3417
3416
3428
3427
3356
3354
3355
3346
3374
3384
231
HEX
0C69
0C6A
0C6F
0C70
0C6E
0C6D
0C68
0D77
0D71
0D76
0D74
0D72
0D75
0D78
0D20
0D21
0D23
0D22
0D25
0D26
0D1D
0D24
0D1F
0D1E
0D73
0D04
0D0A
0D14
0D01
0D02
0D05
0D54
0D52
0D10
0D55
0D53
0D5D
0D5B
0D5F
0D60
0D61
0D5E
0D62
0D67
0D5A
0D03
0D5C
0D50
0D51
0D56
0D57
0D66
0D65
0D59
0D58
0D64
0D63
0D1C
0D1A
0D1B
0D12
0D2E
0D38
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.14.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.14.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.14.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.14.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.14.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.14.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.14.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.14.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.14.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.14.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.14.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.14.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.14.PID.ManualReset
Loop.14.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.14.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.14.PID.NumSets
Loop.14.PID.OutputHi
Loop.14.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.14.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.14.PID.OutputLo
Loop.14.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.14.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.14.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.14.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.14.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.14.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.14.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.14.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.14.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.14.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.14.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.14.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.14.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.14.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.14.Setup.LoopType
Loop.14.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.14.SP.AltSP
Loop.14.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.14.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.14.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.14.SP.RangeLow
Loop.14.SP.Rate
Loop.14.SP.RateDisable
Loop.14.SP.RateDone
Loop.14.SP.SP1
Loop.14.SP.SP2
Loop.14.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.14.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.14.SP.SPSelect
Loop.14.SP.SPTrack
Loop.14.SP.SPTrim
Loop.14.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.14.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.14.SP.TrackPV
Loop.14.SP.TrackSP
Loop.14.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.14.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.14.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.14.Tune.Stage
Loop.14.Tune.StageTime
Loop.14.Tune.State
Loop.14.Tune.StepSize
Loop.14.Tune.Type
232
Mini8 Controller
DEC
3345
3375
3385
3337
3373
3383
3336
3372
3382
3368
3377
3387
3367
3376
3386
3392
3369
3379
3389
3370
3380
3390
3334
3371
3381
3347
3378
3388
3393
3391
3350
3351
3335
3353
3349
3352
3396
3397
3403
3340
3339
3398
3399
3407
3341
3342
3394
3395
3343
3404
3400
3401
3402
3405
3406
3436
3433
3434
3439
3440
3438
3437
3432
HEX
0D11
0D2F
0D39
0D09
0D2D
0D37
0D08
0D2C
0D36
0D28
0D31
0D3B
0D27
0D30
0D3A
0D40
0D29
0D33
0D3D
0D2A
0D34
0D3E
0D06
0D2B
0D35
0D13
0D32
0D3C
0D41
0D3F
0D16
0D17
0D07
0D19
0D15
0D18
0D44
0D45
0D4B
0D0C
0D0B
0D46
0D47
0D4F
0D0D
0D0E
0D42
0D43
0D0F
0D4C
0D48
0D49
0D4A
0D4D
0D4E
0D6C
0D69
0D6A
0D6F
0D70
0D6E
0D6D
0D68
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.15.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.15.Diag.Error
Loop.15.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.15.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.15.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.15.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.15.Diag.SBrk
Loop.15.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.15.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.15.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.15.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.15.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.15.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.15.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.15.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.15.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.15.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.15.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.15.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.15.Main.AutoMan
Loop.15.Main.Inhibit
Loop.15.Main.PV
Loop.15.Main.TargetSP
Loop.15.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.15.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.15.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.15.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.15.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.15.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.15.OP.CoolType
Loop.15.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.15.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.15.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.15.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.15.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.15.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.15.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.15.OP.ManualMode
Loop.15.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.15.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.15.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.15.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.15.OP.Rate
Loop.15.OP.RateDisable
Loop.15.OP.RemOPH
Loop.15.OP.RemOPL
Loop.15.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.15.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.15.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.15.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.15.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.15.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.15.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.15.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.15.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.15.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.15.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.15.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.15.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.15.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.15.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.15.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.15.PID.IntegralTime
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
3703
3697
3702
3700
3698
3701
3704
3616
3617
3619
3618
3621
3622
3613
3620
3615
3614
3699
3588
3594
3604
3585
3586
3589
3668
3666
3600
3669
3667
3677
3675
3679
3680
3681
3678
3682
3687
3674
3587
3676
3664
3665
3670
3671
3686
3685
3673
3672
3684
3683
3612
3610
3611
3602
3630
3640
3601
3631
3641
3593
3629
3639
3592
Sep-05
HEX
0E77
0E71
0E76
0E74
0E72
0E75
0E78
0E20
0E21
0E23
0E22
0E25
0E26
0E1D
0E24
0E1F
0E1E
0E73
0E04
0E0A
0E14
0E01
0E02
0E05
0E54
0E52
0E10
0E55
0E53
0E5D
0E5B
0E5F
0E60
0E61
0E5E
0E62
0E67
0E5A
0E03
0E5C
0E50
0E51
0E56
0E57
0E66
0E65
0E59
0E58
0E64
0E63
0E1C
0E1A
0E1B
0E12
0E2E
0E38
0E11
0E2F
0E39
0E09
0E2D
0E37
0E08
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.15.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.15.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.15.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.15.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.15.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.15.PID.ManualReset
Loop.15.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.15.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.15.PID.NumSets
Loop.15.PID.OutputHi
Loop.15.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.15.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.15.PID.OutputLo
Loop.15.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.15.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.15.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.15.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.15.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.15.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.15.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.15.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.15.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.15.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.15.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.15.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.15.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.15.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.15.Setup.LoopType
Loop.15.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.15.SP.AltSP
Loop.15.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.15.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.15.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.15.SP.RangeLow
Loop.15.SP.Rate
Loop.15.SP.RateDisable
Loop.15.SP.RateDone
Loop.15.SP.SP1
Loop.15.SP.SP2
Loop.15.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.15.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.15.SP.SPSelect
Loop.15.SP.SPTrack
Loop.15.SP.SPTrim
Loop.15.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.15.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.15.SP.TrackPV
Loop.15.SP.TrackSP
Loop.15.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.15.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.15.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.15.Tune.Stage
Loop.15.Tune.StageTime
Loop.15.Tune.State
Loop.15.Tune.StepSize
Loop.15.Tune.Type
Loop.16.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.16.Diag.Error
Loop.16.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.16.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.16.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.16.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.16.Diag.SBrk
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
3628
3638
3624
3633
3643
3623
3632
3642
3648
3625
3635
3645
3626
3636
3646
3590
3627
3637
3603
3634
3644
3649
3647
3606
3607
3591
3609
3605
3608
3652
3653
3659
3596
3595
3654
3655
3663
3597
3598
3650
3651
3599
3660
3656
3657
3658
3661
3662
3692
3689
3690
3695
3696
3694
3693
3688
3959
3953
3958
3956
3954
3957
3960
HEX
0E2C
0E36
0E28
0E31
0E3B
0E27
0E30
0E3A
0E40
0E29
0E33
0E3D
0E2A
0E34
0E3E
0E06
0E2B
0E35
0E13
0E32
0E3C
0E41
0E3F
0E16
0E17
0E07
0E19
0E15
0E18
0E44
0E45
0E4B
0E0C
0E0B
0E46
0E47
0E4F
0E0D
0E0E
0E42
0E43
0E0F
0E4C
0E48
0E49
0E4A
0E4D
0E4E
0E6C
0E69
0E6A
0E6F
0E70
0E6E
0E6D
0E68
0F77
0F71
0F76
0F74
0F72
0F75
0F78
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.16.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.16.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.16.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.16.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.16.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.16.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.16.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.16.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.16.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.16.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.16.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.16.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.16.Main.AutoMan
Loop.16.Main.Inhibit
Loop.16.Main.PV
Loop.16.Main.TargetSP
Loop.16.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.16.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.16.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.16.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.16.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.16.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.16.OP.CoolType
Loop.16.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.16.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.16.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.16.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.16.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.16.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.16.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.16.OP.ManualMode
Loop.16.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.16.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.16.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.16.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.16.OP.Rate
Loop.16.OP.RateDisable
Loop.16.OP.RemOPH
Loop.16.OP.RemOPL
Loop.16.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.16.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.16.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.16.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.16.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.16.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.16.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.16.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.16.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.16.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.16.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.16.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.16.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.16.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.16.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.16.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.16.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.16.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.16.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.16.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.16.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.16.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.16.PID.ManualReset
Loop.16.PID.ManualReset2
DEC
3872
3873
3875
3874
3877
3878
3869
3876
3871
3870
3955
3844
3850
3860
3841
3842
3845
3924
3922
3856
3925
3923
3933
3931
3935
3936
3937
3934
3938
3943
3930
3843
3932
3920
3921
3926
3927
3942
3941
3929
3928
3940
3939
3868
3866
3867
3858
3886
3896
3857
3887
3897
3849
3885
3895
3848
3884
3894
3880
3889
3899
3879
3888
233
HEX
0F20
0F21
0F23
0F22
0F25
0F26
0F1D
0F24
0F1F
0F1E
0F73
0F04
0F0A
0F14
0F01
0F02
0F05
0F54
0F52
0F10
0F55
0F53
0F5D
0F5B
0F5F
0F60
0F61
0F5E
0F62
0F67
0F5A
0F03
0F5C
0F50
0F51
0F56
0F57
0F66
0F65
0F59
0F58
0F64
0F63
0F1C
0F1A
0F1B
0F12
0F2E
0F38
0F11
0F2F
0F39
0F09
0F2D
0F37
0F08
0F2C
0F36
0F28
0F31
0F3B
0F27
0F30
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Loop.16.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.16.PID.NumSets
Loop.16.PID.OutputHi
Loop.16.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.16.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.16.PID.OutputLo
Loop.16.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.16.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.16.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.16.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.16.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.16.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.16.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.16.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.16.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.16.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.16.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.16.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.16.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.16.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.16.Setup.LoopType
Loop.16.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.16.SP.AltSP
Loop.16.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.16.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.16.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.16.SP.RangeLow
Loop.16.SP.Rate
Loop.16.SP.RateDisable
Loop.16.SP.RateDone
Loop.16.SP.SP1
Loop.16.SP.SP2
Loop.16.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.16.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.16.SP.SPSelect
Loop.16.SP.SPTrack
Loop.16.SP.SPTrim
Loop.16.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.16.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.16.SP.TrackPV
Loop.16.SP.TrackSP
Loop.16.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.16.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.16.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.16.Tune.Stage
Loop.16.Tune.StageTime
Loop.16.Tune.State
Loop.16.Tune.StepSize
Loop.16.Tune.Type
Math2.1.In1
Math2.1.In2
Math2.1.Out
Math2.2.In1
Math2.2.In2
Math2.2.Out
Math2.3.In1
Math2.3.In2
Math2.3.Out
Math2.4.In1
Math2.4.In2
Math2.4.Out
Math2.5.In1
Math2.5.In2
234
Mini8 Controller
DEC
3898
3904
3881
3891
3901
3882
3892
3902
3846
3883
3893
3859
3890
3900
3905
3903
3862
3863
3847
3865
3861
3864
3908
3909
3915
3852
3851
3910
3911
3919
3853
3854
3906
3907
3855
3916
3912
3913
3914
3917
3918
3948
3945
3946
3951
3952
3950
3949
3944
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
HEX
0F3A
0F40
0F29
0F33
0F3D
0F2A
0F34
0F3E
0F06
0F2B
0F35
0F13
0F32
0F3C
0F41
0F3F
0F16
0F17
0F07
0F19
0F15
0F18
0F44
0F45
0F4B
0F0C
0F0B
0F46
0F47
0F4F
0F0D
0F0E
0F42
0F43
0F0F
0F4C
0F48
0F49
0F4A
0F4D
0F4E
0F6C
0F69
0F6A
0F6F
0F70
0F6E
0F6D
0F68
128E
128F
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
129A
129B
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Math2.5.Out
Math2.6.In1
Math2.6.In2
Math2.6.Out
Math2.7.In1
Math2.7.In2
Math2.7.Out
Math2.8.In1
Math2.8.In2
Math2.8.Out
Math2.9.In1
Math2.9.In2
Math2.9.Out
Math2.10.In1
Math2.10.In2
Math2.10.Out
Math2.11.In1
Math2.11.In2
Math2.11.Out
Math2.12.In1
Math2.12.In2
Math2.12.Out
Math2.13.In1
Math2.13.In2
Math2.13.Out
Math2.14.In1
Math2.14.In2
Math2.14.Out
Math2.15.In1
Math2.15.In2
Math2.15.Out
Math2.16.In1
Math2.16.In2
Math2.16.Out
Math2.17.In1
Math2.17.In2
Math2.17.Out
Math2.18.In1
Math2.18.In2
Math2.18.Out
Math2.19.In1
Math2.19.In2
Math2.19.Out
Math2.20.In1
Math2.20.In2
Math2.20.Out
Math2.21.In1
Math2.21.In2
Math2.21.Out
Math2.22.In1
Math2.22.In2
Math2.22.Out
Math2.23.In1
Math2.23.In2
Math2.23.Out
Math2.24.In1
Math2.24.In2
Math2.24.Out
MultiOper.1.AverageOut
MultiOper.1.In1
MultiOper.1.In2
MultiOper.1.In3
MultiOper.1.In4
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC HEX
4764 129C
4765 129D
4766 129E
4767 129F
4768 12A0
4769 12A1
4770 12A2
4771 12A3
4772 12A4
4773 12A5
4774 12A6
4775 12A7
4776 12A8
4777 12A9
4778 12AA
4779 12AB
4780 12AC
4781 12AD
4782 12AE
4783 12AF
4784 12B0
4785 12B1
4786 12B2
4787 12B3
4788 12B4
4789 12B5
4790 12B6
4791 12B7
4792 12B8
4793 12B9
4794 12BA
4795 12BB
4796 12BC
4797 12BD
4798 12BE
4799 12BF
4800 12C0
4801 12C1
4802 12C2
4803 12C3
4804 12C4
4805 12C5
4806 12C6
4807 12C7
4808 12C8
4809 12C9
4810 12CA
4811 12CB
4812 12CC
4813 12CD
4814 12CE
4815 12CF
4816 12D0
4817 12D1
4818 12D2
4819 12D3
4820 12D4
4821 12D5
5017 1399
5006 138e
5007
138f
5008 1390
5009 1391
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
MultiOper.1.In5
MultiOper.1.In6
MultiOper.1.In7
MultiOper.1.In8
MultiOper.1.MaxOut
MultiOper.1.MinOut
MultiOper.1.SumOut
MultiOper.2.AverageOut
MultiOper.2.In1
MultiOper.2.In2
MultiOper.2.In3
MultiOper.2.In4
MultiOper.2.In5
MultiOper.2.In6
MultiOper.2.In7
MultiOper.2.In8
MultiOper.2.MaxOut
MultiOper.2.MinOut
MultiOper.2.SumOut
MultiOper.3.AverageOut
MultiOper.3.In1
MultiOper.3.In2
MultiOper.3.In3
MultiOper.3.In4
MultiOper.3.In5
MultiOper.3.In6
MultiOper.3.In7
MultiOper.3.In8
MultiOper.3.MaxOut
MultiOper.3.MinOut
MultiOper.3.SumOut
MultiOper.4.AverageOut
MultiOper.4.In1
MultiOper.4.In2
MultiOper.4.In3
MultiOper.4.In4
MultiOper.4.In5
MultiOper.4.In6
MultiOper.4.In7
MultiOper.4.In8
MultiOper.4.MaxOut
MultiOper.4.MinOut
MultiOper.4.SumOut
Recipe.LastDataset
Recipe.LoadingStatus
Recipe.RecipeSelect
SwitchOver.SelectIn
SwitchOver.SwitchHigh
SwitchOver.SwitchLow
Timer.1.ElapsedTime
Timer.1.Out
Timer.1.Time
Timer.2.ElapsedTime
Timer.2.Out
Timer.2.Time
Timer.3.ElapsedTime
Timer.3.Out
Timer.3.Time
Timer.4.ElapsedTime
Timer.4.Out
Timer.4.Time
UsrVal.1.Val
UsrVal.2.Val
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
5010
5011
5012
5013
5015
5016
5014
5029
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5027
5028
5026
5041
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5039
5040
5038
5053
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5051
5052
5050
4913
4914
4912
4927
4925
4926
4995
4996
4994
4998
4999
4997
5001
5002
5000
5004
5005
5003
4962
4963
HEX
1392
1393
1394
1395
1397
1398
1396
13a5
139a
139b
139c
139d
139e
139f
13a0
13a1
13a3
13a4
13a2
13b1
13a6
13a7
13a8
13a9
13aa
13ab
13ac
13ad
13af
13b0
13ae
13bd
13b2
13b3
13b4
13b5
13b6
13b7
13b8
13b9
13bb
13bc
13ba
1331
1332
1330
133f
133d
133e
1383
1384
1382
1386
1387
1385
1389
138A
1388
138C
138D
138B
1362
1363
Parameter Description / Modbus address
UsrVal.3.Val
UsrVal.4.Val
UsrVal.5.Val
UsrVal.6.Val
UsrVal.7.Val
UsrVal.8.Val
UsrVal.9.Val
UsrVal.10.Val
UsrVal.11.Val
UsrVal.12.Val
UsrVal.13.Val
UsrVal.14.Val
UsrVal.15.Val
UsrVal.16.Val
UsrVal.17.Val
UsrVal.18.Val
UsrVal.19.Val
UsrVal.20.Val
UsrVal.21.Val
UsrVal.22.Val
UsrVal.23.Val
UsrVal.24.Val
UsrVal.25.Val
UsrVal.26.Val
UsrVal.27.Val
UsrVal.28.Val
UsrVal.29.Val
UsrVal.30.Val
UsrVal.31.Val
UsrVal.32.Val
Zirconia.1.CarbonPot
Zirconia.1.CleanFreq
Zirconia.1.CleanProbe
Zirconia.1.CleanState
Zirconia.1.CleanTime
Zirconia.1.CleanValve
Zirconia.1.DewPoint
Zirconia.1.GasRef
Zirconia.1.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.1.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.1.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.1.Oxygen
Zirconia.1.OxygenExp
Zirconia.1.ProbeFault
Zirconia.1.ProbeInput
Zirconia.1.ProbeOffset
Zirconia.1.ProbeStatus
Zirconia.1.ProbeType
Zirconia.1.ProcFactor
Zirconia.1.PVFrozen
Zirconia.1.RemGasEn
Zirconia.1.RemGasRef
Zirconia.1.Resolution
Zirconia.1.SootAlm
Zirconia.1.TempInput
Zirconia.1.TempOffset
Zirconia.1.Time2Clean
Zirconia.1.Tolerence
Zirconia.1.WrkGas
Zirconia.2.CarbonPot
Zirconia.2.CleanFreq
Zirconia.2.CleanProbe
Zirconia.2.CleanState
DEC
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
13256
13251
13248
13268
13252
13263
13274
13254
13253
13270
13255
13261
13260
13271
13259
13250
13262
13258
13275
13272
13257
13267
13273
13264
13269
13266
13249
13276
13265
13288
13283
13280
13300
235
HEX
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
136A
136B
136C
136D
136E
136F
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
137A
137B
137C
137D
137E
137F
1380
1381
33C8
33C3
33CO
33D4
33C4
33CF
33DA
33C6
33C5
33D6
33C7
33CD
33CC
33D7
33CB
33C2
33CE
33CA
33DB
33D8
33C9
33D3
33D9
33D0
33D5
33D2
33C1
33DC
33D1
33E8
33E3
33EO
33F4
Engineering Handbook
Parameter Description / Modbus address
Zirconia.2.CleanTime
Zirconia.2.CleanValve
Zirconia.2.DewPoint
Zirconia.2.GasRef
Zirconia.2.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.2.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.2.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.2.Oxygen
Zirconia.2.OxygenExp
Zirconia.2.ProbeFault
Zirconia.2.ProbeInput
Zirconia.2.ProbeOffset
Zirconia.2.ProbeStatus
Zirconia.2.ProbeType
Zirconia.2.ProcFactor
Zirconia.2.PVFrozen
Zirconia.2.RemGasEn
Zirconia.2.RemGasRef
Zirconia.2.Resolution
Zirconia.2.SootAlm
Zirconia.2.TempInput
Zirconia.2.TempOffset
Zirconia.2.Time2Clean
Zirconia.2.Tolerence
Zirconia.2.WrkGas
236
Mini8 Controller
DEC
13284
13295
13306
13286
13285
13302
13287
13293
13292
13303
13291
13282
13294
13290
13307
13304
13289
13299
13305
13296
13301
13298
13281
13308
13297
HEX
33E4
33EF
33FA
33E6
33E5
33F6
33E7
33ED
33EC
33F7
33EB
33E2
33EE
33EA
33FB
33F8
33E9
33F3
33F9
33F0
33F5
33F2
33E1
33FC
33F1
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
23.2.1 Version 2.xx Programmer Addresses - Decimal
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Comms.n.ProgramNumber
Program.n.HoldbackVal
Program.n.RampUnits
Program.n.DwellUnits
Program.n.Cycles
Programmer.n.PowerFailAct
Programmer.n.Servo
Programmer.n.SyncMode
Programmer.n.ResetEventOuts
Programmer.n.CurProg
Programmer.n.CurSeg
Programmer.n.ProgStatus
Programmer.n.PSP
Programmer.n.CyclesLeft
Programmer.n.CurSegType
Programmer.n.SegTarget
Programmer.n.SegRate
Programmer.n.ProgTimeLeft
Programmer.n.PVIn
Programmer.n.SPIn
Programmer.n.EventOuts
Programmer.n.SegTimeLeft
Programmer.n.EndOfSeg
Programmer.n.SyncIn
Programmer.n.FastRun
Programmer.n.AdvSeg
Programmer.n.SkipSeg
Program.n.PVStart
Programmer.n.PrgIn1
Programmer.n.PrgIn2
Programmer.n.PVWaitIP
Programmer.n.ProgError
Programmer.n.PVEventOP
Programmer.n.GoBackCyclesLeft
Programmer.n.DelayTime
Programmer.n.ProgReset
Programmer.n.ProgRun
Programmer.n.ProgHold
Programmer.n.ProgRunHold
Programmer.n.ProgRunReset
Segment.1.Type
Segment.1.Holdback
Segment.1.Duration
Segment.1.RampRate
Segment.1.TargetSP
Segment.1.EndAction
Segment.1.EventOutputs
Segment.1.WaitFor
Segment.1.PVEvent
Segment.1.PVThreshold
Segment.1.UserVal
Segment.1.GsoakType
Segment.1.GsoakVal
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5597
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5645
5685
5726
5768
5811
5855
5900
6080
6081
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5661
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5709
5749
5790
5832
5875
5919
5964
6592
6593
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5725
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5773
5813
5854
5896
5939
5983
6028
7104
7105
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5789
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5837
5877
5918
5960
6003
6047
6092
7616
7617
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5853
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5901
5941
5982
6024
6067
6111
6156
8128
8129
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5917
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5965
6005
6046
6088
6131
6175
6220
8640
8641
8644
8645
8646
8647
8648
8649
8650
8653
8654
8655
8656
8657
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5981
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
6029
6069
6110
6152
6195
6239
6284
9152
9153
9156
9157
9158
9159
9160
9161
9162
9165
9166
9167
9168
9169
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6045
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6093
6133
6174
6216
6259
6303
6348
9664
9665
9668
9669
9670
9671
9672
9673
9674
9677
9678
9679
9680
9681
237
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.1.TimeEvent
Segment.1.OnTime
Segment.1.OffTime
Segment.1.PIDSet
Segment.1.PVWait
Segment.1.WaitVal
Segment.2.Type
Segment.2.Holdback
Segment.2.Duration
Segment.2.RampRate
Segment.2.TargetSP
Segment.2.EndAction
Segment.2.EventOutputs
Segment.2.WaitFor
Segment.2.GobackSeg
Segment.2.GobackCycles
Segment.2.PVEvent
Segment.2.PVThreshold
Segment.2.UserVal
Segment.2.GsoakType
Segment.2.GsoakVal
Segment.2.TimeEvent
Segment.2.OnTime
Segment.2.OffTime
Segment.2.PIDSet
Segment.2.PVWait
Segment.2.WaitVal
Segment.3.Type
Segment.3.Holdback
Segment.3.Duration
Segment.3.RampRate
Segment.3.TargetSP
Segment.3.EndAction
Segment.3.EventOutputs
Segment.3.WaitFor
Segment.3.GobackSeg
Segment.3.GobackCycles
Segment.3.PVEvent
Segment.3.PVThreshold
Segment.3.UserVal
Segment.3.GsoakType
Segment.3.GsoakVal
Segment.3.TimeEvent
Segment.3.OnTime
Segment.3.OffTime
Segment.3.PIDSet
Segment.3.PVWait
Segment.3.WaitVal
Segment.4.Type
Segment.4.Holdback
Segment.4.Duration
Segment.4.RampRate
Segment.4.TargetSP
Segment.4.EndAction
Segment.4.EventOutputs
Segment.4.WaitFor
238
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6112
6113
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6144
6145
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6176
6177
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6624
6625
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6656
6657
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6688
6689
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7136
7137
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7168
7169
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7200
7201
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7648
7649
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7680
7681
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7712
7713
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
8151
8160
8161
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
8181
8182
8183
8192
8193
8196
8197
8198
8199
8200
8201
8202
8203
8204
8205
8206
8207
8208
8209
8210
8211
8212
8213
8214
8215
8224
8225
8228
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233
8658
8659
8660
8661
8662
8663
8672
8673
8676
8677
8678
8679
8680
8681
8682
8683
8684
8685
8686
8687
8688
8689
8690
8691
8692
8693
8694
8695
8704
8705
8708
8709
8710
8711
8712
8713
8714
8715
8716
8717
8718
8719
8720
8721
8722
8723
8724
8725
8726
8727
8736
8737
8740
8741
8742
8743
8744
8745
9170
9171
9172
9173
9174
9175
9184
9185
9188
9189
9190
9191
9192
9193
9194
9195
9196
9197
9198
9199
9200
9201
9202
9203
9204
9205
9206
9207
9216
9217
9220
9221
9222
9223
9224
9225
9226
9227
9228
9229
9230
9231
9232
9233
9234
9235
9236
9237
9238
9239
9248
9249
9252
9253
9254
9255
9256
9257
9682
9683
9684
9685
9686
9687
9696
9697
9700
9701
9702
9703
9704
9705
9706
9707
9708
9709
9710
9711
9712
9713
9714
9715
9716
9717
9718
9719
9728
9729
9732
9733
9734
9735
9736
9737
9738
9739
9740
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9747
9748
9749
9750
9751
9760
9761
9764
9765
9766
9767
9768
9769
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.4.GobackSeg
Segment.4.GobackCycles
Segment.4.PVEvent
Segment.4.PVThreshold
Segment.4.UserVal
Segment.4.GsoakType
Segment.4.GsoakVal
Segment.4.TimeEvent
Segment.4.OnTime
Segment.4.OffTime
Segment.4.PIDSet
Segment.4.PVWait
Segment.4.WaitVal
Segment.5.Type
Segment.5.Holdback
Segment.5.Duration
Segment.5.RampRate
Segment.5.TargetSP
Segment.5.EndAction
Segment.5.EventOutputs
Segment.5.WaitFor
Segment.5.GobackSeg
Segment.5.GobackCycles
Segment.5.PVEvent
Segment.5.PVThreshold
Segment.5.UserVal
Segment.5.GsoakType
Segment.5.GsoakVal
Segment.5.TimeEvent
Segment.5.OnTime
Segment.5.OffTime
Segment.5.PIDSet
Segment.5.PVWait
Segment.5.WaitVal
Segment.6.Type
Segment.6.Holdback
Segment.6.Duration
Segment.6.RampRate
Segment.6.TargetSP
Segment.6.EndAction
Segment.6.EventOutputs
Segment.6.WaitFor
Segment.6.GobackSeg
Segment.6.GobackCycles
Segment.6.PVEvent
Segment.6.PVThreshold
Segment.6.UserVal
Segment.6.GsoakType
Segment.6.GsoakVal
Segment.6.TimeEvent
Segment.6.OnTime
Segment.6.OffTime
Segment.6.PIDSet
Segment.6.PVWait
Segment.6.WaitVal
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6208
6209
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6240
6241
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6720
6721
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6752
6753
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7232
7233
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7264
7265
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7744
7745
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7776
7777
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
8234
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239
8240
8241
8242
8243
8244
8245
8246
8247
8256
8257
8260
8261
8262
8263
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268
8269
8270
8271
8272
8273
8274
8275
8276
8277
8278
8279
8288
8289
8292
8293
8294
8295
8296
8297
8298
8299
8300
8301
8302
8303
8304
8305
8306
8307
8308
8309
8310
8311
8746
8747
8748
8749
8750
8751
8752
8753
8754
8755
8756
8757
8758
8759
8768
8769
8772
8773
8774
8775
8776
8777
8778
8779
8780
8781
8782
8783
8784
8785
8786
8787
8788
8789
8790
8791
8800
8801
8804
8805
8806
8807
8808
8809
8810
8811
8812
8813
8814
8815
8816
8817
8818
8819
8820
8821
8822
8823
9258
9259
9260
9261
9262
9263
9264
9265
9266
9267
9268
9269
9270
9271
9280
9281
9284
9285
9286
9287
9288
9289
9290
9291
9292
9293
9294
9295
9296
9297
9298
9299
9300
9301
9302
9303
9312
9313
9316
9317
9318
9319
9320
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
9331
9332
9333
9334
9335
9770
9771
9772
9773
9774
9775
9776
9777
9778
9779
9780
9781
9782
9783
9792
9793
9796
9797
9798
9799
9800
9801
9802
9803
9804
9805
9806
9807
9808
9809
9810
9811
9812
9813
9814
9815
9824
9825
9828
9829
9830
9831
9832
9833
9834
9835
9836
9837
9838
9839
9840
9841
9842
9843
9844
9845
9846
9847
239
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.7.Type
Segment.7.Holdback
Segment.7.Duration
Segment.7.RampRate
Segment.7.TargetSP
Segment.7.EndAction
Segment.7.EventOutputs
Segment.7.WaitFor
Segment.7.GobackSeg
Segment.7.GobackCycles
Segment.7.PVEvent
Segment.7.PVThreshold
Segment.7.UserVal
Segment.7.GsoakType
Segment.7.GsoakVal
Segment.7.TimeEvent
Segment.7.OnTime
Segment.7.OffTime
Segment.7.PIDSet
Segment.7.PVWait
Segment.7.WaitVal
Segment.8.Type
Segment.8.Holdback
Segment.8.Duration
Segment.8.RampRate
Segment.8.TargetSP
Segment.8.EndAction
Segment.8.EventOutputs
Segment.8.WaitFor
Segment.8.GobackSeg
Segment.8.GobackCycles
Segment.8.PVEvent
Segment.8.PVThreshold
Segment.8.UserVal
Segment.8.GsoakType
Segment.8.GsoakVal
Segment.8.TimeEvent
Segment.8.OnTime
Segment.8.OffTime
Segment.8.PIDSet
Segment.8.PVWait
Segment.8.WaitVal
Segment.9.Type
Segment.9.Holdback
Segment.9.Duration
Segment.9.RampRate
Segment.9.TargetSP
Segment.9.EndAction
Segment.9.EventOutputs
Segment.9.WaitFor
Segment.9.GobackSeg
Segment.9.GobackCycles
Segment.9.PVEvent
Segment.9.PVThreshold
Segment.9.UserVal
240
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6272
6273
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6304
6305
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6336
6337
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6784
6785
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6816
6817
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6848
6849
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
7296
7297
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7328
7329
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7360
7361
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7808
7809
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7840
7841
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7872
7873
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
8320
8321
8324
8325
8326
8327
8328
8329
8330
8331
8332
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
8342
8343
8352
8353
8356
8357
8358
8359
8360
8361
8362
8363
8364
8365
8366
8367
8368
8369
8370
8371
8372
8373
8374
8375
8384
8385
8388
8389
8390
8391
8392
8393
8394
8395
8396
8397
8398
8399
8832
8833
8836
8837
8838
8839
8840
8841
8842
8843
8844
8845
8846
8847
8848
8849
8850
8851
8852
8853
8854
8855
8864
8865
8868
8869
8870
8871
8872
8873
8874
8875
8876
8877
8878
8879
8880
8881
8882
8883
8884
8885
8886
8887
8896
8897
8900
8901
8902
8903
8904
8905
8906
8907
8908
8909
8910
8911
9344
9345
9348
9349
9350
9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360
9361
9362
9363
9364
9365
9366
9367
9376
9377
9380
9381
9382
9383
9384
9385
9386
9387
9388
9389
9390
9391
9392
9393
9394
9395
9396
9397
9398
9399
9408
9409
9412
9413
9414
9415
9416
9417
9418
9419
9420
9421
9422
9423
9856
9857
9860
9861
9862
9863
9864
9865
9866
9867
9868
9869
9870
9871
9872
9873
9874
9875
9876
9877
9878
9879
9888
9889
9892
9893
9894
9895
9896
9897
9898
9899
9900
9901
9902
9903
9904
9905
9906
9907
9908
9909
9910
9911
9920
9921
9924
9925
9926
9927
9928
9929
9930
9931
9932
9933
9934
9935
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.9.GsoakType
Segment.9.GsoakVal
Segment.9.TimeEvent
Segment.9.OnTime
Segment.9.OffTime
Segment.9.PIDSet
Segment.9.PVWait
Segment.9.WaitVal
Segment.10.Type
Segment.10.Holdback
Segment.10.Duration
Segment.10.RampRate
Segment.10.TargetSP
Segment.10.EndAction
Segment.10.EventOutputs
Segment.10.WaitFor
Segment.10.GobackSeg
Segment.10.GobackCycles
Segment.10.PVEvent
Segment.10.PVThreshold
Segment.10.UserVal
Segment.10.GsoakType
Segment.10.GsoakVal
Segment.10.TimeEvent
Segment.10.OnTime
Segment.10.OffTime
Segment.10.PIDSet
Segment.10.PVWait
Segment.10.WaitVal
Segment.11.Type
Segment.11.Holdback
Segment.11.Duration
Segment.11.RampRate
Segment.11.TargetSP
Segment.11.EndAction
Segment.11.EventOutputs
Segment.11.WaitFor
Segment.11.GobackSeg
Segment.11.GobackCycles
Segment.11.PVEvent
Segment.11.PVThreshold
Segment.11.UserVal
Segment.11.GsoakType
Segment.11.GsoakVal
Segment.11.TimeEvent
Segment.11.OnTime
Segment.11.OffTime
Segment.11.PIDSet
Segment.11.PVWait
Segment.11.WaitVal
Segment.12.Type
Segment.12.Holdback
Segment.12.Duration
Segment.12.RampRate
Segment.12.TargetSP
Segment.12.EndAction
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6368
6369
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6400
6401
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6432
6433
6436
6437
6438
6439
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6880
6881
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6912
6913
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6944
6945
6948
6949
6950
6951
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7392
7393
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7424
7425
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7456
7457
7460
7461
7462
7463
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7904
7905
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7936
7937
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7968
7969
7972
7973
7974
7975
8400
8401
8402
8403
8404
8405
8406
8407
8416
8417
8420
8421
8422
8423
8424
8425
8426
8427
8428
8429
8430
8431
8432
8433
8434
8435
8436
8437
8438
8439
8448
8449
8452
8453
8454
8455
8456
8457
8458
8459
8460
8461
8462
8463
8464
8465
8466
8467
8468
8469
8470
8471
8480
8481
8484
8485
8486
8487
8912
8913
8914
8915
8916
8917
8918
8919
8928
8929
8932
8933
8934
8935
8936
8937
8938
8939
8940
8941
8942
8943
8944
8945
8946
8947
8948
8949
8950
8951
8960
8961
8964
8965
8966
8967
8968
8969
8970
8971
8972
8973
8974
8975
8976
8977
8978
8979
8980
8981
8982
8983
8992
8993
8996
8997
8998
8999
9424
9425
9426
9427
9428
9429
9430
9431
9440
9441
9444
9445
9446
9447
9448
9449
9450
9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9472
9473
9476
9477
9478
9479
9480
9481
9482
9483
9484
9485
9486
9487
9488
9489
9490
9491
9492
9493
9494
9495
9504
9505
9508
9509
9510
9511
9936
9937
9938
9939
9940
9941
9942
9943
9952
9953
9956
9957
9958
9959
9960
9961
9962
9963
9964
9965
9966
9967
9968
9969
9970
9971
9972
9973
9974
9975
9984
9985
9988
9989
9990
9991
9992
9993
9994
9995
9996
9997
9998
9999
10000
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10016
10017
10020
10021
10022
10023
241
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.12.EventOutputs
Segment.12.WaitFor
Segment.12.GobackSeg
Segment.12.GobackCycles
Segment.12.PVEvent
Segment.12.PVThreshold
Segment.12.UserVal
Segment.12.GsoakType
Segment.12.GsoakVal
Segment.12.TimeEvent
Segment.12.OnTime
Segment.12.OffTime
Segment.12.PIDSet
Segment.12.PVWait
Segment.12.WaitVal
Segment.13.Type
Segment.13.Holdback
Segment.13.Duration
Segment.13.RampRate
Segment.13.TargetSP
Segment.13.EndAction
Segment.13.EventOutputs
Segment.13.WaitFor
Segment.13.GobackSeg
Segment.13.GobackCycles
Segment.13.PVEvent
Segment.13.PVThreshold
Segment.13.UserVal
Segment.13.GsoakType
Segment.13.GsoakVal
Segment.13.TimeEvent
Segment.13.OnTime
Segment.13.OffTime
Segment.13.PIDSet
Segment.13.PVWait
Segment.13.WaitVal
Segment.14.Type
Segment.14.Holdback
Segment.14.Duration
Segment.14.RampRate
Segment.14.TargetSP
Segment.14.EndAction
Segment.14.EventOutputs
Segment.14.WaitFor
Segment.14.GobackSeg
Segment.14.GobackCycles
Segment.14.PVEvent
Segment.14.PVThreshold
Segment.14.UserVal
Segment.14.GsoakType
Segment.14.GsoakVal
Segment.14.TimeEvent
Segment.14.OnTime
Segment.14.OffTime
Segment.14.PIDSet
242
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6464
6465
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6496
6497
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6976
6977
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7008
7009
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7488
7489
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7520
7521
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
8000
8001
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8019
8020
8021
8022
8023
8032
8033
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040
8041
8042
8043
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050
8051
8052
8053
8488
8489
8490
8491
8492
8493
8494
8495
8496
8497
8498
8499
8500
8501
8502
8503
8512
8513
8516
8517
8518
8519
8520
8521
8522
8523
8524
8525
8526
8527
8528
8529
8530
8531
8532
8533
8534
8535
8544
8545
8548
8549
8550
8551
8552
8553
8554
8555
8556
8557
8558
8559
8560
8561
8562
8563
8564
8565
9000
9001
9002
9003
9004
9005
9006
9007
9008
9009
9010
9011
9012
9013
9014
9015
9024
9025
9028
9029
9030
9031
9032
9033
9034
9035
9036
9037
9038
9039
9040
9041
9042
9043
9044
9045
9046
9047
9056
9057
9060
9061
9062
9063
9064
9065
9066
9067
9068
9069
9070
9071
9072
9073
9074
9075
9076
9077
9512
9513
9514
9515
9516
9517
9518
9519
9520
9521
9522
9523
9524
9525
9526
9527
9536
9537
9540
9541
9542
9543
9544
9545
9546
9547
9548
9549
9550
9551
9552
9553
9554
9555
9556
9557
9558
9559
9568
9569
9572
9573
9574
9575
9576
9577
9578
9579
9580
9581
9582
9583
9584
9585
9586
9587
9588
9589
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
10031
10032
10033
10034
10035
10036
10037
10038
10039
10048
10049
10052
10053
10054
10055
10056
10057
10058
10059
10060
10061
10062
10063
10064
10065
10066
10067
10068
10069
10070
10071
10080
10081
10084
10085
10086
10087
10088
10089
10090
10091
10092
10093
10094
10095
10096
10097
10098
10099
10100
10101
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
DECIMAL ADDRESSES (2.xx)
Segment.14.PVWait
Segment.14.WaitVal
Segment.15.Type
Segment.15.Holdback
Segment.15.Duration
Segment.15.RampRate
Segment.15.TargetSP
Segment.15.EndAction
Segment.15.EventOutputs
Segment.15.WaitFor
Segment.15.GobackSeg
Segment.15.GobackCycles
Segment.15.PVEvent
Segment.15.PVThreshold
Segment.15.UserVal
Segment.15.GsoakType
Segment.15.GsoakVal
Segment.15.TimeEvent
Segment.15.OnTime
Segment.15.OffTime
Segment.15.PIDSet
Segment.15.PVWait
Segment.15.WaitVal
Segment.16.Type
Segment.16.Holdback
Segment.16.Duration
Segment.16.RampRate
Segment.16.TargetSP
Segment.16.EndAction
Segment.16.EventOutputs
Segment.16.WaitFor
Segment.16.GobackSeg
Segment.16.GobackCycles
Segment.16.PVEvent
Segment.16.PVThreshold
Segment.16.UserVal
Segment.16.GsoakType
Segment.16.GsoakVal
Segment.16.TimeEvent
Segment.16.OnTime
Segment.16.OffTime
Segment.16.PIDSet
Segment.16.PVWait
Segment.16.WaitVal
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6518
6519
6528
6529
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6560
6561
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
7030
7031
7040
7041
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7072
7073
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7542
7543
7552
7553
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7584
7585
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
8054
8055
8064
8065
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
8085
8086
8087
8096
8097
8100
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
8109
8110
8111
8112
8113
8114
8115
8116
8117
8118
8119
8566
8567
8576
8577
8580
8581
8582
8583
8584
8585
8586
8587
8588
8589
8590
8591
8592
8593
8594
8595
8596
8597
8598
8599
8608
8609
8612
8613
8614
8615
8616
8617
8618
8619
8620
8621
8622
8623
8624
8625
8626
8627
8628
8629
8630
8631
9078
9079
9088
9089
9092
9093
9094
9095
9096
9097
9098
9099
9100
9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
9106
9107
9108
9109
9110
9111
9120
9121
9124
9125
9126
9127
9128
9129
9130
9131
9132
9133
9134
9135
9136
9137
9138
9139
9140
9141
9142
9143
9590
9591
9600
9601
9604
9605
9606
9607
9608
9609
9610
9611
9612
9613
9614
9615
9616
9617
9618
9619
9620
9621
9622
9623
9632
9633
9636
9637
9638
9639
9640
9641
9642
9643
9644
9645
9646
9647
9648
9649
9650
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
10102
10103
10112
10113
10116
10117
10118
10119
10120
10121
10122
10123
10124
10125
10126
10127
10128
10129
10130
10131
10132
10133
10134
10135
10144
10145
10148
10149
10150
10151
10152
10153
10154
10155
10156
10157
10158
10159
10160
10161
10162
10163
10164
10165
10166
10167
243
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
23.2.2 Version 2.xx Programmer Addresses - Hexadecimal
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Comms.n.ProgramNumber
Program.n.HoldbackVal
Program.n.RampUnits
Program.n.DwellUnits
Program.n.Cycles
Programmer.n.PowerFailAct
Programmer.n.Servo
Programmer.n.SyncMode
Programmer.n.ResetEventOuts
Programmer.n.CurProg
Programmer.n.CurSeg
Programmer.n.ProgStatus
Programmer.n.PSP
Programmer.n.CyclesLeft
Programmer.n.CurSegType
Programmer.n.SegTarget
Programmer.n.SegRate
Programmer.n.ProgTimeLeft
Programmer.n.PVIn
Programmer.n.SPIn
Programmer.n.EventOuts
Programmer.n.SegTimeLeft
Programmer.n.EndOfSeg
Programmer.n.SyncIn
Programmer.n.FastRun
Programmer.n.AdvSeg
Programmer.n.SkipSeg
Program.n.PVStart
Programmer.n.PrgIn1
Programmer.n.PrgIn2
Programmer.n.PVWaitIP
Programmer.n.ProgError
Programmer.n.PVEventOP
Programmer.n.GoBackCyclesLeft
Programmer.n.DelayTime
Programmer.n.ProgReset
Programmer.n.ProgRun
Programmer.n.ProgHold
Programmer.n.ProgRunHold
Programmer.n.ProgRunReset
Segment.1.Type
Segment.1.Holdback
Segment.1.CallProgNum
Segment.1.Cycles
Segment.1.Duration
Segment.1.RampRate
Segment.1.TargetSP
Segment.1.EndAction
Segment.1.EventOutputs
Segment.1.WaitFor
Segment.1.PVEvent
Segment.1.PVThreshold
244
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15C0
15C1
15C2
15C3
15C4
15C5
15C6
15C7
15C8
15C9
15CA
15CB
15CC
15CD
15CE
15CF
15D0
15D1
15D2
15D3
15D4
15D5
15D6
15D7
15D8
15D9
15DA
15DD
15E2
15E3
15E4
15E5
15E6
160D
1635
165E
1688
16B3
16DF
170C
17C0
17C1
17C2
17C3
17C4
17C5
17C6
17C7
17C8
17C9
17CA
17CD
17CE
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
160A
160B
160C
160D
160E
160F
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
161A
161D
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
164D
1675
169E
16C8
16F3
171F
174C
19C0
19C1
19C2
19C3
19C4
19C5
19C6
19C7
19C8
19C9
19CA
19CD
19CE
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
164A
164B
164C
164D
164E
164F
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
165A
165D
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
168D
16B5
16DE
1708
1733
175F
178C
1BC0
1BC1
1BC2
1BC3
1BC4
1BC5
1BC6
1BC7
1BC8
1BC9
1BCA
1BCD
1BCE
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
168A
168B
168C
168D
168E
168F
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
169A
169D
16A2
16A3
16A4
16A5
16A6
16CD
16F5
171E
1748
1773
179F
17CC
1DC0
1DC1
1DC2
1DC3
1DC4
1DC5
1DC6
1DC7
1DC8
1DC9
1DCA
1DCD
1DCE
16C0
16C1
16C2
16C3
16C4
16C5
16C6
16C7
16C8
16C9
16CA
16CB
16CC
16CD
16CE
16CF
16D0
16D1
16D2
16D3
16D4
16D5
16D6
16D7
16D8
16D9
16DA
16DD
16E2
16E3
16E4
16E5
16E6
170D
1735
175E
1788
17B3
17DF
180C
1FC0
1FC1
1FC2
1FC3
1FC4
1FC5
1FC6
1FC7
1FC8
1FC9
1FCA
1FCD
1FCE
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
170A
170B
170C
170D
170E
170F
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
171A
171D
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
174D
1775
179E
17C8
17F3
181F
184C
21C0
21C1
21C2
21C3
21C4
21C5
21C6
21C7
21C8
21C9
21CA
21CD
21CE
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
174A
174B
174C
174D
174E
174F
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
175A
175D
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
178D
17B5
17DE
1808
1833
185F
188C
23C0
23C1
23C2
23C3
23C4
23C5
23C6
23C7
23C8
23C9
23CA
23CD
23CE
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
178A
178B
178C
178D
178E
178F
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
179A
179D
17A2
17A3
17A4
17A5
17A6
17CD
17F5
181E
1848
1873
189F
18CC
25C0
25C1
25C2
25C3
25C4
25C5
25C6
25C7
25C8
25C9
25CA
25CD
25CE
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.1.UserVal
Segment.1.GsoakType
Segment.1.GsoakVal
Segment.1.TimeEvent
Segment.1.OnTime
Segment.1.OffTime
Segment.1.PIDSet
Segment.1.PVWait
Segment.1.WaitVal
Segment.2.Type
Segment.2.Holdback
Segment.2.Duration
Segment.2.RampRate
Segment.2.TargetSP
Segment.2.EndAction
Segment.2.EventOutputs
Segment.2.WaitFor
Segment.2.GobackSeg
Segment.2.GobackCycles
Segment.2.PVEvent
Segment.2.PVThreshold
Segment.2.UserVal
Segment.2.GsoakType
Segment.2.GsoakVal
Segment.2.TimeEvent
Segment.2.OnTime
Segment.2.OffTime
Segment.2.PIDSet
Segment.2.PVWait
Segment.2.WaitVal
Segment.3.Type
Segment.3.Holdback
Segment.3.Duration
Segment.3.RampRate
Segment.3.TargetSP
Segment.3.EndAction
Segment.3.EventOutputs
Segment.3.WaitFor
Segment.3.GobackSeg
Segment.3.GobackCycles
Segment.3.PVEvent
Segment.3.PVThreshold
Segment.3.UserVal
Segment.3.GsoakType
Segment.3.GsoakVal
Segment.3.TimeEvent
Segment.3.OnTime
Segment.3.OffTime
Segment.3.PIDSet
Segment.3.PVWait
Segment.3.WaitVal
Segment.4.Type
Segment.4.Holdback
Segment.4.Duration
Segment.4.RampRate
Segment.4.TargetSP
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17CF
17D0
17D1
17D2
17D3
17D4
17D5
17D6
17D7
17E0
17E1
17E4
17E5
17E6
17E7
17E8
17E9
17EA
17EB
17EC
17ED
17EE
17EF
17F0
17F1
17F2
17F3
17F4
17F5
17F6
17F7
1800
1801
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
180A
180B
180C
180D
180E
180F
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1820
1821
1824
1825
1826
19CF
19D0
19D1
19D2
19D3
19D4
19D5
19D6
19D7
19E0
19E1
19E4
19E5
19E6
19E7
19E8
19E9
19EA
19EB
19EC
19ED
19EE
19EF
19F0
19F1
19F2
19F3
19F4
19F5
19F6
19F7
1A00
1A01
1A04
1A05
1A06
1A07
1A08
1A09
1A0A
1A0B
1A0C
1A0D
1A0E
1A0F
1A10
1A11
1A12
1A13
1A14
1A15
1A16
1A17
1A20
1A21
1A24
1A25
1A26
1BCF
1BD0
1BD1
1BD2
1BD3
1BD4
1BD5
1BD6
1BD7
1BE0
1BE1
1BE4
1BE5
1BE6
1BE7
1BE8
1BE9
1BEA
1BEB
1BEC
1BED
1BEE
1BEF
1BF0
1BF1
1BF2
1BF3
1BF4
1BF5
1BF6
1BF7
1C00
1C01
1C04
1C05
1C06
1C07
1C08
1C09
1C0A
1C0B
1C0C
1C0D
1C0E
1C0F
1C10
1C11
1C12
1C13
1C14
1C15
1C16
1C17
1C20
1C21
1C24
1C25
1C26
1DCF
1DD0
1DD1
1DD2
1DD3
1DD4
1DD5
1DD6
1DD7
1DE0
1DE1
1DE4
1DE5
1DE6
1DE7
1DE8
1DE9
1DEA
1DEB
1DEC
1DED
1DEE
1DEF
1DF0
1DF1
1DF2
1DF3
1DF4
1DF5
1DF6
1DF7
1E00
1E01
1E04
1E05
1E06
1E07
1E08
1E09
1E0A
1E0B
1E0C
1E0D
1E0E
1E0F
1E10
1E11
1E12
1E13
1E14
1E15
1E16
1E17
1E20
1E21
1E24
1E25
1E26
1FCF
1FD0
1FD1
1FD2
1FD3
1FD4
1FD5
1FD6
1FD7
1FE0
1FE1
1FE4
1FE5
1FE6
1FE7
1FE8
1FE9
1FEA
1FEB
1FEC
1FED
1FEE
1FEF
1FF0
1FF1
1FF2
1FF3
1FF4
1FF5
1FF6
1FF7
2000
2001
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
200A
200B
200C
200D
200E
200F
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2020
2021
2024
2025
2026
21CF
21D0
21D1
21D2
21D3
21D4
21D5
21D6
21D7
21E0
21E1
21E4
21E5
21E6
21E7
21E8
21E9
21EA
21EB
21EC
21ED
21EE
21EF
21F0
21F1
21F2
21F3
21F4
21F5
21F6
21F7
2200
2201
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
220A
220B
220C
220D
220E
220F
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2220
2221
2224
2225
2226
23CF
23D0
23D1
23D2
23D3
23D4
23D5
23D6
23D7
23E0
23E1
23E4
23E5
23E6
23E7
23E8
23E9
23EA
23EB
23EC
23ED
23EE
23EF
23F0
23F1
23F2
23F3
23F4
23F5
23F6
23F7
2400
2401
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
240A
240B
240C
240D
240E
240F
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2420
2421
2424
2425
2426
25CF
25D0
25D1
25D2
25D3
25D4
25D5
25D6
25D7
25E0
25E1
25E4
25E5
25E6
25E7
25E8
25E9
25EA
25EB
25EC
25ED
25EE
25EF
25F0
25F1
25F2
25F3
25F4
25F5
25F6
25F7
2600
2601
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
260A
260B
260C
260D
260E
260F
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2620
2621
2624
2625
2626
245
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.4.EndAction
Segment.4.EventOutputs
Segment.4.WaitFor
Segment.4.GobackSeg
Segment.4.GobackCycles
Segment.4.PVEvent
Segment.4.PVThreshold
Segment.4.UserVal
Segment.4.GsoakType
Segment.4.GsoakVal
Segment.4.TimeEvent
Segment.4.OnTime
Segment.4.OffTime
Segment.4.PIDSet
Segment.4.PVWait
Segment.4.WaitVal
Segment.5.Type
Segment.5.Holdback
Segment.5.Duration
Segment.5.RampRate
Segment.5.TargetSP
Segment.5.EndAction
Segment.5.EventOutputs
Segment.5.WaitFor
Segment.5.GobackSeg
Segment.5.GobackCycles
Segment.5.PVEvent
Segment.5.PVThreshold
Segment.5.UserVal
Segment.5.GsoakType
Segment.5.GsoakVal
Segment.5.TimeEvent
Segment.5.OnTime
Segment.5.OffTime
Segment.5.PIDSet
Segment.5.PVWait
Segment.5.WaitVal
Segment.6.Type
Segment.6.Holdback
Segment.6.Duration
Segment.6.RampRate
Segment.6.TargetSP
Segment.6.EndAction
Segment.6.EventOutputs
Segment.6.WaitFor
Segment.6.GobackSeg
Segment.6.GobackCycles
Segment.6.PVEvent
Segment.6.PVThreshold
Segment.6.UserVal
Segment.6.GsoakType
Segment.6.GsoakVal
Segment.6.TimeEvent
Segment.6.OnTime
Segment.6.OffTime
246
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1827
1828
1829
182A
182B
182C
182D
182E
182F
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1840
1841
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
184A
184B
184C
184D
184E
184F
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1860
1861
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
186A
186B
186C
186D
186E
186F
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1A27
1A28
1A29
1A2A
1A2B
1A2C
1A2D
1A2E
1A2F
1A30
1A31
1A32
1A33
1A34
1A35
1A36
1A37
1A40
1A41
1A44
1A45
1A46
1A47
1A48
1A49
1A4A
1A4B
1A4C
1A4D
1A4E
1A4F
1A50
1A51
1A52
1A53
1A54
1A55
1A56
1A57
1A60
1A61
1A64
1A65
1A66
1A67
1A68
1A69
1A6A
1A6B
1A6C
1A6D
1A6E
1A6F
1A70
1A71
1A72
1A73
1A74
1C27
1C28
1C29
1C2A
1C2B
1C2C
1C2D
1C2E
1C2F
1C30
1C31
1C32
1C33
1C34
1C35
1C36
1C37
1C40
1C41
1C44
1C45
1C46
1C47
1C48
1C49
1C4A
1C4B
1C4C
1C4D
1C4E
1C4F
1C50
1C51
1C52
1C53
1C54
1C55
1C56
1C57
1C60
1C61
1C64
1C65
1C66
1C67
1C68
1C69
1C6A
1C6B
1C6C
1C6D
1C6E
1C6F
1C70
1C71
1C72
1C73
1C74
1E27
1E28
1E29
1E2A
1E2B
1E2C
1E2D
1E2E
1E2F
1E30
1E31
1E32
1E33
1E34
1E35
1E36
1E37
1E40
1E41
1E44
1E45
1E46
1E47
1E48
1E49
1E4A
1E4B
1E4C
1E4D
1E4E
1E4F
1E50
1E51
1E52
1E53
1E54
1E55
1E56
1E57
1E60
1E61
1E64
1E65
1E66
1E67
1E68
1E69
1E6A
1E6B
1E6C
1E6D
1E6E
1E6F
1E70
1E71
1E72
1E73
1E74
2027
2028
2029
202A
202B
202C
202D
202E
202F
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2040
2041
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
204A
204B
204C
204D
204E
204F
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2060
2061
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
206A
206B
206C
206D
206E
206F
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2227
2228
2229
222A
222B
222C
222D
222E
222F
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2240
2241
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
224A
224B
224C
224D
224E
224F
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2260
2261
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
226A
226B
226C
226D
226E
226F
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2427
2428
2429
242A
242B
242C
242D
242E
242F
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2440
2441
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
244A
244B
244C
244D
244E
244F
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2460
2461
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
246A
246B
246C
246D
246E
246F
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2627
2628
2629
262A
262B
262C
262D
262E
262F
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2640
2641
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
264A
264B
264C
264D
264E
264F
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2660
2661
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
266A
266B
266C
266D
266E
266F
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.6.PIDSet
Segment.6.PVWait
Segment.6.WaitVal
Segment.7.Type
Segment.7.Holdback
Segment.7.Duration
Segment.7.RampRate
Segment.7.TargetSP
Segment.7.EndAction
Segment.7.EventOutputs
Segment.7.WaitFor
Segment.7.GobackSeg
Segment.7.GobackCycles
Segment.7.PVEvent
Segment.7.PVThreshold
Segment.7.UserVal
Segment.7.GsoakType
Segment.7.GsoakVal
Segment.7.TimeEvent
Segment.7.OnTime
Segment.7.OffTime
Segment.7.PIDSet
Segment.7.PVWait
Segment.7.WaitVal
Segment.8.Type
Segment.8.Holdback
Segment.8.Duration
Segment.8.RampRate
Segment.8.TargetSP
Segment.8.EndAction
Segment.8.EventOutputs
Segment.8.WaitFor
Segment.8.GobackSeg
Segment.8.GobackCycles
Segment.8.PVEvent
Segment.8.PVThreshold
Segment.8.UserVal
Segment.8.GsoakType
Segment.8.GsoakVal
Segment.8.TimeEvent
Segment.8.OnTime
Segment.8.OffTime
Segment.8.PIDSet
Segment.8.PVWait
Segment.8.WaitVal
Segment.9.Type
Segment.9.Holdback
Segment.9.Duration
Segment.9.RampRate
Segment.9.TargetSP
Segment.9.EndAction
Segment.9.EventOutputs
Segment.9.WaitFor
Segment.9.GobackSeg
Segment.9.GobackCycles
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1875
1876
1877
1880
1881
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
188A
188B
188C
188D
188E
188F
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
18A0
18A1
18A4
18A5
18A6
18A7
18A8
18A9
18AA
18AB
18AC
18AD
18AE
18AF
18B0
18B1
18B2
18B3
18B4
18B5
18B6
18B7
18C0
18C1
18C4
18C5
18C6
18C7
18C8
18C9
18CA
18CB
18CC
1A75
1A76
1A77
1A80
1A81
1A84
1A85
1A86
1A87
1A88
1A89
1A8A
1A8B
1A8C
1A8D
1A8E
1A8F
1A90
1A91
1A92
1A93
1A94
1A95
1A96
1A97
1AA0
1AA1
1AA4
1AA5
1AA6
1AA7
1AA8
1AA9
1AAA
1AAB
1AAC
1AAD
1AAE
1AAF
1AB0
1AB1
1AB2
1AB3
1AB4
1AB5
1AB6
1AB7
1AC0
1AC1
1AC4
1AC5
1AC6
1AC7
1AC8
1AC9
1ACA
1ACB
1ACC
1C75
1C76
1C77
1C80
1C81
1C84
1C85
1C86
1C87
1C88
1C89
1C8A
1C8B
1C8C
1C8D
1C8E
1C8F
1C90
1C91
1C92
1C93
1C94
1C95
1C96
1C97
1CA0
1CA1
1CA4
1CA5
1CA6
1CA7
1CA8
1CA9
1CAA
1CAB
1CAC
1CAD
1CAE
1CAF
1CB0
1CB1
1CB2
1CB3
1CB4
1CB5
1CB6
1CB7
1CC0
1CC1
1CC4
1CC5
1CC6
1CC7
1CC8
1CC9
1CCA
1CCB
1CCC
1E75
1E76
1E77
1E80
1E81
1E84
1E85
1E86
1E87
1E88
1E89
1E8A
1E8B
1E8C
1E8D
1E8E
1E8F
1E90
1E91
1E92
1E93
1E94
1E95
1E96
1E97
1EA0
1EA1
1EA4
1EA5
1EA6
1EA7
1EA8
1EA9
1EAA
1EAB
1EAC
1EAD
1EAE
1EAF
1EB0
1EB1
1EB2
1EB3
1EB4
1EB5
1EB6
1EB7
1EC0
1EC1
1EC4
1EC5
1EC6
1EC7
1EC8
1EC9
1ECA
1ECB
1ECC
2075
2076
2077
2080
2081
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
208A
208B
208C
208D
208E
208F
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
20A0
20A1
20A4
20A5
20A6
20A7
20A8
20A9
20AA
20AB
20AC
20AD
20AE
20AF
20B0
20B1
20B2
20B3
20B4
20B5
20B6
20B7
20C0
20C1
20C4
20C5
20C6
20C7
20C8
20C9
20CA
20CB
20CC
2275
2276
2277
2280
2281
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
228A
228B
228C
228D
228E
228F
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
22A0
22A1
22A4
22A5
22A6
22A7
22A8
22A9
22AA
22AB
22AC
22AD
22AE
22AF
22B0
22B1
22B2
22B3
22B4
22B5
22B6
22B7
22C0
22C1
22C4
22C5
22C6
22C7
22C8
22C9
22CA
22CB
22CC
2475
2476
2477
2480
2481
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
248A
248B
248C
248D
248E
248F
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
24A0
24A1
24A4
24A5
24A6
24A7
24A8
24A9
24AA
24AB
24AC
24AD
24AE
24AF
24B0
24B1
24B2
24B3
24B4
24B5
24B6
24B7
24C0
24C1
24C4
24C5
24C6
24C7
24C8
24C9
24CA
24CB
24CC
2675
2676
2677
2680
2681
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
268A
268B
268C
268D
268E
268F
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
26A0
26A1
26A4
26A5
26A6
26A7
26A8
26A9
26AA
26AB
26AC
26AD
26AE
26AF
26B0
26B1
26B2
26B3
26B4
26B5
26B6
26B7
26C0
26C1
26C4
26C5
26C6
26C7
26C8
26C9
26CA
26CB
26CC
247
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.9.PVEvent
Segment.9.PVThreshold
Segment.9.UserVal
Segment.9.GsoakType
Segment.9.GsoakVal
Segment.9.TimeEvent
Segment.9.OnTime
Segment.9.OffTime
Segment.9.PIDSet
Segment.9.PVWait
Segment.9.WaitVal
Segment.10.Type
Segment.10.Holdback
Segment.10.Duration
Segment.10.RampRate
Segment.10.TargetSP
Segment.10.EndAction
Segment.10.EventOutputs
Segment.10.WaitFor
Segment.10.GobackSeg
Segment.10.GobackCycles
Segment.10.PVEvent
Segment.10.PVThreshold
Segment.10.UserVal
Segment.10.GsoakType
Segment.10.GsoakVal
Segment.10.TimeEvent
Segment.10.OnTime
Segment.10.OffTime
Segment.10.PIDSet
Segment.10.PVWait
Segment.10.WaitVal
Segment.11.Type
Segment.11.Holdback
Segment.11.Duration
Segment.11.RampRate
Segment.11.TargetSP
Segment.11.EndAction
Segment.11.EventOutputs
Segment.11.WaitFor
Segment.11.GobackSeg
Segment.11.GobackCycles
Segment.11.PVEvent
Segment.11.PVThreshold
Segment.11.UserVal
Segment.11.GsoakType
Segment.11.GsoakVal
Segment.11.TimeEvent
Segment.11.OnTime
Segment.11.OffTime
Segment.11.PIDSet
Segment.11.PVWait
Segment.11.WaitVal
Segment.12.Type
Segment.12.Holdback
Segment.12.Duration
248
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18CD
18CE
18CF
18D0
18D1
18D2
18D3
18D4
18D5
18D6
18D7
18E0
18E1
18E4
18E5
18E6
18E7
18E8
18E9
18EA
18EB
18EC
18ED
18EE
18EF
18F0
18F1
18F2
18F3
18F4
18F5
18F6
18F7
1900
1901
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
190A
190B
190C
190D
190E
190F
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1920
1921
1924
1ACD
1ACE
1ACF
1AD0
1AD1
1AD2
1AD3
1AD4
1AD5
1AD6
1AD7
1AE0
1AE1
1AE4
1AE5
1AE6
1AE7
1AE8
1AE9
1AEA
1AEB
1AEC
1AED
1AEE
1AEF
1AF0
1AF1
1AF2
1AF3
1AF4
1AF5
1AF6
1AF7
1B00
1B01
1B04
1B05
1B06
1B07
1B08
1B09
1B0A
1B0B
1B0C
1B0D
1B0E
1B0F
1B10
1B11
1B12
1B13
1B14
1B15
1B16
1B17
1B20
1B21
1B24
1CCD
1CCE
1CCF
1CD0
1CD1
1CD2
1CD3
1CD4
1CD5
1CD6
1CD7
1CE0
1CE1
1CE4
1CE5
1CE6
1CE7
1CE8
1CE9
1CEA
1CEB
1CEC
1CED
1CEE
1CEF
1CF0
1CF1
1CF2
1CF3
1CF4
1CF5
1CF6
1CF7
1D00
1D01
1D04
1D05
1D06
1D07
1D08
1D09
1D0A
1D0B
1D0C
1D0D
1D0E
1D0F
1D10
1D11
1D12
1D13
1D14
1D15
1D16
1D17
1D20
1D21
1D24
1ECD
1ECE
1ECF
1ED0
1ED1
1ED2
1ED3
1ED4
1ED5
1ED6
1ED7
1EE0
1EE1
1EE4
1EE5
1EE6
1EE7
1EE8
1EE9
1EEA
1EEB
1EEC
1EED
1EEE
1EEF
1EF0
1EF1
1EF2
1EF3
1EF4
1EF5
1EF6
1EF7
1F00
1F01
1F04
1F05
1F06
1F07
1F08
1F09
1F0A
1F0B
1F0C
1F0D
1F0E
1F0F
1F10
1F11
1F12
1F13
1F14
1F15
1F16
1F17
1F20
1F21
1F24
20CD
20CE
20CF
20D0
20D1
20D2
20D3
20D4
20D5
20D6
20D7
20E0
20E1
20E4
20E5
20E6
20E7
20E8
20E9
20EA
20EB
20EC
20ED
20EE
20EF
20F0
20F1
20F2
20F3
20F4
20F5
20F6
20F7
2100
2101
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
210A
210B
210C
210D
210E
210F
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2120
2121
2124
22CD
22CE
22CF
22D0
22D1
22D2
22D3
22D4
22D5
22D6
22D7
22E0
22E1
22E4
22E5
22E6
22E7
22E8
22E9
22EA
22EB
22EC
22ED
22EE
22EF
22F0
22F1
22F2
22F3
22F4
22F5
22F6
22F7
2300
2301
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
230A
230B
230C
230D
230E
230F
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2320
2321
2324
24CD
24CE
24CF
24D0
24D1
24D2
24D3
24D4
24D5
24D6
24D7
24E0
24E1
24E4
24E5
24E6
24E7
24E8
24E9
24EA
24EB
24EC
24ED
24EE
24EF
24F0
24F1
24F2
24F3
24F4
24F5
24F6
24F7
2500
2501
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
250A
250B
250C
250D
250E
250F
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2520
2521
2524
26CD
26CE
26CF
26D0
26D1
26D2
26D3
26D4
26D5
26D6
26D7
26E0
26E1
26E4
26E5
26E6
26E7
26E8
26E9
26EA
26EB
26EC
26ED
26EE
26EF
26F0
26F1
26F2
26F3
26F4
26F5
26F6
26F7
2700
2701
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
270A
270B
270C
270D
270E
270F
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2720
2721
2724
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.12.RampRate
Segment.12.TargetSP
Segment.12.EndAction
Segment.12.EventOutputs
Segment.12.WaitFor
Segment.12.GobackSeg
Segment.12.GobackCycles
Segment.12.PVEvent
Segment.12.PVThreshold
Segment.12.UserVal
Segment.12.GsoakType
Segment.12.GsoakVal
Segment.12.TimeEvent
Segment.12.OnTime
Segment.12.OffTime
Segment.12.PIDSet
Segment.12.PVWait
Segment.12.WaitVal
Segment.13.Type
Segment.13.Holdback
Segment.13.Duration
Segment.13.RampRate
Segment.13.TargetSP
Segment.13.EndAction
Segment.13.EventOutputs
Segment.13.WaitFor
Segment.13.GobackSeg
Segment.13.GobackCycles
Segment.13.PVEvent
Segment.13.PVThreshold
Segment.13.UserVal
Segment.13.GsoakType
Segment.13.GsoakVal
Segment.13.TimeEvent
Segment.13.OnTime
Segment.13.OffTime
Segment.13.PIDSet
Segment.13.PVWait
Segment.13.WaitVal
Segment.14.Type
Segment.14.Holdback
Segment.14.Duration
Segment.14.RampRate
Segment.14.TargetSP
Segment.14.EndAction
Segment.14.EventOutputs
Segment.14.WaitFor
Segment.14.GobackSeg
Segment.14.GobackCycles
Segment.14.PVEvent
Segment.14.PVThreshold
Segment.14.UserVal
Segment.14.GsoakType
Segment.14.GsoakVal
Segment.14.TimeEvent
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
192A
192B
192C
192D
192E
192F
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1940
1941
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
194A
194B
194C
194D
194E
194F
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1960
1961
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
196A
196B
196C
196D
196E
196F
1970
1971
1972
1B25
1B26
1B27
1B28
1B29
1B2A
1B2B
1B2C
1B2D
1B2E
1B2F
1B30
1B31
1B32
1B33
1B34
1B35
1B36
1B37
1B40
1B41
1B44
1B45
1B46
1B47
1B48
1B49
1B4A
1B4B
1B4C
1B4D
1B4E
1B4F
1B50
1B51
1B52
1B53
1B54
1B55
1B56
1B57
1B60
1B61
1B64
1B65
1B66
1B67
1B68
1B69
1B6A
1B6B
1B6C
1B6D
1B6E
1B6F
1B70
1B71
1B72
1D25
1D26
1D27
1D28
1D29
1D2A
1D2B
1D2C
1D2D
1D2E
1D2F
1D30
1D31
1D32
1D33
1D34
1D35
1D36
1D37
1D40
1D41
1D44
1D45
1D46
1D47
1D48
1D49
1D4A
1D4B
1D4C
1D4D
1D4E
1D4F
1D50
1D51
1D52
1D53
1D54
1D55
1D56
1D57
1D60
1D61
1D64
1D65
1D66
1D67
1D68
1D69
1D6A
1D6B
1D6C
1D6D
1D6E
1D6F
1D70
1D71
1D72
1F25
1F26
1F27
1F28
1F29
1F2A
1F2B
1F2C
1F2D
1F2E
1F2F
1F30
1F31
1F32
1F33
1F34
1F35
1F36
1F37
1F40
1F41
1F44
1F45
1F46
1F47
1F48
1F49
1F4A
1F4B
1F4C
1F4D
1F4E
1F4F
1F50
1F51
1F52
1F53
1F54
1F55
1F56
1F57
1F60
1F61
1F64
1F65
1F66
1F67
1F68
1F69
1F6A
1F6B
1F6C
1F6D
1F6E
1F6F
1F70
1F71
1F72
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
212A
212B
212C
212D
212E
212F
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2140
2141
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
214A
214B
214C
214D
214E
214F
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2160
2161
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
216A
216B
216C
216D
216E
216F
2170
2171
2172
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
232A
232B
232C
232D
232E
232F
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2340
2341
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
234A
234B
234C
234D
234E
234F
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2360
2361
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
236A
236B
236C
236D
236E
236F
2370
2371
2372
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
252A
252B
252C
252D
252E
252F
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2540
2541
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
254A
254B
254C
254D
254E
254F
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2560
2561
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
256A
256B
256C
256D
256E
256F
2570
2571
2572
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
272A
272B
272C
272D
272E
272F
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2740
2741
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
274A
274B
274C
274D
274E
274F
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2760
2761
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
276A
276B
276C
276D
276E
276F
2770
2771
2772
249
Engineering Handbook
PROGRAM NUMBER
HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS (2.xx)
Segment.14.OnTime
Segment.14.OffTime
Segment.14.PIDSet
Segment.14.PVWait
Segment.14.WaitVal
Segment.15.Type
Segment.15.Holdback
Segment.15.Duration
Segment.15.RampRate
Segment.15.TargetSP
Segment.15.EndAction
Segment.15.EventOutputs
Segment.15.WaitFor
Segment.15.GobackSeg
Segment.15.GobackCycles
Segment.15.PVEvent
Segment.15.PVThreshold
Segment.15.UserVal
Segment.15.GsoakType
Segment.15.GsoakVal
Segment.15.TimeEvent
Segment.15.OnTime
Segment.15.OffTime
Segment.15.PIDSet
Segment.15.PVWait
Segment.15.WaitVal
Segment.16.Type
Segment.16.Holdback
Segment.16.Duration
Segment.16.RampRate
Segment.16.TargetSP
Segment.16.EndAction
Segment.16.EventOutputs
Segment.16.WaitFor
Segment.16.GobackSeg
Segment.16.GobackCycles
Segment.16.PVEvent
Segment.16.PVThreshold
Segment.16.UserVal
Segment.16.GsoakType
Segment.16.GsoakVal
Segment.16.TimeEvent
Segment.16.OnTime
Segment.16.OffTime
Segment.16.PIDSet
Segment.16.PVWait
Segment.16.WaitVal
250
Mini8 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1980
1981
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
198A
198B
198C
198D
198E
198F
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
19A0
19A1
19A4
19A5
19A6
19A7
19A8
19A9
19AA
19AB
19AC
19AD
19AE
19AF
19B0
19B1
19B2
19B3
19B4
19B5
19B6
19B7
1B73
1B74
1B75
1B76
1B77
1B80
1B81
1B84
1B85
1B86
1B87
1B88
1B89
1B8A
1B8B
1B8C
1B8D
1B8E
1B8F
1B90
1B91
1B92
1B93
1B94
1B95
1B96
1B97
1BA0
1BA1
1BA4
1BA5
1BA6
1BA7
1BA8
1BA9
1BAA
1BAB
1BAC
1BAD
1BAE
1BAF
1BB0
1BB1
1BB2
1BB3
1BB4
1BB5
1BB6
1BB7
1D73
1D74
1D75
1D76
1D77
1D80
1D81
1D84
1D85
1D86
1D87
1D88
1D89
1D8A
1D8B
1D8C
1D8D
1D8E
1D8F
1D90
1D91
1D92
1D93
1D94
1D95
1D96
1D97
1DA0
1DA1
1DA4
1DA5
1DA6
1DA7
1DA8
1DA9
1DAA
1DAB
1DAC
1DAD
1DAE
1DAF
1DB0
1DB1
1DB2
1DB3
1DB4
1DB5
1DB6
1DB7
1F73
1F74
1F75
1F76
1F77
1F80
1F81
1F84
1F85
1F86
1F87
1F88
1F89
1F8A
1F8B
1F8C
1F8D
1F8E
1F8F
1F90
1F91
1F92
1F93
1F94
1F95
1F96
1F97
1FA0
1FA1
1FA4
1FA5
1FA6
1FA7
1FA8
1FA9
1FAA
1FAB
1FAC
1FAD
1FAE
1FAF
1FB0
1FB1
1FB2
1FB3
1FB4
1FB5
1FB6
1FB7
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2180
2181
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
218A
218B
218C
218D
218E
218F
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
21A0
21A1
21A4
21A5
21A6
21A7
21A8
21A9
21AA
21AB
21AC
21AD
21AE
21AF
21B0
21B1
21B2
21B3
21B4
21B5
21B6
21B7
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2380
2381
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
238A
238B
238C
238D
238E
238F
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
23A0
23A1
23A4
23A5
23A6
23A7
23A8
23A9
23AA
23AB
23AC
23AD
23AE
23AF
23B0
23B1
23B2
23B3
23B4
23B5
23B6
23B7
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2580
2581
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
258A
258B
258C
258D
258E
258F
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
25A0
25A1
25A4
25A5
25A6
25A7
25A8
25A9
25AA
25AB
25AC
25AD
25AE
25AF
25B0
25B1
25B2
25B3
25B4
25B5
25B6
25B7
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2780
2781
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
278A
278B
278C
278D
278E
278F
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
27A0
27A1
27A4
27A5
27A6
27A7
27A8
27A9
27AA
27AB
27AC
27AD
27AE
27AF
27B0
27B1
27B2
27B3
27B4
27B5
27B6
27B7
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
24.
Engineering Handbook
APPENDIX B DEVICENET PARAMETER TABLES
24.1 IO Re-Mapping Object
DeviceNet comes pre-configured with the key parameters of 8 PID loops and alarms (60 input parameters process
variables, alarm status etc and 60 output parameters – setpoints etc.). Loops 9-16 are not included in the DeviceNet
tables as there are insufficient attributes for the DeviceNet parameters
The Mini8 DeviceNet communicates is supplied with a default input assembly table (80 bytes) and output assembly
table (48 bytes). The parameters included are listed below.
To modify these tables see the next section.
The default Input assembly table
Input Parameter
PV – Loop 1
Working SP – Loop 1
Working Output – Loop 1
PV – Loop 2
Working SP – Loop 2
Working Output – Loop 2
PV – Loop 3
Working SP – Loop 3
Working Output – Loop 3
PV – Loop 4
Working SP – Loop 4
Working Output – Loop 4
PV – Loop 5
Working SP – Loop 5
Working Output – Loop 5
PV – Loop 6
Working SP – Loop 6
Working Output – Loop 6
PV – Loop 7
Working SP – Loop 7
Working Output – Loop 7
PV – Loop 8
Working SP – Loop 8
Working Output – Loop 8
Analogue Alarm Status 1
Analogue Alarm Status 2
Analogue Alarm Status 3
Analogue Alarm Status 4
Sensor Break Alarm Status 1
Sensor Break Alarm Status 2
Sensor Break Alarm Status 3
Sensor Break Alarm Status 4
CT Alarm Status 1
CT Alarm Status 2
CT Alarm Status 3
CT Alarm Status 4
New Alarm Output
Any Alarm Output
New CT Alarm Output
Program Status
TOTAL LENGTH
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
Offset
Value (Attr ID)
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
0
1
2
14 (0EH)
15 (0FH)
16 (10H)
28 (1CH)
29 (1DH)
30 (1EH)
42 (2AH)
43 (2BH)
44 (2CH)
56 (38H)
57 (39H)
58 (3AH)
70 (46H)
71 (47H)
72 (48H)
84 (54H)
85 (55H)
86 (56H)
98 (62H)
99 (63H)
100 (64H)
144 (90H)
145 (91H)
146 (92H)
147 (93H)
148 (94H)
149 (95H)
150 (96H)
151 (97H)
152 (98H)
153 (99H)
154 (9AH)
155 (9BH)
156 (9CH)
157 (9DH)
158 (9EH)
184 (B8H)
251
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
The default output assembly table.
Output Parameter
Offset
Value
Target SP – Loop 1
Auto/Manual – Loop 1
Manual Output – Loop 1
Target SP – Loop 2
Auto/Manual – Loop 2
Manual Output – Loop 2
Target SP – Loop 3
Auto/Manual – Loop 3
Manual Output – Loop 3
Target SP – Loop 4
Auto/Manual – Loop 4
Manual Output – Loop 4
Target SP – Loop 5
Auto/Manual – Loop 5
Manual Output – Loop 5
Target SP – Loop 6
Auto/Manual – Loop 6
Manual Output – Loop 6
Target SP – Loop 7
Auto/Manual – Loop 7
Manual Output – Loop 7
Target SP – Loop 8
Auto/Manual – Loop 8
Manual Output – Loop 8
TOTAL LENGTH
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
3
7
4
17 (11H)
21 (15H)
18 (12H)
31 (1FH)
35 (23H)
32 (20H)
45 (2DH)
49 (31H)
46 (2EH)
59 (3BH)
63 (3FH)
60 (3CH)
73 (49H)
77 (4DH)
74 (4AH)
87 (57H)
91 (5BH)
88 (58H)
101 (65H)
105 (69H)
102 (66H)
24.2 Application Variables Object
This is the list of parameters available to be included in the input and output tables.
Parameter
Process Variable – Loop 1
Working Setpoint – Loop 1
Working Output – Loop 1
Target Setpoint – Loop 1
Manual Output – Loop 1
Setpoint 1 – Loop 1
Setpoint 2 – Loop 1
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 1
Proportional Band – Loop 1 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 1 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 1 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 1 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 1 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 1 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 2
Working Setpoint – Loop 2
Working Output – Loop 2
Target Setpoint – Loop 2
Manual Output – Loop 2
Setpoint 1 – Loop 2
Setpoint 2 – Loop 2
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 2
Proportional Band – Loop 2 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 2 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 2 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 2 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 2 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 2 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 3
Working Setpoint – Loop 3
Working Output – Loop 3
Target Setpoint – Loop 3
Manual Output – Loop 3
Setpoint 1 – Loop 3
Setpoint 2 – Loop 3
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 3
252
Attribute ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter
Proportional Band – Loop 3 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 3 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 3 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 3 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 3 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 3 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 4
Working Setpoint – Loop 4
Working Output – Loop 4
Target Setpoint – Loop 4
Manual Output – Loop 4
Setpoint 1 – Loop 4
Setpoint 2 – Loop 4
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 4
Proportional Band – Loop 4 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 4 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 4 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 4 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 4 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 4 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 5
Working Setpoint – Loop 5
Working Output – Loop 5
Target Setpoint – Loop 5
Manual Output – Loop 5
Setpoint 1 – Loop 5
Setpoint 2 – Loop 5
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 5
Proportional Band – Loop 5 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 5 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 5 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 5 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 5 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 5 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 6
Working Setpoint – Loop 6
Working Output – Loop 6
Target Setpoint – Loop 6
Manual Output – Loop 6
Setpoint 1 – Loop 6
Setpoint 2 – Loop 6
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 6
Proportional Band – Loop 6 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 6 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 6 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 6 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 6 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 6 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 7
Working Setpoint – Loop 7
Working Output – Loop 7
Target Setpoint – Loop 7
Manual Output – Loop 7
Setpoint 1 – Loop 7
Setpoint 2 – Loop 7
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 7
Proportional Band – Loop 7 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 7 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 7 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 7 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 7 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 7 working Set
Process Variable – Loop 8
Working Setpoint – Loop 8
Working Output – Loop 8
Target Setpoint – Loop 8
Manual Output – Loop 8
Setpoint 1 – Loop 8
Setpoint 2 – Loop 8
Auto/Manual Mode – Loop 8
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
Attribute ID
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
253
Engineering Handbook
Parameter
Proportional Band – Loop 8 working Set
Integral Time – Loop 8 working Set
Derivative Time – Loop 8 working Set
Cutback Low – Loop 8 working Set
Cutback High – Loop 8 working Set
Relative Cooling Gain – Loop 8 working Set
Module PV – Channel 1
Module PV – Channel 2
Module PV – Channel 3
Module PV – Channel 4
Module PV – Channel 5
Module PV – Channel 6
Module PV – Channel 7
Module PV – Channel 8
Module PV – Channel 9
Module PV – Channel 10
Module PV – Channel 11
Module PV – Channel 12
Module PV – Channel 13
Module PV – Channel 14
Module PV – Channel 15
Module PV – Channel 16
Module PV – Channel 17
Module PV – Channel 18
Module PV – Channel 19
Module PV – Channel 20
Module PV – Channel 21
Module PV – Channel 22
Module PV – Channel 23
Module PV – Channel 24
Module PV – Channel 25
Module PV – Channel 26
Module PV – Channel 27
Module PV – Channel 28
Module PV – Channel 29
Module PV – Channel 30
Module PV – Channel 31
Module PV – Channel 32
Analogue Alarm Status 1
Analogue Alarm Status 2
Analogue Alarm Status 3
Analogue Alarm Status 4
Sensor Break Alarm Status 1
Sensor Break Alarm Status 2
Sensor Break Alarm Status 3
Sensor Break Alarm Status 4
CT Alarm Status 1
CT Alarm Status 2
CT Alarm Status 3
CT Alarm Status 4
New Alarm Output
Any Alarm Output
New CT Alarm Output
Reset New Alarm
Reset New CT Alarm
CT Load Current 1
CT Load Current 2
CT Load Current 3
CT Load Current 4
CT Load Current 5
CT Load Current 6
CT Load Current 7
CT Load Current 8
CT Load Status 1
CT Load Status 2
CT Load Status 3
CT Load Status 4
CT Load Status 5
CT Load Status 6
CT Load Status 7
254
Mini8 Controller
Attribute ID
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Parameter
CT Load Status 8
PSU Relay 1 Output
PSU Relay 2 Output
PSU Digital Input 1
PSU Digital Input 2
Program Run
Program Hold
Program Reset
Program Status
Current Program
Program Time Left
Segment Time Left
User Value 1
User Value 2
User Value 3
User Value 4
User Value 5
User Value 6
User Value 7
User Value 8
User Value 9
User Value 10
User Value 11
User Value 12
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
Attribute ID
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
255
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
24.2.1 Table Modification
Make a list of parameters required in the input and output tables to suit the application. If the parameter is
listed in the predefined list then use the attribute number of that parameter.
To set up the controller so that
the required parameters are
available on the network
requires setting up the INPUT
and OUTPUT data assembly
tables with the IDs from the
Application Variable Object.
Mini8
Application
Variable Object
Mini8 IO
Remapping
Object
List of available
parameters
ASSEMBLY TABLE
Predefined #0
(MAX 60)
USER OUTPUT
to
USER INPUT
ASSEMBLY TABLE
(MAX 60)
#199
256
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
25.
Engineering Handbook
APPENDIX C CANopen PARAMETER TABLES
25.1 Manufacturer Object – Pick List
Object
Index
2000h
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
Receive PDO1 Note: Sub indices 02h – 04h are letter boxed via sub index 01h.
01h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum1)
Integer16
02h
Loop.n.Main.TargetSP
Integer16
03h
Loop.n.Main.AutoMan
Integer16
04h
Loop.n.OP.ManualOutVal
Integer16
Receive PDO2 Note: Sub indices 06h – 08h are letter boxed via sub index 05h.
05h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum2)
Integer16
06h
Loop.n.PID.ProportionalBand
Integer16
07h
Loop.n.PID.IntegralTime
Integer16
08h
Loop.n.PID.DerivativeTime
Integer16
Receive PDO3 Note: Sub indices 0Ah – 0Ch are letter boxed via sub index 09h.
09h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum3)
Integer16
0Ah
Loop.n.SP.SP1
Integer16
0Bh
Loop.n.SP.SP2
Integer16
0Ch
Loop.n.SP.SPSelect
Integer16
Receive PDO Note: Sub indices 0Eh – 10h are letter boxed via sub index 0Dh.
0Dh
Programmer Number (Comms.InstNum4)
Integer16
0Eh
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgRun
Integer16
0Fh
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgHold
Integer16
10h
Programmer.n.SetUp.ProgReset
Integer16
Tramsmit PDO1
11h
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus1
Integer16
12h
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus2
Integer16
13h
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus3
Integer16
14h
AlmSummary.General.AnAlarmStatus4
Integer16
Transmit PD02
15h
AlmSummary.General.SbrkAlarmStatus1
Integer16
16h
AlmSummary.General.SbrkAlarmStatus2
Integer16
17h
AlmSummary.General.SbrkAlarmStatus3
Integer16
18h
AlmSummary.General.SbrkAlarmStatus4
Integer16
Transmit PDO3 Note: Sub indices 1Ah – 1Ch are letter boxed via sub index 19h.
19h
Loop Number (Comms.InstNum5)
Integer16
1Ah
Loop.n.Main.PV
Integer16
1Bh
Loop.n.Main.WorkingSP
Integer16
1Ch
Loop.n.Main.ActiveOut
Integer16
Transmit PDO4 Note: Sub indices 1Eh – 20h are letter boxed via sub index 1Dh.
1Dh
Programmer Number (Comms.InstNum6)
Integer16
1Eh
Programmer.n.Run.CurProg
Integer16
1Fh
Programmer.n.Run.ProgStatus
Integer16
20h
Programmer.n.Run.ProgTimeLeft
Integer16
21h
Loop.1.Main.PV
Integer16
22h
Loop.2.Main.PV
Integer16
23h
Loop.3.Main.PV
Integer16
24h
Loop.4.Main.PV
Integer16
25h
Loop.5.Main.PV
Integer16
26h
Loop.6.Main.PV
Integer16
27h
Loop.7.Main.PV
Integer16
28h
Loop.8.Main.PV
Integer16
29h
Loop.9.Main.PV
Integer16
2Ah
Loop.10.Main.PV
Integer16
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
SCADA
Address
15816
15817
15818
15819
15820
15821
15822
15823
15824
15825
15826
15827
15828
15829
15830
15831
15832
15833
15834
15835
15836
15837
15838
15839
15840
15841
15842
15843
15844
15845
15846
15847
15848
15849
15850
15851
15852
15853
15854
15855
15856
15857
257
Engineering Handbook
Object
Index
2000h
258
Mini8 Controller
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
SCADA
Address
2Bh
2Ch
2Dh
2Eh
2Fh
30h
31h
32h
33h
34h
35h
36h
37h
38h
39h
3Ah
3Bh
3Ch
3Dh
3Eh
3Fh
40h
41h
42h
43h
44h
45h
46h
47h
48h
49h
4Ah
4Bh
4Ch
4Dh
4Eh
4Fh
50h
51h
52h
53h
54h
55h
56h
57h
58h
59h
5Ah
5Bh
5Ch
5Dh
5Eh
5Fh
60h
61h
62h
63h
Loop.11.Main.PV
Loop.12.Main.PV
Loop.13.Main.PV
Loop.14.Main.PV
Loop.15.Main.PV
Loop.16.Main.PV
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.3.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.4.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.5.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.6.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.7.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.8.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.9.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.10.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.11.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.12.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.13.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.14.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.15.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.16.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.3.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.4.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.5.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.6.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.7.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.8.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.9.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.10.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.11.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.12.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.13.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.14.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.15.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.16.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP
Loop.3.Main.TargetSP
Loop.4.Main.TargetSP
Loop.5.Main.TargetSP
Loop.6.Main.TargetSP
Loop.7.Main.TargetSP
Loop.8.Main.TargetSP
Loop.9.Main.TargetSP
Loop.10.Main.TargetSP
Loop.11.Main.TargetSP
Loop.12.Main.TargetSP
Loop.13.Main.TargetSP
Loop.14.Main.TargetSP
Loop.15.Main.TargetSP
Loop.16.Main.TargetSP
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.3.OP.ManualOutVal
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
15858
15859
15860
15861
15862
15863
15864
15865
15866
15867
15868
15869
15870
15871
15872
15873
15874
15875
15876
15877
15878
15879
15880
15881
15882
15883
15884
15885
15886
15887
15888
15889
15890
15891
15892
15893
15894
15895
15896
15897
15898
15899
15900
15901
15902
15903
15904
15905
15906
15907
15908
15909
15910
15911
15912
15913
15914
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Object
Index
2000h
Part No HA028581
Engineering Handbook
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
SCADA
Address
64h
65h
66h
67h
68h
69h
6Ah
6Bh
6Ch
6Dh
6Eh
6Fh
70h
71h
72h
73h
74h
75h
76h
77h
78h
79h
7Ah
7Bh
7Ch
7Dh
7Eh
7Fh
80h
81h
82h
83h
84h
85h
86h
87h
88h
89h
8Ah
8Bh
8Ch
8Dh
8Eh
8Fh
90h
91h
92h
93h
94h
95h
96h
97h
98h
99h
9Ah
9Bh
9Ch
Loop.4.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.5.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.6.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.7.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.8.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.9.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.10.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.11.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.12.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.13.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.14.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.15.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.16.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan
Loop.3.Main.AutoMan
Loop.4.Main.AutoMan
Loop.5.Main.AutoMan
Loop.6.Main.AutoMan
Loop.7.Main.AutoMan
Loop.8.Main.AutoMan
Loop.9.Main.AutoMan
Loop.10.Main.AutoMan
Loop.11.Main.AutoMan
Loop.12.Main.AutoMan
Loop.13.Main.AutoMan
Loop.14.Main.AutoMan
Loop.15.Main.AutoMan
Loop.16.Main.AutoMan
IO.Mod.1.PV
IO.Mod.2.PV
IO.Mod.3.PV
IO.Mod.4.PV
IO.Mod.5.PV
IO.Mod.6.PV
IO.Mod.7.PV
IO.Mod.8.PV
IO.Mod.9.PV
IO.Mod.10.PV
IO.Mod.11.PV
IO.Mod.12.PV
IO.Mod.13.PV
IO.Mod.14.PV
IO.Mod.15.PV
IO.Mod.16.PV
IO.Mod.17.PV
IO.Mod.18.PV
IO.Mod.19.PV
IO.Mod.20.PV
IO.Mod.21.PV
IO.Mod.22.PV
IO.Mod.23.PV
IO.Mod.24.PV
IO.Mod.25.PV
IO.Mod.26.PV
IO.Mod.27.PV
IO.Mod.28.PV
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
15915
15916
15917
15918
15919
15920
15921
15922
15923
15924
15925
15926
15927
15928
15929
15930
15931
15932
15933
15934
15935
15936
15937
15938
15939
15940
15941
15942
15943
15944
15945
15946
15947
15948
15949
15950
15951
15952
15953
15954
15955
15956
15957
15958
15959
15960
15961
15962
15963
15964
15965
15966
15967
15968
15969
15970
15971
Issue 3 Sep-05
259
Engineering Handbook
Object
Index
2000h
260
Mini8 Controller
Sub
Index
Parameter
Data Type
SCADA
Address
9Dh
9Eh
9Fh
A0h
A1h
A2h
A3h
A4h
A5h
A6h
A7h
A8h
A9h
AAh
ABh
ACh
ADh
AEh
AFh
B0h
B1h
B2h
B3h
B4h
B5h
B6h
B7h
B8h
B9h
BAh
BBh
BCh
BDh
BEh
BFh
C0h
C1h
C2h
C3h
C4h
C5h
C6h
C7h
C8h
IO.Mod.29.PV
IO.Mod.30.PV
IO.Mod.31.PV
IO.Mod.32.PV
IO.FixedIO.A.PV
IO.FixedIO.B.PV
IO.FixedIO.D1.PV
IO.FixedIO.D2.PV
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load1Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load2Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load3Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load4Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load5Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load6Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load7Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load8Current
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load1Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load2Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load3Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load4Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load5Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load6Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load7Status
IO.CurrentMonitor.Status.Load8Status
AlmSummary.General.AnyAlarm
AlmSummary.General.NewAlarm
AlmSummary.General.NewCTAlarm
AlmSummary.General.RstNewAlarm
AlmSummary.General.RstNewCTAlarm
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.CTAlarmStatus4
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus1
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus2
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus3
AlmSummary.General.DigAlarmStatus4
AlmSummary.General.GlobalAck
UserVal.1.Val
UserVal.2.Val
UserVal.3.Val
UserVal.4.Val
UserVal.5.Val
UserVal.6.Val
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
Integer16
15972
15973
15974
15975
15976
15977
15978
15979
15980
15981
15982
15983
15984
15985
15986
15987
15988
15989
15990
15991
15992
15993
15994
15995
15996
15997
15998
15999
16000
16001
16002
16003
16004
16005
16006
16007
16008
16009
16010
16011
16012
16013
16014
16015
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
26.
APPENDIX D VERSION 1.XX PROGRAMMER
26.1
Version 1.xx Parameter Tables
26.1.1 Configuring the Programmer (V1.xx)
Programmer.1.Setup contains the general configuration settings for the Programmer Block. Programs are
created and stored in the Program Folder. Once a Program exists it can be run using the parameters in the
Programmer.1.Run folder.
Folder – Programmer.1
Sub-folder: Setup
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Units
Units of the Output
Resolution
Programmer Output resolution
X to X.XXXX
Conf
PVIn
The programmer uses the PV input for a
number of functions
In holdback, the PV is monitored against the
setpoint, and if a deviation occurs the program
is paused.
The programmer can be configured to start its
profile from the current PV value (servo to PV).
The programmer monitors the PV value for
Sensor Break. The programmer holds in sensor
break.
Conf
SPIn
The programmer needs to know the working
setpoint of the loop it is profiling. The SP input
is used in the servo to setpoint start type.
The transfer of program setpoint to PV Input
(normally the Loop PV) or the SP Input
(normally the Loop setpoint).
Power fail recovery strategy
The PV Input is normally wired
from the loop TrackPV parameter.
Note: This input is automatically
wired when the programmer and
loop are enabled and there are no
existing wires to track interface
parameters.
Track interface parameters are
Programmer.Setup, PVInput,
SPInput, Loop.SP, AltSP, Loop.SP,
AltSPSelect.
SP Input is normally wired from the
loop Track SP parameter as the PV
input.
PV
See also section
SP
18.7.1
Servo
PowerFailAct
SyncIn
Ramp
Reset
Cont
0
1
Default
Access
Level
None
Conf
Conf
Conf
See section 18.8.
Conf
This will normally be
wired to the ‘End of
Seg’ parameter.
Oper
Prog Reset
The synchronise input is a way of synchronising
programs. At the end of a segment the
programmer will inspect the sync. input, if it is
True (1) then the programmer will advance to
the next segment. It is typically wired from the
end of segment output of another programmer.
Only appears if ‘SyncMode’ = ‘Yes’
To set the maximum number of output events
required for the program. This is for
convenience to avoid having to scroll through
unwanted events when setting up each segment
Allows multiple controllers to be synchronised
at the end of each segment
Flag showing reset state
Prog Run
Flag showing run state
No/Yes
Prog Hold
Flag showing hold state
No/Yes
AdvSeg
No/Yes
Oper
No/Yes
Oper
EventOut1 to 8
Set output to target setpoint and advance to
next segment
Skip to the next setpoint and start the segment
at the current output value.
Flags showing event states
No/Yes
R/O
End of Seg
Flag showing end of segment state
No/Yes
R/O
Max Events
SyncMode
SkipSeg
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
1 to 8
No
Yes
No/Yes
Conf
Sync output disabled
Sync output enabled
Can be wired to logic
inputs to provide
remote program
control
Conf
Oper
Oper
Oper
261
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
26.1.2 To Select, Run, Hold or Reset a Program (V1.xx).
The ‘Run’ folder allows an existing program to be selected and run. The folder also shows the current
program status
Folder – Programmer.1
Sub-folder: Run
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
CurProg
Current Program Number
0 to 50. Change only when
Programmer is in Reset.
0
Oper
1
R/O
CurrSeg
Current Running Segment
1 to 255
ProgStatus
Program Status
Reset –
Run –
Hold –
Holdback –
End –
PSP
Programmer Setpoint
0
R/O
CyclesLeft
Number of Cycles Remaining
0 to 1000
0
R/O
CurSegType
Current Segment type
End
R/O
SegTimeLeft
Segment Time Remaining
End
Rate
Time
Dwell
Step
Call
Hr Min Sec Millisec
0
R/O
ResetEventOP
Reset Event Outputs
0 to 255, each bit resets its
corresponding output
0
Oper
SegTarget
Current Target Setpoint Value
SegRate
Segment Ramp Rate
0.1 to 9999.9
0
R/O
ProgTimeLeft
Program Time Remaining
Hrs Min Sec Millisec
0
R/O
FastRun
Fast Run
No
Conf
EndOutput
End Output
Off
R/O
EventsOut
Event Outputs
No (0) Normal
Yes (1) Program executes at 10
times real time
Off (0) Program not in End
On (1) Program at End
0 to 255, each bit represents an
output.
0
R/O
26.1.3
R/O
Oper
R/O
Creating a Program (V1.xx)
A folder exists for each Program containing a few key parameters listed below. This folder would normally be viewed
via the iTools Program Editor under the Program Parameters tab. The Program Editor is used to create the segments
of Program itself using the Segment Editor tab.
Folder – Program
Sub-folder: 1 to 50
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
Name
Program Name
Up to 8 characters
Null
Oper
Holdback
Value
Minimum setting 0
0
Oper
Ramp Units
Deviation between SP and PV at which holdback
is applied. This value applies to the whole
program.
Time units applied to the segments
sec
Oper
Cycles
Number of times the whole program repeats
Sec
Min
Hour
Cont (0)
1 to 999
1
Oper
262
Seconds
Minutes
Hours
Repeats continuously
Program executes
once to 999 times
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
26.1.4
Engineering Handbook
To Select, Run, Hold or Reset a Program (Version 1.xx)
The ‘Run’ folder allows an existing program to be selected and run. The folder also shows the current
program status
Folder – Programmer.1
Sub-folder: Run
Name
Parameter Description
Value
Default
Access
Level
CurProg
Current Program Number
0 to 50. Change only when
Programmer is in Reset.
0
Oper
CurrSeg
Current Running Segment
1 to 255
1
ProgStatus
Program Status
Reset –
Run –
Hold –
Holdback –
End –
PSP
Programmer Setpoint
CyclesLeft
Number of Cycles Remaining
CurSegType
Current Segment type
SegTimeLeft
Segment Time Remaining
ResetEventOP
Reset Event Outputs
SegTarget
Current Target Setpoint Value
SegRate
Segment Ramp Rate
0.1 to 9999.9
0
R/O
ProgTimeLeft
Program Time Remaining
Hrs Min Sec Millisec
0
R/O
FastRun
Fast Run
No
Conf
EndOutput
End Output
Off
R/O
EventsOut
Event Outputs
No (0) Normal
Yes (1) Program executes at 10
times real time
Off (0) Program not in End
On (1) Program at End
0 to 255, each bit represents an
output.
0
R/O
R/O
R/O
Oper
0
R/O
0 to 1000
0
R/O
End
Rate
Time
Dwell
Step
Call
Hr Min Sec Millisec
End
R/O
0
R/O
0 to 255, each bit resets its
corresponding output
0
Oper
R/O
26.2 Version 1.xx Programmer SCADA addresses
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Program.Cycles
Program.DwellUnits
Program.HoldbackVal
Program.RampUnits
Programmer.CommsProgNum
Programmer.Run.CurProg
Programmer.Run.CurSeg
Programmer.Run.CurSegType
Programmer.Run.CyclesLeft
Programmer.Run.EventOuts
Programmer.Run.FastRun
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
8196
8195
8193
8194
8192
8201
8202
8206
8205
8212
8216
HEX
2004
2003
2001
2002
2000
2009
200A
200E
200D
2014
2018
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Programmer.Run.ProgStatus
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeLeft
Programmer.Run.PSP
Programmer.Run.ResetEventOuts
Programmer.Run.SegRate
Programmer.Run.SegTarget
Programmer.Run.SegTimeLeft
Programmer.Setup.AdvSeg
Programmer.Setup.EndOfSeg
Programmer.Setup.PowerFailAct
Programmer.Setup.PVIn
DEC
8203
8209
8204
8200
8208
8207
8213
8217
8214
8197
8210
263
HEX
200B
2011
200C
2008
2010
200F
2015
2019
2016
2005
2012
Engineering Handbook
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Programmer.Setup.Servo
Programmer.Setup.SkipSeg
Programmer.Setup.SPIn
Programmer.Setup.SyncIn
Programmer.Setup.SyncMode
Recipe.LastDataset
Recipe.LoadingStatus
Recipe.RecipeSelect
Segment.1.CallCycles
Segment.1.CallProg
Segment.1.Duration
Segment.1.EndType
Segment.1.EventOuts
Segment.1.Holdback
Segment.1.RampRate
Segment.1.SegType
Segment.1.TargetSP
Segment.2.CallCycles
Segment.2.CallProg
Segment.2.Duration
Segment.2.EndType
Segment.2.EventOuts
Segment.2.Holdback
Segment.2.RampRate
Segment.2.SegType
Segment.2.TargetSP
Segment.3.CallCycles
Segment.3.CallProg
Segment.3.Duration
Segment.3.EndType
Segment.3.EventOuts
Segment.3.Holdback
Segment.3.RampRate
Segment.3.SegType
Segment.3.TargetSP
Segment.4.CallCycles
Segment.4.CallProg
Segment.4.Duration
Segment.4.EndType
Segment.4.EventOuts
Segment.4.Holdback
Segment.4.RampRate
Segment.4.SegType
Segment.4.TargetSP
Segment.5.CallCycles
Segment.5.CallProg
Segment.5.Duration
Segment.5.EndType
Segment.5.EventOuts
Segment.5.Holdback
Segment.5.RampRate
Segment.5.SegType
Segment.5.TargetSP
Segment.6.CallCycles
Segment.6.CallProg
Segment.6.Duration
Segment.6.EndType
Segment.6.EventOuts
Segment.6.Holdback
Segment.6.RampRate
264
Mini8 Controller
DEC
8198
8218
8211
8215
8199
4913
4914
4912
8259
8258
8260
8263
8264
8257
8261
8256
8262
8275
8274
8276
8279
8280
8273
8277
8272
8278
8291
8290
8292
8295
8296
8289
8293
8288
8294
8307
8306
8308
8311
8312
8305
8309
8304
8310
8323
8322
8324
8327
8328
8321
8325
8320
8326
8339
8338
8340
8343
8344
8337
8341
HEX
2006
201A
2013
2017
2007
1331
1332
1330
2043
2042
2044
2047
2048
2041
2045
2040
2046
2053
2052
2054
2057
2058
2051
2055
2050
2056
2063
2062
2064
2067
2068
2061
2065
2060
2066
2073
2072
2074
2077
2078
2071
2075
2070
2076
2083
2082
2084
2087
2088
2081
2085
2080
2086
2093
2092
2094
2097
2098
2091
2095
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.6.SegType
Segment.6.TargetSP
Segment.7.CallCycles
Segment.7.CallProg
Segment.7.Duration
Segment.7.EndType
Segment.7.EventOuts
Segment.7.Holdback
Segment.7.RampRate
Segment.7.SegType
Segment.7.TargetSP
Segment.8.CallCycles
Segment.8.CallProg
Segment.8.Duration
Segment.8.EndType
Segment.8.EventOuts
Segment.8.Holdback
Segment.8.RampRate
Segment.8.SegType
Segment.8.TargetSP
Segment.9.CallCycles
Segment.9.CallProg
Segment.9.Duration
Segment.9.EndType
Segment.9.EventOuts
Segment.9.Holdback
Segment.9.RampRate
Segment.9.SegType
Segment.9.TargetSP
Segment.10.CallCycles
Segment.10.CallProg
Segment.10.Duration
Segment.10.EndType
Segment.10.EventOuts
Segment.10.Holdback
Segment.10.RampRate
Segment.10.SegType
Segment.10.TargetSP
Segment.11.CallCycles
Segment.11.CallProg
Segment.11.Duration
Segment.11.EndType
Segment.11.EventOuts
Segment.11.Holdback
Segment.11.RampRate
Segment.11.SegType
Segment.11.TargetSP
Segment.12.CallCycles
Segment.12.CallProg
Segment.12.Duration
Segment.12.EndType
Segment.12.EventOuts
Segment.12.Holdback
Segment.12.RampRate
Segment.12.SegType
Segment.12.TargetSP
Segment.13.CallCycles
Segment.13.CallProg
Segment.13.Duration
Segment.13.EndType
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
8336
8342
8355
8354
8356
8359
8360
8353
8357
8352
8358
8371
8370
8372
8375
8376
8369
8373
8368
8374
8387
8386
8388
8391
8392
8385
8389
8384
8390
8403
8402
8404
8407
8408
8401
8405
8400
8406
8419
8418
8420
8423
8424
8417
8421
8416
8422
8435
8434
8436
8439
8440
8433
8437
8432
8438
8451
8450
8452
8455
Sep-05
HEX
2090
2096
20A3
20A2
20A4
20A7
20A8
20A1
20A5
20A0
20A6
20B3
20B2
20B4
20B7
20B8
20B1
20B5
20B0
20B6
20C3
20C2
20C4
20C7
20C8
20C1
20C5
20C0
20C6
20D3
20D2
20D4
20D7
20D8
20D1
20D5
20D0
20D6
20E3
20E2
20E4
20E7
20E8
20E1
20E5
20E0
20E6
20F3
20F2
20F4
20F7
20F8
20F1
20F5
20F0
20F6
2103
2102
2104
2107
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.13.EventOuts
Segment.13.Holdback
Segment.13.RampRate
Segment.13.SegType
Segment.13.TargetSP
Segment.14.CallCycles
Segment.14.CallProg
Segment.14.Duration
Segment.14.EndType
Segment.14.EventOuts
Segment.14.Holdback
Segment.14.RampRate
Segment.14.SegType
Segment.14.TargetSP
Segment.15.CallCycles
Segment.15.CallProg
Segment.15.Duration
Segment.15.EndType
Segment.15.EventOuts
Segment.15.Holdback
Segment.15.RampRate
Segment.15.SegType
Segment.15.TargetSP
Segment.16.CallCycles
Segment.16.CallProg
Segment.16.Duration
Segment.16.EndType
Segment.16.EventOuts
Segment.16.Holdback
Segment.16.RampRate
Segment.16.SegType
Segment.16.TargetSP
Segment.17.CallCycles
Segment.17.CallProg
Segment.17.Duration
Segment.17.EndType
Segment.17.EventOuts
Segment.17.Holdback
Segment.17.RampRate
Segment.17.SegType
Segment.17.TargetSP
Segment.18.CallCycles
Segment.18.CallProg
Segment.18.Duration
Segment.18.EndType
Segment.18.EventOuts
Segment.18.Holdback
Segment.18.RampRate
Segment.18.SegType
Segment.18.TargetSP
Segment.19.CallCycles
Segment.19.CallProg
Segment.19.Duration
Segment.19.EndType
Segment.19.EventOuts
Segment.19.Holdback
Segment.19.RampRate
Segment.19.SegType
Segment.19.TargetSP
Segment.20.CallCycles
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
8456
8449
8453
8448
8454
8467
8466
8468
8471
8472
8465
8469
8464
8470
8483
8482
8484
8487
8488
8481
8485
8480
8486
8499
8498
8500
8503
8504
8497
8501
8496
8502
8515
8514
8516
8519
8520
8513
8517
8512
8518
8531
8530
8532
8535
8536
8529
8533
8528
8534
8547
8546
8548
8551
8552
8545
8549
8544
8550
8563
HEX
2108
2101
2105
2100
2106
2113
2112
2114
2117
2118
2111
2115
2110
2116
2123
2122
2124
2127
2128
2121
2125
2120
2126
2133
2132
2134
2137
2138
2131
2135
2130
2136
2143
2142
2144
2147
2148
2141
2145
2140
2146
2153
2152
2154
2157
2158
2151
2155
2150
2156
2163
2162
2164
2167
2168
2161
2165
2160
2166
2173
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.20.CallProg
Segment.20.Duration
Segment.20.EndType
Segment.20.EventOuts
Segment.20.Holdback
Segment.20.RampRate
Segment.20.SegType
Segment.20.TargetSP
Segment.21.CallCycles
Segment.21.CallProg
Segment.21.Duration
Segment.21.EndType
Segment.21.EventOuts
Segment.21.Holdback
Segment.21.RampRate
Segment.21.SegType
Segment.21.TargetSP
Segment.22.CallCycles
Segment.22.CallProg
Segment.22.Duration
Segment.22.EndType
Segment.22.EventOuts
Segment.22.Holdback
Segment.22.RampRate
Segment.22.SegType
Segment.22.TargetSP
Segment.23.CallCycles
Segment.23.CallProg
Segment.23.Duration
Segment.23.EndType
Segment.23.EventOuts
Segment.23.Holdback
Segment.23.RampRate
Segment.23.SegType
Segment.23.TargetSP
Segment.24.CallCycles
Segment.24.CallProg
Segment.24.Duration
Segment.24.EndType
Segment.24.EventOuts
Segment.24.Holdback
Segment.24.RampRate
Segment.24.SegType
Segment.24.TargetSP
Segment.25.CallCycles
Segment.25.CallProg
Segment.25.Duration
Segment.25.EndType
Segment.25.EventOuts
Segment.25.Holdback
Segment.25.RampRate
Segment.25.SegType
Segment.25.TargetSP
Segment.26.CallCycles
Segment.26.CallProg
Segment.26.Duration
Segment.26.EndType
Segment.26.EventOuts
Segment.26.Holdback
Segment.26.RampRate
DEC
8562
8564
8567
8568
8561
8565
8560
8566
8579
8578
8580
8583
8584
8577
8581
8576
8582
8595
8594
8596
8599
8600
8593
8597
8592
8598
8611
8610
8612
8615
8616
8609
8613
8608
8614
8627
8626
8628
8631
8632
8625
8629
8624
8630
8643
8642
8644
8647
8648
8641
8645
8640
8646
8659
8658
8660
8663
8664
8657
8661
265
HEX
2172
2174
2177
2178
2171
2175
2170
2176
2183
2182
2184
2187
2188
2181
2185
2180
2186
2193
2192
2194
2197
2198
2191
2195
2190
2196
21A3
21A2
21A4
21A7
21A8
21A1
21A5
21A0
21A6
21B3
21B2
21B4
21B7
21B8
21B1
21B5
21B0
21B6
21C3
21C2
21C4
21C7
21C8
21C1
21C5
21C0
21C6
21D3
21D2
21D4
21D7
21D8
21D1
21D5
Engineering Handbook
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.26.SegType
Segment.26.TargetSP
Segment.27.CallCycles
Segment.27.CallProg
Segment.27.Duration
Segment.27.EndType
Segment.27.EventOuts
Segment.27.Holdback
Segment.27.RampRate
Segment.27.SegType
Segment.27.TargetSP
Segment.28.CallCycles
Segment.28.CallProg
Segment.28.Duration
Segment.28.EndType
Segment.28.EventOuts
Segment.28.Holdback
Segment.28.RampRate
Segment.28.SegType
Segment.28.TargetSP
Segment.29.CallCycles
Segment.29.CallProg
Segment.29.Duration
Segment.29.EndType
Segment.29.EventOuts
Segment.29.Holdback
Segment.29.RampRate
Segment.29.SegType
Segment.29.TargetSP
Segment.30.CallCycles
Segment.30.CallProg
Segment.30.Duration
Segment.30.EndType
Segment.30.EventOuts
Segment.30.Holdback
Segment.30.RampRate
Segment.30.SegType
Segment.30.TargetSP
Segment.31.CallCycles
Segment.31.CallProg
Segment.31.Duration
Segment.31.EndType
Segment.31.EventOuts
Segment.31.Holdback
Segment.31.RampRate
Segment.31.SegType
Segment.31.TargetSP
Segment.32.CallCycles
Segment.32.CallProg
Segment.32.Duration
Segment.32.EndType
Segment.32.EventOuts
Segment.32.Holdback
Segment.32.RampRate
Segment.32.SegType
Segment.32.TargetSP
Segment.33.CallCycles
Segment.33.CallProg
Segment.33.Duration
Segment.33.EndType
266
Mini8 Controller
DEC
8656
8662
8675
8674
8676
8679
8680
8673
8677
8672
8678
8691
8690
8692
8695
8696
8689
8693
8688
8694
8707
8706
8708
8711
8712
8705
8709
8704
8710
8723
8722
8724
8727
8728
8721
8725
8720
8726
8739
8738
8740
8743
8744
8737
8741
8736
8742
8755
8754
8756
8759
8760
8753
8757
8752
8758
8771
8770
8772
8775
HEX
21D0
21D6
21E3
21E2
21E4
21E7
21E8
21E1
21E5
21E0
21E6
21F3
21F2
21F4
21F7
21F8
21F1
21F5
21F0
21F6
2203
2202
2204
2207
2208
2201
2205
2200
2206
2213
2212
2214
2217
2218
2211
2215
2210
2216
2223
2222
2224
2227
2228
2221
2225
2220
2226
2233
2232
2234
2237
2238
2231
2235
2230
2236
2243
2242
2244
2247
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.33.EventOuts
Segment.33.Holdback
Segment.33.RampRate
Segment.33.SegType
Segment.33.TargetSP
Segment.34.CallCycles
Segment.34.CallProg
Segment.34.Duration
Segment.34.EndType
Segment.34.EventOuts
Segment.34.Holdback
Segment.34.RampRate
Segment.34.SegType
Segment.34.TargetSP
Segment.35.CallCycles
Segment.35.CallProg
Segment.35.Duration
Segment.35.EndType
Segment.35.EventOuts
Segment.35.Holdback
Segment.35.RampRate
Segment.35.SegType
Segment.35.TargetSP
Segment.36.CallCycles
Segment.36.CallProg
Segment.36.Duration
Segment.36.EndType
Segment.36.EventOuts
Segment.36.Holdback
Segment.36.RampRate
Segment.36.SegType
Segment.36.TargetSP
Segment.37.CallCycles
Segment.37.CallProg
Segment.37.Duration
Segment.37.EndType
Segment.37.EventOuts
Segment.37.Holdback
Segment.37.RampRate
Segment.37.SegType
Segment.37.TargetSP
Segment.38.CallCycles
Segment.38.CallProg
Segment.38.Duration
Segment.38.EndType
Segment.38.EventOuts
Segment.38.Holdback
Segment.38.RampRate
Segment.38.SegType
Segment.38.TargetSP
Segment.39.CallCycles
Segment.39.CallProg
Segment.39.Duration
Segment.39.EndType
Segment.39.EventOuts
Segment.39.Holdback
Segment.39.RampRate
Segment.39.SegType
Segment.39.TargetSP
Segment.40.CallCycles
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
DEC
8776
8769
8773
8768
8774
8787
8786
8788
8791
8792
8785
8789
8784
8790
8803
8802
8804
8807
8808
8801
8805
8800
8806
8819
8818
8820
8823
8824
8817
8821
8816
8822
8835
8834
8836
8839
8840
8833
8837
8832
8838
8851
8850
8852
8855
8856
8849
8853
8848
8854
8867
8866
8868
8871
8872
8865
8869
8864
8870
8883
Sep-05
HEX
2248
2241
2245
2240
2246
2253
2252
2254
2257
2258
2251
2255
2250
2256
2263
2262
2264
2267
2268
2261
2265
2260
2266
2273
2272
2274
2277
2278
2271
2275
2270
2276
2283
2282
2284
2287
2288
2281
2285
2280
2286
2293
2292
2294
2297
2298
2291
2295
2290
2296
22A3
22A2
22A4
22A7
22A8
22A1
22A5
22A0
22A6
22B3
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.40.CallProg
Segment.40.Duration
Segment.40.EndType
Segment.40.EventOuts
Segment.40.Holdback
Segment.40.RampRate
Segment.40.SegType
Segment.40.TargetSP
Segment.41.CallCycles
Segment.41.CallProg
Segment.41.Duration
Segment.41.EndType
Segment.41.EventOuts
Segment.41.Holdback
Segment.41.RampRate
Segment.41.SegType
Segment.41.TargetSP
Segment.42.CallCycles
Segment.42.CallProg
Segment.42.Duration
Segment.42.EndType
Segment.42.EventOuts
Segment.42.Holdback
Segment.42.RampRate
Segment.42.SegType
Segment.42.TargetSP
Segment.43.CallCycles
Segment.43.CallProg
Segment.43.Duration
Segment.43.EndType
Segment.43.EventOuts
Segment.43.Holdback
Segment.43.RampRate
Segment.43.SegType
Segment.43.TargetSP
Segment.44.CallCycles
Segment.44.CallProg
Segment.44.Duration
Segment.44.EndType
Segment.44.EventOuts
Segment.44.Holdback
Segment.44.RampRate
Segment.44.SegType
Segment.44.TargetSP
Segment.45.CallCycles
Segment.45.CallProg
Segment.45.Duration
Segment.45.EndType
Segment.45.EventOuts
Segment.45.Holdback
Segment.45.RampRate
Segment.45.SegType
Segment.45.TargetSP
Segment.46.CallCycles
Segment.46.CallProg
Segment.46.Duration
Segment.46.EndType
Segment.46.EventOuts
Segment.46.Holdback
Segment.46.RampRate
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
DEC
8882
8884
8887
8888
8881
8885
8880
8886
8899
8898
8900
8903
8904
8897
8901
8896
8902
8915
8914
8916
8919
8920
8913
8917
8912
8918
8931
8930
8932
8935
8936
8929
8933
8928
8934
8947
8946
8948
8951
8952
8945
8949
8944
8950
8963
8962
8964
8967
8968
8961
8965
8960
8966
8979
8978
8980
8983
8984
8977
8981
HEX
22B2
22B4
22B7
22B8
22B1
22B5
22B0
22B6
22C3
22C2
22C4
22C7
22C8
22C1
22C5
22C0
22C6
22D3
22D2
22D4
22D7
22D8
22D1
22D5
22D0
22D6
22E3
22E2
22E4
22E7
22E8
22E1
22E5
22E0
22E6
22F3
22F2
22F4
22F7
22F8
22F1
22F5
22F0
22F6
2303
2302
2304
2307
2308
2301
2305
2300
2306
2313
2312
2314
2317
2318
2311
2315
Version 1.xx Programmer Parameters
Segment.46.SegType
Segment.46.TargetSP
Segment.47.CallCycles
Segment.47.CallProg
Segment.47.Duration
Segment.47.EndType
Segment.47.EventOuts
Segment.47.Holdback
Segment.47.RampRate
Segment.47.SegType
Segment.47.TargetSP
Segment.48.CallCycles
Segment.48.CallProg
Segment.48.Duration
Segment.48.EndType
Segment.48.EventOuts
Segment.48.Holdback
Segment.48.RampRate
Segment.48.SegType
Segment.48.TargetSP
Segment.49.CallCycles
Segment.49.CallProg
Segment.49.Duration
Segment.49.EndType
Segment.49.EventOuts
Segment.49.Holdback
Segment.49.RampRate
Segment.49.SegType
Segment.49.TargetSP
Segment.50.CallCycles
Segment.50.CallProg
Segment.50.Duration
Segment.50.EndType
Segment.50.EventOuts
Segment.50.Holdback
Segment.50.RampRate
Segment.50.SegType
Segment.50.TargetSP
DEC
8976
8982
8995
8994
8996
8999
9000
8993
8997
8992
8998
9011
9010
9012
9015
9016
9009
9013
9008
9014
9027
9026
9028
9031
9032
9025
9029
9024
9030
9043
9042
9044
9047
9048
9041
9045
9040
9046
267
HEX
2310
2316
2323
2322
2324
2327
2328
2321
2325
2320
2326
2333
2332
2334
2337
2338
2331
2335
2330
2336
2343
2342
2344
2347
2348
2341
2345
2340
2346
2353
2352
2354
2357
2358
2351
2355
2350
2356
Engineering Handbook
27.
Mini8 Controller
APPENDIX E SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION
Eurotherm Controls Ltd manufactures this controller in the UK.
Please read this section carefully before installing the controller
This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications where it will meet the
requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC. If the instrument is used in a manner not
specified in this manual, the safety or EMC protection provided by the instrument may be impaired. The
installer must ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation.
The Mini8 is intended for operation at safe low voltage levels, except the RL8 relay module. Voltages in
excess of 42 volts must not be applied to any terminals other than the RL8 relay module.
Protective Earth Connection is required.
Safety
This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, by the application of the safety
standard EN 61010. The earth stud should be connected to safety earth before other connections are made.
Electromagnetic compatibility
This controller conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, by the
application of EMC standard EN61326
Unpacking and storage
The packaging should contain an instrument and an Installation guide. It may contain a CD.
If on receipt, the packaging or the instrument are damaged, do not install the product but contact your
supplier. If the instrument is to be stored before use, protect from humidity and dust in an ambient
temperature range of -10oC to +70oC.
SERVICE AND REPAIR
This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier for repair.
Cleaning
Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible. Isopropyl alcohol
may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the
product.
GENERAL
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been
made to ensure the accuracy of the information, your supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained
herein.
268
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Safety Symbols
Various symbols are used on the instrument, they have the following meaning:
!
Caution (refer to the accompanying documents
Protective Conductor Terminal
Personnel
Installation must only be carried out by suitably qualified personnel.
Mounting
The Mini8 should be mounted in a suitable enclosure with suitable ventilation to ensure the ambient
temperature remains below 50ºC.
Wiring
It is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in this guide. Take
particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low level inputs and
outputs. Only use copper conductors for connections (except thermocouple inputs) and ensure that the
wiring of installations comply with all local wiring regulations. For example in the UK use the latest version
of the IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671). In the USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods.
Power Isolation
The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. The device should be mounted in
close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting device
for the instrument.
Overcurrent protection
The power supply to the system should be fused appropriately to protect the cabling to the units.
Voltage rating
The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not exceed:
•
24 V dc ± 10% on the power supply terminals
•
42V peak on analogue and digital I/O terminals, and fixed resource I/O terminals;
•
264V rms on Relay card fitted in I/O slot 2 or 3.
The case MUST be wired to a protective earth.
Conductive pollution
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted. For
example, carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution. To secure a suitable atmosphere, install
an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet. Where condensation is likely, for example at low temperatures,
include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.
This product has been designed to conform to BSEN61010 installation category II, pollution degree 2. These
are defined as follows:Installation Category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 24V dc supply is 800V.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally only non conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity
caused by condensation shall be expected.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
269
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
Over-Temperature Protection
When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part of the system
should fail. In temperature control applications the primary danger is that the heating will remain constantly
on. Apart from spoiling the product, this could damage any process machinery being controlled, or even
cause a fire.
Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include:
•
the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process
•
thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit;
•
the controller failing with its heating output constantly on
•
an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition
•
the controller setpoint set too high.
Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend fitting a separate over-temperature protection unit, with
an independent temperature sensor, which will isolate the heating circuit.
Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failure conditions.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC
To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary as
follows:
•
For general guidance refer to EMC Installation Guide, HA025464.
•
When using relay outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable for suppressing the conducted
emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load. For typical applications we
recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612.
•
If the unit is used in table top equipment which is plugged into a standard power socket, then it is likely
that compliance to the commercial and light industrial emissions standard is required. In this case to
meet the conducted emissions requirement, a suitable mains filter should be installed. We recommend
Schaffner types FN321 and FN612.
Routing of wires
To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the low voltage DC connections and the sensor input wiring
should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impractical to do this, use shielded
cables with the shield grounded at both ends. In general keep cable lengths to a minimum.
270
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
28.
Engineering Handbook
APPENDIX F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
The I/O electrical specifications are quoted as factory calibrated worst-case; for life, over full ambient
temperature range and supply voltage. Any “typical” figures quoted are the expected values at 25°C ambient
and 24Vdc supply.
The nominal update of all inputs and function blocks is every 110ms. However, in complex applications the
Mini8 will automatically extend this time in multiples of 110ms.
28.1 Environmental Specification
Power Supply Voltage:
17.8Vdc min to 28.8Vdc max.
Supply Ripple:
2Vp-p max.
Power Consumption:
15W max.
Operating Temperature:
0 to 55°C
Storage Temperature:
-10°C to +70°C
Operating Humidity:
5% to 95% RH non-condensing
EMC:
EN61326 for Industrial Environments
Safety:
Meets EN61010, installation category II, pollution degree 2.
Max. applied voltage any terminal:
42Vpk.
The Mini8 must be mounted in a protective enclosure.
28.2 Network Communications Support
Modbus RTU: RS485, 2 x RJ45, user select switch for 3-wire or 5-wire.
Baud rates: 4800, 9600, 19200
DeviceNet: CAN, 5-pin standard "open connector" with screw terminals.
Baud rates: 125k, 250k, 500k
CANopen: CAN, 5-pin standard "open connector" with screw terminals.
Baud rates: 125k, 250k, 500k, 1M
Profibus DP: RS485 via standard 9 pin D connectopr OR 2 RJ45 connectors
Baud rates: Up to 12M set by the Master
Ethernet: Standard Ethernet RJ45 connector.
Baud rate: 10baseT
Modbus /DeviceNet /CANopen /Profibus /Ethernet are mutually exclusive options; refer to the Mini8 order
code document.
28.3 Configuration Communications Support
Modbus RTU: 3-wire RS232, through RJ11 configuration port.
Baud rates: 4800, 9600, 19200
All versions of Mini8 support one configuration port.
The configuration port can be used simultaneously with the network link.
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
271
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
28.4 Fixed I/O Resources
The PSU card supports 2 independent and isolated relay contacts
Relay Output Types:
On/Off (C/O contacts, "On" closing the N/O pair)
Contact Current:
<1A (resistive loads)
Terminal Voltage:
<42Vpk
Contact Material:
Gold
Snubbers:
Snubber networks are NOT fitted.
Contact Isolation:
42Vpkmax.
The PSU card supports 2 independent and isolated logic inputs
Input Types:
Logic (24Vdc)
Input Logic 0 (off):
< 5Vdc.
Input Logic 1 (on):
> 10.8Vdc.
Input Operating Range:
-30Vdc to +30Vdc.
Input Current:
2.5mA (approx.) at 10.5V; 10mA max @ 30V supply.
Detectable Pulse Width:
110ms min.
Isolation to system:
42Vpkmax.
28.5 TC8 8-Channel and TC4 4-Channel TC Input Card
The TC8 supports 8 independently programmable and electrically isolated channels, catering for all standard
and custom thermocouple types. The TC4 supports 4 channels to the same specification.
272
Channel Types:
TC, mV Input Range: -77mV to +77mV.
Resolution:
20 bit ( Σ∆ converter), 1.6µV with 1.6s filter time
Temperature Coefficient:
< ±50ppm (0.005%) of reading/ °C
Cold Junction Range:
-10°C to +70°C
CJ Rejection:
> 30:1
CJ Accuracy:
± 1°C
Linearisation Types:
C, J, K, L, R, B, N, T, S, LINEAR mV, custom.
Total accuracy:
± 1°C ± 0.1% of reading (using internal CJC)
Channel PV Filter:
0.0 seconds (off) to 999.9 seconds, 1st order low-pass.
Sensor Break: AC detector:
Off, Low or High resistance trip levels.
Input Resistance :
>100 M
Input Leakage Current:
<100nA (1nA typical).
Common mode rejection:
>120dB, 47 - 63Hz
Series mode rejection:
>60dB, 47 - 63Hz
Isolation channel-channel:
42Vpkmax
Isolation to system:
42Vpkmax
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
28.6 DO8 8-Channel Digital Output Card
The DO8 supports 8 independently programmable channels, the output switches requiring external power
supply. Each channel is current and temperature protected, foldback limiting occurring at about 100mA.
The supply line is protected to limit total card current to 200mA.
The 8 channels are isolated from the system (but not from each other). To maintain isolation it is essential
to use an independent and isolated PSU.
Channel Types:
On/Off, Time Proportioned
Channel Supply (Vcs):
15Vdc to 30Vdc
Logic 1 Voltage Output:
> (Vcs - 3V) (not in power limiting)
Logic 0 Voltage Output:
< 1.2Vdc no-load, 0.9V typical
Logic 1 Current Output:
100mA max. (not in power limiting)
Min. Pulse Time:
20ms
Channel Power Limiting:
Current limiting capable of driving short-circuit load
Terminal Supply Protection:
Card supply is protected by 200mA self-healing fuse
Isolation (channel-channel):
N/A (Channels share common connections)
Isolation to system:
42Vpk max.
28.7 RL8 8-Channel Relay Output Card
The RL8 supports 8 independently programmable channels. This module may only be fitted in slot 2 or 3,
giving a maximum of 16 relays in a Mini8.
The Mini8 chassis must be earthed (grounded) using the protective earth stud.
Channel Types:
On/Off, Time Proportioned
Maximum contact voltage:
264 volt ac
Maximum contact current:
2 amps ac
Contact snubber:
Fitted on module
Minimum contact wetting:
5 volt dc, 10mA
Min. Pulse Time:
220ms
Isolation (channel-channel):
264V
Isolation to system:
264V.
} 230V nominal
28.8 CT3 3-Channel Current-Transformer Input Card
The CT3 supports 3 independent channels designed for heater current monitoring. A scan block allows
periodic test of nominated outputs to detect load (failure) changes.
Channel Types:
A (current)
Factory set accuracy:
better than ±2% of range
Current Input Range :
0mA to 50mA rms, 50/60Hz nominal
Transformer Ratio:
10/0.05 to 1000/0.05
Input Load Burden:
1W
Isolation:
None (provided by CT)
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
273
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
28.9 Load Failure Detection
Requires CT3 module
Max number of loads:
16 Time Proportioned Outputs
Max loads per CT:
6 loads per CT input
Alarms:
1 in 8 Partial load failure, Over current, SSR short circuit, SSR open
circuit
Commissioning:
Automatic or manual
Measurement interval:
1 sec - 60 sec
28.10 DI8 8-Channel Digital Input Card
The DI8 supports 8 independent input channels.
Input Types:
Logic (24Vdc)
Input Logic 0 (off):
< 5Vdc.
Input Logic 1 (on):
> 10.8Vdc.
Input Operating Range:
-30Vdc to +30Vdc.
Input Current:
2.5mA (approx.) at 10.5V; 10mA max @ 30V supply.
Detectable Pulse Width:
110ms min.
Isolation channel-channel:
42Vpkmax
Isolation to system:
42Vpkmax.
28.11 RT4 Resistance Thermometer Input Card
The RT4 supports 4 independently programmable and electrically isolated resistance input channels. Each
channel may connected as 2 wire, 3 wire or 4 wire.
Channel Types:
Resistance/PT100
Input Range:
0 to 600 ohms, -200°C to +850°C for PT100
Calibration Error
±0.1ohms ±0.1% of reading, 22 to 500 ohms
±0.3°C ±0.1% of reading, -200°C to +850°C
Resolution:
0.008 ohms, 0.2°C
Measurement Noise
0.016 ohms, 0.04°C peak to peak, 1.6s channel filter
0.06 ohms, 0.15°C peak to peak, no filter
274
Linearity error
±0.02 ohms, ±0.05°C
Temp coefficient
±0.002% of ohms reading per °C ambient change relative to normal
ambient 25°C
Lead resistance:
22 ohms max in each leg. Total resistance including leads is restricted
to the 600 ohm maximum limit. 3 wire connection assumed matched
leads.
Bulb current
300µA
Isolation channel-channel:
42Vpkmax
Isolation to system:
42Vpkmax
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
28.12 AO8 8-Channel and AO4 4-Channel 4-20mA Output Card
The AO8 supports 8 independently programmable and electrically isolated mA output channels for 4-20mA
current-loop applications. The AO4 supports 4 channels to the same specification. The AO4 and AO8
modules may only be fitted in slot 4.
Channel Types:
mA (current) Output
Output Range :
0-20mA, 360Ω load max.
Setting Accuracy:
±0.5% of reading
Resolution:
1 part in 10000 (1uA typical)
Isolation channel-channel:
42Vpkmax
Isolation to system:
42Vpkmax
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
275
Engineering Handbook
Mini8 Controller
28.13 Toolkit Blocks
User Wires:
Orderable options of 30, 60 120 or 250
User values:
32 real values
2 Input Maths:
24 blocks
Add, subtract, multiply, divide, absolute difference, maximum,
minimum, hot swap, sample and hold, power, square root, Log, Ln,
exponential, switch
2 Input Logic:
24 blocks
AND, OR, XOR, latch, equal, not equal, greater than, less than, greater
than or equal to, less than or equal to
8 Input Logic:
4 blocks
AND, OR, XOR
8 Input Multiple Operator
4 blocks
Maximum, Minimum, Average. Input/Outputs to allow cascading
of blocks
8 Input Multiplexer:
4 blocks
BCD Input:
2 blocks
8 sets of 8 values selected by input parameter
2 decades (8 inputs giving 0 to 99).
Input monitor:
2 blocks
Max, min, time above threshold
16 Point Linearisation:
2 blocks
16-point linearisation fit
Polynomial Fit:
2 blocks
Characterisation by Poly Fit table
Switchover:
1 block
Smooth transition between two input values
Timer blocks:
8 blocks
OnPulse, OnDelay, OneShot, MinOn Time
Counter blocks:
2 blocks
Up or down, Directional flag
Totaliser blocks:
2 blocks
Alarm at Threshold value
Real time clock:
1 block
Day & time, 2 time based alarms
Transducer Scaling
2 blocks
Transducer Auto-tare, calibration & comparision cal.
276
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
Mini8 Controller
Engineering Handbook
28.14 PID Control Loop Blocks
Number of Loops:
0, 4, 8 or 16 Loops (order options)
Control modes:
On/Off, single PID, Dual channel OP
Control Outputs:
Analogue 4-20mA, Time proportioned logic,
Cooling algorithms:
Linear, water, fan, or oil
Tuning:
3 sets PID, One-shot auto-tune.
Auto manual control:
Bumpless transfer or forced manual output available
Setpoint rate limit:
Ramp in units per sec, per min or per hour.
Output rate limit:
Ramp in % change per second
Other features:
Feedforward, Input track, Sensor break OP, Loop break alarm, remote
SP, 2 internal loop setpoints
28.15 Process Alarms
Number of alarms:
32 analogue, 32 digital, 32 Sensor break,
Alarm types:
Absolute high, absolute low, deviation high, deviation low, deviation
band, sensor break, logic high, logic low, rising edge, falling edge, edge.
Alarm modes:
Latching or non-latching, blocking, time delay.
28.16 Setpoint Programmer
The Setpoint Programmer is a software orderable option
Number of programs:
8
Number of segments:
128
Number of event outputs:
8 per program (64 total)
Digital inputs:
Run, Hold, Reset, Run/Hold, Run/Reset, Program Advance, Skip,
Segment, Sync
Power failure action:
Ramp, Reset, Continue
Servo start:
PV, SP
28.17 Recipes
Recipes are a software orderable option
Number of recipes:
8
Tags:
24 tags in total
Part No HA028581
Issue 3 Sep-05
277
Engineering Handbook
278
Mini8 Controller
Part No HA028581
Issue 3
Sep-05
INTERNATIONAL SALES AND SERVICE
AUSTRALIA Sydney
HONG KONG & CHINA
NORWAY Oslo
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288
E-mail info@eurotherm.com.au
Eurotherm Limited Aberdeen
Telephone (+85 2) 28733826
Fax (+85 2) 28700148
E-mail eurotherm@eurotherm.com.hk
Eurotherm A/S
Telephone Oslo (+47 67) 592170
Fax (+47 67) 118301
E-mail info@eurotherm.se
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail eurotherm@eurotherm.at
BELGIUM & LUXEMBURG Huy
Guangzhou Office
Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5936
Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831
Beijing Office
SWEDEN Malmo
Shanghai Office
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
INDIA Chennai
Eurotherm Ltda.
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
E-mail eurothermltda@eurothermltda.com.br
Eurotherm India Limited
Telephone (+9144) 2496 1129
Fax (+9144) 2496 1831
E-mail sales@eurothermdel.com
Eurotherm Danmark A/S
Telephone (+45 70) 234670
Fax (+45 70) 234660
E-mail info@eurotherm.se
Telephone (+86 21) 6352 6406
Fax (+86 21) 6352 7351
Eurotherm Finland
Telephone (+358) 22506030
Fax (+358) 22503201
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
Telephone (+33 478) 664500
Fax (+33 478) 352490
E-mail ea@automation.eurotherm.co.uk
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
Telephone (+353 1) 469180
Fax (+353 01) 4691300
E-mail info@eurotherm.ie
Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 31) 975111
Fax (+39 31) 977512
Telex 380893 EUROTH I
E-mail info@eurotherm.it
KOREA Seoul
Eurotherm Korea Limited
Telephone (+82 31) 2738507
Fax (+82 31) 2738508
E-mail help@eurotherm.co.kr
GERMANY Limburg
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Ryn
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980
Fax (+49 6431) 298119
E-mail info@regler.eurotherm.co.uk
Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail sales@eurotherm.nl
© Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2005
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or
transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than
for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates,
without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement.
The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm
Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
HA028581/3 CN21541
Eurotherm AB
Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Fax (+46 40) 384545
E-mail info@eurotherm.se
SWITZERLAND Freienbach
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 55) 4154400
Fax (+41 55) 4154415
E-mail epsag@eurotherm.ch
IRELAND Dublin
ITALY Como
FINLAND Abo
Eurotherm España SA
Telephone (+34 91) 6616001
Fax (+34 91) 6619093
E-mail ventas@iberica.eurotherm.co.uk
Telephone (+86 10) 6762 0936
Fax (+86 10) 6762 0931
Eurotherm S.A/N.V.
Telephone (+32) 85 274080
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081
E-mail sales@eurotherm-belgium.be
DENMARK Copenhagen
SPAIN Madrid
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
E-mail info@eurotherm.co.uk
Web www.eurotherm.co.uk
U.S.A Leesburg VA
Eurotherm Inc.
Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
E-mail info@eurotherm.com
Web www.eurotherm.com
ED43
ENG
http://www.eurotherm.co.uk